Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

"Die, Motherf*cker."

"Sigh~ Another defeat," Alex muttered, despair evident in his voice.

"Skill issue," Steven commented as he watched Alex lose once more in Elden Ring.

"Shut up, Steven," Alex shouted angrily before turning off his computer.

"A loser is a loser. By the way, your girlfriend tried to call you," Steven said while washing his hands before dinner.

"Huh... she's not my girlfriend anymore; we broke up last week," Alex responded, too lethargic to care.

"Really?" Steven asked, surprised. "I thought you two were good," he added as he sat down in the dining room for dinner.

"Well, I caught her cheating, so there's nothing left to say," Alex stated as he walked towards the dining room.

However, the moment he stepped through the dining room door, he lost consciousness.

***

"Are you stupid?" stated an elderly man with a white beard and hair.

"But... Father, I was just playing with my powers," the little girl whispered, fear in her voice.

"You will be grounded for a year. No playing, no sweets, only training. Albert, take her for punishment and train her," the old man commanded as he watched his daughter leave with his servant.

"Yes, Master."

"Nooooooo..." the small child screamed with all her might.

The old man considered how to handle the situation as he looked at the transparent screen in front of him.

***

In Konoha...

When Alex regained consciousness for the first time, he felt his body flutter and heard faint sounds. He tried to open his eyes but couldn't. Shortly after, he slipped back into a deep sleep.

As he fell deeper into sleep, his soul entered a specific space.

A red-haired woman was looking at a huge fox at the time.

Uzumaki Kushina looked at the small body floating in the air, blinked, and asked the huge fox, "Nine-Tails, is this your child? So, you're a female fox, correct?"

Kyuubi was perplexed by the child's sudden appearance. However, upon hearing that phrase, he burst out, "How could I have a child?"

Kushina tilted her head. "You've been sealed for so many years..." Before Kyuubi could respond, she hit her palm with a look of "I've figured it out."

"Did you become pregnant before you were sealed? You're so enormous that the other-tailed creatures may have gotten you pregnant. How long is your mating period? Look at the marks on its face—they're the same as yours!"

Kyuubi shuddered in wrath, his hands and feet growing icy. If it weren't for the nails, he would have slapped her. How did this woman's brain function?

Kyuubi took a deep breath and exclaimed, "I cannot get pregnant! This kid is yours and that man's outside!"

"Really? I've only been pregnant for about three months... wait a minute..." Kushina murmured, exiting the sealed compartment and turning to the blond man next to her, who stared at her with concern. "Minato, what is a fetus like when it's three months old?"

Minato Namikaze was taken aback. "The fetus? According to Konoha Hospital records, a three-month-old fetus measures approximately 9 cm in length. Facial features have begun to emerge, limbs can be distinguished, fingers and toes have formed, and hair and nails have started to grow." Minato paused and questioned, "Why are you asking so suddenly?"

Minato had been researching Kushina's pregnancy since the day he discovered it, gathering information from Konoha Hospital. After several months of study, he had nearly caught up to medical ninjas in terms of theory.

Kushina dropped her head, one hand resting on her tummy, and beheld her child in the sealed space. "I just saw our child..."

"Child? What happened?" Minato inquired with concern. "You looked dizzy just now. I assumed it was related to the Nine-Tails change. Could it be the fetus?"

Kushina explained what had recently happened and concluded, "That must be the child's conscious body. I checked the seal—while there are signs of minor deterioration, it's still within the expected range. I'm concerned about the child entering the sealed space."

Minato frowned. "That's quite strange. I'll have Mrs Sarutobi look into this. I'll bring her to inspect our child."

"Yeah," Kushina responded softly, and her awareness returned to the conscious space.

"This is Minato's and my child," Uzumaki Kushina gently reached out to the fetus floating in the air, hesitant to touch it.

Nine-Tails looked at her puzzled. Was this still the 'Red Hot-Blooded Habanero' who was feared for her personality? Can giving birth to a new life transform a person? That expression... it was similar to how the old man looked at us...

"Hey, Nine-Tails!" Kushina proclaimed, word for word, "I will tame you. You will be utilized for the village and this youngster in the future!"

"A mere human!" Nine-Tails roared. It was to be expected—all humans wanted was to rule over him. In what way could she be like the old man? "I will surely kill you!"

Kushina ignored him and concentrated on the tiny life in her palm until Minato, the Third Hokage Sarutobi Hiruzen, and his wife Sarutobi Biwako materialized in front of her.

"Kushina, how are you doing? Are you okay?" Minato asked first, clearly worried.

"I'm fine." Kushina turned to face the Third Hokage couple after shaking her head. "I'm sorry for disturbing you both at such a late hour, Mrs. Sarutobi."

At this point, Kushina completed her account of the entire affair, and Sarutobi Biwako concluded her examination. "The fetus is very healthy, and nothing abnormal was found."

Beside her, Sarutobi Hiruzen opened his mouth to place his smoking pipe between his lips, but Biwako stopped him. "There were no similar occurrences with Mito-sama, the previous host of the Nine-Tails when she was pregnant."

The Third Hokage replied, scratching his beard awkwardly. "So, there isn't a previous instance to refer to. Please keep a watchful eye on Kushina's condition going forward. We cannot afford to act irresponsibly."

Sarutobi Biwako gave a nod of agreement. "That's the only way."

"We won't disturb you any longer." Sarutobi Hiruzen said his goodbyes, realizing he couldn't assist them further.

Sarutobi Hiruzen is now in an "advisory" position. Minato struggled to gain the trust of the elders, including Koharu and Homura, after becoming the Fourth Hokage due to his youth.

Of course, interacting with his old friend Danzo was even more difficult.

As a result, he decided to stay temporarily to assist Minato and gradually strengthen his authority, smoothing the transition of power, With Kushina pregnant, Hiruzen Sarutobi had no choice but to help Minato and share the burden.

Though many thought he was power-hungry, he was approaching 60 years old and conscious that his strength and courage had significantly deteriorated.

He only wanted to guide the next generation of Konoha while he still had some peace.

After seeing the Third Hokage couple leave, Minato returned and tenderly embraced Kushina, assuring her, "Don't worry, I'll protect you and the child." Minato smiled gently.

"And you must be the luckiest mother in the world to get to see the baby ahead of time. Tell me more about Granny Mito."

Kushina couldn't help but remember what Granny Mito had once told her. "Being a tailed beast vessel is our destiny to counter the fox's hatred. We need to fill ourselves with love, but you will be very lucky if you encounter a man who genuinely loves you."

"I encountered that person long ago, someone as warm as the sun." Kushina described the fetal consciousness while smiling at Minato. "Though I can't tell the gender yet, I believe it's a boy. He'll grow up to be an incredible person!"

"Then how about naming him Naruto?"

"Naruto?"

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

---

Kushina's stomach grew noticeably with each passing day. During this period, Alex began to grasp the reality of his predicament.

According to the anime, he had somehow traveled to the Naruto universe, becoming Naruto before his birth.

Was this a direct reincarnation or a replacement of Naruto's soul? The question lingered, but Alex remained calm.

After all, he had already faced the strangeness of being reborn in California at the New Horizons orphanage.

Although Naruto's body was still incapable of speech or movement, his mind was incredibly active.

His primary concern was the imminent threat posed by Uchiha Obito during his birth.

Obito, driven by rage and resentment, would push Naruto's parents to sacrifice themselves to weaken the Nine-Tails' seal.

This was his chance to unleash the Nine-Tails and attack Konoha.

In Alex's previous life, he hadn't fully grasped the significance of Obito's actions until the story's conclusion.

Naruto knew that this calamity would claim the lives of many Konoha ninjas, including his parents, Minato Namikaze and Kushina Uzumaki.

But as a fetus, there was nothing he could do-no way to warn them, no way to prepare.

For now, Naruto could only passively receive the nutrients provided by his mother while listening to Kushina's voice, which reached him through some mysterious connection.

From the first time she sensed Naruto in the awareness space, Kushina had been visiting his consciousness daily, speaking to him. Her words were simple but filled with love:

"Naruto, grow up quickly; your father and I can't wait to meet you."

"Your father is a super-powerful ninja, the Fourth Hokage."

"Mom is strong too! See that big, scary fox over there? Your mother can handle it easily." (In the background, a fox's roar echoed in protest.)

"Naruto, it wasn't easy for your mother to bring you into this world, so you must be obedient in the future."

"Naruto, your dad asked me to pass something on to you..."

"I don't care if you understand it or not, but I want to tell you anyway."

Despite the absurdity of it all, Naruto understood her, even though the language was different.

Over the months, he absorbed a surprising amount of knowledge.

He learned that their home was located in Building 101 on Ramen Street in Konoha Village.

He knew that his mother's close friend, Uchiha Mikoto, was also expecting a child.

He also knew that his father's disciple was a masked, white-haired ninja with dead-fish eyes-Kakashi Hatake.

In the ninja world, it's common knowledge that a fetus can't understand what's being said to them, but my mother was already planning my future. Is this what it's like to be an Asian child?

It seemed that he would have to study hard even before he was born.

Did she somehow know I was a scholar in my previous life?

Naruto almost resigned himself to spending the rest of his pre-birth days in 'Kushina's Parent-Child Prenatal Education Class.'

Until one day, a few months later...

"Who are you, handsome guy?"

As Naruto opened his eyes, he was startled to see a striking man standing before him.

Minato Namikaze, Konoha's Fourth Hokage and Naruto's father, had blonde hair, bright eyes with an orange ring around them, and a smile that radiated warmth. But why was he in Sage Mode?

"Who am I? Where am I? What am I doing? Did I fast-forward to the Ninja World War in my sleep?" Naruto's thoughts were a jumble of confusion.

Before Naruto could make sense of it, Minato spoke, his voice gentle but tinged with awkwardness. (Author's note: Minato's arrival in Sage Mode might have caused some confusion.)

"Hello, Naruto. This is our first meeting. I'm Minato Namikaze, your father. Uh...this..." Minato scratched the back of his head, clearly embarrassed.

"I'm a first-time father, with no experience. I even asked the Third Hokage and Jiraiya-senpai for advice on 'how to get along with my kid' and 'what to say when I see my son for the first time.'"

"In short, I'll do my best to be a good father. Please take care of me in the future!"

He extended his right hand as if to shake hands with Naruto, his expression hopeful.

"Pfft, hahaha..." Kushina, standing nearby, burst out laughing. Minato, normally so composed, was adorably clumsy.

She remembered how, just days before, Minato had practiced his "first meeting with Naruto" speech at home.

He had termed it "The Family Struggle Over the First Meeting Between Father and Son."

Minato had rehearsed dozens of lines, but the final result was a disaster.

"Minato, Naruto is still a baby. How could he possibly shake hands with you?"

"Haha, that's true." Minato realized his mistake, laughing it off.

Naruto had already pieced it together-Minato must have found a way to enter the sealed space to meet him ahead of time.

'This father seems pretty great,' Naruto thought as he tried to raise his tiny hand, gently placing it on Minato's outstretched one before it could retreat.

"Ugh..." Minato was so touched that tears nearly spilled from his eyes. "Did Naruto accept me?"

"Yeah!" Kushina exclaimed, her joy evident, though her cheeks puffed up in mock annoyance. "Really, Mommy has been talking to you for so long, and you don't care, but when Dad comes, you say hello. It's not fair, it's not fair, it's not fair...not...fair..." She playfully poked Naruto's cheek.

"Wow ah ah." Naruto waved his little hands in protest, trying to fend off his mischievous mother while making noises that had no clear meaning.

"Hahaha." Minato grinned, pulling both mother and son into a warm embrace.

A family of three, enjoying a precious moment together...if you ignored the large fox in the background.

"Hmph, stupid humans."

Kurama watched them, a tinge of envy in his eyes. If only the old man were still around... Many generations had passed since then.

"Hey! Human, how did you get inside?" Kurama suddenly realized there was something he'd overlooked.

"Me? I devised a trick called [Father and Mother Chakra Resonance Control] to meet Naruto earlier."

"Huh?" Although Kurama had always known Minato was a genius, he still found it hard to adjust. "What is this guy talking about?"

"In simple terms, it's a technique to improve perception through chakra control. By adapting my chakra to a specific frequency based on Kushina's chakra fluctuations, I could control the chakra and enter through the seal. I've been practicing chakra control for months to pull this off."

Kurama couldn't help but be impressed by Minato's ingenuity.

Naruto, nestled in Kushina's arms, felt the same way. My father is amazing.

After just a few months of practice, he discovered this technique by combining it with chakra control.

It reminded Naruto of the method he later used to distribute chakra to the entire ninja coalition during the Fourth Ninja War.

Come to think of it, after mastering chakra control, when your misguided disciple returns to cause trouble in a few months, will you be able to defeat him?

A sudden wave of confidence surged through Naruto. Hold on, we can win this! His gaze on Minato was filled with admiration.

If you looked closely, you could almost see the words "Big boss, please take care of me!" written in his eyes.

From this day on, Naruto's hope for his future life grew even stronger.

And from this day on, Naruto's daily "Kushina's Parent-Child Prenatal Education Class" was upgraded to the "Minato and Kushina's Parent-Child Prenatal Education Class." Emmmm...hopefully, this isn't just an illusion.

Happy times are always short.

***

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

It was an ordinary night, the moon was sparse, and the Konoha villagers were wandering on the streets in twos and threes.

Some had fallen asleep, some were training in green lights, some were training in bedroom... Ahem, for most people, it was No different from usual.

In a secret cave outside the village, several Anbu nervously stood at the door.

Inside the cave, Sarutobi Biwako and her assistant, Nino Yoshida, stood beside Kushina's bed, nervously instructing and encouraging Kushina.

while Minato was always paying attention to the nine-tailed seal on Kushina's body.

As Kushina's screams stopped, a baby boy was born smoothly.

"Why doesn't this child cry?"

Naruto opened his eyes but found that he was being held in the arms of an old woman.

Before he could react, he felt the world spinning as if someone was holding his foot, and then there was a sharp pain in his butt...

"Who slapped me, Cripple yourself and bow down in front of this young master, or be killed " Naruto cried out spinelessly, trying to act like a young master.

The adults laughed at his cute cry...

"From today, I'll be a father!" Minato already cried with joy.

"He's a very energetic boy." Biwako smiled and gave him towards Kushina.

"Naruto" Minato shouted and stretched out his hand.

"why"

But Lady Biwako avoided, "Don't touch him; he has to see his mother first, right?"

"Huh?" Minato moved his hands away with embarrassment

"Naruto..." Kushina tilted her head to look at Naruto. Although she has been seeing him every day in the sealed space, this is the real meeting.

Naruto stopped crying, opened his eyes wide and looked at his mother for the first time in his life, 'Obito is about to come, but what can I even do in this situation, ~sigh~...

Naruto opened his mouth "Ha ha" I can't speak at all and the words all turn into crying but he can't do anything about it.

"Okay, you can breathe a sigh of relief, Naruto, be good, be good," Biwako said, hugging Naruto and taking Naruto to the side.

She knew that the fourth Hokage had to strengthen the seal, so she should not get in the way.

Minato next to him had already entered the room, he came over and held Kushina's hand: "Kushina, although you have just given birth to Naruto, you have worked very hard, but you can't rest yet. Next, you need to strengthen the seal of the nine tails...",

Before he could finish speaking, Minato suddenly disappeared in place, blocking a kunai that stabbed Sarubi Biwako from behind.

"Who are you?" Minato tightly clasped the wrist of the mysterious man in the black robe with the orange spiral mask in front of him. If Minato were not sensitive enough, the consequences would be unimaginable.

"What a quick blinking technique, you deserve to be called yellow flash ." The mysterious man, Uchiha Obito's tone was three-point admiration, three-point calm, three-point hatred, and one-point regret...,

After all, his personality is relatively narrow, either serious or funny.

Sarutobi Biwako took the opportunity to hug Naruto and hide behind Minato, while Nino kicked back with a sharp kick, but the kick was empty.

No, only a Kunai tied with a few detonating talismans was left in place.

'Can't let the detonator explode here!' Minato vanished instantly with the detonating talisman and appeared in a log cabin outside the village.

Then, with the sound of the explosion, the log cabin collapsed, and Minato also instantly jumped outside the house.

"How is the situation?" When Minato returned to the cave, Kushina had disappeared.

Sarutobi Biwako was standing beside the bed holding Naruto, and Nino was slowly standing up while clutching her stomach.

"Fourth Hokage, Kushina was taken away by the mysterious man. We were not his opponents. He seems to know that you will come back immediately, so he did not entangle with us." Biwako briefly introduced the situation.

"Understood, he was here for Kushina, and he chose today, so the purpose is the Nine-Tails, and the information was leaked. Next, we have to plan for the worst." Minato had a serious expression, and Kushina was a Jinchuriki.

Once the tail beast is lost, many people in Konoha will lose their lives, And once the nine tails get out of control, Konoha will suffer huge damage.

Minato put his hands on Biwako and Nino's shoulders and activated the Flying Thunder God jutsu, and the four of them appeared directly in Hokage's office.

At this time, Hiruzen was replacing Minato to handle official duties, and he was a little puzzled when he saw three of them and Biwako holding Naruto in her arms.

Minato said directly: "This time, it is very urgent; please ask Mrs Biwako for specifics of the situation, and Nino will bring Naruto with me!"

Nino took Naruto from Biwako's arms, while Minato disappeared with the two of them.

"What the fu*k is going on?" Sarutobi Hizan asked, "Could it be that Kushina had an accident?"

Sarutobi Biwako described what had happened, and the third Hokage's expression gradually became solemn.

He called four Anbu, "Order, Konoha enters the wartime state, inform all the anbu to stand by at any time, and immediately organize the civilians below the Chunin to enter the shelter. Now go!

"Yes!"x4

The four immediately split up and sounded the alarm to convey the order.

After the alarm sounded, the entire Konoha was operating at a high speed, and the ninjas rushed to their posts.

At this time, the Uchiha security force, who was in charge of the security and defence of the village, received the order: Protect non-combatants to evacuate.

After receiving the order, Fugaku Uchiha immediately started arranging tasks, suppressing the opinions of the clansmen who asked for battle, mobilizing all the fighting forces to execute the order.

Even Uchiha Mikoto, who was coaxing the child, handed Sasuke to the 5-year-old Itachi and left in a hurry.

On the other side, Minato took Nino back home, put Naruto on the bed, hugged him gently, and said, "Dad is going to pick up Mom, I will be back in sometime time with Mom, so don't worry "

Minato turned around and said to Nino "I have activated the defensive barrier, and Naruto will be in your care for the time being."

"Yes!" Nino knew that her strength would not be of much help, so she could only take care of the child so that the four Hokage of Konoha would have no worries.

Minato sensed the mark of Flying Thunder God on Kushina's body and appeared directly beside Kushina who was tired and was on the ground.

"Kushina!"

"Minato!"

Before Minato could say more, Obito had already controlled the nine-tailed giant claw and swung it down.

Minato immediately hugged Kushina and left the place, appearing on a tree a little further away.

"Oh? The technique of flying thunder god? Too late, yellow flash... "

However, the couple ignored the mysterious man who was speaking sarcastically.

At this time, the sadness and anger in Minato's heart could no longer be suppressed.

The nine tails had already been drawn out, which means that Kushina had little time left...

"Min... is Naruto all right?"

"It's okay, Naruto is in a safe place now."

"Then...that's fine..."

"Don't think too much, I'll take you to Naruto now."

Minato glanced back a little at the mysterious person in the distance, and the city used the Flying Thunder God jutsu to bring Kushina back home, and gently placed her beside Naruto.

"Naruto..." Kushina's eyes filled with tears, she lay on her side and hugged Naruto gently, gently rubbing Naruto's small face and body with her cheeks.

It won't be long before she leaves the father and son behind.

Kushina's heart is full of reluctance now, and she also cherishes this last time to hug Naruto.

Naruto can only be in a hurry now, after all, he can't do anything but cry now, 'Is there no golden finger when I crossed over? '

On the other hand, Minato watched this scene, tightly clenched his fists, and his eyes became sharp, "Nino, please take care of them here, I'll take care of things outside."

"Yes." Nino, who retreated to the door of the room, didn't talk much and didn't bother the family of three.

Minato walked out of the bedroom, put on the ninja bag, put on the Hokage's robe, fastened the Konoha ninja forehead guard.

A special flying thunder Kunai, and waved the robe with a hunting sound. He will fight to protect the village as Konoha's Hokage!

Nino looked at the five characters 'Fourth Hokage' on Minato's back, and at the firm back, she felt from the bottom of her heart that this man would never lose!

A few seconds later, the Minato was prepared for battle and he said in a deep voice, "I'll be right back!"

****

"The fourth Hokage will come soon!"

"Hold on! Drive Kyuubi out of the village!"

At this time, the Konoha Village was brightly lit, and the civilians retreated to the shelter in an orderly manner under the arrangement of the ninjas.

Including Kakashi, Mikoto, Anbu and other younger ninjas, and the older ninjas gave ninjas a look, 'It's not time for your generation to die. '

The battle against the Nine-Tails is bound to be very tragic. They must protect the future of Konoha. This is probably the will of fire that Hiruzen often talks about...

Nine tails, controlled by Obito's Mangekyo Sharingan, moved forward step by step towards the centre of Konoha and ended their tails to wreak the village.

The Anbu Ninjas released various Attacks, such as Fire Release jutsu and Earth Release jutsu, etc.

Against the nine tails in batches, trying their best to slow down the speed of the nine tails.

Nine Tails roared, raised his head and opened his mouth, The terrifying chakra gathered into a dark purple sphere and then sprayed it fiercely in the direction of Hokage Rock!

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

Obito led Kurama back to the village. Kushina was left in the safe house to look after Naruto, while Minato left to defend the village from Kurama.

Even before Kurama arrived in the village, some sensed its approach.

The young Itachi Uchiha felt something ominous, and his brother, Sasuke Uchiha, began to cry.

Kakashi detected a change in the air as he spoke with Might Gai, though he did not know the cause.

Hiruzen sensed Kurama while he worked in his office, against the implication.

Obito snuck back into the village and summoned Kurama by using it to launch an immediate attack.

An Anbu reported Kurama's appearance to Hiruzen, who had already changed into his combat uniform to lead the village's defence.

Minato teleported to the Hokage Monument to lend his assistance.

Kurama immediately noticed his presence and attacked with a Tailed Beast Ball, which he sent away with his Flying Thunder god, Conflict was noticed by the villagers.

Minato attempted to locate Hiruzen so that he could tell him what happened, but he was stopped by Obito.

Obito started to teleport Minato away, but Minato used his teleportation to escape.

Obito followed. From Obito's actions, Minato speculated that Obito was Uchiha Madara, who had decades earlier tried to use Kurama to destroy Konoha.

Obito didn't deny Minato's claim, but he did allude to having some purpose behind the attack.

Minato and Obito clashed, with Minato after some difficulty, finally managing to strike Obito with the Rasengan.

During his attack, Minato was able to brand Obito with the Flying Thunder God, allowing him to teleport to Obito's location whenever he wanted.

He immediately did so to strike again, this time to place a Contract Seal on Obito that removed Kurama from his control.

Injured and deprived of his best weapon, Obito fled, reminding Minato that it was only a temporary setback.

In Konoha meanwhile, many of the village's children had been taken away from the village and confined behind a barrier so that they would not be killed trying to protect their loved ones.

Meanwhile, Itachi was running through the village with Sasuke in his arms, trying to find their parents.

Once free from Obito's control, Kurama tried to retreat from the village. It was pursued by Konoha's forces, led by Hiruzen, prompting it to retaliate with another Tailed Beast Ball.

Minato returned to the village in time to stop it by summoning chakra chains above it, having chains keep Kurama restrained while he gathered the chakra to teleport it away.

Minato took the Kurama to the safe house where he'd left Kushina and Naruto since it was the furthest away from the village that he could get.

After Minato left, Nino retreated to the door to guard, and only Kushina was left in the room holding Naruto and sobbing softly, saying one sentence after another as if she wanted to repeat her entire life in front of Naruto.

Naruto stared at her with wide eyes, trying to say something, but he could only utter the meaningless syllables of "wah wah".

.....

Suddenly time stopped, and an old with white hair & beard appeared in front of Naruto.

"I can't interfere much, but this will help you" The old man extended his hand & released two glowing white balls that entered Kushina & Naruto, respectively.

"Goodbye, young one, hope we meet again for a good cause" After saying this, the Old man disappeared like he was never there.

A few minutes later, Naruto heard a loud "bang", guessing that his father used a flying thunder god to transfer nine tails into the mountains.

A few minutes later, Minato returned home again, looking slightly tired. He picked up Kushina with one hand and Naruto with the other, "Let's go." After speaking, he used the Flying Thunder God technique again.

Naruto only felt that the shift in place in front of him came from one place to another place, and a big fox not far away was particularly conspicuous.

'It seems that from what I recall. This is probably the place where the nine tails were sealed, and it is also the place where Minato and his mother died in battle in the original Anime.. '

(At this time, the Third Hokage was on his way )

Minato said, "I'm here to open the barrier. Fortunately, I have practised chakra control well in the past six months to meet Naruto, otherwise, Chakra might not be able to support it."

"I can hold on for a while..." Saying that Kushina bit her lip, and five golden chains stretched out from behind her, "crashing" around Nine-Tails' limbs, torso, and tail tightly.

Adamantine Sealing Chains! The unique power of the bloodline of the Uzumaki family can be used for both attack and seal.

It is especially good at suppressing tailed beasts. Usually relying on this trick, Kushina kept the nine tails docile.

Now the power that erupted at the critical moment is equally powerful, and the Nine Tails can hardly move after the attack.

She used her Adamantine Sealing Chains to restrict the beast to a point where it could not move.

Keeping in consideration that Kurama is the strongest of the Tailed Beasts, for a teenage Kushina to restrict him is a massive feat in itself.

After that, Naruto saw that the couple started... quarrelling. That's right, it's a quarrel.

Kushina thought that she should drag the nine tails to death together so that the nine tails would be resurrected after a few years.

Konoha had enough time to prepare and then capture the nine tails again.

Minato thinks that losing the nine-tailed Konoha situation will be dangerous.

The balance of the tailed beast will be broken, and other Shinobi villages may take the opportunity to attack Konoha. So let Naruto become the nine-tails Jinchūriki.

But Kushina understands that becoming a Jinchūriki itself is life-threatening in the process of sealing.

Even if it succeeds, it means being isolated, feared, and treated with indifference.

She has felt this way herself, so she can't bear to let her son experience this again; while he is just born, the amount of pain he will suffer is unimaginable.

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

Minato insisted on his own opinion. He believed that Naruto might be the "child of prophecy " that Jiraiya sensei said.

If he can change the world of ninjas, Naruto will survive and become a great ninja. As a parent, you should trust your son.

As the person involved, Naruto, of course, Minato feels that he can survive well.

As for being isolated or something, Third Hokage and other ninjas with some knowledge don't care about these things at all.

As for the people of Konoha, when Naruto is introduced as the son of the fourth Hokage, the villagers Will know about him, the son of the fourth Hokage.

They will not hate their son or try to blame him for his sacrifices.

While Minato was thinking about all this. Naruto was thinking about the most important thing now is to not let his father use the reaper death seal jutsu.

That thing will kill his father, and if the Nine-Tails are directly sealed back now, then Mom has a high probability of surviving!

Naruto was thinking anxiously here, but Minato had already started to act.

He finally persuaded Kushina: "I will combine your remaining chakras in a Reaper Death Seal and seal it in Naruto's body so that when Naruto grows up, I can see him again. And I can do this. The only thing is that you will be sealed with him."

"But if you use that seal, you will..."

"Ah, I know, I'm going to die too, but as a husband and father..." Minato put down Naruto and started to seal.

"uh wah..." Naruto reached out his hand, anxious this time, desperately trying to stop him; this is the last chance!

At the critical moment, a thin golden chain stretched out from Naruto's back and tied Minato's hands that were tying the seal!

"Naruto!?"x2

Minato and Kushina exclaimed at the same time. After a short period of shock, Kushina laughed softly and said, "Minato, Naruto is reluctant to part with you, so let me come..."

Naruto himself was stunned, 'Adamantine Sealing Chains? In this case…'

Naruto's thoughts moved, and four thin golden chains came out from behind and shot directly at nine tails.

One of them trapped the two front claws of nine tails, and the other trapped the two back claws together.

One tied the mouth tightly, and the last tried to tie the nine tails together.

Kushina couldn't be surprised and hurriedly used her chains to cooperate with Naruto, so With the cooperation of the mother and son.

The nine tails fell to the ground with a bang like a pig waiting to be slaughtered, trapped with a sturdy mouth. Still trying to let out a low growl.

"It seems that Naruto has inherited your talent perfectly, Kushina." Minato said softly, "In this case, I have an idea that may allow you to survive!"

Seeing that Minato had changed his mind, Naruto quickly loosened the chains that bound his father's hands.

"Thank you, Naruto." Minato closed his eyes, and when he opened it again, he was already in immortal mode and checked Kushina's situation.

"As expected, Kushina, there are fewer and fewer nine-tailed chakras left in your body. , and your body is getting weaker and weaker; if I have to guess correctly, when these chakras are used up, you will die."

"Then what if we, in turn, replenish the Nine-Tails Chakra for you, or even seal the Nine-Tails directly into your body?"

'Nice! ' Naruto couldn't help but want to Pat his father on the head for it, as expected of you!

"But in my current state, it's not enough to suppress the Nine-Tails. Even if the seal comes back, it may end up with the Nine-Tails."

"Of course, the full nine-tails won't work, so what if it's half?"

"Half?"

"That's right, I will use the strongest ninjutsu I've mastered to attack the nine tails. You and Naruto will take the opportunity to seal half of the nine tails each!"

"I see; Naruto understands; you have to cooperate with Mother well." Kushina smiled softly; she would bet everything on her next actions; she trusted her husband, and she also trusted her child.

Naruto said "Ahhh" to indicate that he understood, and sent the chain that originally bound Minato's hands into the battlefield.

Minato opened his right hand raised it to the top of his head, and said firmly: "I have developed this trick for a long time, and I have never really used it, and I haven't even thought of a name. It was not until the recent progress in the training for chakra that it was real, this first use will be a success!"

(At this time, the third Hokage of Konoha Sarutobi Hidden was still on his way.)

Naruto saw a huge spiral Chakra slowly appearing in the palm of Minato's, and then four wind blades formed around the spiral, constantly spinning and making a harsh sound.

Naruto was stunned, 'I'm familiar with this it should be the famous Rasengan technique,
It's even more amazing to see it in real life... '

No matter what Naruto was thinking, Minato already threw out this move, and the power under the bonus of Flying thunder god was enough for him to smash this huge ninjutsu into the face of Kyuubi!

The fact is as he expected, The super-large Rasengan, which was almost bigger than the head of the nine tails, exploded on the door of the nine tails, turning into countless fine chakra needles of the wind attribute and constantly cutting the body of the nine tails.

"Take advantage of it now!"

Kushina and Naruto exerted their strength together, using the Adamantine Sealing Chains to pull the body of the nine tails like a tug-of-war.

The chains were torn in half, one half went into Kushina's abdomen, which was temporarily suppressed by Kushina with the original broken seal, and the other half went into Naruto's abdomen.

Naruto felt his stomach sink, and he was almost out of breath.

Then he was picked up by Minato and placed on the altar that had been prepared to assist in the display of the Eight Trigrams Seal.

I saw Minato quickly form a few seals, then put both hands on Naruto's abdomen and shout:

"Eight Trigrams Seal!"

A spiral sealing technique appeared around the navel, and Naruto instantly felt a lot more relaxed and then fell into a deep sleep.

'In this lifetime, there should be no need to be an orphan...'

Naruto fell asleep beautifully, and Kushina hugged Naruto and cried with joy, "It's great, I can watch Naruto grow up slowly, it's great, I can continue to be by your side, it's great... It's great…"

The exhausted Minato hugged his wife and child gently and breathed a sigh of relief, "I think I can finally be regarded as a qualified father and a qualified husband..."

"Okay, I'll help you repair the seal next, and then, let's go home!"

"Well, let's go home!"

(At this time, the third Hokage of Konoha Sarutobi was still on his way.)

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

Sarutobi finally arrived at the scene and personally escorted the Minato family back. Minato was already exhausted.

Flying thunder god couldn't be used anymore, so he had to walk back with Kushina.

Seeing that Minato completed the seal of the nine tails, Sarutobi was completely relieved and told Minato to rest and, after confirming nothing major incident had happened.

Sarutobi left to arrange the aftermath and to investigate the mysterious masked man.

"According to Minato, the mysterious man smashed half of his body with his Technique, but there was nothing left at the scene except for a big pit, and blood

"It seems that he used that space ninjutsu to escape, or... he was taken away by his accomplices, and he even cleaned up the traces of the battle. "

Sarutobi pinched the moustache on his chin, thinking that an enemy could easily break through the Konoha barrier, his face became heavy.

"Anbu, continue to search and alert the surrounding area. If there is another attack, notify me as soon as possible. If there are no changes, the residents will be notified tomorrow morning to end the evacuation. In addition, the damage should be calculated as soon as possible."

"Yes!"

The night finally passed, the birds fell on the tree tops and combed their feathers, the autumn sunlight shone through the window on the sleeping family, and the baby who woke up first burst into tears, awakening the couple.

It's not that Naruto is ignorant and insists on waking up his parents, but Naruto...wetting the bed...

As a baby, Naruto couldn't remember how many in this regard, no matter how embarrassed he was, he had to do it.

However, Minato and Kushina were really in a hurry before they realized what was going on. The couple smiled and helped Naruto take a bath and change diapers, and then fed him again.

Naruto stared at his parents with wide eyes and found that Minato's face was still a little tired. After all, there was a war and he only slept for a few hours at night.

However, Kushina has already got out of bed and was preparing breakfast and doing housework, should it be said that he is a member of this new family?

In his previous life, Alex aka Naruto, didn't have parents; he would be lying if he said he didn't want them.

Naruto thought about it, 'My parents had finally survived. I don't know if Obito has managed to escape or died at my father's hands, and I also awakened the signature ability of the Uzumaki Clan, the Adamantine Sealing Chains.'

'Hey, is my hair now yellow or red? And without the trouble of the third Hokage, should I be called Naruto Namikaze or Naruto Uzumaki?'

Thinking of these messy things, Naruto slowly fell asleep.

Babies are like this, they sleep a lot, and Naruto consumed a lot of energy yesterday.

The adamantine Sealing Chains should not be used by children.

In the original anime, Kushina used a chain when she was fifteen or sixteen years old.

At that time, Kushina Chakra was said one of the largest chakra reserves.

She almost collapsed after tying nine tails for a while. How much should chains consume from Naruto?

Minato watched Kushina put the sleeping Naruto down on the bed, change clothes Without much noise, and say, "Then I'm going out; I'm afraid I'll have a lot of work to do today."

"Hmmm, I will take care of Naruto."

This time, with the Nine-Tails rampage, Konoha lost a lot of infrastructure.

The most conspicuous thing is that the street opposite Hokage's office was mostly destroyed.

However, due to the timely response compared with the original, the third Hokage before Obito attacked Konoha with the nine tails, received the news and began to evacuate the civilians, and there were few civilian casualties.

The casualties of ninjas are also much less. It is worth mentioning that Iruka's parents, Kohari and Ikkaku, were lucky to survive.

Only the Anbu were killed when Obito attacked Kushina, and the Jonin delayed the Nine-Tails.

Pov - Minato

As Konoha's fourth Hokage, Minato does have a lot to do.

Looking at the report from the third Hokage about the people of the village, silence fell in the office.

The next thing to do is to arrange for civilians to go home and organize people to clean up the damage and prepare for reconstruction.

Arrangement of the compensation for the dead ninjas, The memorial service will be set in three days.

The dead ninjas will be engraved on the memorial tablet as heroes, and their vacant positions will also need to be refilled.

They strengthen the defence of Konoha and the borders of the land of fire, in addition to being vigilant against the companions of the masked man.

But also to prevent other great powers from taking advantage of the situation, especially a person who does not want to be named the fourth Raikage, and always wants to find an excuse to increase the tensions between the borders.

"Send Kakashi to continue to protect Kushina and Naruto. Kakashi originally asked permission from me to protect Kushina during pregnancy because he wanted him to witness the birth and birth of a new life to dispel the darkness in his heart. Now this has happened, I don't know if this child will be affected, so let him continue the task for the time being"

Konoha's perception barrier needs to be improved. This time, the enemy invaded silently, and the nine tails were channelled in the centre of the village.

If the enemy made such a move during the war, the consequences would be unimaginable.

As for Uchiha... This time the guards played a big role in defending and evacuating the public.

It stands to reason that there is no need to increase surveillance, but the Konoha Council may not agree.

After all, when the nine tails were controlled by a masked man, Mangekyou Sharingan Eyes were used to attack Konoha.

Almost everyone thought it had something to do with Uchiha, and he had to have a good talk with Big Brother Fugaku.

The conflict between the Uchiha family and the village must be resolved.

End of POV...

Minato quickly signed documents one by one and issued one command after another, Konoha worked like a well-oiled machine.

"Knock. Knock", After arranging the important things, the door of the office was knocked.

"Please come in." Minato raised his head and saw that the door was pushed open.

Then Danzō Shimura, Koharu Utatane, Homura Mitocado, Third Hokage came in, and all the Konoha four clan heads.

Minato put down the document in his hand and asked, "Third Hokage? All the elders, why are you here? Did something happen?"

Third Hokage took the lead and said, "We are here to discuss about what to explain to the public about this incident. After all, some things need to be kept secret and are not suitable for disclosure. Many civilians and Genin don't even know what jinchūriki is."

At this time, the four clans didn't know about the matter of Naruto being a jinchūriki.

Because Kushina was still alive, they took it for granted that the nine tails were sealed and returned to Kushina's body.

After all, the tailed beast was divided into two halves to seal the fact It's too unbelievable.

Minato has not decided whether or not to reveal Naruto's identity, so he hasn't told them yet.

Minato frowned and thought for a while, then said, "I want to publicly apologize to the people for causing such a loss. In the end, it was my duty as Hokage that I failed to defeat the enemy immediately."

The third Hokage took a cigarette and exhaled the smoke: "No, rather than apologize, I think Konoha needs a hero, and the people now need a hero to inspire people. As Hokage, you should be a hero who sealed the nine tails, and you did seal the nine tails."

Koharu and Mito nodded in agreement.

Only Danzo expressed dissatisfaction, but he was displeased by the words "Minato is Hokage" by the third Hokage, so he could only snort and leave.

As a result, a message circulated among the Konoha villagers that day: "Last night, when a nine-tailed demon fox attacked the village, the fourth Hokage decisively ordered the evacuation of the people, and many ninjas desperately tried to buy time, and the fourth Hokage's wife Kushina gave birth to a child that night. Regardless of his physical weakness, he joined hands with the fourth Hokage to fight Nine-Tails, finally sealed it and saved Konoha Village."

For a time, the popularity of the fourth Hokage and kushina soared, and they were called "a hero couple", and their sons also became the sons of heroes.

After Naruto heard the news from his parents, he silently complained in his heart, what are the heroic couples called, let's just call them the Legend of Fox and Heroes...

….....

Three days later, the sky was gloomy and it was raining lightly.

People were mourning in black clothes with white flowers in one hand and umbrellas in the other hand near the memorial monument.

Naruto was also carried out by Kushina, Next to Kushina was a white-haired masked man holding an umbrella with expressionless eyes and Kushina, who was usually full of energy, had an unusually serious expression today.

Hokage has already set off ahead of schedule, and today's memorial ceremony is presided over by him.

In addition to the relatives of the deceased, representatives of major families will also attend, and some people voluntarily want to meet the hero.

Naruto felt the heavy atmosphere of the scene in Kushina's arms, listened to the desolate cries of people, and finally had a preliminary understanding of this cruel world.

There is never a shortage of battles here, and there are always many deaths here.

There will be all kinds of tragedies here, and here...it's not my favourite anime that, I have seen.

It's real life, not an anime where you only watch, if not strong enough next is your death waiting for you.

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

1 month later

It's been a month since the end of the Nine-Tailed Demon Fox's Attack.

The village gradually regained its calm, When people mentioned the Nine-Tailed Demon Fox after a meal, they were full of fear, but 'Fourth Hokage came in front of their eyes'.

For a month, Naruto was completely accustomed to the current state. Every day he would wake up eat, sh*t, sleep & repeat

When he was full, he would look around with wide eyes and then listen to his parents talking about various things or was forced to accept certain *cough* things.

At the teasing of the unscrupulous mother, the handsome man smiled happily as he watched the mother and son play.

Usually, Kushina would also go out to buy vegetables with Naruto. Along the way, he would always get looks from the Konoha villagers.

Of course, it was not a bad look. Most of them were admiration and praise. Naruto could always hear it.

Words like "powerful" and "hero" and gossip behind the scenes are always heard by the parties as passive skills of Konoha residents, and good things are no exception.

Kushina didn't pay much attention to these, As his mother walked, she would stop and say hello with a smile, when she met an acquaintance.

Slowly, Naruto got to know the wives of Nara, Akimichi and other families, including his mother's close friend Uchiha Mikoto, but unfortunately, he didn't see Sasuke.

On the day of the memorial ceremony, I only caught a glimpse of the child, who he suspected of being Sasuke and was held by a boy of five or six years old, probably Itachi.

Naruto originally thought that with Kushina's character, Minato must be the one responsible for cooking at home.

Unexpectedly, the carefree and even violent Kushina is a good wife and mother at home.

From breakfast, to when she will help him tidy up his collar before going out.

When Minato came back from work, he gently said Welcome back, and then brought the food to the table, Minato smiled and touched Naruto's head.

*Pat* *pat*

The only thing that can be on the top of the house at this time, before dinner, 14-year-old Kakashi was brought in through the window and thrown into the living room and then ordered to wash his hands and eat, Naruto watched with a smirk on his face, and Kakashi's dazed look was quite cute.

Of course, Kakashi is not that kind of casual person, you can't tell him to come in and eat, but he just doesn't want to be embarrassed in front of his sensei.

He tried to struggle when he was pulled by Kushina, and then... he was dragged by chakra chains that Kushina created to drag him.

On the third day, Kakashi learned to be smart, he tried to hide for avoiding embarrassing himself in front of his Sensei .

Then I saw Kushina close her eyes and sensed him and still jumped out of the window to find him accurately, Kakashi was brought back again.

On the fourth and fifth days after that... Kakashi resisted many times to no avail.

In the end, he had to knock on the door and enter the house by himself as soon as it was time for dinner.

As for face and what kind of face do you need when you wear a mask... On the contrary, when he sees the red-haired woman.

He can't help but be afraid of her again dragging him for dinner, 'Speaking of which, her cooking is quite delicious. ' Kakashi thought.

Of course, this was done by Minato, he instructed Kushina, Minato felt that letting Kakashi stay in Anbu would only fuel the darkness in Kakashi's heart.

Probably only a carefree character like Obito could stop him from falling into the darkness a little bit, but Obito became one of the reasons for his darkness.

Kakashi at this point, is very suitable for the protection of Kushina and Naruto, and another child named Mighty Gai seems to be very suitable...

In short, let's start by asking Kakashi to come to the house for dinner every day.

Sometimes Kushina also goes out. It is said that she went to the barrier department to help improve the Konoha barrier or something, and she would ask Biwako or Nino to take care of Naruto.

When it comes to things like barriers and seals, Kushina is the strongest in Konoha, whether it is Sarutobi Hiruzen, who claims to be proficient in all of Konoha's ninjutsu, or Danzo, who is 'claimed' to be the third strongest ninja in the village.

Naruto has no dissatisfaction with his current life, After all, he was just an orphan in his last life.

He just wanted to have an ordinary job after graduation and just live an ordinary life. Now that I'm a baby, I don't worry about eating or drinking, but I get bored occasionally.

For a month, Naruto also consciously tried to see if he could meet the Nine-Tails, but he never succeeded. Maybe the seal was too strong.

Now, Naruto's only wish is to grow up quickly and become stronger; he lacks a sense of security in this world.

The calm days passed by like this, and the atmosphere at home was warm and beautiful every day.

Even Kakashi, who had always been cool, had changed a little bit without knowing it.

At least he would occasionally take the initiative to say a few words at the dinner table.

Sometimes he would look curiously at Naruto in the swaddling clothes and pinch Naruto's face.

Minato was very pleased to see Kakashi's changes, while Naruto watched Kakashi's changes... just wanted to slap him, 'Ouch! Don't pinch my cheeks, doughnut king,' Naruto thought angrily.

I don't know if it was an illusion. When Naruto opened his eyes wide and wanted to stare at Kakashi, he seemed to see Kakashi smiling faintly.

****

In the blink of an eye, it was another day, and Naruto was lying in the bed bored, waiting for the adults to pinch him in the face after eating, but the atmosphere at the dinner table today didn't seem right.

Minato put the bowl on the table and said, "The situation in the village has not been very good recently, and there is more and more friction between the border of the Sunagakure and Kumogakure "

Kushina also stopped and asked, "Why?"

"Nine-tailed rampage is such a big incident that can't be hidden. After the incident sand village and the cloud village, they will naturally want to test our losses in attack of nine tails, and then create an opportunity for an attack on Konoha."

Minato's tone gradually changed. He spoke with a heavy tone, "The sand village is fine. The last war they fought against us had many losses, they are still not able to recover from that, and now it should be powerless to provoke a war. But from Cloud Village, I can't say for sure."

"The hidden cloud village..." Kushina didn't like the cloud village. After all, it was the people from that village, who kidnapped her when she was a child.

If it wasn't for the Minato saving Kushina at a critical moment, she wouldn't want to know what would have happened to her.

Naruto, who was eavesdropping next to her, Also didn't like the land of lighting either.

When watching anime in his previous life, he always felt that the author was alluding to a certain country:advocating force, unreasonable with technology like chakra cannons, see If you have any chance to obtain power or secret techniques, you have to find a way to grab it.

Kakashi, who had been silent all this time, said, "Minato-sensei, let me go."

Minato reached out his head rubbed Kakashi's hair, and said, "Don't worry, the village has already decided to send Senior Orochimaru to the border, and everything will be fine. Let's eat first."

"Yeah." Kushina and Kakashi responded, feeling a little relieved.

Naruto was stunned when he heard the name of Orochimaru, Has Orochimaru also deflected at this timeline? Thinking about the anime, Orochimaru's defection occurred after the death of the fourth Hokage.

When the third Hokage returned to power, the third Hokage personally led a team to the research institute of Orochimaru and severely injured him in the process, but finally let him go.

What Naruto didn't understand was that since he let him go, why did he send Kakashi, who was Anbu at the time, to pursue him?

Afterwards, Kakashi was intercepted by a teenager who was sent by Danzo, who knew how to use Mudun. Could it be that the third Hokage and Danzo acted together?

After that, I don't know the exact time, but Jiraiya also tried to persuade Orochimaru back halfway.

But Orochimaru did not listen to him and severely injured Jiraiya, that time, Orochimaru was also soft-hearted and did not kill Jiraiya.

Alas, Naruto sighed in his heart, Konoha and the others are doing something to grind, and from time to time, they also do some unintelligible tricks.

Konoha is secure because of the foundation laid by the first and second Hokage for Konoha's situation to be good today.

I hope that my father can get rid of the influence of the third Hokage and be a good Hokage who is wise and strong.

This time, Orochimaru was asked to go to the border. It seems that he came from outside the village.

He visited Kushina when she was pregnant, and by the way, he also talked with Minato about Naruto's name.

It seems that now Jiraiya is either on a mission or travelling abroad. Of course, with his integrity, he may also be attacking a widow's house at night...

After a while of silence at the dinner table, Minato raised the topic and said, "By the way, Kushina, I'm going to visit Big Brother Fugaku and his family in a few days, and let's go with Naruto."

"Okay, I just want to chat with Mikoto, and I haven't had a good look at Sasuke yet," Kushina said happily.

"Sasuke, he should be classmates with Naruto in the future," Minato recalled, remembering that Sasuke was also born this year.

"Yes, the first time I saw Sasuke, I thought it was a girl, that child is really cute." Kushina laughed out loud.

"Hahaha..." Minato also laughed.

"Uchiha..." Kakashi kept his left eye silent, thinking of his "dead" friend, "Let's go to the Memorial Monument in a few days..."

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

The next day, a family of three went out together. Today Minato is wearing the Konoha ninja uniform with a Hokage robe over it.

He is handsome, especially when he puts on the Hokage robe.

In Naruto's impression, there are two most Badass scenes of Minato in the anime. One is when he just puts on the Hokage robe and says with his back to the camera, "I'll be right back."

The other when he pressed Rasengan on Obito to the ground, and said, "Rasen-gan " It's not surprising that even with very few appearances, Minato was one of the fan-favourite characters in Naruto.

After a while

The streets of Konoha have long returned to the bustling streets of the past.

The recent small friction on the border of the Konoha has not had any impact on the civilians.

Along the way, both pedestrians and street vendors greeted the family of three excitedly.

They were quite prestigious, Minato and Kushina responded with a smile.

They finally arrived at the Uchiha clan, and Naruto observed it; except for the red eyes that the guard used on them to inspect.

The civilians in the clan seemed to be no different from other villagers, even if they were patrolling.

When the guards of the Uchiha clan saw the Hokage family, they also stopped to say hello in a proper manner, without showing any arrogance.

Naruto shook his head, wondering why the clan developed to the point of extinction.

After walking around, he finally arrived at the door of Sasuke's house.

Itachi, who was sweeping the floor, hurriedly said "Hello, Lord 4th, Aunt Kushina."

After speaking, he glanced at Naruto curiously and then looked away.

Naruto thought, ' This guy must be thinking, Not cuter than Sasuke or something...'

"Itachi, is Fugaku-san at home?" Minato smiled and touched Itachi's head.

"Yes, please come with me." Itachi put down his broom and led the Minato family through the gate.

When he entered the living room, Naruto was still stunned.

It was too big, He had just passed a large yard, turned through the corner, and walked through a long corridor.

Naruto also caught a glimpse of a single training arena with targets hanging on it. The arena is worthy of being the house of the patriarch of Konoha's largest clan.

This area is too large, and his family's house is only a three-story building, which is far from this kind of wealthy family.

After arriving in the living room for some courtesy, Kushina carried Naruto and followed Uchiha Mikoto to the bedroom to see Sasuke.

Itachi also followed, leaving only Minato and Fugaku to talk alone in the living room.

According to Naruto's observation, Uchiha Fugaku can only be said to have straight facial features and a serious, natural character face.

At first, Naruto wondered how he gave birth to two such handsome sons and then glanced at Uchiha Mikoto. These two children should be with their mother.

The architecture and decoration style of Sasuke's house is Japanese style. At this time, Sasuke, who is less than one year old, already has his room. There are all kinds of small toys on the ground.

The most beautiful thing is that in addition to the family emblem of Uchiha, there is also a calligraphy work on the wall, which reads "Masashi Kishimoto"!! ( One above all of Naruto)

Little Sasuke was lying on the bed at this time, not knowing if he was woken up by the sound of the door opening, he opened his eyes wide and tried to turn over.

"Ah, so cute!" Kushina had already run over to Sasuke in three or two steps, put Naruto next to Sasuke, and then reached out and touched Sasuke's head.

Mikoto said with a smile: "Naruto is also very cute. He has golden hair and blue eyes, exactly like the fourth Hokage."

Yes, although Naruto used the chakra chains when he was born, it stands to reason that he should have perfectly inherited the talent of the uzumaki family from his mother, but his hair colour and pupil colour still follow the father's clan, and he did not show with the red hair of the Uzumaki family, it can only be said that Minato's genes are so terrifying.

"Little Sasuke, this is my son Naruto, and I want you to be a good friend in the future! Naruto too, get along well with Sasuke!"

Sasuke has noticed the little yellow-haired beside him. I don't know if he recognized his half-brother.

He was about to turn over and press Naruto. Naruto tried to reach out and push him away while thinking" Ha, bullying you will be fun in future"

The two adults laughed and exchanged parenting experiences while watching the children "fighting" beside the bed. Of course, it was mainly Kushina who was asking and Mikoto talking.

Among them, there is no lack of the history of the two brothers of the Uchiha family.

"There is a girl named Izumi Uchiha in the clan who has always been very fond of Itachi, but when she hugged Sasuke, Sasuke cried, and when Itachi took over Sasuke, Sasuke laughed immediately."

"Eh~ Is Sasuke so attached to brother? They have a good relationship with each other."

"Yeah, but I'm worried that this child will affect Itachi's girlfriend. Hahaha~"

"Hahaha, that's how it is~"

The two unscrupulous elders glanced at each other, then looked at Itachi in unison, showing their smiles in unison.

Itachi, who was comparing the two children carefully and concluded that " hmmm, as expected, his younger brother is cuter", suddenly found himself lying in the middle of his mother and aunt.

Although he blushed a little from the playful eyes of his elders, he still insisted on staying to take care of his younger brother.

The adults were talking and laughing, the children were playing around, and when Naruto woke up, he was already on his way home.

Seeing the expression on Minato's face, it seems that he and Fugaku had a smooth talk.

Naruto thought to himself, maybe with his father here, Uchiha wouldn't fall out with Konoha, and Itachi wouldn't have to kill his entire family for Konoha.

I just don't know what my father and Sasuke's father talked about.

If Uchiha can be perfectly integrated into Konoha in the future, if everything goes well, then the foundation of Konoha will be more stable.

If Any major incident that will affect him is avoided till he gets strong enough to handle them. By the way...

Konoha is very beautiful.

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

Sorry, this chapter is short, I will try to upload more chapters. enjoy!

****

Three years passed in a blink of an eye, and the border friction between the land of lighting and the land of Fire gradually subsided, In the end, it did not turn into a war, and there was even a faint intention to ally.

As for Sand Village & the Land of Wind, who have already allied. The reason may be that the power of one tail is too small, and it is not perfect.

Even If there is a problem with Konoha, they don't have the confidence to face Minato, let alone others of Konoha like the third Hokage.

The person to watch out for in the Sand Village generation is Gaara, who is the same age as Naruto. When he is out of control Shukaku will go berserk.

After a series of actions by his father, rasa, Gaara's emotions become more and more intense or Unstable, the human brain circuits in this world have always been strange or should I say humans are strange?

The biggest incident in the past three years was when Orochimaru, one of the three legendary Sannin, disappeared and his disciple was planted with a curse mark.

After investigation, Anbu discovered equipment for human experimentation in Orochimaru's secret laboratory.

Dozens of children were soaked in jars filled with nutrient solution, but only one survived. Since then, Orochimaru has been designated as a traitor, and the danger level is S.

The surviving child was finally adopted by the third Hokage.

During that period, I don't know what happened, Danzo's elder position was dismissed, and Sarutobi Hiruzen officially retired to take care of the children at school.

And Jiraiya was also severely injured when he intercepted Orochimaru.

After recovering from the injury, he immediately set off to continue his journey to do research....

In contrast, the head of the Hyuga clan's wife gave birth to a girl, not to mention the headlines, and even the hot search may not be able to squeeze in.

The turmoil gradually subsided, the village returned to calm, and the reputation of the fourth Hokage continued to increase.

Kakashi's generation of ninjas were already seventeen or eighteen years old, and they could almost be on their own.

Whether they were ninjas or civilians, they firmly believed that under the leadership of the fourth Hokage, the village would get better and better.

****

At this time, the home of the fourth Hokage

Minato waved his hand, and a banner unfolded hung on the wall.

Kushina waved her hand and popped up the Paper bomb that flew on Naruto's head.

Kakashi brought out the birthday cake.

"Happy Birthday Naruto!"*3

"Hee hee, thank you!" Naruto smiled closed his eyes to make a wish, and then blew out the candle.

Kushina then grabbed Naruto's shoulders and asked with a smile, "Tell Mom, what is Naruto's wish? Maybe it will come true right away!"

Naruto showed a "naive" smile: "I hope my mother will give me a brother!"

"What, it turns out that it's just to have a brother, such a simple wish..... eh???"

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

In the end, Minato broke the silence: "Why does Naruto want a brother?"

"Because to my brother, I'll be as gentle as Big Brother Itachi, and unlike someone, who is too lazy to take care of me"

Kakashi rolled his eyes and said "Sorry to disappoint you, but I can't sacrifice my novels for you"

"If I had a younger brother, he would be as stupid as Sasuke..." Naruto showed a look of excitement; in his previous life, he was an orphan, so wanting a sibling was no surprise.

Minato smiled dryly and asked, "Don't you two have a good relationship?"

"Because of a good relationship, I am tolerant enough," Naruto said with a smile on his face.

****

Until the end of the birthday party, Naruto still failed to receive the gift of "younger brother" but received several other surprises.

Kakashi gifted a picture book, saying that it was brought back when he went to a village to perform a mission.

Naruto opened it excitedly, only to find that it was just an ordinary picture book. He thought it was some kind of wonderful manga.

Thinking about it too, if Kakashi dared to gift something strange, he might have to face the red-haired woman beside him.

Kushina gave Naruto a small robe, the same style as his father; the difference is that the word written on the back is Naruto's name, "ナルト".

Minato's gift is a special version of Kunai! It has two more forks than ordinary kunai, the handle is painted with the Flying Thunder God technique, and it feels heavy to hold.

Naruto put on the robe on the spot, picked up the special kunai, shook the hem of his clothes excitedly, and felt that he was looking nice.

The difference between him and his father was only a forehead guard!

Suddenly, I wanted to hit the targets. Naruto jumped back a small step and held the Kunai in front of him.

Well, This thing is a little heavier than the ordinary Kunai, which is a bit awkward for a three-year-old child to handle. But a good start.

"Fourth Hokage, I want to challenge you!"

"Haha, okay, I'll accept your challenge!" Minato smiled and took Naruto under his arm and took him to a relatively spacious living room.

Kushina raised her hand happily and said, "I'll be the referee!"

Minato put down Naruto and said, "Before we start, let me explain the rules of sparing."

"Before the duel practice begins, you must first bind the seal of opposition, which symbolizes the next battle." Minato raised his index and middle fingers with one hand and placed them in front of his chest.

Naruto has a similar pattern.

"After the pair training is over, we must make a seal of reconciliation, symbolizing that we respect each other ." He said, bending his index and middle fingers, and hooking Naruto's fingers.

"Oh, I remembered it!" Naruto put down the kunai, this thing is just a burden if it doesn't work.

"Okay! Then, the rule this time is that as long as Naruto's attack hits, he wins!" Kushina stretched out his hand to signal the two to separate, and then shouted, "Start!"

The two sides formed the seal of opposition, and then... Minato didn't move...

Minato felt that he was bullying his son and couldn't be too harsh, so let him attack.

Naruto is... I don't know what to do - I've watched so many episodes of Naruto, but we haven't fought, and I haven't practised any taijutsu ninjutsu before.

Before getting this kunai, they Don't let him touch ninja tools.

Minato and Kushina seem to think that starting the practice too early is not good for future development, so when Naruto wanted to learn ninjutsu, Kushina taught him to read.

Naruto secretly begged Kakashi, but Kakashi refused, he should have 'accidentally' revealed the book Kakashi reads to his mother.

So Naruto is worried now, what is this move? Suddenly, Naruto has a flash of inspiration.

Naruto pounced on Minato, Minato grabbed Naruto's back collar and gently threw him aside.

Naruto barely stood on all fours.

Naruto stood up and hit Minato's leg with a palm... Uh, Naruto's current height is probably about the level of jumping up and hitting Minato's knee but Minato grabbed Naruto's wrist and gently moved to the side.

Naruto lost his centre of gravity and almost fell. After standing up, he turned around and kicked, but again Minato backed away to dodge.

Naruto opened his arms, jumped up and tried to grab him but Minato grabbed Naruto with one hand and then tapped a hand knife on Naruto's head.

Minato said with a smile: "Dad won."

"Oh." Naruto wasn't too disappointed, and even thought about it, he wanted to beat someone in the future and said, "I fought against you Dad, and I got my lesson to work hard to defeat you ."

Well, I'm not good with words.

"At the end of the game, the two sides will seal the sign of reconciliation," Kushina announced at the end of the father-son match.

The family of three was in high spirits; only Kakashi's eyes twitched as he listened to Naruto's words to defeat the sensei.

This talent for being a shinobi, should it be said that he is the teacher's child for sure.

Naruto obediently tied the seal, and took the opportunity to make another request: "Dad, I want to practice."

"Sure."

"Oh-ah? Really?" Naruto was overjoyed, the three-year-old had already been beaten by his father and he could finally start practising.

"Let's start with physical training first; it will be very hard. Can Naruto hold on?"

"Absolutely no problem!" Naruto vowed to become stronger. Can a little hard work stop me?

****

Eternity later

"Ah... I'm so tired, I want to rest..."

The next day, after completing a few laps around his yard, and doing thirty push-ups, Naruto laid on the ground like a dead animal.

I'm only three years old. Do I need to hurry up to practice body arts, or ordinarily go to school and then wait for the old man Hokage to teach me?

Naruto felt that he overestimated his willpower and self-discipline as a normal human.

In my last life, I made countless plans for myself, including skipping rope, running, and push-ups, but none of them could last for more than three days.

Unfortunately or Fortunately, however, if he wants to be lazy in this life, his mother
Will not tolerate being lazy.

Unfortunately, his mother's name is Kushina.

Today Kushina has changed from her past gentleness and concern for Naruto. She has become very strict.

"Get up, there are punch training and kick training next!" Kushina smacked on Naruto's head.

Naruto felt a dull pain on the top of his head, and for a while, he even thought of Garp's iron fist of love for Luffy.

Naruto had to get up and punch the sandbag. Kushina explained how to exert force and correct the movements.

The scene was very harmonious, like a parent supervising their children's homework.

"Come on Naruto, it's almost done."

Naruto gritted his teeth, sweat dripped down his hair, and endured the pain in his arms and thighs. He punched and kicked the sandbag.

When the last kick came out, Naruto felt that his whole person was sublimated. It turns out that I can only endure hardship for so much time.

After this relaxation, it seems that the small arms and calves are not his own, and he doesn't want to move when he sits on the ground.

Kushina hurried over to help Naruto do the stretching and massage after exercise.

Kushina sadly said:

"Naruto, don't blame your mother for being cruel. You will become an excellent ninja in the future. The current practice is like a ninja performing a mission. You can't easily give up halfway when you start."

"I know, I also want to become stronger, at least strong enough to protect myself and my family." Of course, Naruto could understand Kushina's painstaking efforts.

As Human beings, if you don't force yourself, you don't know where your limits are.

If you are not hardworking, then you will be a canon Folder in the world, and you have to be strong enough to survive in this world to protect your family & protect yourself.

This world is too dangerous; if you don't work hard, you will die, and Naruto is not sure if there is any Ashura Chakra in his body.

Therefore, it is up to you to become stronger. As for whether it is a matter of being the son of the fourth Hokage and Kushina with the benefit there comes danger.

Of course, this life has given him his parent's love that he doesn't experience in his previous life.

Kushina hangs up Naruto and beats him,
" How can you give up, so easily If you want to protect us it is not enough, break your limits, we will protect you now but what when you face your enemies, They will not show you mercy and then you will regret that you have not worked hard enough"

While Minato was thinking about, how to train Naruto gently.

If he also started teaching Naruto the same as his wife, then he would cause trauma, or his son's personality would be changed drastically in a short period. ' Maybe, I should invite Lady Tsunade to teach Naruto' Minato thought while walking towards his wife.

Naruto felt chills down his spine
' Is the end near? '

****

The morning passed like that. Naruto dragged his exhausted body back home to take a bath, waited for Minato to come back for lunch, and then fell into a deep sleep.

After sleeping for two hours, Naruto got up and moved his sore... Huh? Why aren't my arms sore?

Naruto jumped off the bed and found that his waist was no longer sore, his legs were no longer sore, and he was able to walk with strength. Is sleeping so effective?

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

After my morning training session, I felt exhausted but In the afternoon, I still had enough energy to bounce around. Naruto had gained a preliminary understanding of his body. Did this mean that if he didn't practice, he would wither away?

However, there was no training scheduled for the afternoon. Kushina had gone to work and advised Naruto not to overexert himself. He was still too young and could easily get injured.

Kushina differed from Uchiha Mikoto, who could be a full-time homemaker during times of peace.

Kushina served as a vital pillar of the village and had to maintain a certain level of combat readiness. In addition to her daily work, she occasionally embarked on missions.

Naruto was now three years old and didn't require constant care. Even Kakashi was no longer solely responsible for his protection.

Kakashi often took on various challenging missions and had earned the title of anbu black op

Kushina had mentioned that he shouldn't train now and let his body rest. Naruto believed it was wise to follow his mother's advice to prevent him from getting hurt. So, should he read books?

Unfortunately, his vocabulary was still limited, and he couldn't even read "The Perseverance and Endurance." With nothing to do at home, Naruto decided to go for a walk.

As he strolled through the streets and observed the shops, Naruto couldn't help but think that Konoha resembled a small city.

Villagers were quite friendly to Naruto, given that he was the son of a hero. Some even called him "Master Naruto," but Minato and Kushina quickly corrected them.

Naruto didn't mind, though. He had no intention of being arrogant or domineering just because he was the village Hokage's son.

Naruto continued to wander and eventually found himself outside the ninja school. It wasn't surprising to see the school, but he recognized someone at the entrance and greeted them with a smile, "Third Grandpa!"

In his heart, he wondered why the Third Hokage was here when he could be at home with his wife, considering that both of his sons were busy with their own lives. Perhaps retirement had made him a bit lonely, leading him to the school to serve as a caretaker.

The Third Hokage retracted his foot that had started to enter the school and replied with a smile, "Ah, Naruto, are you out here to play on your own?"

"Yes, Third Grandpa. Why are you here?" Naruto knew that there were likely Anbu operatives accompanying him, but they couldn't show themselves openly.

"Haha, I'm going to give a lecture to the children later."

"A lecture?"

"Yes, Naruto, do you know about the Will of Fire?"

Before Naruto could respond, the Third Hokage continued, patting Naruto's head affectionately, "Where leaves are falling, the fire will continue to burn. The fire will illuminate the village and nurture new leaves."

Naruto thought to himself, 'Ahhh, brainwashing has already started,' but remained silent.

"Haha, perhaps that's a bit advanced for you. Would you like to go inside and take a look?"

"Sure," Naruto agreed, having never been inside the ninja school.

As Naruto followed the Third Hokage inside, the old man continued to impart knowledge, "The ninja school was founded by the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju. Since its inception, it has nurtured numerous talents for Konoha..."

Naruto listened intently as the Third Hokage shared the history of the ninja school, the heroic deeds of past Hokage, and stories about his parents.

The old man seemed engrossed and Naruto realized that sometimes he just needed someone to listen to him, whether or not they responded.

Naruto suddenly felt a sense of empathy for the old man. Despite the criticisms he had heard in his previous life, at this moment, the Third Hokage appeared to be nothing more than an ordinary retired old man.

Days passed with Naruto following a routine of morning physical exercises, afternoon exploration of the village, and a peaceful and quiet life. Two months flew by, and Konoha had transitioned into the chilly month of December.

Unlike the "damp and chilled" winters of the USA, Konoha's winter was more akin to the "dry and physically chilling of Alaska", Each day required an extra layer of clothing when venturing outside.

Konoha had hosted the delegation from the Land of Lightning, for several days. Negotiations regarding the alliance between the two villages had concluded, and Konoha had scheduled a ceremony for December 27 to celebrate the alliance.

It happened to be the third birthday of Hinata Hyuga, the eldest daughter of the Hyuga clan.

In Konoha, the third birthdays of children were considered significant milestones, marking their transition to more independent individuals.

Naruto's third birthday had been more extravagant than the previous two, and the Hyuga family had attached great importance to it.

The family attended Hinata's third birthday celebrations on that every day, even skipping village festivals. On this day, Hinata would be formally established as the heir of the main branch, and Neji, a member of the branch family, would be marked as her protector.

From that point forward, Neji's life would revolve around safeguarding the main branch's eldest daughter.

The 'cursed seal', also known as the 'Caged Bird Seal', was the Hyuga Clan's technique of protecting their beloved Byakugan while also ensuring that the branch members fulfilled their sacred responsibility as guards of the main house & could even damage their brain nerves, causing death in extreme situations.

The seal also possessed the power to seal the Byakugan, ensuring that the Byakugan's secrets remained within the main branch.

Curiously, Neji seemed to embrace his role, willingly protecting his cousin. He didn't resent the clan's system and the "caged bird" seal, at least not at this point.

However, Naruto knew from his previous life that Neji's perspective would change dramatically after his father, hizashi, died. Hizashi would sacrifice himself to remove the "caged bird" seal from his nephew, declaring it a personal choice to defy the clan's fate.

People had their own beliefs and choices. In the village, preparations for the alliance ceremony were in full swing, and Naruto spent his days shopping and eating with Kushina.

Meanwhile, the Hyuga clan was busy with Hinata's third birthday celebration, seemingly oblivious to the village's festivities.

It was a day when Hinata would officially become the heir, and Neji, despite his eventual resentment, seemed content with his role for now.

However, the ninja from Cloud Village had nefarious plans in motion.

The following day, a piece of unsettling news quietly circulated in Konoha: "Shocking news! The kidnapping of the Hyuga Clan head's Daughter!"

The leader of the cloud village envoys had audaciously kidnapped the eldest daughter of the Hyuga clan, only to be swiftly confronted and killed by the Hyuga clan head, Hiashi Hyuga.

Shockingly, the Cloud Village envoy had turned the tables, falsely accusing the Hyuga clan of unprovoked murder and demanding Konoha hand over the alleged murderer.

The news sparked widespread discussions among the residents. Some sympathized with Hinata's ordeal, others condemned Cloud Village ninja for their shamelessness, and some feared that this incident could escalate into a conflict.

If not handled carefully, it could strain the newly formed alliance between Konoha and Kumogakure.

In response, Minato decided to visit the Hyuga residence, aiming to gather more information and negotiate a resolution.

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

On the same day, the high-ranking Konoha members, Minato Namikaze, Sarutobi Hiruzen and Koharu, visited the Hyuga estate, and the two elders of the Hyuga clan received them in the meeting room of the Hyuga clan.

Although the third Hokage has retired, he will still be notified of such important events. As for Danzo, it seemed he played an important role in Orochimaru's defection.

After the incident, the three Kages advocated for his removal. Subsequently, Danzo became increasingly reclusive, and his actions remained mysterious.

No one knew what the senior members of the Konoha clan were discussing at the Hyuga's house.

They only knew that when everyone left, the senior members of the Hyuga clan were very attentive to Minato, wearing grateful expressions.

The faces of the third and fourth Hokage remained calm but somewhat angered as they departed.

After the incident, Minato met with the remaining members of the Cloud Village messenger group, and the two sides exchanged opinions regarding the killing of the messenger leader. Unfortunately, they had significant differences.

Minato expressed severe condemnation for the kidnapping of the Hyuga head's daughter by Cloud village envoy, demanded that Cloud provide a reasonable explanation, and rejected Cloud's unreasonable request.

The cloud village messenger expressed dissatisfaction with Konoha's actions in covering up the murderer and avoided discussing the kidnapping, claiming it was merely an excuse for Konoha to evade responsibility.

Minato stated that Cloud Village was distorting the facts and taking an unfriendly stance, warning Cloud Village envoy not to cause trouble, as Konoha would respond accordingly.

The envoy expressed great indignation at Konoha's tough attitude.

In the end, the two sides parted unhappily, and the alliance was temporarily put on hold.

****

Following the incident, a small rumour suddenly began to spread.

"Have you heard?"

"What?"

"Lord Hokage covered up the murderer who killed the Cloud village messenger just to please the Hyuga clan."

"He's already a Hokage, so why would he do something to please a powerful family?"

"Of course, it's for... huh?"

"The fourth Hokage must be protecting his fellow villagers. Are you jealous because he's powerful, handsome, and popular?"

"How is that possible? I heard it from my nephew's aunt's sister, who's also Kojiro's neighbour's cousin."

"Do you believe such foolish gossip? It's ridiculous... The envoys from other villages must be furious because they failed to kidnap the child. Last time, they did their best to protect the village and seal the Nine-Tails. This is the Hokage we should support."

...

In the end, these baseless rumours failed to make any significant impact. Minato's popularity and respect remained intact, the rumours did not cause any trouble.

When the person who initiated the rumours learned of their ineffectiveness, he angrily muttered to himself while pounding a stick into the ground.

This man was now wearing bandages on his right shoulder and right eye. If Naruto saw him, he would probably quip, "I have many scars on my body, but this one hurts..."

****

In a private room of the barbecue restaurant, the contemporary trio of Ino-Shika-Cho—Yamanaka Inoichi, Nara Shikaku, and Akimichi Choza—were having a meal together.

Inoichi picked up his wine glass, raised it, took a sip of sake, and remarked, "Minato, the fourth Hokage, won't act too impulsively this time. It might even prevent another war."

Shikaku stared intently at the slices of meat on the grill, his mouth full as he chewed, and muttered, "What's wrong with that? It's all to protect our village, just like Senior White Fang did. I hope we never have to witness such sacrifices again."

"Hey, Choza, you don't have to rush through your meal every time," Inochi said with a helpless smile. "I think Shikaku is right. If we do end up going to war, the power of the Ino-Shika-Cho trio will make a difference."

"Exactly," Choza as he stroked his chin's moustache. "By the way, didn't we have plans to meet an old friend?"

Inoichi and Shikaku both paused and thought for a moment. "You're right, we did. Who was it?"

"Forget it, I can't seem to remember. Anyway, cheers!"

...

In the Hatake household, Kakashi sat alone in an empty room with a broken white-toothed dagger placed in front of him.

The evening sun cast its rays upon him through the window, creating a distinct line between light and shadow that seemed to divide him in half.

After a while, Kakashi murmured, "Father, if Minato-sensei had become Hokage back then..."

Before he could dwell on his thoughts for too long, a loud and enthusiastic voice echoed from a distance, "Hey, Kakashi! The sunset today is so beautiful. Let's face it together and have a competition of betting on youth!"

...

In the Sarutobi family home, Sarutobi Hiruzen smoked a cigarette while quietly observing the teenagers practising ninjutsu in the yard.

Sarutobi Biwako stepped out of the house, snatched the pipe from him, and said, "I told you not to smoke. Don't set a bad example for Tenzo."

Sarutobi Hiruzen smirked, "I'm used to it."

"Judging by your gloomy expression, it seems you disagree with Minato's approach. I think he's handling things much better than you did."

"It's not that. I just believe that Minato has grown significantly in the past few years," Sarutobi Hiruzen sighed. "If Tobirama-sensei were still here, he would support Minato's approach."

"Alright, it's been a long time since he retired. Let's invite Tenzo in for dinner." Sarutobi Biwako turned and headed back into the house.

"Tenzo," Sarutobi Hiruzen called softly.

"Yes." The boy in the yard immediately halted his ninjutsu practice and stood at attention.

"Tomorrow, come with me to meet Hokage. I'm going to recommend you for ANBU. In the future, you'll work hard to protect Konoha."

"Yes, Hokage-sama."

"Good lad. Let's go have dinner."

****

In the Uchiha clan, inside the living room of the Uchiha house, Uchiha Fugaku and Uchiha Shisui sat facing each other.

"Shisui, I've heard that you've been performing exceptionally well in ANBU,
"Shisui of the Body Flicker"

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

This is Naruto's third New Year in this world.
Looking at Minato and Kushina, who were busy in the kitchen, Naruto suddenly had an idea: "I could do it myself without the Spring Festival Shōgatsu "( Japan's New Year Festival)

…

"Shōgatsu?" Kushina stopped her busy work in the kitchen.

"Yeah," Naruto nodded and explained, "It's a show, featuring singing, dancing, skits, magic... ninjutsu, and more so that the entire village can watch and celebrate the old year passing and the new year beginning with lively festivities."

Minato also looked over. "It's a good idea to use the festival to deepen the relations with villagers & understanding of ninjas and increase their sense of identity with the village. And more importantly..."

Minato held his chin in thought for a moment and then said happily, "I can perform my Spiralling Flash Super Round Dance Howl Style Three and I can bring you to the stage with me, Naruto!"

Naruto's refusal came from his father's kindness: "I decline!"

The technique, 'Spiralling Flash Super Round Dance Howl Style Three', combines the Flying Thunder God technique with flash bombs. In battle, it involves throwing Flying Thunder God kunai and using flash bombs to emit dazzling yellow electric light, creating an illusion of blocking the opponent's line of sight Ninjutsu and taking the opportunity to defeat the enemy.

Naruto had experienced the Flying Thunder God technique many times, but it didn't feel good. The instantaneous change of space, rapid scene switching, and the illusion of spatial dislocation made people feel dizzy.

In the past, out of curiosity, Naruto had once begged Minato to let him experience the art of the Flying Thunder God. After the procedure, he felt nauseous and vomited at first, constantly craving sour foods for relief. He slowly got used to it over time. But this technique was different; he knew he must learn it in the future.

Minato, who had been rejected by his son to perform on the same stage, was a little disappointed but quickly cheered up: "There's not enough time this year for a large-scale social gathering, but we can have our family celebration, a party."

"Okay," Kushina washed her hands and said, "I'll go and get Kakashi first."

…

To Naruto's disappointment, Kakashi wasn't dragged along, but he was pleasantly surprised to see that Kakashi was accompanied by a green-clothed boy with a melon head.

"I'm back."

"Excuse me." *2

"Sensei."

"Lord Hokage!"

Kushina poked her head out of the kitchen. She said, "Oh? Is the guy here, too? Sit down; the last dish will be ready soon."

"Yes." *2

Naruto casually greeted Kakashi and observed the now 18-year-old youth, a mighty Gai. He was very curious about the person who had outdanced the ghost of the Uchiha.

Although he had seen odd individuals running upside down in the streets or hopping on one foot, he had never had a close encounter with them.

"Oh~ Could it be that you are the son of Hokage-sama?"

Guy jumped in front of Naruto, bent over, hooked Naruto's shoulder, and said, "It's our first meeting; I'll give you a precious gift."

Without waiting for Naruto to respond, he produced a green jumpsuit seemingly out of thin air, waved it around, and began to introduce it:

"This outfit offers excellent breathability and moisture retention. It's designed for perfect shape and beautiful lines, allowing for easy movement. When you wear it, you'll immediately feel the difference and become addicted. This is the secret of Konoha's proud Blue Beast might guy for becoming stronger! With this show your YOUTH to the world"

Guy gave a thumbs up, and a peculiar light shone in his eyes.

Kakashi held his forehead, exasperated by this behaviour.

Naruto also found it hard to look directly at the guy and tugged at the corner of Kushina's clothes. "Mom, he's showing his teeth at me!"

Kushina finally recovered from the guy's antics and rapped Naruto on the head. "Naruto, don't be rude."

"Oh." Naruto rubbed his aching head and took the jumpsuit. "Thank you, Big Brother ."

Even if he didn't wear it, it would make a great souvenir. If it didn't fit him, he could give it to little Naruto later. It didn't look like it was sized for children.

While talking, Minato brought the last dish to the table.

"Let's eat!"

The five people at the table started eating. Minato occasionally asked Kakashi and the guy some questions. Kakashi replied calmly, while the guy answered enthusiastically and loudly. Kushina occasionally interjected, asking if the two of them had girlfriends.

Naruto...kept peeking at Kakashi. It had been three years, and Naruto had never seen Kakashi's true face. This guy always wore a mask, not even removing it to eat. The mask was swiftly lifted and put back in place, and he continued eating.

Naruto wondered if Kakashi had mastered the art of eating without revealing his face, if he had been single for too long, or if he was gae.

Naruto even felt like he could see Kakashi's eating movements clearly with his developed dynamic vision.

After a lively meal, the five of them set up a small table and some small benches brought snacks, melons, and fruits, and sat in a row in the yard.

Naruto walked up to the others and picked up a carrot as a makeshift microphone:

"Ahem, ladies and gentlemen, good evening!

Another season of snow drifts by, and another year of growth.

The old year has firmly walked away from us,

The new year approaches with the dawn of hope.

Perhaps our path ahead won't be smooth, and we may face challenges.

But we're not afraid, because we'll grow through hard work and progress with high spirits!"

Minato, Kushina, and Kakashi listened with puzzled expressions on their faces. Although Naruto's speech was eloquent, it seemed quite unusual for a three-year-old.

The only guy was so excited that tears welled up in his eyes, and he danced and shouted, "Oh!! Well said, Naruto! Youth means overcoming all obstacles with hard work and determination!"

Naruto waved his hand with a smile. "The first Konoha New Year's begins now!"

****

After the party, Naruto was very excited and felt like he had celebrated the New Year with a group of entertainers.

Tonight, he witnessed Guy's Konoha Fluid Art collection performance, Kakashi's Dog Head Earth Release Wall and Chidori, Kushina's special display of various sealing techniques with cool light effects, and the newly developed 'Party Package Glitter Dance' by Minato. Naruto also sang a bunch of random songs enthusiastically...

In the end, Kakashi bid farewell and left. Guy announced that he was going to do a handstand and run around the village. Naruto returned to his bed and fell asleep.

Meanwhile, Minato and Kushina lay in bed, unable to sleep.

"Hey, Minato, didn't Naruto seem a bit unusual today during his performance?"

"Ah, it does seem like Naruto has never been as happy as he was today, not even on his third birthday."

"This child has always been different from other children. He learns quickly, doesn't enjoy playing with his peers, is always curious about strange things, and sometimes behaves like an adult. What Naruto said today in his opening remarks didn't sound like the words of a three-year-old at all."

"Yeah, sometimes I even wonder if Naruto pretends to act like a child deliberately. One day, I saw him looking out the window with a distant expression, as if he were sad, or... lonely."

"Is there something this child can't share with his parents? I'll ask him."

"Don't rush things; Naruto has his reasons."

"But…"

"It's okay; Naruto is our son. Let's give him more time."

"Alright."

…

Naruto was also feeling conflicted. Should he tease the giant fox in front of him, or should he play it safe?

Naruto was convinced that he wasn't dreaming; he was in a sealed space.

In the dim, dark environment, the water on the ground barely reached his ankles, and in front of him stood a massive iron gate, several tens of meters tall.

A colossal orange fox lay by the gate, its eyes just opened & fixed on the young boy.

Just as Naruto was pondering what to say, Kyuubi spoke first: "Little devil, come here and open the gate."

"I can't open a gate that big," Naruto made up an excuse.

"Just tear the piece of paper on the gate."

"It's too high; I can't reach it," Naruto continued to make excuses.

"Come here; I can can lift you."

"No," Naruto thought, "I trust you, old fox, but you're pretty tricky."

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

In the sealed space, one small child and one fox stared at each other with wide eyes.

Naruto considered that he hadn't employed his mouth evasion skills much and didn't believe he could deceive a thousand-year-old fox. So, he decided to be straightforward: "Big fox, I know you."

Kyuubi closed his eyes and ignored him, "of course, the entire Konoha knows me"

"Everyone calls you the nine-tailed demon fox."

Nine-Tails still didn't harm him.

"But you have a name, Kurama."

Kurama finally opened his eyes and stood up suddenly, his massive head hitting the iron door, making it rattle. "How did you know that, stinky brat!"

Seeing Nine-Tails' excited reaction, Naruto suddenly pondered. Humans are very strange creatures. They will desperately struggle to survive in dangerous situations, but occasionally they want to die in a safe environment.

Naruto now felt like he was looking at a beast through a cage in front of Nine Tails. As everyone knows, the nine-tails don't like humans for a reason.

Naruto tentatively said, "If I were to tell you that I am the reincarnation of a Six Path, would you believe me?"

"Bullsh*t!" Nine Tails patted the door with a paw to express his anger.

"Then, would you believe me if I said I'm the reincarnation of Asura?"

"You still know Asura!?" Nine Tails was shocked. This kid knows that the Six Paths sage can also be understood as having his legend in the ninja world, but the name of Asura is not well-known.

"It's very troublesome to explain. Why don't you just calm down and listen to me slowly?"

Nine Tails stared at him for a few seconds and then relented, "Speak."

"Before that, let's get acquainted. My name is Uzumaki Naruto, hee hee." Naruto showed a big smile.

"Humph." Nine Tails turned his head slightly as if he had to squeeze a few words out of his teeth."Continue."

Naruto clapped his hands and switched to storytelling mode:

"Speaking of which, Kaguya Otsutsuki came from outer space, wanting to turn human beings into sacrifice and nourish the divine tree. Fortunately, the two brothers, Hagoromo Otsutsuki and Hamura Otsutsuki, joined forces to seal her"

"Sometime later, Hagoromo Otsutsuki was inspired by his youngest son, Asura, to use his Creation of All Things ability to divide the Ten-Tails' chakra into nine living entities, what would become the tailed beasts. The Sage named the nine and explained to them that a link existed between them despite their separation."

"However, a guy from the Senju clan took his brother to capture the tailed beasts and distributed them to the major ninja villages, hoping to balance the strength of the villages through the power of the tailed beasts and achieve peace."

"So, the tailed beasts lost their freedom one after another."

"However, things took an unexpected turn. Hashirama didn't expect to be betrayed by his half-brother, Madara, who ran away from the village. Soon after, he passed away. After several wars in the ninja world, peace seemed far away."

"The tailed beasts that Hashirama originally wanted to use to balance the power of various villages were instead used as weapons of war."

"This fox all know that, but what interests me is how you know all this." Although there are some unfamiliar words, Nine Tails can generally understand them.

Naruto felt he was still in a hurry, and Fox was impatient. Why wasn't he listening? There was no choice; so Naruto had to explain:

"If I have to say it, it's like seeing it with my own eyes. Many pictures and sounds remain in my memory. To say where it came from, I already knew it from birth."

What Naruto said was the truth. I watched the anime in my previous life, and I knew it from birth.

Kyuubi generally believed it, mainly because the world did have such an ability. For example, the old toad called Toad Gamamaru in Mount Myoboku can occasionally dream of some fragments about the future.

Back then, it was Toad Gamamaru who guided the sage of the Six Paths to learn Six Paths Senjustu, a heightened version of the Sage Mode to combat Kaguya.

Now it's not uncommon for someone who can see the past to appear, but why is this kid?

"Little devil, what do you want to do?"

"I'm interested in your power."

"What did you say?"

"I mean I desire your power."

"Desire sounds derogatory, doesn't it?"

"Well, maybe from your perspective, you should use that word."

"Hmm." Kurama sat and closed his eyes. The amount of information received today was a bit overwhelming. He would observe and consider later to determine if this little devil had any connection with the old man.

"Anyway, we got to know each other today. I'm going to bed now, bye-bye, big fox!" Naruto waved his hand. "I am still a child; we can't stay up late. It's important to go to bed early and wake up early for good health."

Three seconds later, Kyuubi opened his eyes again: "Why are you still here?"

"Then... how do I get out?"

****

In the end, Naruto left the space. It was the first time he had interacted with the fox spirit, and he was quite satisfied.

In the morning, Naruto emerged from his room yawning. Minato was sitting at the dining table, reading the newspaper, and Kushina was preparing breakfast in the kitchen.

"Good morning, Mom and Dad."

"Good morning."

"Go wash up; it's time for breakfast."

After Naruto washed up, he sat across from Kushina, took a bite of the poached egg, and said inarticulately, "I saw the big fox last night."

Minato put away the newspaper and asked with a smile, "A fox? Did Naruto have a nightmare?"

"It wasn't a dream; it was the big fox with nine tails, locked inside the iron cage."

"Pfft!" Kushina spewed a mouthful of milk onto Naruto's face.

Naruto wiped his face expressionlessly, staring at Kushina with resentment without speaking.

"Ah, sorry, sorry Naruto, Mom was just too surprised." Kushina turned to look at Minato: "Minato~"

"I know." Minato checked Naruto's seal under his clothes and said, "The seal is intact."

That was a standard check. Kushina breathed a sigh of relief, sat up straight, and said seriously, "Naruto, next time something like this happens, don't be afraid."

Naruto said, "We're ninjas; we won't be afraid."

"That fox is called Nine-Tails, one of the nine-tailed beasts..."

"That..." Naruto raised his hand to interrupt her, "I know all of this."

"Since you already know... eh? How do you know?"

"Never mind that you told me when you were pregnant; even if you didn't say..."

"Wait! Do you remember what happened before you were born?!"

"Yes."

Kushina and Minato exchanged glances and asked, "How much do you remember?"

"Most of it; for example, my mother once told me about my father's heroic rescue and then what my mother was thinking at that time..."

"Eh???? Don't go on!" Kushina, who was nearly told something embarrassing, blushed like a tomato. "Forget everything that comes after that! Forget it!"

Minato smiled awkwardly beside her, curious about what Kushina had told Naruto.

"Yes, yes," Naruto said

Kushina was embarrassed, her son now knows everything thing.

"Cough." After finally regaining her composure, Kushina coughed dryly and said seriously, "Since you know everything, you should also know that as a jinchuriki, you may feel lonely, sad, and unfair..."

"It's okay if you can be friends with the big fox; that's fine."

"...Be friends with Kyuubi? Is that even possible?"

"Why not? He has wisdom, feelings, and a name of his own. The 'Nine Tails' is just a name given by people based on the number of tails."

Naruto's words had a profound impact on Minato and Kushina. The prevailing perception of tailed beasts during this period was that they were powerful beasts.

Since they were beasts, they should be tamed and used violently rather than being communicated with for peaceful coexistence.

Minato thoughtfully said, "Naruto."

"Yes?"

"Do it according to your idea."

"Okay!"

Kushina had mixed feelings. She had always assumed she would use her power to control the Nine-Tails, and now she was hearing talk about making friends with it...

****

After breakfast, Naruto diligently completed his daily physical exercises, reading, and education. His training had significantly increased compared to a few months ago, and he could feel his progress every day. It was a great feeling to see the results of his hard work paying off.

Exercise, study, play during the day, tease the fox at night, and then sleep contentedly. The days were comfortable and fulfilling.

It wasn't until a few months later that Naruto's peaceful life became a bit turbulent.

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

It was an ordinary day. Kushina had not returned from her mission, and Minato was too busy to come home for lunch.

Naruto had lunch at Sasuke's house and, after the meal, shouted, "Sasuke, I want you to help me practice!"

Since Kushina and Mikoto had a close relationship and even referred to each other's children as godmothers, the two families knew each other well. So, it was nothing unusual for Naruto to come over for a meal.

The two nearly four-year-old children happily practised shuriken together, engaging in a "friendly" practice duel. The result... Sasuke was quite upset about losing.

When it came to shuriken and physical strength, Naruto was superior. However, Sasuke's agility and physical endurance were greater than Naruto's, and the exceptional reflexes inherited from Minato ensured that Naruto could barely hold his own against Sasuke.

' hmm, maybe I should practice more' Naruto thought while thinking about his strength.

Sasuke's pouting expression was undeniably cute, and Naruto couldn't help but feel ' disgusting '

Fortunately, Sasuke's mood quickly shifted when Itachi arrived and waved to Sasuke.

According to Sasuke's complaint, ever since Oni-chan graduated and became a Genin, he hadn't had much time to spend with him.

Usually, Itachi would either go on missions with his team or be "borrowed" by Big Brother Shisui. Well, it was more like "borrowed." Every time they would say, "Lend us your brother for a while," but Sasuke never agreed!

Sasuke was so frustrated that his eyes were practically shooting fire. Now he cherished the time he spent with Itachi. Whenever Itachi appeared, he completely ignored Naruto, Naruto? Who's that?

Naruto couldn't be bothered to get to know him either, so he simply greeted Itachi and left.

Lost in thought, Naruto eventually returned to his residence.

"I'm back~~ huh?"

When he saw the young man sitting in the living room, Naruto felt like his brain wasn't working properly. The man had grey hair, green pupils, and a red dot on each eyebrow... What was going on?

The boy stood up as Naruto entered and calmly looked at him.

"Naruto's back?" Kushina had just returned and hadn't even had time to change out of her ninja uniform. She took the boy's hand and introduced, "This child's name is Kimimaro, and from now on, he'll be your brother."

"Brother?" Naruto was still in shock. Wasn't Kimimaro kidnapped by Orochimaru and turned into his top henchman, responsible for helping Orochimaru kill the Fourth Kazekage, Rasa? Why was he here in Konoha now?

"Yes, that's right, Kimimaro this is Naruto, so please get along with him."

"Yes, please take care of me." Kimimaro's tone and expression remained remarkably steady.

"Uh, hi," Naruto replied hesitantly, his guard up. He wondered if Kimimaro had been sent by Orochimaru to carry out some mission. But then again, Kimimaro appeared to be only seven or eight years old and likely didn't possess that kind of strength.

Naruto couldn't figure it out. Perhaps he should discuss it with his parents when he has the chance. After all, he had conversed quite a bit with Kyuubi.

…

That evening, Naruto sneaked into his parents' room, closed the door, and wore a serious expression. "I have something very important to discuss, and it involves many secrets. Can mom set up a barrier to prevent eavesdropping?"

Kushina and Minato exchanged glances and nodded.

Soon, a barrier enveloped the entire room.

"I have memories from a different world here..."

Naruto provided a summary of Minato and Kushina's original fate, emphasizing Kimimaro's life.

As for figures like Pain and Obito, he would discuss them later. For now, he wanted to learn more about Kimimaro's situation.

Kushina asked in astonishment, "You're saying that Minato and I were supposed to die on the day you were born? And Kimimaro was supposed to be kidnapped by Orochimaru?"

"Yeah," Naruto nodded.

Minato added, "At that time, I was indeed prepared to use the Reaper Death Seal. If it weren't for Naruto's sudden intervention with the Four Symbols Seal..."

In other words, what Naruto had witnessed was likely "an alternate potential future."

"That..." Naruto hesitated for a moment. This question, reminiscent of the previous life butterfly dream, had been troubling him for a while. He expressed his inner turmoil, "I have so many memories from another life here. Am I still me or someone else? Am I truly your son, Naruto?"

Naruto looked up at his parents with a mix of anxiety and confusion in his eyes.

In response, a fist landed on his head.

"Bang!" Naruto was knocked into a crouching position, clutching his head, tears welling up. He looked at Kushina with a pitiful expression.

Kushina's hair seemed to move of its own accord, dividing into nine strands that floated behind her head. Her tone was unusually stern, "Listen, Naruto! You are my son, and that will never change! If you ever think otherwise, I'll give you a beating. Even if I have to rise from the dead, I'll come back and give you a good beating!"

"Calm down, Kushina," Minato calmed down the almost berserk Kushina, then gently patted Naruto's head.

"It hurts, it hurts," Naruto whined, tears still streaming down his face. Minato gently touched the swelling bump on Naruto's head.

"Ah, sorry, sorry. So, that's been weighing on your mind?"

Naruto sniffled and nodded.

"Dad feels the same way as Mom just explained," Minato continued, his hand still on Naruto's head. "You are our son. We watched you being born, and we've seen you grow up with our own eyes. We hope you'll become an excellent ninja. On the day you were born, I swore that I, Minato Namikaze, would do everything in my power to protect my family. Not as Hokage, but as a father and a husband. So don't think about it"

…

Naruto lay in his small bed, pondering everything that had happened that night.

With his most pressing concern resolved, Minato had also explained to him the backstory of Kimimaro.

Konoha's intelligence operatives had detected Orochimaru's presence near the Land of Water. Given Orochimaru's status as an S-rank traitor, they couldn't ignore it. Minato, as Hokage, couldn't personally rush to the Land of Water, as it would be inappropriate.

So Minato decided to send Kushina along with the contemporary Ino-Shika-Cho trio. They were accompanied by undercover ANBU for added security.

Upon reaching the border of the Land of Water, Yamanaka Inoichi detected Orochimaru's trail, Shikaku set up various traps, and Kushina established a barrier.

Unfortunately, despite a fierce battle, all they found at the end was a "snakeskin," and Orochimaru himself had vanished.

As they were preparing to return, a rebellion erupted in the Land of Water. The Kaguya clan, with their bloodline limit, the clan was mostly killed off when attacking Kirigakure in a failed attempt to show off their ferocity, but they were wiped out, leaving Kimimaro as the sole survivor. By chance, he encountered Konoha's team and was brought back.

After a thorough review by various parties in Konoha, it was determined that Kimimaro was not a spy and had no hidden agenda.

Kushina proposed to adopt him, knowing that Naruto had always wanted a brother. Minato readily agreed, and the matter was settled.

With the assurance that his family was safe, Naruto felt relieved and accepted his new "big brother" with open arms. After all, having him in their own home was much better than dealing with Orochimaru.

Naruto closed his eyes, his mind filled with images of Kushina's fiery red hair and Minato's gentle smile. He murmured to himself, "This is great."

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

The next day, Naruto, who had shared most of his burdens, was full of energy.

"Good morning,"

Kimimaro seemed a bit reserved today "Good morning"

Naruto leaned over with a smile and asked, "What's wrong? Are you not used to this?"

"No, it's just that I've always been treated as a weapon, imprisoned in a cell, and released only when I needed to fight. Sleeping in a warm and soft bed like yesterday, sitting in a bright and spacious room to eat, receiving meticulous care from others... It's never happened before."

"So, do you like it?"

"Well, but... what's the meaning?"

"What?"

"What is the meaning of life?"

Ah... Naruto felt a pain in his head. He hadn't pondered such deep questions at such a young age, spending his days thinking about life and play. No wonder he had been kidnapped by Orochimaru.

In my memory, the original characters asked three similar questions:

The first was Orochimaru, and then the Third Hokage explained how a snake shedding its skin symbolized rebirth, which is the meaning of starting a new life. Later, the whole anime, the Third Hokage, embraced this symbolism of rebirth...

The Third Hokage was truly a mentor who could guide wayward apprentices in the ninja world or brainwash them.

The second was Itachi Uchiha, and then Orochimaru explained that life had no inherent meaning. If there were any, it would only exist when life was eternal.

As a result, 4-year-old Itachi contemplated jumping off a cliff on the spot. He would have perished that day if he hadn't suddenly regained his senses and saved himself.

The third one was Kimimaro and Orochimaru told him that life might not have a predefined meaning, but perhaps he could find interesting things to pursue while living.

Just like how you found that flower, and just like how I found you. As a result, Kimimaro's path crossed with 'Uncle Snake' by chance, shaping his life.

Of course, there was also Gara, who was similar in his willingness to become a tool that would never be discarded simply because he wanted to be needed.

The children in this world, even if they were precocious, grew up too fast. Naruto didn't want to mislead Kimimaro as Orochimaru did. After all, they were just children, and they didn't truly understand the meaning of life.

So Naruto decided to seek guidance from someone wiser, using the secret technique of summoning his father. "Dad! Kimimaro asked what the meaning of life is."

Minato and Kushina emerged from the kitchen with breakfast and took their seats.

"What is the meaning of life?" Minato thought for a moment and then smiled. "Everyone's answer is different, and you have to discover your answer. For instance, I find meaning in protecting. As a father, I must protect my children; as a husband, I must protect my wife; as Hokage, I must protect the village. These are the purposes that define my life. You're still young, and you can take your time to figure out your own goals."

"Protection?" Kimimaro mumbled.

Naruto nudged the still-pensive Kimimaro with his elbow and pointed at Minato. "How do you feel about us, compared to your previous clan"

Kimimaro replied absently, "It felt warm."

"I've decided, I must protect the warmth" Kimimaro smiled at Naruto

Kimimaro clenched his fists, thinking about Minato's gentle smile, Naruto's bright smile, and the joyful look on Kushina's face when he looked at them. He made up his mind, "I'm willing to dedicate my life to safeguarding such life, Maybe that's the meaning of my life."

"Alright, the food will get cold," Kushina reminded them. "I'll take Kimimaro shopping for clothes and everyday necessities later, and Naruto, you're coming too."

"Okay."

…

On that day, Naruto came to a profound realization: shopping with a woman is exhausting, even if that woman is your mother.

Why did they have to meticulously choose and inspect everything, picking up, putting down, and haggling... In his previous life, Naruto mostly shopped online.

If he couldn't shop online, he'd head straight to the store, look for what he needed, glance at the price tags, and make the purchase. Are men just too simple, or are women too complex?

After enduring the ordeal, Kimimaro's supplies were fully stocked, and he officially moved into the room next to Naruto's. This also meant that Naruto would have a companion in his future training, and someone to learn basic literacy from.

Though Kimimaro was three years older than Naruto, he had received little education outside of combat. Minato planned to have Kimimaro study at home for a while before enrolling him in the ninja academy.

****

At night, Naruto lay down in his bed as usual and entered the sealed space.

"Hey, Big Fox, I'm back." Naruto waved in greeting.

Kurama raised an eyelid, glanced at him, then closed it again and said nothing.

"Give me some kind of reaction."

"Could it be that you're angry because I didn't come yesterday?"

"Cut it out."

"Oh, come on, can't you see, Big Fox, you care about me so much." Naruto made a playful expression.

"Stop being presumptuous, you brat!"

"Yes, yes, I'm being presumptuous." According to Naruto's estimation, this fox was about 10% caring, 20% soft, and the remaining 70% was pure ego.

If Naruto had to evaluate it, he'd describe it as an unappealing combination. He couldn't fathom the aesthetic sense of sage of six paths.

Among the nine-tailed beasts, Matatabi and Kurama had somewhat normal forms, while the others displayed bizarre appearances.

"Forget it, let's consider it a coincidence." Naruto didn't want to argue, and he couldn't convince the sage of six paths anyway. "By the way, do you have any issues with your fourth sibling?"

Kurama replied, "No issues, I just defeated him."

Naruto was intrigued. "Tell me about the fight!"

"There's not much to tell. He was weak, and I made him have five tails."

"Hmm... By the way, do you fight with all eight of them?"

"Pretty much. Gyuki is the one I spar with the most. That guy has a sharp tongue and thick skin, and it's quite satisfying to spar with him."

Nine tails seemed to suddenly open up, sharing with Naruto the experiences of battling each of the tailed beasts. He grumbled, "It's a shame that the seventh one can fly once he grows wings. He's hard to catch and ends up getting into fewer fights."

Naruto looked at him with a puzzled expression. "You're not a fox, you're a husky. You pick fights every day. The only difference is that your fighting ability is strong enough, so you can win after starting a fight."

The Nine Tails responded, "This fox has sensed your hostility. What are you staring at?"

"I admire your formidable fighting skills."

"Hmph, go on and tell your story."

"Alright."

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

In the days that followed, Naruto would tell Kurama the stories of his previous life. Unconsciously, the relationship between the fox and him grew much closer.

At least Naruto refrained from hitting the iron gate in front of him. He didn't beat it.

Of course, he also finished telling the story of the original Naruto to Minato and Kushina, during which their reactions ranged from shock and sadness to anger.

As for what action Minato would take after learning this information, Naruto didn't know. Judging solely from Kushina's reaction, she couldn't wait to catch Obito and hang him.

After the beating, she might consider showing sympathy and forgiveness, or not.

Unfortunately, when she thought about it, she knew that the child must be hiding very well. Even the Akatsuki organization had not yet reached that level in the story.

For instance, Itachi was still a child, and he heard that he was preparing for the Chunin exams.

The Great Shark was still in the Mist Village.

Deidara was a student of the Third Tsuchikage. Despite Deidara often annoying his sensei, Ōnoki was still proud of him.

He was a member of the Explosion Corps and possessed the Explosion Release kekkei genkai.

In the end, Minato solemnly instructed Naruto not to discuss these matters with anyone again, promising to do his utmost to eliminate the danger and prevent Konoha from facing the kind of catastrophic crisis depicted in the story.

The most pressing task at the moment was to remove the hidden detonation seals within Konoha Village.

Genno was originally a ninja from the Land of Mountains, Kagero Village, More than twenty years ago, he was ordered to infiltrate Konoha disguised as a craftsman.

During the village's construction, he concealed detonation seals in every corner of Konoha, with all the seals interconnected like a vast net, capable of blowing up the entire village.

The original plan was to detonate them during a war between the two villages, but Konoha preemptively seized Kagero Village's territory.

After peace negotiations between the two villages, Genno never received orders to proceed.

Subsequently, Kagero Village disappeared, and no one could give him orders. Thus, these detonation seals remained hidden in place.

However, Naruto had always thought this situation was absurd. How could so many people, especially ninjas with enhanced sensory talents, be unaware of these seals despite years of training?

How come the ninja dogs introduced into the village by dog breeders never spotted them?

Perhaps it was the will of the universe (Author) that kept them hidden...

But now that Minato knows about them, there was no need to worry. He could simply call on ninjas to search and dismantle them.

This time, maybe Naruto could make a small profit. Detonation seals scattered throughout the village were quite valuable.

The explosion seal situation was handled with remarkable ease, and Konoha narrowly avoided another calamity.

Naruto didn't participate in this matter and continued to carry out his training tasks day by day. Each day, when he sparred with Kimimaro, he found himself struggling and could only occasionally take out his frustration on Sasuke.

This routine continued until the end of the year. Naruto's suggestion to hold a New Year's festival eventually turned into a celebration of Konoha's unique traditions.

The scene was filled with the sound of drums and fireworks. It was bustling with people. While not quite to the extent of what Naruto had imagined, lanterns adorned the village, fireworks illuminated the sky, and people moved about, creating a festive atmosphere throughout the village.

Minato and Kushina led Kimimaro and Naruto to enjoy themselves.

Naruto followed his parents with great interest, experiencing the unique festival celebration. Even the typically stoic Kimimaro occasionally displayed a happy smile. It seemed that he had fully adapted and genuinely enjoyed the life he now had.

****

In February, Kimimaro had been in Konoha for over half a year. For the past six months, he had been receiving basic education at home, and now it was time for him to attend the ninja academy.

Of course, eight-year-old Kimimaro was placed directly in the third grade.

On his first day of school, the entire family accompanied Kimimaro to the ninja academy. When he entered the third-grade classroom, it created quite a sensation.

"Is that the Fourth Hokage-sama? He's so handsome!"

"I'm going to become Hokage one day!"

"The Fourth Hokage's wife is so beautiful!"

…

And when Kimimaro went to the front of the class with the teacher to introduce himself, the girls couldn't contain their excitement:

"The new transfer student is so handsome!"

"Ah~Kimimaro~"

…

Kushina stood by the classroom door and smiled. "It looks like you're quite popular, Kimimaro. Get along well with your classmates."

"Yes, Mother," Kimimaro nodded.

After that, Three of them bid farewell to Kimimaro.

Minato said, "I'm going to attend the opening ceremony of the first grade next. Do you want to take a look?"

Naruto shook his head: "No, I'll watch it when I go to school." 'I don't want to listen to the third Hokage's speech at all, so please forgive me.'

Kushina followed and said, "Then I'll take a look when I send Naruto to school."

Minato was helpless, smiled, and said, "Okay, see you later."

Kushina waved her hand: "Goodbye, Minato!"

***

The mother and son walked out of the school, and as soon as they went out, they saw children fighting... and saw three children bullying a little loli... ahem, a Hyuga.

"So ugly, you white-eyed monster!"

"Monster!"

"Monster!"

"Woooooo..." The little girl squatted on the ground and cried while covering her face.

"Let go of that girl!" Naruto shouted, trying to act like a hero. 'Am I a lolicon now?'

The three bullies turned around: "Hey, there are adults here, run!"

"Oh!" x2

The three bullies ran away in a hurry.

Naruto walked over, gently pulled up the little girl, and asked, "Are you alright?"

The little girl finally held back her tears: "Thank... Thank you."

Kushina came over and touched the little girl's head: "Are you the child of the Hyuga family?"

"Well." The little girl fiddled with her fingers nervously: "My name is Hinata Hyuga."

Kushina pulled Hinata's little hand and said with a smile, "Let's take you home."

Hinata obediently followed Kushina's side. Naruto didn't add any drama but just observed. The four-year-old Hinata was quite cute, ' am I becoming a Lolicon?'

As he walked, Kushina was still talking about her deeds: "When I was a kid, there were punks who laughed at my hair and said that the red hair looked like a tomato, and then I beat them all one by one. Hahaha, then no one dared to laugh at me in person! Little Hinata, be brave!"

Hinata looked at Kushina with big eyes admiringly, how amazing!

Looking at Hinata's reaction, Naruto thought to himself, if Kushina were to teach Hinata, she might end up turning her into a fierce, fearless version of herself!

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

After Kushina completed her sixth heroic deed of pinning down and beating up the person who mocked her, they finally arrived at the Hyuga home.

"It's here." Kushina let go of Hinata's small hand and encouraged her, "Be braver in the future, Hinata-chan!"

"Yes, thank you very much!" Hinata bowed obediently in gratitude.

"Goodbye then!"

After returning home, Naruto realized that he had forgotten to leave his name for the good deeds just now. He didn't even say, "I'm Naruto"; bad luck.

"Naruto," Kushina interrupted his thoughts, handing him a book, and said, "You have almost learned the necessary basic knowledge. The next thing to learn is this."

Naruto took the book, which was as thick as a dictionary, and looked at the cover: "Introduction to Sealing?"

"Yes, sealing techniques," Kushina said. "Naruto, you used the Adamantine Sealing Chains when you were just born, which proves that you have perfectly inherited the blood of the Uzumaki clan. This is one of the reasons your father insisted on you keeping the Uzumaki surname"

"Our Uzumaki clan used to be famous for being good at sealing techniques, on par with the Senju and Uchiha clans. Our clan's advantages are strong vitality, a large amount of chakra, and our sealing techniques being more powerful than those of ordinary people. Mine can even suppress tailed beasts, which is why I became the Jinchūriki of the Nine-Tails."

"Since you have inherited the talent of the Uzumaki clan, come and learn sealing techniques. You know the importance of sealing techniques, right?"

"Yeah." Naruto listened quietly to Kushina's speech. Of course, he knew that sealing techniques were very important. In the future, when facing enemies with "undead attributes" like those using Reanimation Jutsu or Hidan, he could use sealing techniques on them.

Even in the face of Orochimaru... that snake guy is a real problem. He can open the belly of the Shinigami and retrieve his hands when hit with the Reaper Death Seal and can still be resurrected through the Cursed Seal when hit with the Totsuka Blade seal. Naruto didn't know how to deal with him.

Sealing shouldn't be too difficult to learn, right? It's just different spells representing different functions. Write the spells according to certain rules, and then use chakra to exert various effects. It feels similar to programming, right? Can this stump me, a reincarnated person?

Thirty minutes later...

What is this?

Wtf..is going on?

Am I stupid?

Naruto looked at the "Introduction to Sealing Techniques" written on the cover of the book again, and it seemed that it became "Sealing Techniques from Beginner to Mastery," then "Sealing Techniques from Beginning to Abandonment," and finally "Sealing Techniques: From Entry to Entry."

At first, Naruto felt he could still memorize it, but after turning the page, he felt like, 15,16,20, 25....35 were too difficult...

Fortunately, he could ask Kushina to solve his doubts. Kushina still had experience in teaching others the sealing technique. Her first disciple was her husband, the Fourth Hokage, Minato Namikaze.

Kakashi also came to learn for a while. In the beginning, he copied several commonly used sealing techniques with the help of the Sharingan.

Now, Kushina's request for Naruto was to understand the basics and principles of sealing, which is still far from real application.

Just like after we learned Pythagoras theorem in school, we couldn't use it except to solve problems.

Naruto, who had been learning the Sealing Technique for half a day, worked extraordinarily hard today, even breaking a sandbag and spreading the sand all over the floor.

Then Kushina taught him a lesson, telling him to practice his fists and feet on wooden stakes outside in the future.

Although the process of learning sealing techniques was not smooth, it didn't prevent Naruto from bragging to Kurama at night.

"Big fox, I'm starting to learn sealing," Naruto smiled.

Kurama sighed deeply: "Humph."

Kurama said bitterly "When the old man was in this world, we had freedom"

"Then Madara tried to control us but Hashirama Senju defeated him & he distributed us like candy to villages, we are weapons for them now, all my brothers are tortured because we are tailed beasts, I tried to escape to save my brothers "

"But I could only wait for Mito to die because she knew sealing techniques. After finally waiting for Mito's life to end, Kushina comes, and the most annoying thing is that she also knows sealing techniques"

"I had no choice but to wait and was finally released, however, was sealed by that yellow-haired guy again, and it was still sealed in two halves"

Kushina's side doesn't need to think about it for the time being, so there is still some hope for this kid. Well, now this kid has also started to learn sealing techniques, and let the fox live!

This kid is also, you can learn if you want to learn. If you have time, you might as well tell the old man a few stories. I've heard more stories during this time, and the whole fox culture has improved. Just like the kid said, what is men of culture?

"Don't be so negative, big fox. Think about the good in everything. At least when I've mastered the sealing technique, I can improve your living environment."

Kurama said to Naruto: "Go away."

"Tsundere, Fox"

"Come here, brat!"

...

Spring ends and summer solstice arrives, and then autumn and winter come.

Naruto practised hard in winter and summer. From the village perspective, he was as strong as a calf. Although he never won against Kimimaro, he never lost against Sasuke. He felt like he could fight two or three people without a problem, uh, normally.

This year seemed to have gone by very fast. Kimimaro had long been the top student in his class, and almost no one in the senior class was his opponent.

With his current strength, there was no problem applying for early graduation, but Minato insisted that he finish Ninja School and make more friends.

A family of four sometimes went out together, went shopping, ate, and had picnics. It is worth mentioning that Minato liked Ichiraku ramen, Naruto liked the grilled meat and Kimimaro preferred a dessert shop with dango. Kushina... liked the rice cooked by Minato the most.

The ordinary life continued until the end of the year without any change, but on December 30, a small event made Naruto very happy.

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

The third Hokage, Sarutobi Hiruzen, was delighted to be the grandfather of the newborn. Due to the close friendship between their families, he felt it was only right to visit & see his grandson.

"Ah, so cute!" Kushina exclaimed, looking at the baby on the bed.

The third Hokage, Sarutobi Hiruzen, his wife Biwako, and their son Sarutobi Shinnosuke with his wife were gathered around the newborn.

Sarutobi Shinnosuke, the eldest son of the third Hokage, held an important position in Anbu.

He wasn't well-known because of his secretive role, but in the manga, he sacrificed himself for an unknown reason, leaving behind his only son, Konohamaru.

Naruto also leaned over to take a look. The baby was cute and small, resembling a little monkey, befitting the Sarutobi surname.

But Naruto refrained from saying that and instead asked, "What's his name?"

The third Hokage, whose pipe had been confiscated before entering the house, stroked his beard and smiled, "I have chosen this child's name. I hope he can become a powerful ninja when he grows up..."

The third Hokage's beard twitched for a moment before he continued, "No, not just that. I also hope he can benefit Konoha..."

"How about 'Sarutobi Yuki'? Bringing happiness to Konoha!"

Bam!! Kushina couldn't stand it and punched Naruto on the head.

"Naruto, don't be rude. Listen to what the Third Hokage has to say!"

"Oh." Naruto rubbed his head, feeling aggrieved.

"Hehehe... It's alright," the Third Hokage chuckled. "Naruto, you remind me so much of Minato." Silently, he added to himself, especially when it comes to choosing names.

The Third Hokage continued, "So I named him Konohamaru, Sarutobi Konohamaru."

"What a good name, Konohamaru," Naruto echoed.

Despite Naruto's attempt to suggest a different name, fate decided that Konohamaru would keep his name.

****

After returning home, Naruto showed his belly to Kushina. "Mom, can my seal be changed?"

"What's the matter? Is Kurama acting up?" Kushina asked, her expression stern, ready to deal with the Nine-Tails if needed.

"No, no, we get along fine. I just want to improve the environment."

Kurama, who listened to Naruto's stories every day, had even begun to laugh and occasionally shared chakra with him.

"Why did you suddenly think of changing the environment?" Kushina asked, puzzled.

"I talk to the big fox every day, tell stories, and all. The sealed space is like a sewer; it's very uncomfortable, so I want to change it."

"Theoretically, it is possible. The Eight Trigrams Seal is very flexible. It represents the elements of nature and can be combined into many kinds of environments."

"Then I want a forest-style one with a meadow, lake, and river attached. A little mountain in the distance, and the environment should be brighter. It would be better if day and night could alternate!"

Kushina listened to Naruto's requests, the corners of her mouth twitching. "This is real jutsu! Do you think it's ordering a meal or building a house?"

Frustrated, she slapped Naruto lightly.

Naruto covered his head, realizing he'd been too presumptuous. "Alright, just make it more refreshing and comfortable."

"Listen, the seal of the Nine-Tails is very important. I'll discuss it with Minato when he comes back tonight. You must not tamper with it!" Kushina warned.

"Yeah," Naruto nodded obediently. "By the way, what is the sealed space like on your side, Mom?"

"It's almost the same as before, except the Nine-Tails is just tied to a big stone ball."

"Haven't you two had a good talk?"

"That stubborn fox! He has a terrible temper! Do you want me to beg him to talk to me nicely?"

"Uh..." Naruto hesitated, thinking the other half of Kurama was truly unfortunate. When a proud monster meets a fiery-tempered woman, it's a tough match.

****

At night, Kurama, who was waiting to hear a story, was dozing off. Suddenly, the water on the ground seeped away, and grass sprouted, forming a lawn large enough for the fox to roll around on. The original black ceiling turned into a sky with blue clouds.

Though there were still boundaries, the original fence and gate were covered with vines, and every morning, glories bloomed.

Kurama noticed the change, looked around, and saw Naruto standing at the door waving.

"Yo, big fox, how do you feel?"

"Humph," Kurama lay down again. This new setup was undeniably more comfortable than lying in the water.

"Don't be so ungrateful; my mom finally agreed to help change it. I promised you I'd learn the sealing technique and change it myself, but since I'm still learning, it would take years to reach that level, so I had to ask for help."

Kurama's tail twitched slightly.

Naruto noticed Kurama's subtle movements. "Alright, let's continue the story."

Naruto cleared his throat. "Continuing from last time, After seeing a vision, Griffith tries to run away from camp. He falls and finds the Behelit again. As the band get close to him, the moon begins to cover the sun and starts a solar eclipse...."

Kurama loved dark stories for some reason, or he is a sadist, perhaps...

Whether it worked or not, at least the bond between Naruto and Kurama grew stronger. In the future, Naruto could confidently ask Kurama for chakra as a fee for the stories.

Naruto said to Kurama, "I let you enjoy so many stories for free. When I face difficulties, can I ask you for help, and you'll help me, right... right?"

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

Konoha's ninja academy opening ceremony was as lively as ever... and boring, When it came to the speech of the Third Hokage, the eyes of other children were shining, but Naruto was drowsy. There was no excitement in him at all.

"To those who possess the Will of Fire, everyone is family. The desire to protect one's family builds thicker and stronger bonds between each and everyone in the village."

"If the Will of Fire is embraced by everyone, the village will be alright no matter what happens." The third Hokage said with a joyful face & warm smile.

Oh, there was another boy with pineapple-shaped hair who had a similar reaction to Naruto and looked like he was about to fall asleep.

'what a drag..'

After the beautifully written, rich in content, clear in theme, and sleep-inducing speech was over, the children left their parents and went back to their respective classes.

The classroom of the ninja school was an amphitheatre with long, slender desks, and the positions had already been allocated. It was said to be random.

There were thirty people in Naruto's class. He observed them: the fat, the thin, the yellow-haired, the pink-haired, the spiky-headed, those with painted faces, those wearing hoods and sunglasses, the arrogant and cool ones in the front row, and the person beside him who looked down and played with his fingers... With these people and himself, this year's "Nine Rookie" class was complete.

Looking at the little girl beside him, Naruto decided to say hello: "Hello, I'm Uzumaki Naruto. I remember your name is Hinata, right?"

"Y-Yes..." Hinata's face visibly reddened, her mind full of thoughts: 'He remembers me, he still remembers me...he...'

'That aunt taught me to be brave, but now I can't even speak clearly' Hinata lowered her head in frustration, her mind racing.

Naruto was puzzled... How can I continue this conversation with your reaction?

Forget it; let's talk about it later. why did Iruka become a teacher? His parents didn't die in the Nine-Tails attack this time. Why?

At this time, Iruka wrote a few big characters on the blackboard and said, "From today onwards, I will be your teacher. My name is Iruka Umino, and I hope to get along well with everyone in the future!"

The children applauded respectfully. "Let's get to know each other. The classmates whose names I read, please come to the podium."

Iruka looked down at the list and said, "The first one, Sakura Haruno!"

"My name is Sakura Haruno..."

Here comes the ultimate simp of Sasuke & ultimate hater of Naruto. Will she treat me the same as the original? I don't hate her but if she tried to treat me like og Naruto, I think I should show her some gender equality.....

By the way, have you heard the name Sakura Haruno somewhere? Is it an important supporting role? I can't remember.....

"Next, Kiba Inuzuka."

Naruto perked up a little and looked over; a spiky-headed boy was standing on the podium, his face painted with oil paint in the shape of a dog's tooth, and there was a small white dog on his head... Huh? Where's Akamaru?

Kiba had already spoken: "I'm Kiba Inuzuka. I like dogs. My dream is to be a Hokage and let everyone have dogs!"

Naruto watched the spirited boy get off the stage and return to his seat. He walked with confidence, but he didn't notice where Akamaru was.

Is he not yet born? Possibly, It seems that wanting to pet the dog is out of the question, so let's think about a way to pet my fox, but he will be angry if I try.

"Next, Sasuke Uchiha."

As soon as Sasuke came to the stage, it caused a little riot among the girls in the class. This guy was good-looking & arrogant.

' hmm, the young master vibes ' Naruto thought while looking at Sasuke.

"My name is Sasuke Uchiha. My hobby is training and becoming stronger, and my dream is to be as good as my brother." After speaking, he glanced at Naruto intentionally or unintentionally.

Naruto pondered, does this kid think he can do it again? Why does he never learn?

"Next, Naruto Uzumaki."

"I'm Naruto Uzumaki. I like many things. My dream is... world peace."

Naruto didn't know what to say. He wanted to say he wanted to protect the people he valued, but he felt it was too embarrassing.

A few of the girls said that Naruto was handsome, but more said he wasn't as handsome as Sasuke. It seems that the girls in Konoha prefer Sasuke's cold and arrogant style.

It's no wonder that in some romance dramas, so many people like to watch the male protagonist with a straight face every day, what were they called..kdrama, Naruto was not jealous...

After observing the classmates, Naruto tried his best to remember their names. Although they were all just strangers, they were still his classmates.

The bored Naruto looked at the class schedule and found that the content to be learned was quite rich, including Ninja World Common Language, Ninja World History, Ninja World Geography, Basic Arithmetic, Basic Ninjutsu and Taijutsu classes, etc.

It feels like listening in class or not is about the same, and why is there no theory class on the Will of Fire? Should he skip class? Forget it, if he skipped class and went home, he might get beaten up, so let's chat with the fox spirit and bring that book on Sealing Techniques tomorrow.

****

When Naruto finished telling the fox a chapter of *berserk*, the class's self-introductions were over.

Iruka started to teach the first lesson, the foundation of ninjas using ninjutsu - chakra.

"Chakra is derived from 130 trillion cells in the human body... It is the basis for ninjas to use various ninjutsu... Bala..bala..."

"And refining chakra requires... Bala..bala..."

Naruto tried according to what Iruka said. He felt that it was not as easy to use as what his mother taught him. Maybe his mother taught him her special skills.

From the looks of these children, it seems that they are learning smoothly. It is not difficult for people in this world to refine chakra.

As for the seals that Iruka talked about later, Naruto said that he learned them in his previous life. He can even perform Chidori, Fireball, and even water dragon bombs with 44 seals...

It's a pity that Naruto can't release any of them right now. If he knew the order of the seals, he could release ninjutsu, but then the copying ability of the Sharingan would become a joke. There must be some coordination skills involved.

For Naruto, the morning class was boring. If he hadn't been accompanied by the fox spirit, he would have fallen asleep long ago.

When he heard the word "end of class," it meant it was time for lunch. Naruto took out his bento and naturally sat beside Sasuke.

"What are you doing here?" Sasuke was vigilant. For some reason, he always felt that Naruto wanted to make fun of him.

"I'll see what Aunt Mikoto has cooked." Naruto smiled, hinting that he wanted to eat.

"Hmph." Sasuke opened the lunch box.

"Wow, isn't this my favourite fried shrimp!" Naruto rudely took one and took a big bite. "Delicious!"

"You bastard! This is my bento!"

"Don't be so disrespectful. It's not a big deal; you can eat my meat balls." Naruto gave Sasuke a ball and then took a shrimp.

'Aunt Mikoto's cooking is really good. As expected of a woman who has raised two children' Naruto thought happily.

After several years, Sasuke still couldn't adapt to Naruto's shameless appearance. This guy seemed to conflict with the etiquette he had learned in every move.

A big family like Uchiha still has some rigid etiquette. Although it is not as serious as the Hyuga, it is not as loose as Naruto.

Every time Naruto went to grab a meal, Sasuke felt that his peaceful dining table was disturbed by Naruto, and this guy had very similar tastes to himself, always grabbing the dishes he liked.

Eating at the same table with him is like fighting a war. If it wasn't for my brother who often served me dishes... Hmph, as expected, my brother is the best. For a creature like Naruto, eating this 10000 times won't be enough.

The lunch was enjoyed by the host and guests, probably. Naruto wiped his mouth and put away the bento box: "Thank you for your hospitality, Sasuke!"

After speaking, he patted Sasuke on the back.

"Cough, cough, cough!" Before Sasuke could swallow his last mouthful of food, Naruto nearly choked him on food.

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

"Ah, sorry, I wasn't paying attention!" Naruto shouted as he sprinted away.

"Crack!" Sasuke snapped his chopsticks in frustration, gritted his teeth, and yelled, "Uzumaki! When I catch you!"

Naruto ran so fast that he couldn't be caught, deciding to avoid the fight for now. He realized he was at fault and couldn't believe he was getting more and more naive, arguing with a six-year-old.

In the afternoon, the class was a taijutsu session. Iruka-sensei explained, "You will all be ninjas in the future, so let's use your strength to get to know each other."

"The first group for training: Sasuke Uchiha vs. Naruto Uzumaki!"

Sasuke stepped forward, clenching his fists tightly and glaring at Naruto.

Naruto smirked, "Hey, don't be angry. Didn't I apologize?"

Sasuke gritted his teeth, "Stop babbling! I'm going to beat you today!"

"The battle begins! Both sides, form the Seal of Confrontation!" Iruka-sensei announced, making sure everyone paid attention.

Naruto thought Iruka-sensei could have said a few more things like:

1. Don't be impatient!
2. Never miss any important details!
3. The referee must always be fair!

Naruto and Sasuke formed the Seal of Confrontation instinctively. They had done this many times before.

Sasuke noticed Naruto seemed distracted. He couldn't understand why Naruto always had so many random and irrelevant thoughts.

Naruto's inattentive attitude at the beginning of the battle was irritating. Even though Sasuke was used to it, it still bothered him.

Sasuke charged forward, aiming a punch at Naruto's face. He wanted to do this for a long time.

Naruto blocked the punch with his forearm and countered by swinging his other hand at Sasuke's face. Naruto had been annoyed with Sasuke's handsome face for quite a while.

Sasuke jumped back. There was no chakra-enhanced strike; it wasn't the Chidori.

The first round was just a warm-up, testing if the opponent's strength and speed had improved. As expected, both had progressed, and neither had slacked off.

They moved in again, their fists and palms clashing. It was hard to tell who had the upper hand, but Sasuke knew he was at a disadvantage.

Naruto had tough skin and strong endurance. Once Sasuke's strength waned, Naruto would overpower him.

They were very familiar with each other's moves. Sasuke knew Naruto's next move, so he dodged and swept his leg.

Naruto jumped to avoid the sweep. Sasuke took the opportunity to kick sideways, but Naruto caught his calf and threw him to the ground.

Naruto figured this move wouldn't be very effective. Sasuke would probably pull off some acrobatic escape.

Sure enough, Sasuke used his hand to flip mid-air, landing gracefully and drawing cheers from the onlookers.

'Showing off again, huh' Naruto thought, rushing over and twisting into a sweeping kick.

"The Secret Taijutsu of the Blue Beast: leaf Whirlwind!"

Sasuke dodged the initial kick aimed at his head, but Naruto continued his spin, sweeping Sasuke's legs out from under him.

"Whoa!" Sasuke lost his balance and fell. Naruto swiftly pinned him down, ready to strike.

"The winner is Naruto Uzumaki! Form the Seal of Reconciliation!" Iruka-sensei announced, saving Sasuke from further embarrassment.

Iruka-sensei was impressed. These two, based on their physical prowess alone, were already at a genin level. It was no surprise, given their heritage.

Naruto got off Sasuke and extended two fingers.

"Humph!" Sasuke grudgingly hooked Naruto's fingers with his own, completing the seal.

A group of girls nearby called out to Sasuke:

"Ah, what a pity, Sasuke-kun lost!"

"Yeah, but Sasuke was so cool!"

"But Naruto was awesome too."

"Sasuke is still cooler!"

"Hehe, don't you think Sasuke and Naruto make a good match?"

"Are you gay?"

Hinata, however, quietly whispered to herself, "Naruto-kun is amazing..."

Naruto's mouth twitched as he overheard. Did something weird get mixed up in Sasuke's fan group?

"Hey, that move just now, what was it?" Sasuke asked awkwardly.

Naruto turned and saw Sasuke looking at him, clearly puzzled.

Naruto shrugged and explained, "That move is called leaf Whirlwind. The upper kick blocks the opponent's retreat. The actual attack is with the lower kick. It was taught to me by Might Gai, who calls himself Konoha's Proud Blue Beast."

Sasuke nodded. It was a strong move, but the name was strange. Naruto's friends were as unusual as he was.

"Next time, I'll beat you!"

"Sure," Naruto replied, having heard it many times before.

"Don't look down on me! I'm going to train with my brother, and I'll defeat you!" Sasuke exclaimed.

Naruto dismissed the idea, "Big Brother Itachi is so busy, how does he have time to teach you?"

Sasuke suddenly felt discouraged. Since his brother joined Anbu, he had become busier and spent less time with him.

Forget it; if that doesn't work, I'll find someone else to teach me. All this is to defeat Naruto, prove myself, surpass my brother, and make my father proud!

Naruto watched Sasuke's changing expressions, finding it amusing.

The other students' fights were less interesting, more like children flailing at each other. They barely knew a few moves.

Shino and Kiba seemed somewhat competent, but Sasuke could probably defeat them in three moves.

Choji and Shikamaru, who could have been promising, didn't end up fighting.

Choji was too kind-hearted, "Shikamaru is my friend, how can I fight my friend?"

Iruka-sensei explained, "This is just a training exercise, not a real battle. It's fine."

"But what if I hurt him?" Choji didn't want to fight.

"If you want to be a ninja, you will inevitably get hurt. The teacher is here to ensure safety."

"But... no, I don't want to fight Shikamaru." Choji insisted.

Shikamaru couldn't stand it anymore, "This is too troublesome, teacher. I concede."

"The two of you..." Iruka-sensei sighed. He had seen students afraid of getting hurt, but never ones who refused to fight for fear of hurting others. Even if they were kind, it was too much. Their families were fighting ninjas, not medics!

And Shikamaru, how could a child be lazier than his father.

Iruka-sensei was out of ideas. Next time, he would give them different opponents or find another way to solve this. Children's personalities were the hardest to change.

Naruto nudged Sasuke with his elbow, "Sasuke, what do you think?"

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

"Cowards" Sasuke frowned. How could someone who didn't even dare to take a fight be a ninja?

"Don't be so cold, Sasuke. Those two are good friends," Naruto said.

Sasuke was confused. One didn't dare to make a move, and the other conceded defeat. What's good about that?

"Both of them are thinking of each other. One is afraid the other will get injured and doesn't take action, and the other is afraid the other will be embarrassed by the teacher and admit defeat," Naruto explained.

"So what?" Sasuke asked.

"Of course, I want to get to know them. What's wrong with having more friends?" Naruto said, genuinely liking Shikamaru and Choji.

In the original series, the two didn't show any disgust towards Naruto like the others. They even formed a group of four with Naruto and Kiba to skip class together.

Shikamaru once asked his father, Shikaku, "Why do people in the village hate Naruto?"

Shikaku replied, "What do you think of him?"

Shikamaru answered, "I don't hate him"

Shikaku then said, "Do what you think is right."

Choji once nearly fought for Naruto. Even though these events hadn't happened yet, Naruto still felt a natural affection for them. So, he wanted to get to know them better.

"Shikamaru and Choji, right? Hello!" Naruto pulled Sasuke, who wore a reluctant expression, over to Shikamaru and Choji, who had just left the field.

"I'm Naruto Uzumaki, and this guy is Sasuke Uchiha."

"I know you guys. You're amazing," Shikamaru said, noticing how almost all the girls' eyes followed the two of them. He sighed, thinking, 'What a drag, They seem like very troublesome guys'

Shikamaru finally mustered a bit of energy and continued, "So, what's up?"

Choji, who had been silent, stepped forward to half-block Shikamaru, worried that the two were there to cause trouble.

Naruto said calmly, "It's nothing. I just think you two are pretty cool, so I wanted to get to know you."

At this, Choji, who wasn't particularly chubby yet, looked a bit stunned. He had always felt a bit inferior because of his plumpness and other children disliked him for being clumsy and didn't like to play with him.

Only Shikamaru didn't laugh at him for this, so Choji only had Shikamaru as a friend. Now that someone said he was not bad, Choji was a little overjoyed.

"Don't you think I'm... Fat?" Choji asked anxiously.

"Does that have anything to do with making friends?" Naruto replied nonchalantly. What's wrong with being chubby? Naruto had a few chubby classmates in his previous life, who were mild-mannered and had good temperaments, Being around them was fun.

"Choji, you are also a member of the Akimichi clan; I've always believed that the Akimichi clan's strength allows them to make their companions feel safer, Right, Sasuke?" Naruto said truthfully and then attempted to involve Sasuke.

Sasuke nodded. He had heard of the Akimichi clan. He didn't care about Choji's stature, as long as he was strong enough.

Shikamaru was happy for Choji. If he could make new friends, Choji would be happy. Shikamaru turned his head, and sure enough, Choji was moved to the point of tears, sniffing hard.

"Thank you! I'm so happy," Choji said.

Naruto didn't expect Choji's reaction to be so strong. He waved his hand and said, "It's okay. Why don't I invite you to eat Ichiraku Ramen tomorrow at noon? It's delicious."

Sasuke found his blind spot. "Why not after school?"

"Because today is the first day of school. My mother told me to come home early," Naruto sighed and patted Sasuke on the shoulder. "The consequences of disobedience, Sasuke, you understand."

Sasuke shuddered at the thought of a terrifying figure with flowing red hair and looked at Naruto with more sympathy. 'I'm lucky my mom is gentle through, But I heard from my mother that she wanted me to recognize Aunt Kushina as my trainer. No way... In all fairness, Aunt Kushina used to be pretty good, cheerful and liked to laugh, praising me for being cute every time. But once, I made her angry, and she strangled me by the neck and drilled her fists on the top of my head.'

When Shikamaru heard Naruto's words and saw Sasuke's reaction, he roughly understood something. "Sure enough, moms are troublesome creatures."

Thinking that when he got home, his mother would ask about his school situation. After he made friends, his mother would brag about how well she had done and then start to nag if he was listless again.

After three minutes, she would drag his father, who was watching the fun, into it, saying that no one in the Nara family could be saved.

Fortunately, their son was still young and could be corrected quickly. His father would probably try to defend a bit and then lose the battle, secretly using ninjutsu to plug his ears, giving himself a headache until dinner was over.

"Troublesome. Maybe I should try to learn ninjutsu, at least enough to sneak in earplugs," Shikamaru thought.

And Choji's mind was full of thoughts about the ramen for lunch tomorrow. Naruto's treat...

At the end of the afternoon class, the four little friends walked out of the school together. Choji and Shikamaru were led away by their parents.

Choji happily waved goodbye to Naruto and Sasuke, while Shikamaru waved with a lazy attitude.

Naruto noticed that Hinata went back with Neji, and when Neji said something with a smile, Hinata replied in a low voice. It seemed they had a good relationship.

Sasuke called out to his brother with a look of surprise, ran over, and hugged Itachi's thigh. Well, because of the height difference, Sasuke could only hug his thigh. Itachi smiled and said hello to Naruto, then led Sasuke away.

Naruto went back with Kimimaro. "I also have a family now."

Naruto, who went to school for the first day, had to talk about today's experience when he got home.

Sasuke did the same, complaining to Itachi with a frustrated face, saying that he had lost to Naruto again and wanted to learn ninjutsu from his brother.

Choji told his father, Choza, that he had made two new friends and happily ate two more bowls of rice. Choza was also happy for his son, so he served him another bowl.

As for Shikamaru's house, it was similar to what Shikamaru had guessed. Shikaku was soon discovered by his wife after putting on the earplugs and was scolded for half an hour.

Shikamaru was thinking about how he would wear earplugs in the future.

Hinata finished her evening training, coaxed Hanabi to sleep, and lay tiredly in her bed. Thinking that she would see Naruto again tomorrow, she smiled sweetly and fell asleep.

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

***

The next day, Naruto went to school with Kimimaro, carrying a book of sealing techniques. When he arrived in the classroom, he greeted Hinata with a warm smile and then immediately dived into his book.

It was typical of Naruto to focus intensely on his training, and Hinata admired his dedication, believing it was the secret behind his growing strength.

Naruto's skill with sealing techniques had improved significantly. He could now use storage scrolls proficiently, meaning he wouldn't need to carry a backpack in the future. This is no small feat for a young ninja.

Though storage scrolls were expensive, Naruto used them freely. It wasn't because his family was wealthy, it was because Kushina knew how to make them, and she made them exceptionally well. Most of the high-quality storage scrolls in the ninja shop came from Kushina's skilled hands.

In recent years, while taking care of Naruto, Kushina had made many scrolls out of boredom. Selling them turned out to be just as profitable as completing missions.

However, the demand for these scrolls wasn't very high, and the market was very saturated. Not every ninja used scrolls as extensively as Tenten, who treated them almost as disposable. Any extra scrolls at home could be traded with any wealthy shinobi.

At noon, Naruto invited Sasuke, Shikamaru, and Choji to eat at Ichiraku Ramen. The council of boys sat in a row, eagerly anticipating their meals:

- Naruto had a bowl of tonkatsu ramen.
- Choji had a bowl of tonkotsu ramen.
- Sasuke had a bowl of Miso Chashu Pork ramen.
- Choji had a bowl of Miso Chashu Pork ramen.
- Shikamaru had a bowl of vegetable ramen.
- Choji had a bowl of vegetable ramen.
- Choji had a bowl of miso ramen.
- Choji had a bowl of miso ramen.

The scene was almost comical, reminiscent of the Sage of Six Paths distributing chakra to the tailed beasts. Shikamaru and Naruto had anticipated Choji's appetite, but Sasuke was left wide-eyed, knowing Choji had a big appetite but not realizing it was this extreme.

Fortunately, Naruto had enough pocket money. When he asked for funds for the dinner party, Kushina, knowing there would be a member of the Akimichi clan, had generously added extra to the amount.

After finishing their meals, Choji rubbed his small stomach and sighed contentedly, "That was delicious! Thanks for the ramen, Naruto. Next time, I'll treat you to a barbecue. I know a great place."

"Okay," Naruto agreed cheerfully.

The four friends returned to school and went their separate ways. Before Naruto opened his book, he noticed a little girl with pale yellow hair, Ino, nervously approaching him.

"Um... Naruto, are you free?" she asked timidly.

Naruto put down his book and replied, "Ino? What's up?"

"Do you... have a good relationship with Sasuke?"

"It's okay," Naruto nodded, remembering the bond they had formed from playing together as kids. Sasuke might not remember, but Naruto cherished those memories.

"Then do you know what kind of girl Sasuke likes?"

So that was it. Naruto almost thought she was interested in him. He pondered whether Sasuke liked girls. Sasuke's favourite person was undoubtedly his brother, followed by his parents, then Naruto, Shikamaru, Choji, and lastly, everyone else.

Is it normal for a six-year-old girl to care about this? Are girls in this world too horny?

Naruto decided to be honest: "Sasuke is interested in people stronger than him. Even if they aren't as strong as him, they should at least have some special skills."

Ino's face fell in disappointment. "But Sasuke is so strong; it's impossible to surpass him. Isn't there anything else, like hairstyle or personality?"

"If I had to say, he probably likes someone good at housework, has long hair, and a gentle smile," Naruto said, describing Sasuke's mother, Mikoto.

"Got it, thanks, Naruto!" She was happy because she could now win Sasuke's favour. She planned to invite Naruto for dinner in the future.

"Thank you, Naruto!" multiple voices chimed in. Ino's smile froze as she turned and saw a group of girls surrounding her and Naruto. The information has been leaked!

"Why is this happening!? You guys!" The girls started arguing. Naruto wasn't interested, these girls were not his type.

'they don't have a sense of insecurity like me I think but they are just children right now'

Naruto continued studying his sealing techniques. Little did he know, gossip about Sasuke's ideal type would spread that day, causing rifts among friends and leading almost every girl in the class to grow her hair long.

From spring to autumn, as the girls' hair grew more than ten centimetres, a year passed.

During this year, Sasuke learned the Fireball jutsu. Confidently showing off a large fireball, he was surprised when Naruto, who had secretly learned a water jutsu from Kushina, countered with a water stream, drenching Sasuke and chilling him to the bone. Sasuke was disheartened and took days to recover before asking his brother to teach him new ninjutsu.

Naruto had finished reading "Introduction to Sealing Techniques," and Kushina commented that Naruto's current level was enough for an internship in the sealing class. She then gave him "Mastering Sealing Techniques."

Regarding water ninjutsu, Naruto discovered he had dual water and wind chakra natures, likely inherited from his parents. Deciding to learn water techniques first, Naruto looked up to the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju.

It's not that Naruto didn't want to learn the Rasengan, his chakra control wasn't advanced enough yet. Tree climbing and water walking were next on his list.

The Flying Raijin was also on hold until he graduated from the Ninja Academy. The King Kong Blockade technique is still challenging for a seven-year-old Naruto.

So, Naruto focused on water ninjutsu for now; not only could it be used to counter Sasuke's fire techniques, but it could also be used in blocking enemies.

However, after teaching him Water Release: Water Stream, Kushina waited nearly a month to teach Water Release: Water Wall, claiming Naruto needed practice, But Naruto sensed she was hiding something.

What Naruto didn't know was this:

In the Sarutobi household, Kushina was learning water techniques from the Third Hokage.

"What's with this technique?" Kushina looked frustrated.

The Third Hokage explained, "There are two types of water walls: one for broad defence and one that covers all around, including above your head"

"Ah, I see!"

"Why the sudden interest in water ninjutsu, Kushina? Ninjutsu isn't your strong suit."

"Naruto asked me to teach him. He rarely asks for anything besides sealing techniques. Now he's interested in water ninjutsu, so I want to teach him myself!"

"You can send Naruto to me directly."

"No, it's about my pride as a mother! Please continue teaching me!" Kushina resembled a parent studying alongside their child for exams.

"Alright," the Third Hokage agreed. He enjoyed teaching, and with nothing else to do besides spending time with his grandson, he was happy to help.

"Next, let's learn the Water Dragon Jutsu!"

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

Unlike Kushina, who is full of energy, several children in the Uchiha family seem to have suffered a lot recently.

Things started with the graduation ceremony of the ninja school.

This year is the 55th year of Konoha. Uchiha Itachi has just turned 12 years old, and most students should graduate at this age.

However, Itachi, a genius of the Uchiha family, went to the battlefield at the age of 5, graduated at the age of 7, and also worked in Anbu for a year.

But his three friends of the same age don't have his talent. Although they are stronger than ordinary students, that's all.

It's nothing if it's just that, after all, not everyone is a genius. As usual, as long as they graduate successfully, they can join the Konoha Police Force, the proud department of the Uchiha clan.

The Konoha Police Force was established by the second Hokage, Senju Tobirama, and its members are all from the Uchiha clan, responsible for maintaining the security of the village.

Of course, this not only expressed the second Hokage's trust in Uchiha but also facilitated observation of Uchiha's every move. Mainly, Madara Uchiha betrayed Konoha and brought a large husky to demolish the village. The impact was too great, and Tobirama had to guard against it.

But Tobirama didn't blindly reject Uchiha, he also cultivated a ninja-like Uchiha Kagami, who was very good and close to the village.

After Tobirama died, the senior Konoha leaders, led by the third Hokage and Danzo, did not fully understand Tobirama's intentions and blindly suppressed the Uchiha family.

Under the blind operations of some people (there should be no objection to throwing this blame on Danzo), there were differences between the Uchiha clan and Konoha.

At the same time, voices within the Uchiha clan calling for a coup loudly emerged, causing Uchiha Fugaku, the clan head, a great deal of headaches

It was not until the Fourth Hokage, Minato Namikaze, took control in recent years that the situation improved. Everyone knows that the Fourth Hokage once had a disciple from the Uchiha clan who died heroically in the war.

Of course, they didn't know that the "hero" Obito, who was presumed dead, was alive, and Minato was worried about how to find him.

****

These were not the concerns of the three Uchiha friends who had just graduated. They just wanted to join the Konoha police force.

However, the day before they were about to graduate, they were called by the clan head Fugaku.

Fugaku sat on his knees in his living room, looked at the three somewhat restrained young people in front of him, and said with a serious face, "Gen, daiki, Jiro, you will graduate soon."

Uchiha Gen, Uchiha Daiki, and Uchiha Jiro replied in unison, "Yes, Patriarch!"

"Originally, I should have arranged for you to join the police force, but the plan has changed."

The three of them were a little flustered. They had been looking forward to that day for a long time. The police force is the proud department of the Uchiha clan and the dream of every child, Could it be that their grades were so poor that the clan head was disappointed?

"Don't be nervous, it's not because of your lack of ability but because of other arrangements for you." Fugaku briefly talked about Uchiha's situation and continued, "Over the years, I have had many exchanges with the Fourth Hokage, and we have been working hard for Uchiha to integrate into Konoha smoothly"

"Now Shisui has joined the Shadow Guards, and Fourth Hokage holds him in very high regard. According to Shisui, the Fourth Hokage once instructed him on the Body Flicker Technique, almost treating the members of the Shadow Guards as his students."

"And Itachi has already joined Anbu, and the Fourth Hokage deliberately asked his disciple Kakashi Hatake to lead him for a while."

"But just the two of them are not enough. I also hope you can work hard for it."

The three of them were both excited and apprehensive. They didn't expect the patriarch to entrust such an important matter to them. Did he want them to join Anbu? Or even... the Shadow Guard?

Gen dared to ask, "So, what do we need to do?"

Fugaku said, "I want you to be like ordinary ninjas. After graduation, you will form a team of three, led by a Jonin, to perform tasks, not only you but also future graduates of the clan will do the same, including my son Sasuke."

The three of them silently digested Fugaku's words. Their long-standing dream was shattered by the words of the clan head.

But at the same time, the clan head seemed to have high hopes for them, otherwise, he would not have explained so much. This feeling made them a little overwhelmed.

"Anyway, gather on time tomorrow, and the village will appoint a very good Jonin as your leader. In the future, follow his instructions and don't bring shame to the glory of the Uchiha clan!"

"Yes!"x3

The three responded reflexively, then left in a daze.

****

At 5:30 the next morning, the three of them arrived at the gate of Konoha. This was the location the head teacher had told them. To give the teacher a good impression, they arrived half an hour early.

The patriarch said that the leading teacher is an excellent Jonin, so he would be very serious, as majestic and powerful as the clan head. They must not be late.

The three of them stood in place and waited, but 20 minutes later, the teacher hadn't come yet. It was still too early. Except for the two guards at the gate, there was no one around, except for an occasional green-clad figure running in various strange postures.

At six o'clock, when the three of them were getting a little impatient, the green-clad figure, who had passed by for the third time, stopped in front of them, With teeth seeming to flicker with a strange light, he raised a thumb and said:

"Yo! The three young men, are you Gen, Daiki, and Jiro?"

The three of them were stunned for a moment. They had a bad feeling and replied, "Yes. May we ask who you are?"

"Good question!" Gai struck a few self-assured poses and said, "I am Konoha's Proud Green Beast... Might Gai!
From now on, I will be the leader of Team 4. Let's shed the sweat of our youth together!"

The mouths of the three of them dropped open, almost petrified on the spot. No matter how you look at this teacher, he doesn't seem normal!

Is he the "very excellent Jonin" that the clan head mentioned? Have we misunderstood what excellence means? And what is Konoha's beast? I think you are Konoha's White Fang! This tooth is going to blind our Sharingan that we haven't even awakened yet!

"Uh...Hello, teacher..." the three poor children replied mechanically. First, they were unable to join the police force, and then they were disillusioned with the excellent Jonin. Their worldview was a bit shattered, and their eyes were faintly tearing up.

"Oh~~~~~~" Gai shed tears of excitement and hugged his three students, "I became a teacher! I must do my best! Then, Gen! Daiki! Jiro! Let's face the rising sun and have a hot-blooded morning run! This is youth!"

***

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

Since then, three new figures could be seen running against the rising sun on the streets of Konoha.

Gai, leading his disciples for the first time, was thrilled. He noticed that the three children worked incredibly hard, diligently completing any training task—even if they ended up exhausted and unconscious.

Gen, Daiki, and Jiro were struggling internally. This wasn't what they had envisioned, but they had to obey the teacher's arrangement as per the patriarch's orders.

They believed that failing to meet the training goals would embarrass the Uchiha clan, so they often encouraged each other in secret:

Gen: "Don't let the teacher underestimate Uchiha!"

Daiki: "For the glory of Uchiha!"

Jiro: "Me too!"

Gen: "I am a ninja of Uchiha!"

Daiki: "I can persevere!"

Jiro: "Me too!"

****

With unyielding belief, the three gritted their teeth and completed the nearly impossible physical training each day, earning Gai's admiration.

Then, Gai made a significant decision:

"This outfit has excellent breathability & moisture retention & pursues the perfect shape & beautiful lines for easy movement. When you wear it, you will immediately feel the difference and become addicted. This is the proud secret of Konoha's Blue Beast!"

Gai took out three green jumpsuits and gave a thumbs up, his white teeth gleaming. "This is a gift from me as your teacher. Go ahead and change into them!"

Gen: (◉ _ ◉)

Daiki: (◉ _ ◉)

Jiro: (◉ _ ◉)

They took the clothes in a daze. They had become accustomed to obeying Gai's orders, whether it was running against the rising sun, running upside down against the sunset, or doing push-ups in the wind and rain...

So, when Gai handed out the green jumpsuits, they took them reflexively. But wearing them... was so embarrassing.

Wouldn't it be disobedient if they didn't change? These slightly rigid teenagers, determined to uphold Uchiha's glory, took Gai's warm advice as an order to follow.

In the end, four figures in green jumpsuits, one large and three small, shouted youthful slogans while running through the streets and alleys of Konoha. This spectacle caught the attention of the villagers.

It also caught the eyes of Naruto, Sasuke, Shikamaru, and Choji. The four of them were out for dinner, staring blankly at the four odd figures running by.

Naruto tugged at Sasuke's clothes and asked, "Sasuke, why do those people shouting 'youth' look familiar to me?"

Sasuke, unsure, said, "Those three seem to be from the Uchiha clan... and the same age as my brother?"

Shikamaru and Choji looked at Sasuke strangely, "Everyone in the Uchiha family is like this?"

"That's not it!" Sasuke was annoyed. "What happened to these people? Although we didn't know them well, they weren't like this before, right? Are they Uchiha?"

Naruto knew Gai. He guessed the three boys were from the Uchiha clan, hence his vague recognition. But Gai shouldn't have other students besides Lee and the others, right? Is this some kind of Butterfly Effect?

Most other passersby didn't recognize the three children, but Gai was a well-known figure. The villagers speculated about whose child was so unlucky to end up like this at such a young age.

****

Not to mention the reactions of passersby, Gai was in a very good mood. When the Fourth Hokage let him lead the team, he was a little worried about whether he would be a good teacher. He didn't expect it to go so smoothly, and as expected, the youth did not let him down.

Gai secretly made up his mind to teach these three lovely disciples with all his heart!

As for Gen, Daiki, and Jiro, when they put on the jumpsuits, they felt like something was going to leave them...

Uchiha Gen came home that night in despair.

What the heck have I done today? Why did things turn out like this? I graduated from the ninja school smoothly and joined the ninja team. Even the overloaded training a few days ago, I gritted my teeth and endured it, but why did I put on those shameful jumpsuits today?

And I followed Mr. Gai across the streets and alleys of Konoha! The glory of the Uchiha clan has been tarnished by me, I am the sinner of the Uchiha clan...

Aaaaaaa... even the pain in my eyes can't surpass the pain in my heart! Huh? Eyes?

Gen picked up a mirror and saw that his eyes were red, and there was a tomoe around the pupil in each of his left and right eyes. This is... the Sharingan!?

Gen: ???

…

The next morning, Gen came to the meeting place with dark circles under his eyes and saw his two teammates, who also had dark circles under their eyes.

"You are...?" *3

"I've awakened my Sharingan." *3

In an instant, the three of them, with their Sharingan activated, looked at each other. The three teenagers in green tights, staring at each other with their Sharingan, created a very strange scene.

Finally, Gen was the first to speak, "Last night, I felt like I had become a disgrace to Uchiha, and I felt very guilty inside..."

Daiki continued, "I also felt like I had betrayed the trust of the patriarch and didn't deserve the name of Uchiha."

Jiro: "Me too."

"Could it be?" An incredulous expression appeared on Gen's face as he pulled at his extremely elastic collar and said in shock, "Is this all part of the patriarch's plan?"

Daiki echoed, "That's why the patriarch said we should all obey Teacher Gai's orders! And the patriarch said our leading teacher is an excellent Jonin! The patriarch must have known that Teacher Gai could help us awaken our Sharingan!"

The more Daiki spoke, the more reasonable it seemed: "I heard that Mr. Gai's best friend is Kakashi, who has the Sharingan. So, Mr. Gai must understand the Sharingan well and use this method to stimulate us!"

Jiro: "I think so too!"

The three looked at each other: "As expected of the patriarch, as expected of Mr. Gai!"

"Ah!" Fugaku, who had just watched his son leave, sneezed at the same time as Gai, who was leaping to the meeting point.

"Youth!"

At this moment, Gen, Daiki, and Jiro's admiration for Fugaku and Gai was like an endless ocean.

"I've decided!" Gen smacked the palm of his left hand with his right hand and said, "I'm going to have a haircut like Teacher Gai's."

Daiki touched his long hair and nodded firmly: "Okay, I agree!"

Jiro: "Me too!"

As for the shame and anger from yesterday, or the hard work from the past, what did the three say? With their newly awakened Sharingan, it was as if nothing had happened.

****

"Yo, my lovely disciples, you guys are extraordinarily shining today!" Gai looked at the three freshly shorn heads, stretched out his thumb, and showed his big white teeth.

"Gai Sensei, we are ready! Let's start today's youth practice!"

The three disciples imitated Gai, stretching out their thumbs and showing the same smile.

"Oh~~~~~~" Gai burst into tears, "This is youth! Let's go!"

"Oh!" x3

A new day had begun...

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

The Uchiha family had three more 12-year-old prodigies who had awakened their Sharingan, but Fugaku couldn't bring himself to smile. 'This is not what I wanted! How did this happen so fast? I know the Sharingan requires emotional stimulation to awaken but to this extent?'

Fugaku pinched the bridge of his nose, feeling that his own Mangekyō Sharingan was on the verge of losing control. 'Is it too late to set things right now?'

While he was brooding, a pair of soft hands pressed against his temples, gently massaging them.

"Are you troubled by something?" Mikoto asked softly.

"Ah, it's about Gen, Daiki, and Jiro. These three children are very talented, but..."

Mikoto chuckled softly. "Isn't that a good thing? They're much more energetic than before."

'Is this just a matter of perspective?' Fugaku sighed and said, "Maybe it is a good thing."

---

"Of course, it's a good thing!" Minato beamed. Recently, Gai, Gen, Daiki, and Jiro had completed over a dozen D-rank missions, ranging from catching cats and dogs to weeding, farming, and even handling heavy lifting.

Clients couldn't praise them enough, especially for physical tasks. After each enthusiastic shout of "youth," they outperformed expectations, Hiring such diligent ninjas is worth every penny.

Moreover, these missions have indirectly helped many residents. Knowing that these three children are from the Uchiha clan has gradually improved the clan's reputation. People are no longer excessively fearful when they see the police force.

Under Fugaku's leadership, the police force's law enforcement attitude has also been changing.

Only a few old and stubborn members of the Uchiha still try to cause trouble, but they are manageable and can't stir up much trouble.

Minato enjoyed sharing Gen, Daiki, and Jiro's amusing stories at dinner, smiling as he did so. Naruto realized these green-clad Uchiha kids were a result of his father's cooperation with Sasuke's father. Naruto couldn't quite evaluate it, but he thought Sasuke's family might be saved.

That evening, Naruto lay on his bed, entered his sealed space, and finished a chapter of *Berserk* to the fox spirit.

The relationship between him and Kurama had improved significantly. Now Naruto could come in, sit in front of Kurama, talk, and even pat Kurama's paws when he was happy. Every time Naruto sang, Kurama would give a grudging compliment:

"Brat, stop!"

"Oh," Naruto hurriedly exited the space.

Kurama glared at him. The stories Naruto told were tolerable for killing boredom, but he often spoke in strange languages Kurama didn't understand, which frustrated the fox.

Naruto had grown accustomed to interacting with Kurama. When he told stories, it was like coaxing a child, when he sang, it was like annoying a pet cat.

"Big fox, are you still arguing with my mother every day?" Naruto knew Kurama could share memories and communicate with Kushina's fox spirit.

"So what? That detestable woman!"

"Don't speak ill of my mother! Just talk to her like you do with me. Is it so hard to communicate properly?"

"Hmph! Do you want to argue too?"

"I don't want to, but you can at least try to be more friendly."

Kurama lay down heavily, grumbling to himself.

Naruto didn't bother trying to persuade them. Maybe their arguments were just their way of communicating. It was understandable for a woman like his mother and Kurama to argue with each other.

---

Time flew by, in the blink of an eye, two years passed swiftly.

Back then, Kimimaro was a melancholy youth pondering the meaning of life. Five years later, he had become a warm-hearted young man despite his cold demeanour.

His popularity in the class was even more exaggerated than Sasuke's. When Kimimaro smiled, it was like a celebrity charming his fans.

Unfortunately, his smiles were mostly reserved for his "little brother" Naruto, possibly due to his brotherly protective instincts developed in Konoha.

Because of this, Naruto received numerous snacks and gifts meant for Kimimaro from his female classmates, often accompanied by love letters.

Naruto never refused them and shared the snacks with his always-hungry friend, Choji, who envied Naruto's luck.

However, these days were coming to an end, as Kimimaro had graduated.

In the 57th year of Konoha, Kimimaro, at 12 years old, graduated at the usual age. In terms of strength, Kimimaro could handle three to five Irukas, the only thing he lacked was experience.

Minato insisted Kimimaro graduate like a regular student, and it proved to be a wise decision. Over five years, Kimimaro transformed from a lost weapon of war into a beloved young man.

****

"Team assignment? I plan to place Kimimaro in Team 4."

At the dinner table, Minato answered Naruto's question with a smile.

"Team 4?" Naruto felt it sounded familiar.

"It's the current team of Gai, Gen, Daiki, and Jiro."

"Oh, on Gai's team," Naruto realized, then asked, "But aren't there already four members in that team?"

Kushina and Kimimaro looked at Minato, sharing the same question, while Kakashi continued eating nonchalantly.

Even though Kakashi was an adult, he often joined Naruto's family for dinner when he wasn't on a mission. Despite Kushina urging him to find a girlfriend, he hadn't made much progress.

Naruto often wondered if his mother should pair Kakashi with Kurenai Yuhi but learned Asuma had recently returned to the village and often spent time with Kurenai.

So Naruto brainstormed again. Uzuki Yugao seemed like a good match, although she had a childhood sweetheart, Hayate Gekkou, who might not survive his illness, so she was a candidate. Anko Mitarashi was another option, though she had a rumoured difficult personality.

Alternatively, Kakashi could be paired with Terumi Mei from the Hidden Mist Village. Finally, as a last resort, Jiraiya could take Kakashi to a village renowned for its eligible women...

Back to the topic, Minato explained that in two years, he wanted Gai to lead a new team. Although Team 4 was good, it lacked a calm and wise leader, also Kimimaro could fill that role after training.

Naruto thought his dad's explanation was too polite. To put it bluntly, the four of them were all reckless, and they needed someone with a brain.

The next day, Naruto went to school as usual and found a new student in the class.

---

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

As soon as Naruto entered the classroom, he saw Kiba showing off Akamaru to everyone. Kiba held a small puppy, no bigger than an adult's palm.

The puppy was completely white except for some black fur on the back of its ears, giving it a cute appearance.

Naruto approached, feeling an urge to pet Akamaru. He didn't have much hope for petting Kurama, so petting someone else's dog would have to suffice.

"Kiba, can I pet Akamaru?" Naruto asked politely.

"Do you like dogs too, Naruto?" Kiba was thrilled. He was a straightforward person, and anyone who liked dogs was a friend.

Naruto nodded.

"I don't mind," Kiba said nonchalantly. "But Akamaru has to agree."

Akamaru barked happily and wagged his tail.

Without needing further encouragement, Naruto reached out and petted Akamaru, a foolish smile spreading across his face.

Sasuke, secretly observing, shuddered. He felt he had seen that smile before but couldn't remember where.

Kiba was surprised to see how much Akamaru liked Naruto. "I didn't expect Akamaru to like you so much. This is the first time you've met."

Naruto thought to himself, 'My affinity for animals must be strong, maybe because I'm a Jinchūriki.'

The time spent playing with Akamaru was short. Soon, the children returned to their seats, and Akamaru perched on Kiba's head.

Some students were surprised that Kiba wasn't reprimanded for bringing his pet to class. Not everyone understood the ninjutsu of the various clans.

For example, during the Chunin Exams in the original series, Naruto was amazed at how Kiba brought Akamaru on stage, and he made a fuss about the techniques used by Shino, Ino, and others.

It's not surprising that many people don't understand the significance of the ninja dogs of the Inuzuka clan. Of course, Naruto wasn't one of them.

Because of Akamaru, Naruto routinely played with the dog every day, gradually getting to know Kiba. Kiba naturally joined Naruto's small circle, adding one more person and one dog to their group.

Kiba occasionally brought along a friend with a very low presence, a strange person who always wore a hood and sunglasses, played with bugs, and was often interrupted by Kiba. This kid was Shino Aburame.

Since meeting Kiba, Naruto often sighed that the group of four from the original series had formed, though they never skipped class.

When Naruto returned to his senses, Iruka was engrossed in teaching. Today, the lesson was on camouflage, summarized as "An Actor."

This made sense. As a ninja, acting skills were essential. Otherwise, using the transformation technique and blowing your cover with a few words wouldn't work. This wasn't an action game, it was a life-and-death situation.

Naruto listened attentively, feeling his acting skills improving.

In the afternoon, during taijutsu class, Naruto defeated several opponents with ease, eventually facing Sasuke.

It was a spectacular taijutsu showdown. Iruka had forbidden Naruto's water jutsu and Sasuke's fire jutsu, as they were too powerful and could accidentally injure the spectators.

Yes, both sides had cheerleaders. Most girls supported Sasuke for his looks, while most boys supported Naruto, not wanting Sasuke to hog the spotlight. Naruto wondered why, despite inheriting his father's handsome looks and style, he didn't have many female fans-not that he wanted them.

Naruto absently finished the seal of opposition with Sasuke.

Seeing Naruto distracted, Sasuke didn't bother to warn him. Sasuke threw three kunai, then rushed forward.

Naruto dodged the kunai, but as he approached Sasuke, he heard two sharp dings behind him.

"Ah!" Amidst the gasps of the girls, the kunai Naruto dodged collided midair and flew back toward him.

'Has Sasuke already learned this trick?' Naruto was startled but quickly moved aside. Sasuke anticipated his move and landed a punch on Naruto's chest.

Naruto staggered back, rubbing his chest. "Impressive. It seems Itachi has been teaching you."

Sasuke knew Naruto recognized the technique as Itachi's but didn't respond.

Naruto then taught Sasuke a lesson, easily overpowering him. Sasuke wasn't too disappointed. He believed he would win once he awakened his Sharingan.

Naruto admired Sasuke's determination, always believing he could win next time.

'I should not slack off from my training.'

Sasuke's shuriken technique gave Naruto an idea: Should he learn it, too? It would be amazing to combine it with the Flying Thunder God jutsu in the future.

If he couldn't master it, he could consider learning the Shuriken Shadow Clone Jutsu. Minato had used a similar technique in battle, creating a field of kunai. Maybe Naruto could do the same.

Speaking of Shadow Clone Jutsu, it was time to learn it. It was one of the most frequently used jutsu in the entire series. He would ask about it tonight.

***

"Shadow clone?" At the dinner table, Minato looked at Naruto in surprise. "Why do you want to learn that?"

"It's practical for reconnaissance, sensing, and combining with other jutsu. It can also be used for learning and training. The Multi-Shadow Clone Jutsu can even be used for crowd tactics."

Naruto imagined creating a thousand clones in the future, each contributing to his strength and strategy.

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

"When the Shadow Clone Jutsu is cancelled, it indeed returns both memory and experience to the user," Minato explained solemnly to Naruto. "While it can double the effects of certain exercises, it also brings back the feeling of exhaustion. It must not be used indiscriminately!"

"And the Multi-Shadow Clone Jutsu is a forbidden jutsu," Kushina added. "It consumes a tremendous amount of chakra. If you use it recklessly, you could seriously harm yourself."

Despite these warnings, Naruto eagerly received the training method for the Shadow Clone Jutsu.

Minato and Kushina emphasized the side effects and cautioned him against its indiscriminate use.

Naruto, though aware of these dangers, remained captivated by the Shadow Clone Jutsu.

As a child, he dreamt of creating clones like the older Naruto, and now, inspired by the stories of the ninja world, he yearned to master this jutsu.

The idea of having one clone play games while another did homework seemed perfect to him.

Excitedly, Naruto studied the instructions and attempted the jutsu in front of his family.

"Shadow Clone Jutsu!" he declared, forming the hand seals.

However, nothing happened. Scratching his head in confusion, Naruto tried again, focusing his chakra more intently.

"Shadow Clone Jutsu!"

With a puff of smoke, an identical copy of Naruto appeared beside him. The clone turned to face him and saluted.

"Reporting for duty, Uzumaki Naruto 001!"

Naruto stared in surprise.

Kushina and Minato exchanged amused glances. Minato chuckled, "Well, the name is fitting. A shadow clone is indeed a one-off. It's impressive that you were successful in creating a clone on just your second attempt."

Naruto curiously circled the clone, feeling a mix of excitement and wonder, akin to his first visit to the zoo.

He reached out to poke the clone, finding the touch indistinguishable from his own body.

The clone, sharing Naruto's curiosity, mirrored his actions, poking and prodding as if confirming its existence.

When Naruto's prodding became excessive, the clone snapped, "Hey, that's enough! Is it that fun to poke yourself? It's indecent!"

Naruto froze, embarrassed. With so many eyes on him, he quickly dispelled the clone.

Instantly, the memories returned to him, and he felt a wave of embarrassment wash over him. Experiencing the events from the clone's perspective was disorienting, but Naruto knew he needed more practice to adapt to the dual viewpoints.

Later that night, Naruto had a bold idea. Creating another clone, he faced it and tried to communicate with the entity sealed within him.

"Big fox!" they called in unison.

Kurama, the Nine-Tailed Fox, raised an eyebrow. "What are you up to now?"

"I want to see if you can control this clone," Naruto proposed.

"Why would I do that?"

Naruto grinned mischievously. "Just for fun. You can come out for a bit."

The clone transformed into a miniature version of Kurama, standing only half of Naruto's height.

Naruto patted the tiny fox's head. "Want to come out for a walk? You can use this clone."

Kurama, intrigued by the offer, decided to try. He manipulated the clone through the gap in the seal left by Minato.

An aura of power emanated from the tiny fox, imbuing it with Kurama's majesty.

As Kurama flicked his tail, Kushina burst through the wall from the adjacent room, red hair blazing and exuding the aura of a fierce ninja.

"Kurama, what are you doing!?" she shouted.

Naruto tried to intervene, but Kushina's chakra chains shot towards the miniature fox, instantly dispelling it.

Naruto clutched his stomach, feeling the clone's pain in his memories, though his body remained unharmed. The mental sensation was disconcerting.

Minato entered the room, assessing the situation. Kimimaro followed, looking puzzled at the broken wall.

After calming down, Naruto explained everything to his parents. Kushina had sensed Kurama's chakra and feared the worst, leading to her dramatic entrance. Despite the misunderstanding, she simply hugged Naruto and began cleaning up the debris.

Minato ruffled Naruto's hair. "It's okay, Naruto. Your mother was just worried about you. You were a bit reckless this time."

Naruto nodded, realizing he should have warned them.

"Are you and Kurama... friends?" Minato asked.

In the sealed space, Kurama's ears twitched.

Naruto thought for a moment. "I think so."

Kurama remained silent, but Naruto interpreted his silence as agreement.

"Can he borrow my clone again?" Naruto asked.

Minato considered it. "Yes, but tell him not to harm anyone, stay in human form, and avoid causing trouble. Also, don't maintain the clone for too long."

Naruto agreed eagerly, confident Kurama would understand.

With the family back to normal, Naruto went to bed, bidding Kurama goodnight. As Naruto's consciousness faded, Kurama whispered, "That's it..."

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

The information Kimimaro received that evening was overwhelming, making it hard for him to calm down.

He never expected such a powerful monster to reside within Naruto.

Kimimaro clenched his fists. Starting tomorrow, he resolved to intensify his training, aiming to match the energy of his three teammates.

He needed to grow stronger quickly. Whether it was the Nine-Tails or any other threat, he would never allow anything to harm his family.

The next day, life returned to its usual rhythm. Naruto attended class, while he sent a clone, controlled by Kurama, to explore the village.

Disguised with the Transformation Jutsu to avoid drawing attention, Kurama wandered the streets, mindful of Naruto's well-known presence in Konoha.

In the afternoon, Naruto had an idea and asked the Nine-Tails clone to buy snacks. Initially disdainful of human food, Kurama was swayed by Naruto's playful threat: "Try it, or I'll dismiss the clone." Soon, Kurama found himself enjoying the food.

It turned out this fox was a hidden foodie. He sampled fruits, meatballs, grilled meat, and more, as if discovering a new world, his favorites were grilled meat and grapes, which he ate without spitting out the skins.

Once the money was spent, Kurama had Naruto release the clone, returning to the sealed space to sleep. Before drifting off, he set a small goal: to taste all the food in Konoha.

Unbeknownst to Naruto, Kurama reflected on his past: "What was I thinking, wanting to destroy such a place? It's all Uchiha Madara's fault!"

****

Time passed, and nearly three years later, Naruto's class was nearing graduation.

According to Kimimaro, Gai left Team Four last year. Naruto imagined the scene: the four green-jumpsuit-wearing members hugging and crying, while Kimimaro stood awkwardly to the side, hearing slogans about the youthful world. The image was both amusing and heartwarming.

Naturally, Kimimaro became the "brain" of Team Four, although his strength was nothing to scoff at.

Since the "Nine-Tails Incident," Kimimaro had trained diligently, even learning some of the Eight Gates technique from Gai.

Currently, Team Four is among the strongest in Konoha. Kimimaro's Shikotsumyaku, combined with the Eight Gates, and his teammates' Sharingan, enhanced by their own Eight Gates training, made them formidable.

These three peculiar Uchiha members, despite their clan's traditional focus on fire ninjutsu, dedicated themselves to taijutsu, causing Fugaku some concern.

Gai had moved on to train a new team: Neji, Tenten, and Rock Lee. Naruto was curious whether Neji's character had changed over the years, especially after his father's death.

Hinata had become more outgoing, no longer stuttering when speaking to Naruto and excelling in taijutsu. She is the strongest girl in the class.

Sakura and Ino continued their rivalry. After Naruto jokingly said, "Sasuke likes strong girls," the class's fangirls threw themselves into training with renewed determination.

Naruto was puzzled by Sakura's ability to keep pace with Ino despite her civilian background, speculating that she might have hidden talent.

Kiba had recently boasted about learning animal ninjutsu, claiming newfound strength.

Akamaru barked in agreement, but Naruto remained skeptical, waiting to see the results.

Shikamaru and Choji had diligently studied their family's secret techniques, feeling the pressure from Naruto and Sasuke's progress.

Even the typically lazy Shikamaru didn't want to be left behind by his friends.

Sasuke had advanced significantly, mastering shuriken techniques and several fire jutsu.

Recently, he had also been learning genjutsu and body flicker techniques from Itachi and Shisui.

Naruto had made great strides as well, His knowledge of sealing techniques had advanced to the point where he is close to learning the Flying Thunder God jutsu.

Also, his chakra reserves increased significantly, allowing him to use the Multi-Shadow Clone Jutsu effectively, and to wield the Adamantine Sealing Chains in combat, making even the Nine-Tails wary.

Kurama, feeling indebted for all the food Naruto had provided, also agreed to let Naruto use his chakra to offset the debt, giving Naruto plenty of pocket money in the process.

Naruto had been learning water jutsu from Kushina, though his techniques were not as powerful as hers.

Kushina proudly claimed this was natural since she was his mother, while Minato explained that Naruto's growing body limited the power of his jutsu.

Naruto, however, suspected Minato was just trying to console him.

Despite these challenges, Naruto's water jutsu was already stronger than that of an average ninja, his fire jutsu, which countered Sasuke's due to its elemental advantage, was also impressive.

Compared to his portrayal in the original series, this Sasuke was an enhanced version, thanks to the guidance of his brother and cousin.

Three years of growth had brought many changes. Now, Naruto's primary focus is on graduating.

On the day of the graduation exam, the test covered multiple subjects, including transformation, clones, and shuriken throwing, in accordance with Minato's rigorous standards.

Naruto passed with flying colors. As he received his forehead protector, he bowed deeply to Iruka. "Thank you, Iruka-sensei!"

Iruka, taken aback, waved his hands modestly. "It's nothing."

Despite not being the strongest, Iruka was a dedicated teacher who always cared for his students. Naruto respected him deeply.

One thing that puzzled Naruto was the absence of Mizuki, who had been the first villain in the original series.

"Mizuki?" Minato's expression grew serious. "He attempted to kill an injured comrade during a mission to escape the enemy's pursuit. Fortunately, Team Four intercepted him. Mizuki's actions were reprehensible, and he is now in prison."

Naruto felt some sympathy for Mizuki, who had crossed paths with the wrong team. But overall, things had turned out for the best.

Naruto's journey as a ninja was about to begin.

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

The second day after receiving their forehead guards, the graduates returned to their classrooms one after another.

Today, the team arrangements would be announced.

A group of Konoha genin excitedly discussed who they would be paired with, and the girls, led by Sakura and Ino, had already started quarreling over who would be with Sasuke.

Hinata, affected by the excitement, quietly asked, "Who does Naruto-kun want to be with?"

Naruto saw an opportunity to boast. He cleared his throat: "It doesn't matter what I think, it's mostly already decided."

Hinata was slightly disappointed but continued to listen quietly.

"For example, Ino, Shikamaru, and Choji will form the 'Ino-Shika-Cho' trio, and they should be in the same class."

Hinata nodded, she had heard of the 'Ino-Shika-Cho' formation in Konoha.

Naruto continued, "Hinata, you'll probably be on a special reconnaissance team with Kiba and Shino. As for me, I'll likely form team with Sasuke."

"Naruto-kun is amazing." Although Hinata was disappointed, she still praised Naruto.

Shikamaru, lying on the table in the front row, thought to himself that while Naruto's analysis made sense, it felt like the Fourth Hokage had tipped him off in advance.

Sasuke, who had been eavesdropping, was thrilled. He and Naruto would make a great team. He didn't care who the third member would be with his and Naruto's strength, they could complete any mission, Or was it his arrogance?

After a while, Iruka walked in and began to speak: "From today onwards, you are all ninjas. But remember, you're just genin. Many challenges await you in the future..."

Iruka spoke earnestly and emotionally. He had watched these children grow up, and now they were finally embarking on the path of ninjas, facing various dangers and tests ahead.

Iruka felt a mix of pride and sadness as he looked at the familiar faces, whether serious or distracted.

Finally, Iruka read the class list. After a bunch of names were called:

"Team 7: Naruto Uzumaki, Sakura Haruno, Sasuke Uchiha."

"Yes!" Sakura was ecstatic, turning to show a victory sign to Ino, who clenched her fists in frustration.

"Team 8: Hinata Hyuga, Kiba Inuzuka, Shino Aburame."

Despite Naruto's spoilers, Hinata still felt a pang of disappointment.

"Team 10: Ino Yamanaka, Shikamaru Nara, Choji Akimichi."

Ino looked at Shikamaru, who was still lying on the table, and Choji, who was snacking, feeling disheartened. Why did it have to be them?

After the class divisions, the jōnin came in one by one to lead their teams.

When only Team 10 remained, Asuma entered, cigarette in mouth, and said coolly, "Team 10, follow me."

Ino looked at Asuma, then at Shikamaru and Choji, feeling despair.

A smoker, a slacker, and a glutton—how unlucky! The little girl seemed to wear a mask of pain.

A few minutes later, an unexpected person entered.

"Mom?" Naruto jumped up in shock. What was going on? No one had told him about this.

"Aunt Kushina?" Sasuke was equally shocked. Since recognizing Kushina as his teacher, he had been put through many challenges. Was she going to be their jōnin sensei?

The other students were surprised too. Naruto's mother? Wasn't she the wife of the Fourth Hokage? And Sasuke's teacher?

"Hey, Naruto, Sasuke!" Kushina greeted them.

Naruto finally regained his senses and asked, "Mom, are you going to be our sensei?"

"I wanted to, but Minato didn't agree," Kushina said, somewhat annoyed. "He said he already decided who would take you."

Sasuke breathed a sigh of relief, only to be caught in a headlock by Kushina.

"Little Sasuke doesn't seem to want me as your jōnin," Kushina said, drilling her fist into Sasuke's head.

"No...no, I'm just...just disappointed," Sasuke quickly corrected, knowing better than to argue with Kushina.

Kushina let go of Sasuke and waved: "Team 8, follow me!"

The three obediently followed her.

Akamaru whimpered, sensing future difficulties, while Shino pushed up his sunglasses, remaining stoic. Hinata's mind was racing: "Naruto's mother... meeting the parents..." Her face turned as red as Kushina's hair.

Naruto pieced things together. In the original story, Team 8 was led by Kurenai Yuhi, but she was still a "new jōnin" and not qualified to lead the heirs of the Hyuga, Inuzuka, and Aburame clans.

As the son of the Third Hokage, Asuma was qualified but was destined to lead the Ino-Shika-Cho trio, as the Sarutobi clan witnessed their alliance. So, Kushina leading Team 8 made sense.

Only Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura were left in the classroom. The three sat in a row. Sakura broke the silence: "Naruto, Sasuke, what just happened?"

Sakura's inner self was excited: "That red-haired woman was so cool!"

Naruto replied, "That's my mom, probably the strongest female ninja in Konoha right now."

Sasuke nodded, thinking she is the most terrifying woman in Konoha.

"Eh? Then why did you look so surprised?" Sakura asked.

"Because no one told me she'd be a jōnin sensei. It was a shock."

Sasuke nodded again, sharing the sentiment.

"Who will be our sensei then?" Sakura wondered.

"Probably Kakashi."

"Kakashi?" Sakura hadn't heard of him.

"Kakashi?" Sasuke knew him as the Copy Ninja, possessing the Sharingan, and more laid-back than many Uchiha clan members.

Naruto began explaining: "Hatake Kakashi, my dad's disciple, became a jōnin at twelve, known as the 'Copy Ninja'. He's very strong, but he likes reading erotic novels, being late, and being lazy. He's like a lazy sloth..."

"It's not nice to talk behind someone's back, Naruto," Kakashi's voice came from behind them.

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

"When?" Sasuke and Sakura spun around in shock, completely unaware of the presence behind them.

A man stood there—a slender figure with silver hair, a forehead protector, and a mask covering his mouth and nose. Only one eye was visible, and he was holding a book, not even glancing up as he spoke.

Naruto remained calm. He knew Kakashi too well. "Is it a good habit to eavesdrop on other people's conversations? Besides, everything I said is true."

"Well... most of it," Kakashi replied.

"Speaking of which, why aren't you late today?" Naruto asked, curious. He then teased, "Did my mom drag you here?"

Kakashi coughed, snapped his book shut, and tapped Naruto on the head. "We'll talk gossip later. For now, the three of you come with me."

Naruto had never been to the school rooftop, It was said to be the place where Itachi once fought.

Naruto and Sakura sat side by side. Sasuke, ever the cool kid, claimed the best spot, and Naruto scowled at him.

Kakashi leaned on the opposite guardrail. "As Naruto just introduced, I am Hatake Kakashi, and from now on, I'll be your sensei. Let's start with introductions, beginning with Naruto."

Naruto stared at him without saying a word. You come to my house every day for dinner. Do we really need to do this?

Kakashi, with his usual deadpan expression, stared back. Despite being familiar with each other through Naruto's mom, they still had to go through the motions.

Naruto sighed, deciding to play along. "My name is Uzumaki Naruto. I like training and getting stronger. I hate people being late. My dream is world peace."

Kakashi then turned to Sasuke.

Sasuke, hands clasped and chin resting on them, coolly said, "Sasuke Uchiha. I like training with my brother. I hate losing to Naruto. My dream is to surpass my brother."

Itachi's younger brother, Kakashi thought, remembering the genius who joined the Anbu at 11.

"My name is Haruno Sakura. I like... my dream is... I hate Ino." Sakura's eyes kept drifting to Sasuke.

Naruto and Kakashi understood, but Sasuke found this teammate's behaviour strange.

Kakashi looked at the three of them: one was his teacher's son, another was the younger brother of a former subordinate, and the last was a girl lost in her own fantasy. Despite this, they still needed to be tested. Minato-sensei wouldn't let Naruto pass without earning it.

"Tomorrow, we'll start with a survival drill."

Sakura questioned, "Isn't it a mission? Why a drill? We've done many drills in school."

"This isn't an ordinary exercise. Out of the 27 graduates, only nine will become genin. The other 18 will be sent back to school. It's a tough test with a failure rate of over 66%. Even you, Naruto, won't get special treatment."

"That's it. Tomorrow at 5 a.m., meet at the training ground. Bring your ninja tools."

Kakashi vanished in the blink of an eye, purposely omitting that they shouldn't eat breakfast. He knew Kushina might beat him if Naruto skipped a meal.

"What do you think, Naruto?" Sasuke asked, and Sakura looked at him expectantly. As the son of the Fourth Hokage, Naruto might know more.

Naruto looked at Sasuke in disbelief. Are you stealing my lines? Angrily, he said, "I think he left too fast. I wanted to invite him to dinner."

Sasuke was exasperated. "I meant about tomorrow's drill."

"Yes, yes. If I fail, will I be sent back to school?" Sakura asked.

"Kakashi is a qualified ninja. If he says it's a survival drill, it's serious. I don't know the specifics, but it won't be a simple exercise," Naruto deduced.

Sasuke and Sakura nodded. Ordinary survival drills wouldn't have such a high failure rate.

Naruto continued, "He specifically reminded us to bring ninja tools, which means we might have to fight. We could end up facing Kakashi."

"Fight against a jōnin? Why not just spar among ourselves?" Sakura asked, raising her hand.

Naruto and Sasuke turned to look at her, making Sakura feel self-conscious. She lowered her head. "Okay, I get it."

Naruto felt dumb too, thinking, why didn't I consider sparring among ourselves? Fortunately, they figured it out. "If it were an ordinary jōnin, we might have a chance. But Kakashi's on another level."

"Why?" Sasuke wasn't convinced. How strong was Kakashi, really?

Naruto explained, "Kakashi can at least fight Brother Itachi. Do you think the three of us could beat him together?"

Itachi was 17, already a team leader in the Anbu, skilled in combining genjutsu and shuriken techniques. Even without the Mangekyō Sharingan, he was formidable. If they faced Kakashi, defeat was almost certain.

Sasuke was convinced. If Kakashi was at Itachi's level, they had no hope.

"So Kakashi shouldn't expect us to beat him. As long as we give our best, we should be fine."

Sasuke nodded, but Sakura was still worried. If anyone was sent back, it would likely be her.

"Let's go eat together to celebrate our team assignment and discuss tactics for tomorrow. I don't want to lose too badly," Naruto suggested, still remembering the pain from when Kakashi pinched his face as a child.

"Okay," Sasuke agreed, used to having meals with friends.

"Yeah!" Sakura forgot her worries, her inner self cheering. 'Long live! Eat with Sasuke! Thank you, Naruto, for this opportunity!'

Naruto thought while looking at Sakura, is she delusional or just blind?

The three of them left the rooftop together.

Kakashi, secretly watching, was satisfied. The team dynamics seemed good, which was what he valued most. Strength was secondary.

"As expected of Sensei's son," Kakashi thought of Minato and his long-deceased teammates as he walked towards the Memorial Monument.

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

---

In the evening, when Naruto returned home, Kushina pulled him aside and asked mysteriously, "Naruto, do you know Shino?"

"Shino? Is he okay? What's wrong?"

Kushina replied with frustration, "Shino is such an odd child. If he's not careful, he'll get left behind."

Naruto chuckled. "Shino has a really low profile. My classmates often forget about him at gatherings. Kiba's had to take him along a few times."

"Why doesn't Kiba forget him?" Kushina asked.

"I don't know. Maybe he finds him by his smell?" Naruto guessed.

Kushina raised a finger to her chin thoughtfully. "Do I need to use Perception Ninjutsu to make sure Shino's around before I say anything important in the future?"

Naruto smirked. "It's not impossible. Anyway, our family doesn't lack chakra."

Then he added, "But it's not that bad. Once you get used to him, you'll start to sense his presence."

---

Early morning, Naruto left home with a sandwich in his mouth and arrived at the meeting point right on time at five o'clock. It is the training ground with three wooden logs in the centre.

Although he knew Kakashi might be late, Naruto didn't dare to be. After all, Kakashi was their Sensei, and when Sensei orders a five o'clock gathering, you show up at five. It's a basic rule for ninjas.

Sasuke and Sakura had also arrived. They greeted each other and waited. Ten minutes later, Naruto walked over to where Sasuke and Sakura were chatting and said, "Looks like he's going to be late again. Why don't we prepare?"

Naruto pulled out steel wire, kunai, and other tools from his ninja kit. Sasuke and Sakura agreed, and with that, three of them started setting up traps around the training ground. They rigged it with all sorts of tripwires.

Kakashi, who had been observing from a tree, smiled approvingly. "Not bad. They're working together to set traps."

But when Naruto took out a stack of explosive tags, Kakashi broke into a cold sweat. "No way, does this kid want to blow up the training ground and kill me?"

Naruto, however, decided against it and put the explosive tags away. After all, Kakashi wasn't his enemy.

The three genin continued working for a couple of hours. By the time they were done, the practice field was covered in traps, with barely any space left to stand. Kakashi, still hiding, grinned slyly and suddenly used the Body Flicker Technique to appear before them.

Sakura gasped, "Ka... Kakashi-sensei!"

Naruto glared, pretending to be upset. "You're late."

Kakashi tried to explain, "I ran into a black cat on my way, so..."

Naruto thought to himself, 'Jiraiya sure taught you well in the art of spying.'

Seeing the three of them silently glaring at him, Kakashi cleared his throat. "Alright, let's start the test."

The three instantly perked up.

Then Kakashi added with a smile, "But first, dismantle all the traps you've set up. We'll move to another training ground."

Naruto: "Huh?"

Sasuke: "Huh?"

Sakura: "Huh?"

"Hurry up! The exercise ends at noon, and there are only two hours left."

"Yes~" *3

The three of them gritted their teeth as they disarmed the traps they had painstakingly set up. Reluctantly, they followed Kakashi to a new training ground, feeling like they were shrouded in dark energy.

"I'll explain the test rules," Kakashi said, pulling out two bells. "Your goal is to grab these two bells from me before noon. Anyone who doesn't get a bell fails the test."

Sakura frowned. "Then why are there only two bells?"

Kakashi answered seriously, "Because only two of you can pass. Those who fail will be sent back to the Academy. You can use ninja tools, and unless you're ready to kill me, you won't get the bells."

Sakura's heart sank. Is this a ploy to eliminate me? I finally graduated and got assigned to the same team as Sasuke. This should've been a happy moment, but why does it feel like this?

Naruto remarked casually, "That's harsh, playing mind games with us."

'It's a psychological tactic. Stay strong, Sakura, don't hold back for Sasuke-kun!' Sakura steeled herself.

"Who knows?" Kakashi's tone shifted as he announced, "The test begins now!"

In an instant, Naruto and Sasuke positioned themselves in front of Sakura, who drew her kunai defensively.

Naruto formed a hand seal. "Multi-Shadow Clone Jutsu!"

He created shadow clones with a one-handed seal, forming a cross with his left hand's index and middle fingers.

"Uzumaki Naruto, join in!" x20

Twenty clones shouted in unison, creating an imposing atmosphere. Naruto smacked his forehead. "Enough already! Can't you see the situation? Attack him!"

"Oh? Shadow clones?" Kakashi was surprised, With this many, does this kid have an abnormal amount of chakra? As expected of the Sensei's son.

Kakashi quickly punched a clone, making it disappear.

As the first clone vanished, the second one shouted, "Get him, brothers!"

The remaining nine clones charged at Kakashi, full of righteous indignation, only to be swiftly taken out one by one.

Meanwhile, ten other clones stood back, preparing for an attack.

"Water release: Water Dragon Jutsu (Third Hokage, Kushina's Effortless Teaching Edition)!" *10

Ten massive water dragons rose in front of the clones, diving down from the sky, heading straight for Kakashi, covering nearly 20 meters around him.

Sakura stared at the spectacle in amazement. She knew Naruto was good at Water Style, but this was on another level!

She glanced at Sasuke. If Naruto is this strong, then Sasuke-kun, who's supposed to be on par with him, must have an equally powerful Fire release, right?

Even Sasuke was taken aback. "I've never seen shadow clones combined with a Water Dragon Bullet to flood the battlefield! Even if this guy has insane chakra levels, there has to be a limit!"

Kakashi's reaction was more genuine. After taking down the last clone, he widened his eyes at the sight of the ten water dragons, blocking almost all hiding spots. He resisted the urge to curse.

"You call this a Water release!?"

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

---

Ten water dragons roared down and smashed into the ground, causing waves to splash around and gradually spread to the feet of the clones.

Kakashi had already vanished from his spot. The ten Narutos and the Sakura clone in the front row immediately started moving.

The three Sakura clones stood back-to-back in the centre while the ten Narutos formed a circle to guard the surroundings.

Suddenly, a hand emerged from the ground at Sakura's feet, pulling her down until only her head was exposed.

Kakashi appeared, hearing Sakura shout, "Sasuke!" But when she spoke, it was Naruto's voice, and he flashed Kakashi a big smile before turning into smoke and dissipating.

'Sasuke' and 'Naruto' immediately charged at Kakashi, trying to disrupt his movements.

The ten surrounding Narutos turned, and one of them transformed back into Sasuke, quickly forming a seal. Sasuke's cheeks puffed up as he shouted:

"Fire Release: Great Fireball Jutsu!"

"A shadow clone?" Kakashi was surprised. Did he swap out Sakura with a transformation technique while I was distracted by the water dragons?

How did he know my target was Sakura? No, as long as the three people standing together are shadow clones, the outcome will be the same no matter which one I attack!

Kakashi quickly figured out Naruto's and Sasuke's strategy. His hands formed seals at lightning speed:

"Earth Release: Earth Wall!"

Kakashi clapped his hands on the ground, and a four-to-five-meter-high earth wall rose, blocking the oncoming fireball. The dog's head carved into the wall was scorched black.

Naruto seized the opportunity to form seals, and a large amount of water spurted out of his mouth:

"Water Release: Water Bullet!"

Sakura, who was standing next to Naruto, released her transformation and threw six shuriken, sealing off Kakashi's left and right escape routes.

At the same time, Naruto released a shadow clone, which then dissipated.

The clone on the other side of the earth wall received the message and immediately signalled Sasuke.

Kakashi ran up the dirt wall, but when he looked up, he saw two kunai shooting straight down from above—it was Sasuke's shuriken-throwing technique!

Kakashi deflected the attack with his kunai and continued running to the top of the dirt wall, looking down at the three of them.

The kunai hadn't made an impact; Sakura's six shuriken were embedded in the earth wall, and Naruto's water bullet hit the wall and flowed down, briefly raising the water level.

Sasuke had already bypassed the earth wall and joined Naruto. They had planned that the three of them should regroup as much as possible. Otherwise, they would be easy targets.

Kakashi clapped his hands atop the earthen wall and said, "This is a very impressive team effort. First, Naruto's ten shadow clones were used as a feint to distract me."

"Then, ten shadow clones combined to use Water Dragon Bullets. When I lost visual contact, you swapped the real body with the shadow clones using a transformation technique, making the clones the bait."

"After I attacked, you flanked me on both sides, Naruto and Sakura blocked my retreat to the left and right, continuing to harass me with shadow clones."

"You've used the memory-transmitting ability of shadow clones very cleverly to guide Sasuke's attack from my blind spot."

"I'm impressed, but Naruto, your chakra must be nearly exhausted by now, right? Maybe it's time to admit defeat?"

The chakra cost was indeed significant. With twenty shadow clones, ten water dragons in a waterless environment, and a water bullet, it's been draining. The transformation technique can be ignored.

Naruto cooperated by releasing several shadow clones within Kakashi's field of vision.

He panted and said, "It's been taxing, but have you wondered why the three of us are just standing here, listening to you...?"

Kakashi suddenly rolled off the dirt wall, his eyes narrowing at the sight of a golden chain on the wall, still quivering with energy.

"...Finished?" Naruto's voice reached Kakashi as he leapt away from the wall, leaving him with a lingering sense of fear.

"Where did you learn that?" Kakashi followed the chain with his eyes, noticing it stretched from behind Naruto, hanging down against his thighs, concealed by the shallow water on the ground, and quietly wrapped around the earth wall. So the water bullet was used for this!

"I remember this technique isn't typically used like this," Kakashi muttered, stunned by the versatility of the Adamantine Sealing Chains, known for binding even-tailed beasts. How did her son use this technique so...creatively?

"Are you trying to kill me!?" The golden chains dissipated into fragments as Naruto started gasping. Nonsense, if I had my mother's full strength, I'd summon four chains directly to your face, but I'm not wasting that kind of energy on you.

Seeing Naruto was exhausted, Sasuke pulled out a kunai to guard Naruto's right side, while Sakura moved to cover his left.

Kakashi observed their coordination with satisfaction. "Well, you're showing a good application of ninjutsu as ninjas, but let me teach you another lesson in ninja tactics—illusion!"

"Break!" Naruto was suddenly disoriented, but then he felt a huge tail tap him lightly. He snapped back to reality. "Thanks, big fox!"

"Pfft, you fell for such a basic illusion? Pathetic!" Kurama mocked.

Naruto didn't argue, opening his eyes to see that Sakura had already formed a seal and released herself from the illusion. Great, Sakura—this illusion's level is pretty decent.

Just as Naruto was about to help Sasuke break free, he saw Sasuke's eyes suddenly widen and turn red, with a single tomoe spinning slowly in each eye.

Naruto was stunned. Sasuke, you've awakened your Sharingan—at the perfect moment!

Kakashi was equally shocked. Could it be that Itachi's younger brother is also a genius?

Sasuke felt the change, looked at his hands, clenched his fists, and smirked. "With this power, I should be able to defeat Naruto."

Naruto was taken aback. I see you as a brother, and your first thought after awakening your Sharingan is to beat me?

Sakura was overwhelmed by Sasuke's smile, her eyes practically turning into hearts. "So cool, so cool, so cool..."

Fortunately, Kakashi remained focused on the exercise. He raised an eyebrow and said, "So, you've awakened the Sharingan? Well, I have one too. Let's see if you, as a Uchiha, can match up to me, an outsider."

"Stop looking down on me!" Sasuke couldn't bear the insult and charged forward, his eyes blazing red.

It's beyond unfair to push kids to awaken their Sharingan just to play mind games. Naruto had no choice but to rush in and grab Sakura, using her as "cover."

Kakashi felt no shame and continued, "Besides ninjutsu and illusions, there's also..."

Kakashi disappeared in an instant, reappearing to kick Sasuke in the chest, finishing his sentence with, "...taijutsu!"

Naruto caught Sasuke as he was sent flying backwards, pulling him to safety.

Sakura seized the moment and threw her kunai, trying to buy time for Naruto and Sasuke to adjust their positions—just now, she hadn't seen Kakashi's movements at all!

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

****

Kakashi ignored Naruto and Sasuke then raced to Sakura, who was standing behind him.

Naruto saw this and turned Sasuke around, throwing him at Kakashi. "Secret Technique: Sasuke Toss!"

Sasuke adjusted his posture midair and kicked Kakashi in the lower back.

Kakashi effortlessly grabbed Sasuke's leg and pushed him to the ground, just in time for Naruto's attack. "Leaf Whirlwind!"

But Kakashi was too familiar with this manoeuvre. He easily caught Naruto's leg and slammed him against Sasuke. The two lay neatly together on the ground.

It all happened so quickly that Sakura was still in a defensive stance when Kakashi appeared behind her, his hand gently but firmly gripping her neck.

As Naruto and Sasuke struggled to get up, Kakashi suddenly chuckled.

He noticed Sakura's hand discreetly reaching for the bell tied around his waist. "So, you remembered the mission was to get the bell after all," he said with a smirk.

Before Naruto and Sasuke could react, Kakashi released Sakura and swiftly threw a kunai behind him, dispelling a sneaky shadow clone.

When Kakashi earlier said Naruto lacked chakra, Naruto had dispersed several clones in front of him while secretly keeping one in reserve.

"That's enough," Kakashi said, raising a hand to signal a stop. He adjusted his headband to cover his Sharingan.

The purpose of this test has been achieved. He had seen the teamwork of the three genin and their unyielding determination to complete the mission.

"Though none of you got the bell, you made me take this seriously," Kakashi admitted. He removed the bells and handed them to Sakura, continuing, "Now that you've achieved your goal, tell me how you plan to distribute these two bells."

Sakura took the bells in a daze. At first, she was ecstatic, imagining herself on missions with Sasuke.

But then she looked at Naruto, realizing that from strategy to combat, he had been the driving force. Her contribution felt small in comparison.

Sasuke frowned.

Naruto, on the other hand, was puzzled. Kakashi's test seemed complete, with their teamwork shining through. So why was there still an issue with the bells?

Everyone was silent for a moment. Then, Sakura walked over to Naruto and Sasuke, holding out the bells with both hands. "These... these should belong to you."

Biting her lip, she added, "I... I'm the weakest, and I didn't help much in the fight. But even if it was just for two days, I was really happy to be part of this team with you guys. Next time..."

Naruto smiled at Sakura's gesture and didn't take the bell. "I'm happy to be on this team with you too. What do you think, Sasuke?"

Sasuke looked up at Kakashi. "So, as long as we get the bell, we pass, right?"

Kakashi nodded. "Yes. What are you planning?"

Sasuke took the bells from Sakura, tossed one to Naruto, and then sliced the remaining bell in half with his kunai.

He handed one half to Sakura, saying casually, "This is enough."

Sakura was so moved that she almost burst into tears. "Sasuke~!"

She hugged a small doll with Sasuke's name on it and mentally screamed, "I have to make him mine!"

"You clever little bastard," Naruto said with a grin. He also cut his bell in half and tossed one half to Kakashi. "Indeed, this is enough."

Kakashi held the half-bell, smiling even more brightly than Naruto. "All of you pass!"

"Awesome!" Sakura cheered.

Sasuke gave a small smile.

"Kakashi-sensei, please take care of us!" x3

"Ah, please take care of me."

"To celebrate the official formation of Team 7, Kakashi-sensei will treat us!" Naruto said with a mischievous grin, remembering how Kakashi had thrown him earlier.

Kakashi sighed, "I can't say no to you guys. Let's go."

As the three genin laughed behind him, Kakashi looked up at the sky at a 45-degree angle and muttered, "I've become a teacher..." With a sigh, he pulled out his favourite book with a yellow cover from his ninja pouch.

...

At the barbecue restaurant, Naruto, who rarely managed to outwit Kakashi, rubbed his full stomach and hiccupped contentedly. He wasn't the best at fighting on an empty stomach.

Next time, I'll bring Chōji along, Naruto thought, glancing at Kakashi, who looked like he was holding back tears.

The wealth Kakashi has accumulated over the years, bringing Hinata along wouldn't be too much, would it? Chōji and Hinata will decrease Kakashi's wealth significantly.

Sakura and Sasuke sat side by side, their faces glowing with happiness. Sasuke seemed a bit unsure of what to do, placing his chopsticks down after his last bite.

Noticing that everyone had finished eating, Kakashi snapped his book shut and waited for the three of them to look at him before he said, "Team 7's first mission starts tomorrow. I've got something to take care of, so you're dismissed!"

Kakashi bolted out of the restaurant, leaving the three genin staring at each other. Thankfully, he had at least paid the bill before leaving.

Naruto asked, "Got any plans for the afternoon, Sasuke?"

"Training."

"Let's train together, then."

"Alright."

Sakura looked back and forth between them, asking, "Is your usual communication always this... brief?"

Is this how close friends talk? She couldn't help but think of Ino and quickly shook her head. Why am I thinking of that loudmouth pig?

"Pretty much," Naruto replied. "When you're familiar with someone, conversations are casual. If there's more to say, you say it, if not, you keep it short."

"Sakura, want to join us?"

"Sure!" Sakura agreed eagerly, excited at the prospect of training with Sasuke.

The three of them headed for the training ground, where they had set traps earlier.

It was a large field with three wooden posts on one side and a little river on the other, both surrounded by trees-an ideal training location.

Naruto invited Sakura along for more than just company.

Since they were going to be a team, it made sense to assist her in developing her skills sooner rather than later.

Sakura will likely follow Tsunade's route in the future, therefore, having a qualified medical ninja on the team was essential.

"I'll learn the Rasengan next. My father left me the training approach. You can participate if you're interested, but it's difficult for individuals with little chakra."

Considering Minato's nature, he'd probably be eager to teach anyone with potential, even passing down techniques like the Rasengan and Flying Thunder God.

After all, he did teach the Flying Thunder God to Genma's team for their Flying Thunder Formation.

Sasuke and Sakura considered Naruto's impressive chakra reserves and compared them to their own.

They both shook their heads, realizing they couldn't afford to learn such a technique.

"Alright," Naruto said, understanding their decision. "So, what are you planning to practice next?"

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

"Shisui taught me the Body Flicker Jutsu, but I'm still not very skilled at it. I also need to get more familiar with the Sharingan," Sasuke said, touching his eyes.

A smile crept across his face as he thought, 'When I tell Itachi about this, he'll be proud of me.'

Sakura remained silent, unsure of what she should be practising. All she knew was that she'd get to train alongside Sasuke, and that was enough for her.

Naruto, however, wasn't surprised by her reaction. At 12 years old, Sakura lacked a sense of urgency.

Unlike those from prominent clans, her family didn't push her to become stronger.

Sakura's biggest dream was to someday change her last name to Uchiha rather than focusing on becoming a stronger ninja.

Naruto knew that even if he left her alone, Sakura would eventually realize what she needed to do, especially when the Chunin Exams came around, and she started feeling like a burden to the team.

But he wasn't about to let that happen. After all, she was his teammate and could be strong enough to protect herself, not a burden.

"If you don't have a specific goal, let's start with chakra control. Have you practised tree climbing and water walking?" Naruto asked.

Sakura, ever the diligent student, questioned, "What does climbing trees have to do with chakra control? And what's water walking?"

"Alright then, I'll teach you how to climb trees. Once you've got that down, Sasuke can teach you how to walk on water," Naruto replied.

"Yeah!" Sakura was energized and determined to impress Sasuke.

Sasuke had no objections. He and Naruto had learned tree climbing and water walking before they graduated, so teaching it to their teammate wasn't a problem.

"The tree climbing I'm talking about isn't the usual kind. You have to gather chakra on the soles of your feet to stick to the tree," Naruto explained.

As he spoke, he casually walked up the tree trunk and hung upside down from a branch as a demonstration, shocking Sakura.

Sakura quickly began trying it herself. Within thirty seconds, she was walking up a ten-meter-high tree as if it were flat ground. She smiled, "This is easier than I thought!"

Sasuke was taken aback. The teammate he had always considered a burden had such strong chakra control.

It had taken him days to learn what she mastered in moments, maybe because she didn't have large chakra reserves.

"Impressive!" Naruto gave her a thumbs up. "As expected of you, Sakura-chan."

"I'll leave the water walking to you, Sasuke!" Naruto waved as he walked away.

"Oh," Sasuke replied nonchalantly. He wasn't one to go back on his word.

Sakura felt touched. Naruto was truly a great teammate for helping her become strong.

Naruto paid no attention to the interaction between the two and moved to the side to practice the Rasengan. Naturally, he used shadow clones for training.

He decided to summon two clones, as doing more at once might be overwhelming.

Naruto pulled out a scroll and unrolled it, revealing a "ball" surrounded by intricate seals. He formed a hand sign and slapped the scroll.

A dozen water-filled balloons appeared, prepared in advance for training.

Naruto picked up a water balloon and gave it a light squeeze, then signalled to his clones. "Got it?"

"Got it!" the clones replied in unison.

The clones were excited. Practising the Rasengan was way more fun than sparring with Kakashi.

Each clone grabbed a water balloon and began focusing on making the water inside rotate.

The initial rotation was smooth; the water began to drive the balloon's shape, flattening it.

But how do you get the chakra to revolve in numerous directions at the same time? That was the true challenge.

The original manga suggested using the other hand to help, but Naruto wasn't interested in shortcuts.

He wanted to master the Rasengan single-handedly, especially since he planned to use it as a quick-strike technique.

Later on, he would learn how to combine it with shadow clones for bigger moves.

Naruto envisioned himself outmanoeuvring an enemy, pretending to be a frail, long-range fighter, only to surprise them with a Rasengan to the face.

But mastering the technique was tough. After an hour of training, Naruto released the two clones.

As their memories flowed back to him, Naruto felt a slight headache—along with an influx of jumbled thoughts. "Couldn't my clones be more reliable?" he muttered, rubbing his temples.

They had been thinking about random stuff: one wanted to flush the toilet, another was daydreaming about playing with a kitten's ball of yarn, and a third was stuck on the planets. 'How does that relate to the Rasengan?'

Though to be fair, the planetary model wasn't entirely unrelated. Naruto imagined the solar system as he worked with the water balloon.

When he pictured Halley's Comet and other planetary orbits, the balloon started to bulge in multiple places. "That's the feeling!" he thought.

Naruto released two more clones to continue training. Following the idea he just had, he imagined adding more comets...

After about half an hour, one of the clones suddenly jumped up, shouting, "I did it!"

The other clone scowled, then grabbed a kunai and stabbed him. "You know too much!" he declared coldly.

Naruto's eyelids twitched. He said nothing.

As the clone's memories and experiences returned to him, Naruto found that he and the remaining clone managed to burst their water balloons one after another.

But just as he was about to celebrate, his clones gleefully slammed into a tree, yelling, "Motherf*cker! I will kill you!"

When Sasuke finished teaching Sakura water walking and returned, he witnessed Naruto's clone getting destroyed.

Sakura looked at Naruto, who was still rubbing his temples, and quietly asked Sasuke, "What's wrong with him?"

"He's… happy?" Sasuke replied uncertainly.

Sakura blinked, confused. *Happy?*

Sasuke found it odd as well. Knowing Naruto, his clone had indeed shown signs of joy. But why kill it while it was happy?

'This guy's mind is getting weirder by the day,' Sasuke thought, shaking his head. He watched as Naruto picked up another balloon and continued training.

Seeing that Naruto didn't seem suicidal, Sasuke went off to practice the Body Flicker Technique in an open area.

Sakura stayed behind, observing Naruto for a while. Finding nothing particularly strange, she happily reviewed her training progress before heading off to join Sasuke—probably to stick close to him.

Naruto focused on the balloon in his hand, trying out his earlier method. It was a tough challenge.

If the first stage of water balloon training was to practice rotation and maintenance, then the second stage with a rubber ball was about chakra control.

By the afternoon, his hand's chakra pathways were sore, with only a bit of energy left.

The three friends said goodbye to each other and went home.

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

---

Naruto returned home and trained physically for over an hour, attempting to deplete his energy, but to no avail. He was no longer the child who grew tired after just a few dozen push-ups.

Naruto considered adding weights to his workout routine.

However, if he strictly adhered to Rock Lee's regimen, he risked injury or worse.

He decided to increase the weights gradually and thought he could approach Kimimaro for guidance.

After all, Kimimaro worked hard every day with his Team 4 friends, so he would probably understand.

At dinner, the family of four sat around the table, and as usual, Kakashi arrived on time.

Naruto kept staring at Kakashi's ninja pouch, making the Jonin visibly uncomfortable.

Even with all the courage in the world, Kakashi wouldn't dare take out any of his strange books in Naruto's house.

Yet, he often touched his ninja pouch, like someone desperate to check their phone after an hour.

Feeling the presence of his "food" seemed to calm his nerves.

Kushina talked about her day in class. She mentioned how Kiba and Akamaru rushed recklessly during a test and ended up getting knocked to the ground by her.

She also shared how Shino's insects grossed her out so much that she accidentally punched him in the face, breaking his sunglasses.

Kushina also noted that little Hinata, despite being skilled in taijutsu, lacked decisiveness and would need more training.

Naruto was concerned whether Akamaru was hurt and asked curiously if Shino's eyes were tiny dots since he had never seen Shino without his sunglasses.

Then, he worried whether Hinata would turn out rebellious like in the alternate version of her (the alternate universe where Menma and Naruto Uzumaki fought).

Minato asked Kakashi about Naruto's performance that day. Kakashi praised Naruto, Sakura, and Sasuke.

Naruto, however, took the opportunity to complain, saying that Kakashi used his Sharingan to defeat all three of them and that, in the end, Kakashi had slammed both him and Sasuke to the ground so hard that Sasuke was nearly in tears from the pain.

'Feel the pain, Kakashi,' Naruto thought with a sadistic smile.

Kakashi felt a chill down his spine under Kushina's sharp gaze.

Meanwhile, bro-con Sasuke, who was showing off his Sharingan at home, sneezed, rubbed his nose, and went back to enjoying his brother's praises.

There was frequent laughter at the dinner table, and Kimimaro, who had been quietly smiling, seemed to eat a bit more lightly.

He truly cherished his current family—his father, mother, younger brother, and Kakashi, who felt like an older brother.

After dinner, Minato and Kushina once again reminded Kimimaro not to overexert himself in training, and everyone dispersed.

****

Later that evening, Naruto went to his usual meeting with Kurama.

"Big fox, wasn't it cool when I launched ten Water Dragon Jutsu today?"

"Hah, those little splashes? The Third Hokage could do better while sneezing."

"Is it that bad? I thought it was enough to give Shukaku a run for his money."

"Are you thinking of fighting Shukaku?"

"Don't you hold a grudge against him?"

"That's the spirit!" Kurama perked up, something rare for the Nine-Tails. "Once you get better at Water Style, you'll almost be at that woman's level. When the time comes, use my chakra to drench Shukaku in a downpour!"

Imagining Shukaku's miserable state, Kurama nearly laughed out loud. "Hahahahaha...Oh, and that chain-breaking technique of yours—give Shukaku a taste of that too. Then..."

Kurama suddenly stopped and lay down, his once-excited tail drooping to the ground. His expression turned melancholic.

Naruto sensed that mentioning the Adamantine Sealing Chains brought up painful memories for Kurama, and he didn't know how to comfort the tailed beast.

Fortunately, Kurama's resilient nature kicked in, and he clenched his massive claws into fists, pounding the ground as he roared, "Just like that! Get stronger, kid! Beat all eight of those other beasts, and tie them up with that broken chain of yours!"

'There are nine-tailed beasts in the world—if one fox suffers, all should feel the same pain! Hehehehehehe...'

What had gotten into Kurama? Naruto had no idea, and he didn't dare ask. He figured that bringing up Shukaku wasn't the best idea, as it had ignited the fox's fighting spirit.

Maybe he should have talked about peaceful coexistence with the tailed beasts instead.

Naruto thought for a moment and then said, "Tonight, I'll tell you the story of 'Jujutsu Kaisen.' It all begins with the..."

Kurama, intrigued by the promise of a new story, calmed down.

"In Jujutsu Kaisen, all living beings emanate energy called Cursed Energy, which arises from negative emotions that naturally flow throughout the body. Ordinary people cannot control this flow in their bodies."

"As a result, they continually lose Cursed Energy, resulting in the birth of Curses, a race of spiritual beings whose primary desire is to bring harm to humanity. These Curses are shown as gruesome monsters: onryō (vengeful spirit), yūrei (ghosts), and yōkai..."

The more Kurama listened, the more familiar the tale seemed.

This cursed energy, the creation of mystical creatures to bring balance to the world, sounded a lot like the Sage of Six Paths creating the tailed beasts...

Was Naruto just making this up to deceive him? But the details seemed too specific.

Kurama's moral education had a long road ahead.

****

Early the next morning, Team 7 gathered at the mission hall on time, but Kakashi was only half an hour late this time.

Their first mission wasn't the usual cat-catching task but a D-rank emergency mission—to help out at the orphanage.

Naruto was curious, "Is the orphanage short on staff? Shouldn't they hire long-term workers? Hiring ninjas doesn't seem cost-effective."

Kakashi, who seemed to know a lot about the orphanage, explained as they walked, "The village usually provides subsidies for these kinds of missions. Sensei has been very supportive of the orphanage in recent years."

He continued, "The orphanage normally has four staff members, including the director and her adopted son, so they usually don't need extra help. But one of the teachers suddenly fell ill, and the director with her son had to assist with surgery at Konoha Hospital yesterday, so they're temporarily short-handed."

Naruto felt something was off.

Sakura raised her hand and asked, "Why would the orphanage director and her son need to assist in surgery? Doesn't the hospital have enough doctors?"

"They do," Kakashi replied, "but this surgery was particularly complicated. The director and her son are highly skilled in medical ninjutsu, even more so than most of the hospital's doctors, so they were asked to help."

Naruto found this even stranger. More skilled than the doctors at Konoha Hospital? Who were these people? Did Tsunade secretly adopt someone and place them at the orphanage as the director?

Unable to figure it out, he asked, "Who are these two people?"

Kakashi thought for a moment and replied, "Their names are Yakushi Nono and Yakushi Kabuto."

Naruto felt a sense of familiarity with the names. "Huh?"

Kakashi continued, "Yakushi Nono was once a highly regarded ANBU operative. But after a certain mission, she approached Sensei and said she was tired of the ANBU life and wanted to return to Konoha to run the orphanage."

"Minato-sensei respected her wishes, and she's been dedicated to the orphanage ever since. When funds were tight, she would help out at Konoha Hospital to earn extra money. Now that the village supports the orphanage, she still volunteers at the hospital from time to time."

****

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

---

Nonō Yakushi was once an ace spy under Danzo, famously known as the "Aruki no Miko" (The Wandering Nun), Her gentle and kind heart, coupled with her exceptional skills in medical ninjutsu, made it easy for her to infiltrate enemy ranks and gain their trust.

However, her kindness became her greatest weakness. She found it increasingly difficult to betray or kill the comrades who placed their trust in her.

If she had been a Uchiha, the emotional toll might have triggered the awakening of the Mangekyō Sharingan long ago.

Danzo was well aware of Nonō's character and repeatedly exploited it, threatening the children at her orphanage to coerce her into betraying those who trusted her.

This cycle of manipulation continued until Danzo was removed from power, and Minato assumed full control as Hokage.

At that point, Nonō requested that Minato stop assigning her spy missions—she wished only to devote herself to running the orphanage.

Minato, unlike Danzo, respected the personal choices of his ninja.

While he might send spies to gather crucial information for the village, he never forced anyone against their will.

As a result, Nonō was able to continue as the orphanage director, occasionally taking part-time work at the hospital to support the children financially.

After hearing Kakashi's explanation, Naruto began to piece together the situation.

This was characteristic of his father's leadership release. While Minato was perceived as a powerful and formidable Fourth Hokage by outsiders, to the villagers, he was a warm and guiding light.

"And what about Kabuto Yakushi?" Naruto asked, knowing Kabuto to be a cunning and dangerous character, possibly as dangerous as Orochimaru himself. It was essential to understand him fully.

"Yamato Yakushi, or Kabuto, is an orphan adopted by Director Nonō. He was taken in during the last Great Ninja War, having lost his memory due to a head injury. Director Nonō later taught him medical ninjutsu, and he proved to be exceptionally talented. His skills now nearly surpass those of the Director herself."

"It seems Kabuto's current motivation is to help the Director support the orphanage, with little interest in becoming a full-fledged ninja."

Kakashi, ever the professional ninja, thoroughly collected information even for a D-rank mission.

Naruto hoped that they would be equally diligent in gathering intelligence for future C-rank missions.

There was, after all, a running joke in the ninja world about the absurdity of Team 7's "C-rank missions."

Sasuke, listening to Kakashi's briefing, found it impressive. As expected of a Jōnin, the information was comprehensive.

Sakura, on the other hand, fell into deep thought. Learning medical ninjutsu seemed like a good idea.

Given the strength of her teammates, she likely wouldn't contribute much in battle, but medical knowledge could be invaluable.

Moreover, if Sasuke were to get injured in the future... Sakura clenched her fist with determination. Wouldn't that mean he would rely on her?

Meanwhile, Naruto was inwardly lamenting for Orochimaru, who was likely lurking in some dark corner.

Orochimaru's two strongest subordinates—one was Kimimaro, who had long been brought back as Naruto's brother, and the other was now the determined director of an orphanage.

This was essentially severing Orochimaru's right-hand men. "Let's keep up the pressure!" Naruto thought.

The four of them had reached their destination while conversing.

Naruto looked around and noticed that the orphanage wasn't as run-down and shabby as he had imagined.

Inside the open gate was a large courtyard resembling a playground. Swings, seesaws, and other play facilities reminded Naruto of an elementary school from his previous life.

The children were playing and chasing each other in groups.

A person dressed as a nun noticed Team 7 and approached to greet them.

"Hello, I'm the teacher here. My name is Tsubaki. Are you the ninjas who accepted the mission?"

Kakashi handed the mission list to Tsubaki and responded, "Yes, we're Team 7, led by me, Kakashi Hatake."

"Uzumaki Naruto."

"Sasuke Uchiha."

"Haruno Sakura."

The three youngsters introduced themselves in turn.

"Welcome," Tsubaki said with a smile. "There are 31 children here who need your care. Today, they need a literacy class and an arithmetic class. Could you also play some games with them afterwards?"

"No problem," Kakashi replied.

Tsubaki gathered the children together and announced, "Today, we have four temporary teachers here to instruct you. They're all very powerful ninjas, so please be on your best behaviour, okay?"

"Okay~!" the children chorused.

Seeing the children obey so readily, Tsubaki turned back to Kakashi and said, "I'll handle the meals and cleaning today, so I'll leave the children in your care."

With that, Tsubaki left.

As soon as the teacher departed, the children became excited and started looking curiously at the four members of Team 7.

"Are you ninjas?"

"Are you strong?"

"Do you know ninjutsu?"

The children buzzed with excitement, like preschoolers seeing rare animals at the zoo for the first time.

"So, what do you plan to do next?" Kakashi asked, shrugging, and leaving the decision to them.

Naruto exchanged a glance with Sasuke, then took a few steps back, creating some distance between them.

Sasuke understood immediately and stepped back as well. The two of them began to form hand seals simultaneously.

"Water Release: Water Bullet Jutsu!"

"Fire Release: Fireball Jutsu!"

Naruto and Sasuke spat out water and fire from their mouths, respectively.

The large fireball collided with a massive amount of water, creating a huge plume of white steam.

The children watched in awe and screamed with excitement.

"It's ninjutsu! It's ninjutsu!"

"That's so cool!"

"That brother is so handsome!"

Sakura's ears twitched as she felt a sense of impending competition.

Naruto pulled Sasuke in front of the children and asked with a smile, "Do you want to see even more powerful ninjutsu?"

"Yes~!" the children shouted eagerly.

"If you do, then hurry to the classroom. After class, I'll put on a show for you."

The children eagerly rushed into the classroom.

Naruto turned to Sakura and said, "Sakura-chan, I'll leave the teaching to you. I'm not very good at that."

"No problem, leave it to me!" Sakura responded confidently.

Then she suddenly realized something and looked at Naruto. "Wait, what did you just call me?"

Naruto looked up at the sky. "Ah, it's such a nice day, isn't it, Sasuke?"

"You idiot...!" Sakura clenched her fists and stormed off to the classroom angrily.

Naruto suddenly remembered something and looked at Kakashi. "Sensei, why haven't you taken out your weird book today? Aren't you reading it?"

Kakashi sighed. "There are so many kids watching, so I have to be mindful of the influence."

Naruto was shocked. "Are you the kind of person who would care about that?"

"What kind of image do you have of me?" Kakashi asked as he took the book out of his ninja pouch and walked away.

"You should focus on what to perform next," he added.

"Come on, Sasuke, let's go see how Sakura's doing with the lesson."

"Yeah," Sasuke replied quietly. "But do we have to put on a show?"

"Why not?"

"It's dumb."

Naruto turned to Sasuke with a serious expression. "We're ninjas, brother. It's a mission. There's nothing dumb about it."

****

Chapter Text

---

At the end of class, the students rushed out and headed straight to Naruto and Sasuke.

"Big brother, big brother, perform! Perform!"

"Ninjutsu! Ninjutsu!"

Naruto signalled to Sasuke. Reluctantly, Sasuke walked to the middle of the field and performed a Uchiha-style martial arts routine.

With flashy moves that looked almost like hip-hop, it was no wonder that "Dance King" Madara Uchiha always talked about dancing with others.

The children were captivated by Sasuke, especially the little girls who cheered and screamed, with Sakura leading the way.

Naruto facepalmed. "Since when did you join in, Sakura? The fan culture is already corrupting Konoha's minors."

After Sasuke's street-style demonstration, several of his afterimages suddenly appeared on the field, making the children gasp in awe.

Then, the afterimages vanished, and Sasuke reappeared next to Naruto.

Though his mastery of the Body Flicker Technique, passed down from Shisui, wasn't perfect, Sasuke's performance was enough to impress the kids.

With his hands in his pockets, Sasuke nodded at Naruto, signalling that it was his turn.

Naruto generously formed a hand seal and shouted, "Multiple Shadow Clone Jutsu!" creating 18 clones.

The clones immediately got into character, somersaulting and doing stunts.

They gathered together and shouted in unison, "Naruto Uzumaki clone no 1-18, reporting sir!"

Naruto, with a tick mark on his forehead, said, "Be serious! It's a performance!"

The clones suddenly acted as if they realized something, then shouted, "Welcome to the Uzumaki Naruto Acrobatic Troupe!"

One particularly clever clone stepped forward, bowed to the audience, and then pulled out a gong from nowhere. He struck it with a loud "Duang" and announced:

"Watch closely, folks! After this, there's no such show. As long as the audience wants to see it, we can do anything! Those with money, pay up! Those without, just cheer us on!"

Then he turned around and waved, "Brothers, start the show!"

The children clapped out of courtesy, while Sasuke tugged at Naruto's sleeve and asked, "What exactly are you planning?"

Naruto responded irritably, "I don't know! Don't ask me."

Sasuke and Sakura: ???

"Your clones... and you don't know what they're planning?"

The clones had already started their performance, doing 20 backflips in a row—a basic feat.

They could flip from one end of the playground to the other without breaking a sweat.

The physical capabilities in this world are so ridiculous that they could attempt any acrobatic trick from Naruto's previous life.

Somersaults, tightrope walking, human ladders, and wall runs were all part of the fun.

Especially with a risky act like tightrope walking, the clones enjoyed themselves, walking steadily because they knew if they slipped and fell, they'd disperse.

As for the steel wire, ninja kits provided all the necessary tools.

The Uzumaki Acrobatic Troupe continued to entertain, with the children cheering and applauding non-stop.

Finally, 15 of the clones stacked themselves into an Arhat formation, the scene resembling a pyramid.

One clone ran up to Sakura, curled into a ball, and asked, "Pink hair, do you want to play bowling?"

Sakura glanced at Naruto.

Naruto's expression was complicated as he said, "Just throw him at the wall over there. The more clones you knock down, the better."

Sakura's eyes narrowed, and her face twisted into a grin. "You asked for it!" She picked up the clone.

The clone lamented, "Please remember me in the original body. I am Uzumaki Naruto No. 001, the one-time-use clone!"

Naruto's frustration hit its peak. "You're the one who hit the gong earlier, too!"

No. 001 grinned. "I'm going in! Hurry up!"

Sakura's anger gauge was maxed out. "Pink hair, huh? And you dare call me pink hair!"

"Shannaro!"

With a mighty shout, Sakura hurled No. 001 right into the centre of the human wall.

The 16 clones vanished amidst laughter and cheers.

Meanwhile, the Nine-Tails watched the scene with interest from within the sealed space. "This kid has some skills. Why doesn't he perform like this for me? Ever since the Sage passed away, I've been nothing but an orphan... a thousand-year-old orphan."

Sasuke was stunned. It wasn't Naruto's chaotic antics that shocked him—he was used to that by now.

What surprised him was the realization that Sakura's strength might surpass both his and Naruto's.

The children first applauded and cheered, but when they looked at Sakura, they suddenly fell silent.

"Good thing we didn't cause trouble during class earlier, or Sakura-sensei would have killed us," they thought.

Naruto turned to the two surviving clones who hadn't participated in the Human Wall and asked, "So, how do you two want to go?"

One clone responded, "Cool... let's go out in style!"

Before Naruto could say anything, the other clone quickly formed a seal. "Water Release: Water Dragon Jutsu!"

A massive water dragon surged from beneath the bragging clone, spiralling upward with him on its head.

"Ahh oh oh oh oh oh~"

The screams echoed—whether from fear or excitement, it was unclear. The water dragon soared into the air, and the clone called out, "Sasuke! Fireworks!"

Sasuke was confused. He glanced at Naruto, who sighed and said, "Fine, do the Phoenix Flower Jutsu."

"Using my ninjutsu as fireworks?" Sasuke was annoyed, but seeing how the water dragon had turned into an acrobatic display, he decided to play along.

"Fire Release: Phoenix Flower Jutsu!"

A string of basketball-sized fireballs shot out of Sasuke's mouth, flying towards the clone in the air.

The clone jumped down, weaving between the fireballs, and shouted at Sasuke, "You jump, I jump!"

Naruto growled through clenched teeth, "Finish him!"

Sasuke complied, unleashing a massive fireball that engulfed the clone in the air, making him disappear spectacularly.

However, just as the last clone on the ground dissolved into water, Naruto's eye twitched, and he overheard the clone's final thought:

"Sasuke, you bastard, I will always return."

…

After a fun-filled morning, Team 7 had lunch with the children.

Then came the last part of the mission—getting the children to take a nap. The director and her son were expected to return in the afternoon.

However, no one had experience with this task. Even though Kakashi had taken care of Naruto as a child, he never had to coax him to sleep.

In the end, the children demanded a story before they would go to bed.

Hearing this, Naruto, who had a knack for stories, perked up. "This, I can handle! The thousand-year-old fox at home listens to stories every day."

So Naruto began, "The story starts 20 years ago. The Marine finally captured and killed the King of Pirates: Gol D. Roger! What they didn't expect was Roger's final attack, with a smile on his face and near his last moments, he said: "You want my treasure? You can have it! I left everything I gathered together in one place! Now you just have to find it!"

Halfway through the story, the children were already fast asleep, not even remembering the name of the protagonist...

---

Thank you for reading

Chapter Text

---

Before Kakashi and the others left, they had a face-to-face meeting with the head of the orphanage, Nono Yakushi, who had just returned from the hospital, and her assistant, Kabuto Yakushi.

Both wore the same round-frame glasses, and the smiles on their faces were gentle and peaceful.

It seemed that Kabuto genuinely wanted to dedicate himself to the development of the orphanage.

For a moment, Naruto silently mourned for Orochimaru, who had now lost Kabuto, his right-hand man.

One could only wonder if Orochimaru's future experiments would go as smoothly.

Sakura approached Nono Yakushi for a brief chat, and they seemed to get along well.

After leaving, the four shinobi—Kakashi and his three students—headed back to submit their mission report.

Kakashi walked ahead, his eyes glued to the book in his hand.

Naruto followed with his hands in his pockets, striding along with a bored expression, secretly hoping Kakashi would walk into a telephone pole.

Sasuke frowned, his mind consumed with thoughts about what Naruto had said earlier about jutsu...

Sakura also seemed lost in thought.
'Sasuke...'

After handing in the mission, Kakashi wasted no time and hurried off.

According to him, he was eager to see what the next part of the story would bring.

Naruto and Sasuke went to the training field to practice as usual, while Sakura said she would borrow a book first and catch up with them later.

When Naruto and Sasuke arrived at the training ground, Naruto began practising with a stack of targets, determined to complete the second stage of his Rasengan training as soon as possible.

Naruto created over a dozen shadow clones, each holding a Rasengan.

He stared at his clones for several minutes, ensuring nothing seemed out of the ordinary, then took a Rasengan and began to practice.

Meanwhile, Sasuke was honing his Shunshin no Jutsu (Body-Flicker Jutsu).

Shisui's body-flicker technique seemed to integrate with shadow clones and genjutsu, making it appear as though each clone wasn't real, when in fact, every one of them was. It was a formidable and bewildering tactic.

During a break, Naruto observed Sasuke's practice and came up with an idea to try later.

After about half an hour, Sakura returned with a large book.

Naruto asked curiously, "Sakura-chan, what's that?"

Sakura held up the book for Naruto to see and replied, "It's a medical ninjutsu textbook. I asked the head of the orphanage about medical ninjutsu today, and she recommended some books for me to read first. So, I borrowed one from the library."

"Why did you suddenly decide to become a medical ninja?" Naruto wondered why Sakura had taken an interest in medical ninjutsu so early on.

Sakura pondered for a moment before replying, "Because I find it hard to help you guys in combat, and sometimes I feel like a burden. But if I learn medical ninjutsu, I can be more useful!"

Naruto gave her a thumbs up and encouraged, "You can do it! Your chakra control is amazing, so maybe you have a natural talent for medical ninjutsu."

Glancing at Sasuke, Sakura nodded resolutely. "Yes, I'll do my best!"

Naruto picked up his Rasengan and was about to continue practising when he suddenly paused. 'Wait, am I encouraging someone to study medicine?'

Naruto looked up at the sky. It was clear, with no sign of thunderstorms...

'Peaceful days are short...'

The atmosphere at the training ground was harmonious. Sasuke practised his Shunshin no Jutsu among the trees.

Occasionally, dozens of Sasuke's phantoms would appear and disappear.

Sakura sat in the shade with a medical textbook as thick as a dictionary on her lap.

She read intently, occasionally glancing up at Sasuke for a brief eye-refresh before returning to her book.

Naruto's clones held Rasengans in the open space, striking various poses and expressions while practising.

There was even a clone of Naruto in a blonde pigtail wig, fuming.

Naruto suddenly remembered a rumour he heard in his previous life about some shady online streamers who would wear women's clothing to get better luck.

Maybe trying a similar tactic would give him some inspiration. It was worth a shot.

Although the main body would never be caught in a dress, a clone trying it out wouldn't hurt.

Besides, if it didn't work, the clone would just disappear anyway. No harm done.

When the clone dispersed, Naruto's face turned red.

It was understandable when a one-off "Naruto Uzumaki No. 001" appeared earlier. After all, he was a bit of a prankster, so perhaps his clone's personality got a bit exaggerated.

But Naruto didn't remember having any interest in cross-dressing! And yet, here was this memory of "Naruko Uzumaki"—the legendary "most beautiful woman" in the Naruto world.

'Seriously, can you guys consider the circumstances before messing around with my clones? Teammates are watching!'

"Hey, Kurama, why don't you come out and blow up Konoha?" Naruto thought.

"No way, the food in Konoha is pretty good," Kurama replied.

At this time, a plain-looking boy was wandering around Konoha's Snack Street, holding a pile of snacks, eating heartily with a joyful expression.

Upon closer inspection, one could see his eyes had vertical pupils.

It was a clone that Naruto had lent to Kurama, who had changed its appearance on purpose.

Naruto couldn't help but complain, "Kurama, could you eat a little less? Every time the clone disperses, I feel so full even though I haven't eaten anything. It's weird."

"What does it matter? It's just a sensation caused by memory regression anyway. And who insisted that I should experience human food?"

Naruto gave up arguing with Kurama and began to reflect on his training.

After an afternoon of practice, he felt like his Rasengan was on the verge of a breakthrough, but it still needed something more.

Naruto looked at his red, swollen palms. 'Tomorrow... Tomorrow, it'll be done.'

The three friends headed home, but as they parted ways, Sasuke and Sakura exchanged strange looks, prompting Naruto to rush home even faster.

...

The next day, the three shinobi followed Kakashi to take on a mission to clean up garbage from a river.

After a busy morning, they returned to the training ground to continue their practice.

Kakashi joined them this time.

It seemed like a rare moment of responsibility, but Naruto suspected it was more likely because Kakashi had finished the novel he was reading and had nothing else to do.

After asking about their training progress, Kakashi learned that all three students had mastered basic skills like tree climbing and water walking.

Naruto and Sasuke were focused on their ninjutsu, while Sakura was diligently pursuing her path.

Kakashi nodded in satisfaction. This teaching gig was really easy—rarely did he need to put in any effort himself, and he didn't even have to worry about his training.

So, Kakashi casually found a tree, leaned against it, and prepared to dive back into his book.

Naruto practised diligently for over an hour, focusing his chakra into the Rasengan in his hand, spinning, maintaining, and increasing the chakra output.

Finally, with a snap, the Rasengan burst; Naruto looked at the fragments on the ground with joy—it was finally complete!

---

Chapter Text

---

Naruto, sensing that he was nearing the completion of the Rasengan, stretched out his hand and visualized an invisible sphere within his grasp.

He concentrated on containing his chakra within the boundaries of that imaginary sphere.

Blue chakra surged in Naruto's hand, forming thousands of chakra threads that spiralled around a central point, following different paths until they coalesced into what resembled a translucent ball of energy.

This was the preliminary form of the Rasengan, but its power was still far from the perfected version.

Naruto pressed the chakra ball against a nearby tree, and with a "bang," sawdust flew as a hole about the size of a basketball was blasted into the trunk.

Excited, Naruto summoned ten shadow clones, instructing them to strike the tree with their unfinished Rasengans.

The surrounding trees were left in disarray, a clear testament to the destructive power of the jutsu.

Next, as long as he kept practising to make the Rasengan more stable and powerful, he would fully master it.

His two teammates were already accustomed to Naruto's antics and didn't pay much attention. Kakashi, however, had noticed Naruto's progress.

He looked at the blonde boy with the blue sphere in his hand. It was as if he could see the shadow of Minato-sensei.

Kakashi walked over to Naruto, instinctively ruffling his hair, and asked, "Have you mastered the Rasengan?"

"Not quite yet, but with more practice, I'll perfect it soon. After that, I'm planning to learn the Flying Thunder God jutsu. Got any tips?"

"The Flying Thunder God? You'd be better off asking Genma and the others. Or better yet, ask Minato-sensei directly," Kakashi replied with a bit of helplessness.

Minato-sensei had tried to teach him, but unfortunately, he didn't have the knack for it.

Despite being called a genius, Kakashi knew he wasn't skilled in every aspect.

"Haha, your answer makes me feel like I should have already asked him, huh? I've also studied the Flying Thunder God seal quite a bit, but I'm still working on getting the hang of it."

"Then I'm not sure I can help," Kakashi admitted, though he was looking forward to the day Naruto mastered the Flying Thunder God.

The combination of the Rasengan and the Flying Thunder God would make Naruto Konoha's second Yellow Flash.

"Hey, what's the use of asking you? Huh? Maybe there is some use," Naruto mused, deciding to give his mentor something to do.

"What's on your mind?" Kakashi sensed mischief in Naruto's tone.

"What do you think about Sasuke?"

"Hmm... In terms of strength, he's certainly strong for a Genin, and he's talented, especially since he awakened the Sharingan at such a young age..." Kakashi began to catch on to what Naruto was suggesting.

"Then why not teach him that move of yours?"

Kakashi sighed. "You mean Chidori. Don't go renaming other people's jutsu without permission."

"I still think 'doughnut palm' sounds cooler. But if you don't like that, I've got another name: 'doughnut maker,' where a single strike creates a hole in the ch—"

"Stop, stop!" Kakashi interrupted Naruto's wild naming spree and brought the conversation back on track. "Why do you suddenly want me to teach Sasuke Chidori?"

'Because we're all training hard, and it feels wrong watching you do nothing,' Naruto thought, but instead, he said.

"Sasuke's learned a lot of flashy jutsu, but he still lacks a powerful, one-hit-kill move. The Sharingan and doughnut maker would be a perfect match."

Kakashi couldn't argue with that. After all, he knew from personal experience how well the Sharingan complemented Chidori. "Alright, I'll go check on Sasuke's progress."

With that, Kakashi left, and Naruto created more shadow clones to continue practising the Rasengan, determined to grasp the "spatial awareness" needed for the Flying Thunder God jutsu on his own.

Naruto had also wanted to learn Chidori, not necessarily for practical use, but just for fun.

With his chakra reserves, plus the chakra of the Nine-Tails within him, he might even be able to create a city-level version of the doughnut palm jutsu for amusement.

'Hmm, what should I name it then?'

But that could wait, mastering the Flying Thunder God jutsu was more important. After all, it's hard to play a game without being able to flash-step.

Before long, Naruto heard the distinct chirping sound of birds—Kakashi must have been demonstrating Chidori.

It seemed that Kakashi and Sasuke had hit it off and jumped straight into training mode.

****

That evening, after Naruto returned home, Kushina suddenly called out, "Naruto, come here. Mom's going to teach you a new ninjutsu."

"Ninjutsu?" Naruto asked, puzzled.

"That's right, a sensory ninjutsu."

"Why do you suddenly want to teach me a sensory technique?" Naruto wondered.

Kushina tapped her chin with her finger as she explained, "Well, you know how Shino's presence is so low it's easy to overlook him. So, I learned a sensory jutsu from Minato just to avoid ignoring him."

"Before I say something important, I quietly sense how many people are in front of me to make sure I haven't missed him. But today, I realized that even without consciously using sensory jutsu, I can sense the chakras around me. So…"

"What?"

'Did she awaken Kagura's Mind Eye?'

Naruto was taken aback, feeling like he had a lot to say.

For example, was Shino's presence really that low? Almost to the level of a Kekkei Genkai?

And did she learn a sensory jutsu just to keep track of her students?

And Kagura's Mind Eye, awakened for such an absurd reason? Was she joking? Could it get any more ridiculous?

In short, Kushina had indeed mastered this ability.

She then explained to Naruto the sensation of using Kagura's Mind Eye—how with herself at the centre.

She could sense all the chakras within a five-kilometre radius and distinguish between them.

As she grew more accustomed to the ability, the range seemed to be gradually increasing.

Naruto thought that if he could match these different chakras with specific people, it would be like playing an RPG with a mini-map…

Finally, Kushina taught Naruto the sensory ninjutsu she'd been using frequently, encouraging him to practice it diligently.

The jutsu was called Chakra Sensing, invented by the great ninjutsu pioneer Tobirama Senju.

It didn't require any hand signs, all you needed to do was touch the ground or a wall with your fingers, and you could sense anyone nearby.

For general sensing, you didn't need to take any action, but this technique required a certain level of talent.

Naruto's family had this talent—Minato had used it before when he led Kakashi and the others on the battlefield.

So, Naruto's training regimen expanded, but he didn't mind. After all, who wouldn't want a mini-map?

"Mom, can you sense how much chakra I have? Say, compared to Kakashi-sensei?" Naruto asked, curious about something he'd been wondering for a long time, though his question was tinged with a bit of mischief towards Kakashi.

---

Chapter Text

---

Team 7 continues their usual routine, taking on missions in the morning and training together in the afternoon.

Recently, however, Kakashi has noticed something strange about Naruto's eyes.

They now convey emotions like empathy, sympathy, and excitement.

This puzzles Kakashi, as Naruto's eyes have become unusually expressive.

When questioned, Naruto brushes it off with responses like, "It's nothing," "Don't worry about it," or "You just have to live with conviction," further deepening the mystery.

But everyone is accustomed to Naruto's quirks by now, so Kakashi doesn't dig deeper.

The truth behind Naruto's strange expressions lies in what he learned from his mother, Kushina.

She informed him that his chakra reserves are nearly ten times those of Kakashi's under normal conditions.

This knowledge leaves Naruto struggling to contain his emotions whenever he sees Kakashi—a living unit of chakra measurement.

Despite Kakashi's rigorous training under Kushina's watchful eye, which made him somewhat stronger than his counterpart in the original timeline, he still can't compete with the immense chakra reserves of the Uzumaki clan.

Naruto is only twelve years old now, but as he matures and his body strengthens, the gap will widen even further.

He might easily burn through a few hundred calories without breaking a sweat—not to mention the Nine-Tailed Fox sealed within him.

Naruto once asked Kushina how much chakra he had exactly.

Kushina, with a mysterious smile, simply told him to learn chakra perception jutsu and see it himself.

Shaking off his thoughts, Naruto puts on his training weights and starts his physical exercises.

As for the Rasengan, Flying Thunder God, and chakra-sensing training, he leaves those to his Shadow Clones.

Naruto is determined to strengthen his physique.

After all, whether he uses the Nine-Tails Chakra Mode or Sage Mode in the future, it's like adding multiple buffs to his abilities, with the Uzumaki clan's physicality and the resilience of a jinchūriki, it would be a waste not to focus on physical training.

Meanwhile, Sakura has already finished reading another book.

According to her, she has memorized the previous one completely.

Naruto is impressed—Sakura's knowledge is akin to a high school student having memorized the entire Oxford Dictionary, leaving him with nothing to say but, "That's insane."

Given Sakura's dedication, Naruto introduced her to Shizune, a medic-nin who assisted in his birth along with Sarutobi Biwako.

On the day of the Nine-Tails attack, Shizune was saved by Minato.

After several years, she left the Anbu, got married, and now works at Konoha Hospital.

She has a habit of pinching Naruto's cheeks and making him call her "sister," which at least provides enough guidance for Sakura in her medical training.

Sakura was too shy to bother Nonō Yakushi, who was always busy at the orphanage.

Now, Sakura has learned basic medical ninjutsu and can heal minor wounds.

In addition to her standard ninja tools, she now carries a medical kit and plans to further expand her medical knowledge.

Sasuke's progress with the Chidori has been relatively smooth.

He's managed to generate some sparks, but he's still far from mastering the technique.

****

One day, Team 7 received the infamous "catch-the-cat" mission.

This cat, named Tora, isn't just any cat—it's the beloved pet of the Fire Daimyo's wife.

Its frequent escapes have contributed significantly to Konoha's economy.

How the cat managed to escape from the Daimyo's residence to Konoha is anyone's guess.

Due to Lady Daimyo's special status, she's always personally received by the Hokage, Minato Namikaze, who often assigns these tasks to Team 7.

Catching the cat was uneventful, but when they returned to the Hokage's office to report, Naruto met Lady Daimyo—a heavily adorned, plump woman.

After handing over the cat, Lady Daimyo clutched it tightly, fussing over it as she was escorted out by her entourage.

Naruto couldn't help but wonder if she would hire Konoha ninjas as guards when she left, contributing even more to Konoha's economic growth.

After Lady Daimyo left, Minato stopped Kakashi, who was about to lead the team, out and said, "Hold on. I have a C-rank mission for you."

At that moment, an elderly man stumbled through the door, reeking of alcohol.

The old man wore a bamboo hat, carried luggage, and clutched a bottle of sake.

Naruto instantly recognized him—Tazuna, a famous NPC from the Land of Waves arc, the bridge builder who lied about the mission's rank and guilt-tripped Team 7 into helping him.

Tazuna eyed Naruto and the others with disdain, muttering, "Are these kids supposed to protect me? They don't look very reliable."

Naruto knew what kind of man Tazuna was, so he didn't react. But Sasuke and Sakura glared at him, clearly offended by his lack of faith in their abilities.

Minato wasn't bothered by Tazuna's attitude and calmly explained, "You requested a C-rank mission, and Team 7 is one of Konoha's top-generation squads. Kakashi Hatake, their leader, is my former student. They're more than capable of handling any situation that might arise."

Upon hearing that Kakashi was the Hokage's student, Tazuna took a closer look at the team.

Noticing their competent appearance and the blond-haired boy who resembled the Hokage, he hesitantly asked, "Is that boy... your son?"

Minato didn't hesitate to confirm, "Yes, that's my son—one of the top graduates of the Ninja Academy."

The gears in Tazuna's mind started turning. For the cost of a C-rank mission, he had managed to secure the Hokage's student and son—what a bargain!

Tazuna quickly dropped his attitude and agreed, eager to ensure they wouldn't change their minds.

Kakashi took the mission details, then turned to his team, "The mission to guard the Land of Waves might take some time, so go prepare. We'll meet at the village gate in half an hour."

Kakashi and the rest of the team departed to make their preparations. Only Naruto stayed behind, looking at Minato and saying, "Dad, can you take me home?"

Minato raised an eyebrow, puzzled that his son, already grown, would make such a request.

Naruto quickly explained, "I just want to experience the Flying Thunder God Jutsu a few more times—it might help with my training."

"Ah, I see. Alright then," Minato agreed.

Three seconds later, Naruto found himself at home, courtesy of the Namikaze Minato Express.

Kushina happened to be home as well—her squad had just completed a simple mission.

Minato briefly explained the situation before returning to his office.

"You're going away? And for a long time?" Kushina asked, her worry evident. Even though Naruto was mature for his age, she couldn't help but fret.

"I'll help you pack right away!" Kushina declared, rushing to get everything ready.

"Uh... you don't need to go through so much trouble..." Naruto only had time to reach out with a half-hearted protest as his mother bustled around, too concerned to listen.

****

Chapter Text

---

Twenty minutes later, Naruto stared in disbelief at the huge pile of luggage in the living room, towering taller than he was.

Kushina proudly explained, "This bag has enough clothes for half a month. This one has dry food and water. We've got medical supplies, weapon kits, and military food pills in this one."

"This one's full of fruit, snacks, and other treats. Over here are ninja tools, ice-cold pills, and explosive tags. Everything's ready!"

"Mom, we're going on a mission, not a camping trip. We don't need all this stuff..."

Kushina suddenly remembered something. "Oh, right! You should also take tents, sleeping bags, emergency torches, and some kitchen utensils."

With that, even more things were added to the pile.

Naruto was close to tears. "Mom, I can't carry all this! I just need some basic ninja gear and clothes."

Kushina pulled out a few scrolls. "Why can't you take it? Didn't you learn the sealing technique?"

"Seal!" With a snap, all the items were neatly packed into the scrolls. Kushina handed the scrolls to Naruto.

What could Naruto say? There's a saying: nothing is colder than when your mom thinks you're cold.

Since his mom had prepared everything, he might as well take it.

Better safe than sorry, especially with all those explosive tags. He'd give them back to her when he returned.

"Okay, I'm off!"

"Wait, take these too." Kushina handed Naruto two red-edged scrolls, one labelled "Endurance" and the other "Love."

"What's this?"

"If you're ever in danger, open both scrolls at the same time to summon help. But if you open just one, it'll release a genjutsu to protect against the enemy."

A powerful summoning? Naruto carefully tucked the scrolls away. Knowing his mom, he might end up summoning either her or his dad.

With these scrolls, Naruto felt confident that as long as he didn't go to the Village Hidden in the Rain, he'd return safely.

When Naruto arrived at the village gate, everyone else was already there, each carrying a bag.

Naruto, however, had nothing in his hands, which made him stand out.

Sakura noticed and asked, "Naruto, didn't you bring any luggage?"

"It's all here." Naruto patted the scrolls on his waist.

"Wow, those scrolls must be expensive, right?"

"No, my mom made them. She said that when she was pregnant, she had a lot of free time, so she made a bunch of them. She even sold some to help support our family."

Naruto pulled out two scrolls and handed them to Sasuke and Sakura. "These are ones I made while practising sealing. They're better than the standard ones, but not as good as my mom's. You can use them."

As for Kakashi, he could make his own. After all, he wasn't one to freeload.

Sasuke took the scroll without a word, putting it into his ninja pouch.

Sakura carefully examined her scroll before storing it away.

"Alright, everyone's here. Let's move out," Kakashi said.

As they left, Naruto glanced back and noticed the two guards at the gate weren't Izumo and Kotetsu. A small disappointment.

The group set off. Naruto and Sasuke led the way, Tazuna followed a few meters behind, and Kakashi and Sakura flanked him on either side.

Kakashi put away his *Icha Icha* novel as soon as they left the village, maybe to stay more alert.

Sakura, curious about the Land of Waves, asked, and Kakashi explained, "The Land of Waves is a small island nation. They don't have their ninja village, so they hire shinobi from the mainland."

"Our mission is to protect Tazuna on his journey home and ensure the completion of his bridge. We shouldn't run into any battles with other shinobi-at most, we'll encounter samurai or bandits."

Tazuna's eyes darted nervously. He hadn't told Konoha the full truth.

After walking for a while, they came across a small puddle on the road.

Kakashi glanced at it but said nothing, pretending to be distracted.

Naruto used his basic sensory jutsu and detected two faint chakras, both weaker than Sasuke.

Seeing that Kakashi didn't react, Naruto decided not to warn anyone. He just tensed up, ready to attack if needed.

Sasuke didn't notice anything unusual but saw Naruto's change in posture. He silently prepared for a possible fight.

When the five of them were just past the puddle, the water bulged, and two figures burst out, chains in hand, heading straight for Tazuna!

Naruto reacted instantly. With the fastest hand speed of his life, he formed a Rasengan and slammed it into the back of one of the attackers' heads.

Sasuke, just a bit slower, used his Body Flicker Technique to appear beside the other attacker and kicked him squarely in the face.

The Demon Brothers were down.

"Che, weak," Sasuke said with disdain.

Naruto looked at the man he hit with his Rasengan. The guy's head had left a hole in the ground-no way he was surviving that.

The one Sasuke kicked had crashed into a tree, smashing his head.

Naruto smirked. "If you're that weak, why even bother covering your faces? Do you think you're Kakashi? Or is the manga artist just too lazy to draw your faces?"

Kakashi, feeling slightly targeted by Naruto's comment, examined the attackers' outfits. "These are the Demon Brothers from Kirigakure. They're known for doing whatever it takes to complete a mission."

He then turned to Tazuna. "Their target was you, which means you didn't tell us that you were being pursued by shinobi. This is beyond the scope of a C-rank mission."

Tazuna, sweating, realized how close he had come to death.

Kakashi addressed Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura. "Given that the client lied about the mission's difficulty, we can abandon the mission. What do you all think?"

Sasuke, in his usual cool tone, said, "I'm fine either way." He figured that if all the enemies were this weak, it'd be good practice.

Sakura felt she didn't have the right to decide, so she went along with her teammates.

Naruto thought for a moment and then said, "We're just Genin. It's against the rules to take on missions above C-rank. Even though I believe we can handle it, this is about risking our lives..."

"Are you going to abandon me?" Tazuna's voice trembled.

Naruto shook his head. "No, I'm saying that if we risk our lives, we should get more than a C-rank reward. So...you'll need to pay us more!"

---

Chapter Text

---

Naruto's abrupt involvement nearly surprised Kakashi.

He glanced at Naruto solemnly and thought, 'When did you become so greedy for money?'

When Tazuna heard this, he immediately began to play the sympathy card, claiming that the Land of Waves was poor, that all their hopes were pinned on the bridge, and that he truly couldn't afford the fee for a B-rank mission.

Finally, Tazuna pulled out his ultimate move—moral blackmail:

"Even if you don't want to protect me, it's fine. If I die, at most my daughter and my eight-year-old grandson will resent Konoha for the rest of their lives and cry every day. But don't worry, I won't blame you. It's not your fault."

Tazuna's eyes gleamed cunningly.

Kakashi scratched his head, finding the situation troublesome. Sasuke's mouth twitched slightly, and Sakura's expression turned grim.

But Naruto wasn't fazed by this trick. He calmly said, "Well, I guess there's no choice. Why don't we put in some extra effort and head to the Land of Waves?"

Tazuna felt triumphant, thinking his plan had worked, and a sly smile crept across his face.

The team sensed that Naruto was up to something. Kakashi decided to play along with Naruto's act. "You want to continue the mission?"

"No, what I mean is, it wouldn't be good if they hated Konoha forever. So why don't we work extra hard, go to the Land of Waves, and kill his daughter and grandson? That way, the whole family will be reunited."

Naruto then turned to Tazuna with a malicious grin. "And of course, we'll take care of the real culprit who lied about the mission level first."

Tazuna collapsed to the ground in fear. "No! You can't do that!"

Naruto responded righteously, "If you eat a bowl of ramen, you should pay for it. It's only fair. We can't accept a low-level mission fee while doing a high-level mission, can we?"

Naruto was adamant about setting things right. Lying about a mission's level could have serious consequences, or it could be overlooked if Tazuna settled the matter by paying the correct commission or forfeiting the mission altogether.

After all, Tazuna's deliberate withholding of information was akin to endangering the lives of the Fourth Hokage's son and the Uchiha clan's prodigy.

In true shinobi style, ensuring the family's "neatness" wouldn't be unreasonable.

What was most infuriating was Tazuna's attempt to manipulate them through moral blackmail.

It was like reading a bad novel—where you can predict the plot exactly.

In the end, Tazuna apologized sincerely and requested Team 7 to continue protecting him.

He promised to clarify the mission level and make up the commission once they reached Konoha.

It didn't matter much to Kakashi whether they continued the mission or not. With his strength, he could handle any unexpected situation, and no village would bother to send an assassin just to kill a foreman.

Sasuke wanted to continue training and face strong opponents outside the village, so Sakura followed Kakashi's lead.

Naruto mainly wanted to test his current strength and see if he could go head-to-head with Zabuza.

So the group continued their journey. Along the way, they experienced hunger and thirst and spent the night in small inns.

But they reached the seaside pier and prepared to take the waterway.

As they boarded a motorized boat, Naruto found it fascinating.

While the land was still dominated by horse-drawn carriages, the boats had engines—a complex mix of technology.

"Now that we're here, Mr. Tazuna, why don't you tell us more about your situation?" Kakashi began the conversation.

Naruto, seated comfortably, took out some melon seeds from his scroll and started munching, offering some to his teammates as well. "Go on, let's hear your story."

So Tazuna continued with his tale, trying to evoke sympathy by explaining how the Land of Waves was oppressed by the evil merchant Gato.

The general summary was:

'Gato is ruthless, treating people like animals. The people of the Land of Waves suffer under his tyranny. However, the people are too afraid to resist.'

'Fortunately, Tazuna decided to build a bridge to rally the people's courage, shouldering all the burdens on his own...'

The atmosphere grew heavy after hearing this, but Naruto remained indifferent. If the people didn't stand up for themselves, who could they blame for being oppressed?

*Cough*, that might be a bit of an exaggeration, but the truth holds. With so many workers, can't they just pick up a hammer and sickle and fight back? If that doesn't work, why not post a bounty on the underground black market for Gato's assassination?

Just mark it as a D-rank mission and note that Gato is filthy rich. Perhaps a kind-hearted old man in his nineties would take on the task, saying, "I don't care about the reward, I'm just curious how much money Gato has."

Of course, if you don't dare to make the payment, you might find yourself having a "heart-to-heart" conversation.

It's not because the old man is stingy, it's just that there's a certain spendthrift in the organization who asks for money every day.

As Naruto was lost in these thoughts, the ship approached the dock.

This was Naruto's first time leaving the Land of Fire and stepping onto foreign soil.

For a moment, he felt a surge of emotion… and the urge to shout, "Land ahoy!"

****

After docking, there was still a long road ahead to reach Tazuna's house, and they could be attacked at any time along the way.

Naruto took out a stack of explosive tags, then grabbed some from Sasuke's ninja pouch and handed them to Sakura. "Sakura, take these for self-defence."

Sakura was the least lethal member of the team.

Sakura's hands trembled. "T-Too many."

There were dozens, if not hundreds, of explosive tags. The little money she'd earned from missions since graduating probably wouldn't cover the cost.

"It's fine. You can return what you don't use. Besides, Sasuke's family is in this business, so you can get a discount from him later," Naruto said generously, and Sasuke nodded in agreement, showing support for his teammates.

Sakura carefully stored the tags and enthusiastically answered, "I've never been in such a well-funded fight before!"

As they walked, a mist gradually formed around them, and suddenly, the sound of something slicing through the air echoed.

Kakashi quickly knocked Tazuna down and shouted, "Get down!"

The three genin reacted swiftly, crouching just in time as a massive sword, nearly two or three meters long, spun over their heads and embedded itself in a nearby tree.

A figure leapt out of the woods, landing on the sword's hilt, arrogantly turning its back to the group.

"I didn't expect to run into the famous Copy Ninja Kakashi. No wonder the Demon Brothers failed."

Kakashi also recognized Zabuza. His face was unreadable, but his eyes grew serious as he held back Sasuke, who was eager to fight. "It's the Demon of the Hidden Mist, Zabuza. This isn't an opponent you can handle. Form up and protect Mr. Tazuna."

With that, Kakashi raised his forehead protector, revealing his Sharingan.

The three genin quickly stood and formed a protective circle around Tazuna.

Naruto gauged the situation and decided that Kakashi could protect them.

Naruto secretly made some hand seals, planning to give Zabuza a nasty surprise.

---

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

----

Naruto quietly moved behind Kakashi, quickly forming three hand seals.

A sudden thought crossed his mind: 'What if I hit Kakashi with the Mysterious Art of Konoha right now?'

'No, no, focus. This is a battle,' he reminded himself.

'inclusive thoughts are dangerous.' Shaking off the weird idea, Naruto launched his ninjutsu.

"Water release: Water Dragon Jutsu!"

A massive water dragon, easily four or five meters wide, erupted from the water, cutting through the fight between Kakashi and Zabuza.

Zabuza's eyes widened in shock. 'You call that a water dragon jutsu?'

In an instant, Zabuza grabbed the giant sword at his feet, kicked off the tree trunk, and swung it with both hands, striking the water dragon's head.

The force of the strike launched him away, and he landed a bit awkwardly in the nearby lake.

Watching this, Naruto thought, 'Is this really how you're supposed to use the Executioner's Blade?'

He recalled an episode where Jūzō and Itachi were able to strike down most of the hunter-nin, but Yagura entered his Version 2 form and launched a Tailed Beast Ball toward Jūzō.

Naruto had been stunned back then—Jūzō was impaled by his sword. With little time to react, Jūzō attempted to deflect the attack with the Kubikiribōchō but failed.

'Even if Itachi didn't join Akatsuki in this timeline, Juzo probably still would've died on some mission for Kirigakure.'

It was funny how all three wielders of the Executioner's Blade—Juzo, Zabuza, and Suigetsu—ended up as rogue ninjas from Kirigakure. 'Maybe the sword has some weird curse that makes its wielders defective.'

Back to the fight.

The water dragon's head shattered, sending the rest of the water crashing into the large tree where Zabuza had been standing a moment before.

The tree, already weakened from Zabuza's earlier attack, swayed and then broke.

Water cascaded down, flooding the forest, though it was a bit of a waste.

Zabuza stood on the water, raising one hand to the sky and the other in front of his chest, striking a pose that practically screamed mid-level boss.

He sighed dramatically, "As expected of Hatake Kakashi—using such a large-scale Water Style jutsu without me noticing!"

It made sense—no one would think that three genin could pull off such a high-level Water Style jutsu.

Kakashi, though, didn't bother correcting him. 'When did you see me using a Water Style jutsu?'

But explaining things mid-battle would only give away his weaknesses, and Kakashi wasn't about to do that.

"Hidden Mist Jutsu!" Zabuza's voice echoed as the already thick fog became even denser, and he disappeared into the mist.

"Everyone, be careful. He's a master of silent killing," Kakashi warned the team.

"Zabuza killed over 100 of his fellow students during the Kirigakure graduation exam, earning him the title 'Demon of the Hidden Mist.' Don't take him lightly."

Zabuza's eerie voice seemed to come from everywhere at once:

"There are eight vital points in the human body. The throat, the cervical vertebrae, the lungs, the liver…"

"So, where should I start?"

Naruto muttered, 'Where's the silent killing if all you do is yap?'

The fog thickened so much that even Kakashi, standing just two meters away, was almost invisible.

"Shadow Clone Jutsu!"

Twenty shadow clones popped up around Naruto, forming a protective circle around Sakura and Tazuna.

Suddenly, one of the clones pulled out a kunai and stabbed another clone. Naruto and the others immediately realized, 'Right, we've got sensory ninjutsu!'

Naruto made a mental note: 'No. 001, you're getting extra ramen tonight.'

Naruto started using the sensory ninjutsu he had recently learned to search for Zabuza.

But it wasn't easy. Lots of shinobi had techniques to hide their presence, and Zabuza was a master of it.

So, Naruto and his clones didn't find anything for a while.

"Oh, shadow clones? That's pretty impressive for someone your age, kid. You're worthy of being killed by me," Zabuza taunted.

Sasuke and Sakura were already trembling.

Sasuke was overwhelmed by the intense killing intent of the two Jōnin.

The feeling of helplessness in the face of death made him consider ending it all—he even raised a kunai to do it.

A nearby shadow clone noticed and smacked him on the back of the head. "Get it together, or I'll tell Big Brother Itachi about your cowardice."

Sasuke snapped out of it instantly. 'I can't disappoint my brother!'

With his Sharingan now activated, Sasuke's eyes sharpened as he searched desperately for Zabuza.

The tomoe in his eyes spun wildly, and in a moment, one tomoe turned into two.

The clone was speechless. 'What the…? Is 'Itachi' like an instant power-up for you? Just mentioning him levels you up?'

As for why Naruto wasn't affected by the killing intent and still had the energy to joke around—he grew up with the Nine-Tails. Zabuza's aura was nothing compared to Kurama's.

"Sasuke!"

Sasuke threw his kunai with all his might. Naruto was still muttering to himself, 'What a coward. You said you were going to kill me, but you attacked Kakashi instead.'

As Zabuza swung his blade at Kakashi, Kakashi dodged, but the attack turned out to be a water clone, which dispersed on impact.

In truth, Zabuza was in a tough spot. He wanted to kill the yellow-haired kid or Tazuna first, but the shadow clones surrounded them like an iron wall.

There was no way he could slip through without being noticed. Assassination requires stealth—if you're caught, it's just an attack, not an assassination.

So, Zabuza decided to take out Kakashi first—the strongest opponent. Once he was down, the kids would be easy.

But somehow, those two brats sensed his water clone's movements. 'Are they using some kind of sensory ninjutsu?'

If Zabuza kept targeting Kakashi, the two kids would keep getting in the way.

But if he went for Tazuna directly, the shadow clones might hold him off just long enough for Kakashi to interfere.

'Maybe I should wipe out all the shadow clones with one strike or lure them away. I can hold off Kakashi with my main body while the water clone deals with Tazuna.'

Zabuza finalized his plan, hidden in the mist. He swiftly formed 44 hand seals in rapid succession.

Zabuza unleashed the Water Dragon Jutsu using the lake water, but it wasn't as strong as the Water Dragon Jutsu Naruto had just used.

The water dragon roared and surged forward, aiming to wipe out all twenty-three targets, including the shadow clones.

No way three genin could defend against that!

The five clones in the front row were obliterated as expected, unable to react in time.

But as the first clone disappeared, Naruto immediately reacted, forming two seals.

"Water release: Water Formation Wall (Senju Tobirama's Version)!"

---

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

Normally, a Water Wall takes six hand seals to create, raising a water barrier from the ground. But Tobirama's version only needs two seals.

A massive amount of water shoots out, spiralling and rising to form a hollow water column.

If left uncapped, it almost looks like a water-based version of a different jutsu.

Zabuza's Water Dragon clashed with Naruto's Water Wall. The dragon's head and body started to wear down, some of it merging into the Water Wall and strengthening it, while the rest splashed out, injuring a nearby shadow clone.

Naruto, Sakura, and Tazuna were safe inside the Water Wall.

The remaining five shadow clones rushed toward where the Water Dragon had gone, each holding a small blue orb.

Zabuza swung his giant sword, slicing through three clones with one swipe and kicking another aside.

When the last clone was about to smash its Rasengan into his waist, Zabuza blocked with his sword.

The Rasengan hit the blade, causing a thin crack to appear in it before the clone was taken out too.

At the same time, the Water Dragon dissipated, and the Water Wall gradually came down.

Naruto noticed Kakashi snapping out of his stillness, charging at Zabuza with lightning crackling in his hand.

Kakashi's Lightning Cutter sprint was incredibly fast. Realizing he couldn't dodge in time, Zabuza reluctantly raised his large sword to block.

With a loud clang, the Executioner's Blade shattered, the broken half scratching Zabuza's calf before sinking into the water.

Just then, an ice wall shot up, blocking Kakashi's attack.

"Ice Release?" Kakashi dispersed the Lightning Cutter, stepping back cautiously, eyeing the masked boy who had come to Zabuza's aid again.

"Retreat!" Zabuza growled, knowing his leg injury would only get worse if he kept fighting. He had no choice but to pull back and recover.

Haku quickly helped Zabuza retreat, but Kakashi didn't pursue them.

As the thick mist slowly cleared, Naruto sent several shadow clones to try and retrieve the broken blade that had sunk into the water.

They couldn't find it, so the clones dispersed themselves in frustration, feeling guilty for not completing their task.

Naruto rubbed his temples, a bit exasperated. "You guys tried hard, why feel bad about it?"

Kakashi lowered his headband to cover his Sharingan, sighing in relief. "Zabuza probably won't be back for a while. Let's keep moving."

Naruto watched Kakashi for a moment. "Did we win this time, or was it just another draw?" he wondered. Kakashi didn't seem too worn out.

The group of four, plus Tazuna, continued westward. Naruto couldn't shake the feeling that something was off.

Sakura was annoyed that she hadn't done much in the fight, despite Naruto giving her so many explosive tags she never got to use.

Sasuke, with his two-tomoe Sharingan active, was lost in thought, already thinking about when he could spar with Naruto again.

A grin spread across his face, nearly reaching his ears.

Suddenly, Naruto remembered something.

"Hey, Kurama, can you sense if Zabuza's coming back?"

"Of course," Kurama replied curtly.

"Then why didn't you warn me earlier? I could've hit him with a Water Cannon and ended it."

"Didn't you say you wanted to practice your sensory ninjutsu?"

"But that's for training. This was a real fight. I can practice later."

"Don't you humans believe that progress happens faster when your life's on the line?"

"But Zabuza isn't strong enough to make me feel any real danger."

"Are you relying on that white-haired guy up front, or the two scrolls Kushina left you?"

"Both. And besides, you give me plenty of confidence too..."

"Wait, did you just call my mom by her name? Are you not mad anymore?"

Kurama is usually called Kushina "that woman" or something similar. Why the change today?

"This fox can call her whatever he wants."

"Oh," Naruto mumbled, feeling a bit awkward.

Kurama fell silent. His attitude toward Naruto's family has changed a lot over the years.

It started with Naruto himself. Kurama noticed the kid was never afraid of him, even telling him stories when they first met.

When Naruto learned the Shadow Clone Jutsu, his first thought was to lend it to Shukaku, and now he even complained when Kurama didn't help him.

Then there was Kushina. She had said something pretty bold to Kurama back when she first sealed him: "You have the power to dominate the world, but I can dominate you."

For over a decade, Kurama had hated her, wanting to crush her when he was finally free, even though his real anger was aimed at the one who controlled him with the Sharingan.

But later, as Naruto's sealed space evolved, so did Kushina's. The fox and the woman argued daily.

But no matter how intense their fights got, Kushina never restricted Kurama's movements within the seal.

Oddly enough, Kurama started to enjoy their quarrels because Kushina treated him like a person, not a beast.

And then there was Minato and Naruto. Their chakra had a warmth to it, and under Naruto's influence, Kurama noticed they held no malice toward him.

The most surprising thing was that whenever Naruto's family talked about Kurama, they referred to him as "he" in the common ninja language, not "it."

Kurama closed his eyes. "Strange humans..."

---

The group finally arrived safely at Tazuna's house.

They were greeted with what seemed like a modest but hearty dinner, with plates full of fish.

Naruto thought it must be a speciality of the Land of Waves and decided to give it a try.

Tsunami, Tazuna's daughter, wasn't bad at cooking, and everyone ate with gratitude.

The next day, Naruto, realizing he wouldn't stay healthy without some greens, took out a scroll his mother had prepared.

He pulled out a variety of vegetables, fresh meat, and other ingredients, handing them to Tsunami while asking for a healthier, balanced meal.

Tsunami didn't refuse, though she felt a bit embarrassed, knowing the household was already tight on resources.

After breakfast, Tazuna went to work on the bridge, and Kakashi took the students to guard him while they trained nearby.

Kakashi leaned against a tree, his hands in his pockets.

Sakura sat under the tree, fully engrossed in her book.

But while Kakashi read an 18+ novel, Sakura was deep into medical textbooks. Their reading choices couldn't have been more different.

Sasuke, with his Sharingan active, focused on honing his Chidori, the sound of chirping birds echoing through the area.

He pierced a tree with his first Chidori, then another with a second, grinning like the twelve-year-old he was.

It seemed like he might unlock a new level of his Uchiha heritage at any moment.

Naruto, meanwhile, released 30 shadow clones.

Ten worked on improving sensory ninjutsu and the Flying Thunder God jutsu, ten trained Rasengans to smash trees and stones, and the last ten worked on refining his wind nature transformation.

The real Naruto strapped on weights, ran a few kilometres to warm up and then found a random tree to punch and kick.

Kakashi glanced up occasionally, watching his three students. It was great—everyone knew what to work on and was making progress without much guidance.

The birds chirping here and the explosions were a bit noisy, but Kakashi contentedly turned to the next page of his book.

Only to find that the chapter had ended.

--

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

In the evening, the team of four—Naruto, Sasuke, Sakura, and Kakashi—headed home with Tazuna after a long day of work on the bridge.

Naruto had pushed himself to the point of exhaustion, as usual.

The strain from maintaining 30 shadow clones all day finally caught up with him.

As the clones dispersed and their fatigue returned to his body, Naruto staggered and began to fall forward.

Kakashi caught him just in time, pulling him onto his back. Naruto laughed, feeling a familiar warmth from Kakashi, a bond he cherished.

'Just for this, Kakashi, I'll get Jiraiya's autograph for you one day,' Naruto thought.

Unaware of Naruto's thoughts, Kakashi sighed and spoke softly, "Naruto, using shadow clones to train can speed up your progress, but it also doubles the fatigue. You're pushing yourself too hard. If you keep this up, you'll hurt yourself."

Naruto brushed off the concern with a grin, "It's fine, sensei. I'll just sleep it off tonight."

But deep down, he knew he couldn't continue at this pace. They were not in Konoha; they were in dangerous territory.

Zabuza could attack at any moment. He needed to be more careful with how many clones he used the next day.

It wasn't that Naruto wanted to work himself to death—it was the fox's reminder that made him doubt whether he could make progress without facing a life-and-death crisis.

In his previous life, he'd lived a comfortable, sheltered life, far from any real danger.

He'd never even met a thief in 20 years, let alone experienced a true sense of crisis.

He used to be an ordinary student who liked to quietly level up in games until he could overpower others with ease.

Now, in this world, Naruto had plenty of ways to protect himself. Unless the entire Akatsuki gang showed up to snatch Kurama, it was hard for him to feel any real danger.

Kakashi then turned to Sasuke, offering advice. "Sasuke, with your current stamina, using Chidori four or five times a day is your limit. It's not that you don't have enough chakra, but Chidori puts a huge strain on your body."

"Yeah," Sasuke replied, his face pale. He was so drained that he needed Sakura's help to walk.

Sasuke didn't say much. He had been pushing himself hard, trying to keep up with Naruto's insane training regime.

But even with his Sharingan, Sasuke felt like he was no match for Naruto's monstrous stamina.

Sakura didn't expend as much energy as the others. She spent most of her time studying medical books, taking breaks every hour or two for physical training to stay in shape; her goal was clear: to become a qualified medical ninja as quickly as possible.

Because of this, she could now carry Sasuke on the road with a contented smile.

Back at Tazuna's house, Kakashi laid Naruto down at the dining table. Sakura reluctantly let go of Sasuke's hand.

Seeing Tazuna's tired face and Naruto and Sasuke covered in dust, Inari couldn't help but think of his father. Tears welled up in his eyes as he cried out.

"Why do you all work so hard? No matter how hard you try, you can't beat Gato's men. Why do you even fight?!!!"

After shouting, Inari ran back to his room and locked the door.

"Inari..." Tsunami, concerned for her son, chased after him.

Kakashi, Sakura, and Sasuke exchanged confused glances, but Naruto seemed to understand.

He remembered the reason behind Inari's outburst. Frankly, Naruto didn't like the kid's attitude.

Naruto had to resist the urge to smack Inari, reminding himself, "He's just a kid." What's the point of arguing with an 8-year-old when Naruto himself was only 12?

There were plenty of kids who had gone through worse. Look at the children in the Konoha orphanage, or even Sasuke, who lost his entire family. Heck, even Kakashi lost his father at a young age.

Did these people give up? No. The real problem was this messed-up ninja world.

Maybe if Madara Uchiha had forcibly united the world and then let Hashirama Senju rule with a softer touch, things might have been better.

But that was a pipe dream. Both Madara and Hashirama were too stubborn. And with Black Zetsu manipulating things behind the scenes, chaos was inevitable.

But was Black Zetsu wrong? After all, he was trying to save his mother by any means necessary.

In the end, it all came down to the gods who created this world. Their whims led to tragedies everywhere.

"That kid was never like this before," Tazuna began to explain Inari's backstory to everyone.

It turned out that when Gato first arrived in the Land of Waves, he used fear to control the people.

Inari's father, who dared to resist, became an example—killed by Gato to crush the spirit of the entire country.

Ironically, Inari's father had an X-shaped scar on his chin. Naruto couldn't help but wonder if this guy was somehow related to Danzo, remembering the conspiracy theories he used to joke about when watching the anime.

The team couldn't do much to help. Naruto knew that no amount of talking would solve Inari's psychological issues.

After all, they were ninjas, not therapists. They couldn't just wave away his problems.

Their job was to deal with Gato, and once he was out of the picture, Inari might start to heal. Until then, they'd focus on their mission.

After a quiet dinner, everyone went back to rest.

The next morning, Naruto was full of energy again, as if he hadn't been dead tired the day before.

Sasuke, however, was still recovering. He clenched his fists, frustrated.

"Damn it, how long will it take to catch up to him?"

Kakashi noticed the state of his students. In the past, it wasn't as obvious.

But now, with Naruto around, Sasuke's progress seemed more normal in comparison.

They started their training as usual. Naruto decided to halve the number of shadow clones he used, saving more energy for potential emergencies.

Sasuke hadn't fully recovered yet, so he took it easier than before. Sakura continued her routine of studying and physical exercise, sticking to her own pace.

Kakashi was pleased. His students seemed to be listening to his advice, and as a teacher, it was satisfying to see.

Even the way he turned the pages of his book was more relaxed.

Thanks to the calm weather the day before, a few more workers had come to help Tazuna with the bridge, speeding up the project slightly.

And so, three days passed, with a small boat slowly rowing across the sea...

---

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

"Naruto, there's malicious intent approaching," Kurama suddenly warned.

Naruto, who was warming up with a run, stopped abruptly.

His fingers touched the ground as he closed his eyes to sense the presence. "They aren't hiding their presence... It must be Zabuza and Haku."

"Kakashi-sensei, we have an emergency!" Naruto quickly removed his training weights and sprinted in the direction of Tazuna, with Sasuke and Sakura following closely behind.

Kakashi was even faster. By the time the three of them arrived, Kakashi had already blocked the senbon Haku had aimed at Tazuna with his kunai.

Zabuza was still standing on the bridge more than five meters away, taunting, "It's been a long time, Kakashi. Are you still dragging these brats around? Don't you think they're just deadweight?"

Kakashi, never one to back down, smirked and retorted, "Aren't you also dragging a brat along this time?"

"Hmph," Zabuza sneered, "Haku is different from them. I've trained him since he was a child, and today, nothing will stop us!"

With that, Zabuza began forming seals to use the Hidden Mist Jutsu.

Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura arrived at the battlefield just in time. Seeing the seals forming, Naruto threw a kunai and shouted, "Sakura! Sasuke!"

"Understood!" Sakura also threw a kunai.

Zabuza, dodging the kunai, scoffed, "Such childish tricks... wait, an explosive tag?"

His eyes widened as he quickly leapt sideways, barely avoiding the explosion.

Sasuke, with his Sharingan activated, had already predicted Zabuza's landing spot and launched the Phoenix Fire Release, sending a barrage of fireballs toward him.

Zabuza, still in mid-air, had to pull out his massive sword to deflect the fireballs, his actions clumsy and awkward.

Though not particularly damaging, the attack was undeniably humiliating, prompting Zabuza to roar, "You brats!"

Naruto turned to Sakura, "Sakura, don't forget to keep using those explosive tags. We can't let him complete any jutsu!"

"Got it!" Sakura replied eagerly, glad to finally contribute.

She quickly threw three more shuriken, each laced with explosive tags.

Naruto then shouted to Kakashi, "Kakashi-sensei! We'll handle him with long-range attacks. Just hold him off until we wear him down!"

"Leave it to me," Kakashi said, remembering how well the team had worked together during the graduation exam.

He was confident that as long as he took out Haku quickly, the kids could manage until he returned.

"Boom! Boom! Boom!" Sakura's shuriken explosions forced Zabuza to keep dodging. The blasts blew his headband off, leaving him seething with rage.

"Don't get cocky, you brats! Do you even know who I am?! Haku, keep Kakashi busy. I'll take care of these kids!"

"Yes, Zabuza-sama!" Haku, trusting in Zabuza's strength, moved to engage Kakashi.

As Kakashi and Haku clashed, the battlefield shifted further away, leaving Tazuna in the middle of the chaos, confused and unsure of what to do.

Naruto quickly formed the Water Dragon Release and sent a massive water dragon hurtling toward Zabuza. Despite his efforts, Zabuza was forced to defend.

Whenever an enemy starts talking during battle, Naruto sees it as an opportunity. If you don't take advantage of their distraction, you're wasting the moment.

Zabuza dodged the water dragon, splashes of water hitting his face, bringing him back into focus. He realized he had to be cautious—these kids weren't ordinary Genin.

Although Zabuza was reluctant to admit it, he recognized that these brats were skilled enough to force him into a tactical retreat.

He wanted to use the Hidden Mist Jutsu, but every time he tried, Sakura's explosive tags interrupted him.

Sakura's physical skills hadn't improved much since graduation, but watching Sasuke train with the Body Flicker and Chidori every day had sharpened her eyesight.

If she couldn't track Sasuke's high-speed movements, how could she admire his handsome face? This was the power of love (obsession) and affection (madness).

Zabuza desperately tried to avoid getting blown up by the explosive tags, but before he could regroup, Naruto's Water Release or Sasuke's Fire Release would be right on top of him.

The team's seamless coordination kept him from getting close, and their relentless mid-to-long-range attacks prevented him from forming seals.

The plan was clear: either take him down from a distance or stall until Kakashi could help.

No matter how laid-back Kakashi usually was, he was still one of Konoha's elite join. He wouldn't struggle against Haku for long, right?... Right?

Ten minutes passed, and Zabuza was growing increasingly frustrated.

He tried to charge forward multiple times, but his attempts were always thwarted.

He couldn't help but question how this pink-haired girl had so many explosive tags.

It seemed endless! Were they free in Konoha? Was their economy tanking from overproduction?

And that blond brat—was he cheating? How could his Water Release be stronger than Zabuza's own, without even using seawater?

Meanwhile, the Uchiha kid was sweating but still keeping up. What kind of monsters were these Genin?

Something was off. The Uchiha's Fire Release was stronger than any he had seen before, in both scale and temperature.

If this was the standard for Genin, what were those other Chunin he'd encountered?

Naruto didn't know that Zabuza was on the verge of losing it.

He only knew that Sasuke couldn't hold out much longer, so he decided to end it.

As Zabuza dodged yet another explosive tag, Naruto formed the seals and shouted:

"Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu!"

Ten shadow clones appeared, and together with Naruto, they all formed seals:

"Water Release: Water Dragon Jutsu!" x11

Today, Naruto would show Zabuza what it meant to be outclassed by sheer numbers and tactics.

Zabuza's eyes widened as he saw eleven water dragons blocking all his escape routes, and he muttered in disbelief:

"You call this a Water Jutsu?!"

****

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

Eleven Water Dragons collided with each other, but they didn't slice through.

Unable to cut cleanly, they had to adjust their positions, managing to form six seals to summon a Water Wall.

Compared to Tobirama Senju's version, it was like the difference between a wall of rammed earth and a cement-brick wall.

The Water Dragons crashed down, shattering the Water Wall on impact, and a large wave of water surged forward, washing away much of the building materials.

A few seconds later, Naruto spotted Zabuza again.

Zabuza was kneeling on one knee, his head lowered, one hand on the ground, and gripping his sword with the other.

A small hole was pressed into the bridge deck by his knee, with fine cracks spreading out around it.

The ten shadow clones charged forward under the lead of clone number 001, each wielding a small blue Rasengan.

Naruto had learned from countless battles to never leave an enemy alive, even if they seemed incapacitated. Who knew if they were faking it? (From novels & anime)

The shadow clones understood this as well, so without hesitation, they aimed their Rasengans at Zabuza.

Suddenly, Zabuza raised his head and threw a smoke bomb on the ground. Smoke quickly enveloped Zabuza and the ten shadow clones.

Naruto then sensed two clones being slashed apart, followed by several explosions within the smoke, their echoes reverberating across the bridge.

When the smoke cleared, Zabuza was gone. The nine remaining clones looked around but couldn't find him.

They scattered—some searching the distance, others checking the sea on both sides, while a few stayed close to Naruto's original body.

Sakura remained vigilant, her gaze sharp. Naruto glanced at the clones, frowning.

"One, two, three... wait, how did eight clones become nine?" Something felt off. Naruto's eyes widened—one of the shadow clones was an imposter!

At the same moment, Sasuke's Sharingan flared red, and he shouted, "Naruto! The chakra in the front clone is off!" As he spoke, he quickly formed a Chidori.

Just as Sasuke finished speaking, the clone transformed back into Zabuza, who slashed down with his massive sword, yelling, "Brat, die!"

Zabuza had used the smoke to conceal his movements, killing the two nearest clones before transforming into Naruto's likeness and blending in with the shadow clones.

Sasuke rushed forward with Chidori, striking Zabuza's arm. The sword slipped from Zabuza's grip, clattering to the ground, while golden chains wrapped around his legs, immobilizing him.

Sakura's kunai flew, pinning Zabuza's arms. This time, she didn't activate the explosive tags attached, worried about accidentally injuring Sasuke due to their proximity.

Zabuza grunted, looking down at the chains on his legs in shock. "What's happening? My chakra... Could this be a sealing technique? How is this possible? This brat…"

Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura all breathed a sigh of relief. Sasuke deactivated his Sharingan, panting as he leaned on his knees.

The day's battles had exhausted him, with almost continuous use of Fire Style jutsu and Chidori.

Sakura started tidying up her ninja tools. She grimaced as she realized how many she'd used, lamenting, "So many kunai… How many did I throw out today..."

After a moment's thought, Naruto controlled the golden chains to extend and wrap around Zabuza's upper body, binding him like a mummy.

At that moment, Kakashi approached, holding the unconscious Haku. Upon seeing Zabuza's bound form, memories of a painful past resurfaced, causing his eyelids to twitch.

Still, seeing someone else in such a predicament made Kakashi almost want to laugh. He coughed and joked, "Isn't this Zabuza, who looked down on the kids next to me? Why did you end up losing so quickly?"

"Hmph, it's just the way of the world. If you're going to kill me, then do it," Zabuza said with hardened resolve.

He'd already accepted his fate when he failed to assassinate the Mizukage.

As a ninja, dying on a mission was an honourable death. He couldn't help but glance at Haku.

Naruto also glanced at Haku, focusing on his neck. There was an Adam's apple, though not very prominent. "So, he is a guy," Naruto thought.

"Kakashi-sensei, what should we do with these two now?" Naruto asked.

Kakashi replied, "There are generally three ways to handle this situation. First, we could hand them over to Kirigakure since they are rogue ninjas from there. Second, we could kill them on the spot, which is the usual approach when dealing with rogue ninjas. Third, we could bring them back to Konoha, though that might attract a pursuit squad, which would be troublesome."

"Wait!" Zabuza struggled to speak, his expression shifting.

Finally, he said, "I'm just a rogue ninja; do with me as you will. But Haku… he's only a wandering ninja, following me temporarily. Please, don't…"

"Zabuza-sama!" Haku, regaining consciousness, cried out with tears in his eyes. "I failed to complete my mission; I'm just a useless tool. You don't have to do this for me!"

Zabuza roared, "If you're a tool, then shut up!"

"I didn't expect the Demon of the Mist to say something like that," Kakashi said, scratching his head. The situation was proving difficult, and he wasn't exactly cold-blooded.

Naruto didn't want to kill them either. There wasn't any deep hatred; it was just a conflict between ninjas, essentially a professional rivalry.

In his past life, Naruto had admired these two—a pair of tragic partners who shared a deep bond.

Even though some might call him soft-hearted, Naruto thought they deserved a better ending.

But figuring out how to resolve this was tricky. Suddenly, an idea struck Naruto. "Leave it to me!"

Under the puzzled gazes of his teammates, Naruto used a sealing jutsu on both Haku and Zabuza, sealing away their chakra.

Then, he removed the golden chains and tied them up with regular ropes.

"The chains are strong but consume a lot of chakra. Even though I've got plenty, it's always good to save some when you can," Naruto said, clapping his hands. "Better safe than sorry, right?"

With that, Naruto said, "Wait here for a bit, I need to make a call."

(Tazuna, who had been watching everything, thought to himself, "Does anyone remember me?")

---

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

Naruto closed his eyes and prepared to activate his mental link with Kurama.

"Hey, Kurama, do me a favor!"

"What do you want now?" Kurama responded, hearing Naruto's request but unsure what Naruto was up to. Was he asking him for help making a call?

Naruto grinned. "You should be able to contact the other half of yourself—help me reach my mom."

Kurama stared at Naruto with a hint of annoyance.

Naruto continued, playing his trump card: "Come on, help me out, and once we're done here, you can get back to eating all the tasty food in Konoha."

With some reluctance, Kurama contacted the other half of his chakra, and Naruto was pulled into a strange space where he encountered the other half of Kurama.

This was a special way of communicating with tailed beasts.

In the anime, during the Fourth Great Ninja War, Naruto used this method to meet other Jinchūriki and tailed beasts, they even granted him some of their chakras.

For Naruto, this felt like a video call chat room—better than the virtual conference calls the Akatsuki organized.

"Yo, other Kurama, how's it going?" Naruto greeted with a smile.

Since there was no distinction between Yin and Yang at the time of the sealing, the two halves of Kurama looked identical.

To make it easier, let's call the Kurama in Kushina's body the "Red Kurama" and the one in Naruto's body the "Orange Kurama."

Red Kurama stared at Naruto for a while, then suddenly smirked. "Hello, kid."

System Message: *Uzumaki Kushina has joined the chat room.*

Of course, the above message was just something Naruto made up when he saw Kushina appear.

"Where am I?" Kushina asked, still a bit disoriented. Kurama had suddenly told her that Naruto needed to speak with her and asked her to cooperate, so she showed up rather confused.

"Mom," Naruto called out, waving.

"Naruto? What's going on?" Kushina asked, still trying to figure out what kind of ninjutsu this was.

"This is a special communication method with Kurama. He can explain it to you later. For now, can you help me contact Dad? I need to ask him for something."

Naruto then told Kushina everything that had happened after she left, focusing on the situation with Haku and Zabuza.

He explained that he wanted to help them but didn't know how to do it.

"I'm still just a twelve-year-old kid, so of course I have to ask my parents for help with things I can't solve. It's not too much to expect a father to come up with a solution for his son, right?"

"Alright," Kushina replied, understanding what Naruto was asking. "You want to save those two, but you don't know how to do it."

"I'm on a mission with Hinata and the others right now, so I'll send a shadow clone to inform Minato."

"Okay, fine. Kurama can contact me like this again if needed."

System Message: *Naruto Uzumaki has left the chat room.*

Again, this was just Naruto's playful imagination.

"Thanks, Kurama. My mom will contact me later."

"Annoying," Kurama grumbled.

Naruto opened his eyes and said, "I've told Mom everything, so Dad's going to have a headache pretty soon."

"Do you have any ninjutsu that can directly contact Konoha?" Kakashi asked, considering the tactical and strategic uses of Naruto's communication method.

"No, this technique is something only I and my mom can use right now."

Unless, of course, Naruto distributed Kurama's chakra to others and tried to create a Kurama-linked network—but that would require Kurama to act as the server.

Given Kurama's temper, it would be a miracle if he wasn't picky about it.

Or there was another way—one Naruto had read about in a novel—by bringing a fragment of the Slug Sage out of the Shikkotsu Forest.

By splitting it into multiple small slug clones, each person could have one in their hand.

Since all the small slugs share the same consciousness with the main Slug Sage, their information would synchronize, and the slugs could act as mobile phones for real-time communication.

The problem is that the slugs summoned by the summoning technique have a time limit.

When the time expires, they return to the Shikkotsu Forest, so they can't stay around for long.

Additionally, the number of slugs Tsunade can summon with her chakra is also limited.

Maybe when Tsunade returns to Konoha, she can research a way to improve the summoning contract, finding a method to keep summoned creatures around without continuously draining the summoner's chakra.

Naruto's family is proficient in sealing techniques, space-time ninjutsu, and summoning. Maybe they really could figure it out someday.

Kakashi had already deduced from Naruto's explanation that it was either due to the special blood connection of the Uzumaki clan or the unique ability of Naruto as a Jinchūriki.

Either way, it didn't seem like this method could be widely applied anytime soon.

With some time before Konoha responded, Naruto went up to Zabuza and asked, "Hey, why hasn't Gato sent his men to take care of things these past few days?"

Zabuza snorted disdainfully. "He has no men left."

"No men? What do you mean?"

Zabuza's expression darkened as he explained, "Remember when my Kubikiribōchō got broken by you a few days ago?"

Everyone glanced at the large sword. Naruto thought about the Kubikiribōchō's unique ability and had an idea of what happened.

"I remember the broken blade sinking to the bottom of the water," Kakashi said, picking up the now-intact Kubikiribōchō. There were no signs of any repairs.

Zabuza sneered. "The Kubikiribōchō isn't an ordinary sword. Whether it's broken or damaged, as long as it absorbs human blood, it can gradually restore itself."

"Now that my sword is fully restored, how much blood do you think it absorbed? And where do you think that blood came from? If it weren't for the principle that ninja don't kill their employers..."

Everyone's expressions changed as they pieced together the situation.

Haku tried to explain, perhaps to save face for Zabuza:

That day, after the failed assassination attempt on Tazuna, Zabuza returned injured and was mocked by Gato and his men. Gato even put a knife to Haku's neck.

Already in a foul mood from being bested by a bunch of kids, Zabuza snapped when they threatened the person he cared about most, and he went on a rampage, leaving Gato with no subordinates.

This was interesting—many in the Land of Waves despised Gato, and he had been oppressing the people with his hired samurai, ronin, and thugs.

But now, with no men left, who knows what the angry citizens of the Land of Waves will do?

Naruto didn't care much either way. It was an internal matter for the people of the Land of Waves. His only responsibility was to inform Tazuna of the situation.

Whatever Tazuna decided to do with that information was up to him.

If Gato ended up being killed by the angry civilians, it might just mean that Tazuna would finally have the money to pay for the mission.

Just as everyone was about to continue their conversation, Naruto received a message from Konoha.

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"Hey, Naruto, I need you to hand me that special kunai."

"A special kunai? Sure!"

Naruto pulled out the Flying Thunder God Kunai and placed it on the ground, recalling his days of playing video games, where he always carried a warding totem for extra vision.

This kunai served as Minato's teleportation marker. Whenever he went out, he always took one along; it made him feel more secure.

"Hey, Kurama, why didn't you create a chat room this time?"

Kurama thought about it for a second, then glanced at Naruto with irritation. "I did, but then Kushina and I got into a fight."

"Huh? Weren't you both fine just now?"

"Ask her yourself when you get back." Kurama closed his eyes, clearly done with the conversation. Why should he explain?

It was all because this brat had exposed their secret communication method.

Then Kushina started demanding that they should chat with Naruto more often, like daily phone calls.

Seriously? This old fox is the Nine-Tails, the strongest-tailed beast! Did they expect him to be a messenger for his mother and son every day? How embarrassing. That's how the fight started.

Naruto was puzzled but didn't dwell on it.

After all, Kurama and Kushina argued daily, and it only seemed to strengthen their bond.

Naruto wondered if bringing out the kunai now meant his father wanted to teleport over himself.

After a while, Minato appeared, wearing his forehead protector, blue ninja attire, and his signature Hokage cloak.

"Dad, why'd you come here in person?" Naruto asked.

"Because this involves one of my current plans, and I needed to bring them back."

"Knew it," Kakashi thought as he saw Naruto take out the kunai. He wasn't surprised to see Minato.

"Lord Fourth!" Sakura exclaimed, shocked that Minato had travelled from Konoha to the Land of Waves in an instant.

Although the Flying Thunder God Jutsu is Minato's signature jutsu, not everyone knows the details.

Many even confuse it with simple teleportation, so it made sense that Sakura was clueless.

"Uncle Minato," Sasuke greeted politely.

Minato nodded in response, smiling. "Kushina informed me about what was happening. You all did well on this mission. Leave Zabuza and Haku to me."

The team, proud of their work, smiled and wondered what Minato had planned.

Minato turned to Zabuza and Haku, who were securely bound, and asked, "You're Momochi Zabuza, the Demon of the Mist, and one of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen, right?"

"Fourth Hokage, the famed Yellow Flash of Konoha. I've heard much about you," Zabuza replied with cautious respect.

Naruto observed the scene, feeling it resembled the tense negotiations when Kakashi first met Zabuza. Was this some ninja custom he didn't know about?

Luckily, Minato cut through the awkwardness. "I'll be direct. I need your help with something. It won't violate your ninja code, and if you succeed, it'll benefit you."

Zabuza remained silent for a moment before glancing at Haku. "Looks like I don't have much choice."

"Then return to Konoha with me, and we'll discuss the details."

Minato then turned to Tazuna, his expression turning serious. "Mr. Tazuna, regarding your deception and the false mission rank, I expect you to come to Konoha after the bridge is completed to explain yourself and help with the aftermath. Is that clear?"

"Y-Yes, of course!" Tazuna stammered, shocked by the young Hokage's stern demeanour.

Sakura tugged on Naruto's sleeve and whispered, "Hey, Naruto, isn't Lord Hokage supposed to be gentle? Why is he so strict today?"

Naruto replied, "Because he's Hokage. He's gentle with his own, but that old man tried to trick us, so it's only right to be strict. They say that during negotiations with the Land of Lightning a few years ago, Dad's presence was even scarier."

Sakura nodded, trying to understand.

This was how a Hokage should be: kind to his own, like the friendly neighbour everyone loves, but firm with outsiders.

"We'll head back to Konoha now," Minato said, preparing to teleport with Zabuza and Haku.

Naruto leaned in, "Dad, can your chakra handle such a long distance?"

"It's fine. This distance isn't as taxing as summoning Gamabunta. And don't underestimate your dad's chakra reserves."

"Oh, do you want to take us back too? We're done here anyway," Naruto asked hopefully.

Before Minato could respond, Kakashi spoke up, "No, Naruto. This is our mission. We started it, so we'll finish it ourselves. Completing the mission properly is part of a ninja's training."

"Oh," Naruto sighed, resigning himself to walk back. "You ninjas have so many rules." But he didn't argue. When he mastered the Flying Thunder God Jutsu, he could teleport home while others walked.

Minato ruffled Naruto's hair and turned to Kakashi with a proud smile. "You're becoming a great teacher, Kakashi."

"Ah, it's nothing," Kakashi replied, embarrassed by the praise.

Naruto couldn't resist teasing, "You'd be an even better teacher if you didn't read those weird books in front of us."

"Hey, hey..." Kakashi stammered, flustered.

"Pfft," Sasuke snickered.

Sakura also giggled behind her hand.

Zabuza and Haku watched this interaction, a look of disbelief in their eyes. Such casual banter between students and their Jonin was unheard of in the Bloody Mist.

Minato sighed, "Are you still reading those? When I recommended Jiraiya-sensei's book to you, it was 'The Tale of the Utterly Gutsy Shinobi'... Because of that, Kushina's given me quite a few lectures. Maybe I'll let her handle you."

Then, with a casual wave, Minato teleported away with Zabuza and Haku to Konoha.

"No, Minato-sensei..."

Kakashi reached out, but it was too late. Remembering Kushina's "gentle" teachings, he froze in place like a scarecrow in a field.

"Hahahaha..." Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura burst into laughter, filling the air with joy.

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

After the Fourth Hokage left, Tazuna didn't immediately start constructing the bridge.

Instead, he and the workers spread the news that all of Gato's men had been killed by the rebels.

The residents of the Land of Waves rejoiced. Hundreds of people armed themselves with whatever weapons they could find-farm tools, sticks, anything-and rushed together toward Gato's residence.

Naruto didn't know what happened to Gato, but he noticed that Tazuna returned with more workers than before.

While the residents of the Land of Waves were organizing, Naruto sat with his teammates, debriefing the recent battle.

Their encounters with Zabuza had exposed some weaknesses.

Naruto started, "First, our team's sensory abilities are too weak. We were practically blind when Zabuza used the Hidden Mist Technique. It forced us to stop him from using Ninjutsu at all costs in the second battle."

Kakashi-sensei could summon ninja hounds, but they were mostly used for tracking, not combat. He was the only one who could use Earth Release.

"I'll handle this," Naruto continued. "I'm practising sensory ninjutsu. If it works, I'll gain a powerful new ability."

With that, Naruto formed a hand sign, created thirty shadow clones, and sent them off to practice.

The clones dashed into the woods, full of energy. After finding a suitable spot, one of them pulled out a small round card, stuck it on his chest, and it read "Number 001."

Number 001 announced, "I cleared *Elden Ring* with only three lives, but this time we've got 30! If we can't manage to learn sensory ninjutsu with this many, we'll have no face to show to the original! Brothers, let's start training!"

Number 001 and the other twenty-eight clones began practising.

Meanwhile, one clone muttered, "We're all shadow clones, so why are you the only one being dramatic?"

That clone then transformed into a blonde, twin-tailed Naruko and began practising with a smile.

Number 001 glanced at Naruko, adjusted the sign on his chest, and went back to training.

Naruto had no idea what his clones were doing, so he continued the meeting.

Sakura raised her hand and said, "Explosive tags are really useful, but they're expensive. Isn't it a bit wasteful to use so many?"

Inner Sakura shouted excitedly, "Explosions are awesome! It's pure art!" Then she calmed down. "But yeah, they're too costly!"

Naruto reassured her, "We're just rookies fresh out of the Academy. It's worth it if a few dozen explosive tags can hold down a Jonin for that long."

Kakashi wanted to protest-how could Naruto still call himself a rookie after that? But he held back.

Sasuke nodded in agreement and added, "My chakra and stamina need improvement. The tactics we use today are too exhausting; I can't use them often, right?"

"Facing someone like Zabuza isn't common," Naruto replied. "For regular shinobi, the strategies we used against Kakashi-sensei during training should be enough. But you should still work on your endurance. Lasting only ten minutes is too weak."

Sasuke glared at Naruto but didn't argue. Not everyone is as overpowered as you, he thought.

He continued, "The way Zabuza transformed into you and blended in with your clones was pretty clever. When outnumbered, we could consider using a similar tactic to directly target the enemy leader."

Naruto wanted to point out that they're rarely outnumbered because of his ability to make so many clones.

But he took Sasuke's suggestion. "It was risky when Zabuza threw that smoke bomb. We should've countered by blowing up my clone along with him. We'll do that next time if we're in a similar situation."

Sakura asked hesitantly, "Doesn't it bother you? Shadow clones send their memories back to the original when they disperse. Won't it be uncomfortable?"

"It's just a few clones," Naruto said with a grin. "Better they take the hit than us. Anyway, when my clones die, they're usually pretty happy about it."

Kakashi couldn't help but interject, "Speaking of which, I've been wondering. Normally, shadow clones share the same memory and thought process as the original. But your clones act like they have their own personalities. Maybe you should visit the Yamanaka Clan for a check-up?"

The Yamanaka Clan? Isn't that Konoha's psychiatry? Naruto stared at Kakashi, thinking, I treat you like a brother, and you call me crazy?

If the Yamanaka Clan saw what was in my head, they'd go mad before I did!

Deciding to let it slide, Naruto explained, "I'm perfectly sane. If I hadn't, my mom would've taken me to Yamanaka ages ago. It's probably just because my mind is so full of thoughts because of that when I make clones, some of them come out with exaggerated personalities."

His teammates didn't ask about the clone that liked to transform into Naruko.

They just sighed in relief, knowing Naruto wasn't sick, and continued to discuss battle strategies before starting their training.

Naruto focused on his sensory ninjutsu training, aiming to master Kagura's Mind Eye quickly.

Sasuke intensified his physical and chakra control training to boost his stamina.

Sakura continued studying her medical scrolls and added survival training, learning to dodge various attacks from Naruto and Sasuke.

After all, according to the rules of the medical ninja, those who can't protect themselves are of no use to the team.

Kakashi, as usual, leaned against a tree, took out his favourite book, and flipped through a couple of pages before closing it.

"My students are working so hard. As their sensei, I should do the same," Kakashi mused.

In reality, Kakashi was a bit dissatisfied with his performance today. It shouldn't have taken him so long to deal with a single enemy, causing his beloved students to face such danger.

It seemed he needed to step up his training. Maybe he should spar with Gai...

"Youth!!!"

Kakashi shook his head violently. What a terrifying thought!

Later, Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura occasionally noticed flashes of lightning in Kakashi's direction.

This lazy sensei wants to train seriously? The three exchanged glances and smiled, pushing themselves even harder.

Three days later, the bridge in the Land of Waves was officially completed, and the workers cheered and celebrated.

With Gato gone and the bridge finished, the Land of Waves finally had hope.

Tazuna bid farewell to Kakashi, mentioning that he would visit Konoha soon to finalize the mission details and pay the appropriate compensation.

And so, the four of them set out on their journey back to Konoha.

---

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

The mission in the Land of Waves had finally ended, and Naruto was on his way back to Konoha.

Living in the Land of Waves had been uncomfortable, but it wasn't because Tazuna's family hadn't been welcoming.

Naruto just felt out of place. There's nothing like returning to your own home and sleeping in your bed.

The journey back was much easier than the trip there. Without the responsibility of protecting Tazuna and with no mission hanging over them, there was less concern about ambushes or sneak attacks.

As they travelled, Naruto realized he had neglected to bring any souvenirs from his first trip outside of Konoha.

He had intended to, but after wandering through the streets, he discovered there was nothing worth bringing home. The Land of Waves was too poor. It was a country in name, but it felt more like a small fishing village.

"Should I bring back some salted fish?" Naruto wondered aloud, glancing at Kakashi, who already had one slung over his shoulder.

"Kakashi-sensei, will there be more missions like this in the future?" Sakura asked, her voice curious.

Sakura enjoyed missions away from the village. It meant she didn't have to deal with Ino and their rivalry over Sasuke.

"Most Genin missions are in or near the village," Kakashi replied. "Especially for you new Genin."

"Oh," Sakura said, a little disappointed.

"When you become Chunin, though, the mission level goes up, and you'll have more chances to leave the village."

Naruto perked up. "Aren't the Chunin Exams starting soon?"

"In about a month," Kakashi said after thinking for a moment. "Are you all planning to participate?"

The three nodded eagerly, each with their reasons.

Naruto just wanted to join in on the excitement. With Konoha's current lineup, Orochimaru wouldn't dare attack the village.

He thought about Itachi, Sasuke, and Kimimaro-if they were all there, who would Orochimaru target? Maybe it's time to start calling him 'Auntie Snake.'

Sasuke, on the other hand, wanted to see how he measured up against other Genin. Sparring with Naruto every day made it hard to gauge his strength. And of course, becoming a Chunin would mean he was one step closer to catching up to his brother.

Sakura had her motivations. She wanted to become a Chunin as soon as possible so she could spend more time with Sasuke without Ino around.

She saw these four-person missions as her and Sasuke's little world, with Kakashi buried in his book and Naruto off practising on his own. Naruto even gave her opportunities to be alone with Sasuke.

*Inner Sakura*: As long as I can marry Sasuke.

In her mind, becoming a Chunin meant Sasuke was practically hers already. She was determined to take the exam!

"Alright, I'll sign you up," Kakashi said. "But as your teacher, I have to remind you-the Chunin Exams can be very dangerous."

"How dangerous are we talking?" Naruto asked.

Kakashi hesitated. No matter what, the Chunin Exams couldn't be more dangerous than facing Zabuza.

He was confident in his students. Even the talented Neji Hyuga, whom Gai was always bragging about, wasn't necessarily stronger than his team.

Neji might be gifted, but he was just a Genin who had graduated a year ago. Had he seen Fire Jutsu and explosive tags in action? Or an enhanced Water Dragon Jutsu?

The four of them chatted as they walked, sharing what they knew about the Chunin Exams. By evening, they had returned to Konoha.

"Izumo, Kotetsu, it's your turn to stand guard again?" Kakashi greeted them lazily.

Naruto perked up. These two were the legendary Konoha Gatekeepers who had supposedly scared away Pain at the front gate. But no matter how he looked at them, they just seemed like two ordinary Chunin or maybe Special Jonin.

"Kakashi, did the mission go well?" Izumo Kamizuki asked.

"Other than a few surprises, it went fine." Kakashi handed over the mission details and the entry certificates. The process was routine.

Kotetsu Hagane looked over the papers. "Everything seems fine. Welcome back."

"See you later. I've got to submit a mission report." Kakashi waved casually.

Once inside the village, they disbanded.

Sasuke couldn't wait to get home. He hadn't seen his brother in a while and didn't know if he was there.

Sakura also hurried home. Despite always complaining about her parents, she still missed them after being away.

Naruto wasn't in a rush. He had a few video calls with his parents while in the Land of Waves.

Kurama had even helped Kushina call Naruto a few times. His relationship with Kurama was always like that-a pair of happy rivals.

Kushina had mentioned that Minato was trying to hack into the chatroom, but it didn't go well.

Naruto walked slowly, kicking a pebble as he thought about his next plan.

"Hehehe..." A lewd laugh caught Naruto's attention.

No way. Naruto turned his head, and sure enough, there he was!

---

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

Naruto looked up at the figure on the roof, who was laughing strangely. The person had white hair, wore a red shirt, and carried a large scroll on his back. Peeping over the roof, there was no doubt who he was.

"Isn't this Jiraiya, the pervy sage of the ninja world, always getting into trouble?"

Naruto's eyes moved from the roof to the door of the women's bathhouse. Yep, it all made sense.

In broad daylight, right in the middle of the village, Naruto, as a responsible young ninja, couldn't let such bad behaviour slide.

But going over there directly might make him look guilty by association, so he hid in a corner, created a shadow clone, and pointed at Jiraiya. "Go get him!"

"Yes, sir!" The clone saluted, then transformed into Naruko and walked away.

"Hey-" Naruto groaned. "Do you have to transform like that?"

Naruko smiled sweetly and asked, "Then who do you want me to be? Sakura? Tsunade? Don't tell me you want Sasuke?"

Naruto slapped his forehead. "It doesn't matter who you turn into! Just-can you change your clothes?"

Naruko looked down and noticed her outfit. "Oops, my bad... How did I end up in such a revealing outfit?"

****

Naruko changed into a cute little skirt and walked toward the bathhouse.

When she got to the door, she screamed, "Yah~~~~ a pervert is peeping!"

Naruto winced. "That scream... Do I have a talent for dolphin sounds?"

"Oops!" Jiraiya was startled by the sudden scream, slipped, and rolled off the roof.

But he quickly jumped back up as if nothing had happened, as expected from someone who could survive a punch from Tsunade!

Soon, the bathhouse was filled with screams and shouts.

Jiraiya, about to run away, suddenly stopped when he saw Naruko. His eyes widened. "Oh, this, this..."

Naruko shot him a look of disdain, formed a Rasengan, and happily knocked herself out of existence.

'Did she just knock herself out because I was staring?' Jiraiya froze as if hit by a huge blow. He stayed like that until a wooden tub from the bathhouse hit him on the head, snapping him back to reality. He quickly ran off.

Out of danger, Jiraiya stroked his chin thoughtfully. "That move... Was that Minato's Rasengan? And that hair color... Could Minato have had another daughter?"

Jiraiya hopped lightly to dodge a leg that tried to trip him.

"Oh ho, the old pervert is pretty quick!" Naruto remarked playfully with his arms crossed.

Jiraiya looked Naruto up and down. The blond hair, blue eyes... It was like seeing Minato as a kid. And with that bright chakra, this kid is Minato and Kushina's child.

Jiraiya's expression turned serious. "It was your shadow clone messing with me, wasn't it? Using the Transformation Jutsu and Shadow Clone Jutsu like that... Really..."

Then Jiraiya's face lit up with excitement as he grabbed Naruto's shoulder. "That's awesome! How did you come up with that? Also, what's your name?"

"Ah~" Naruto pushed Jiraiya away, feeling annoyed.

"My name is Naruto Uzumaki! And shouldn't you introduce yourself first?"

"Good point!" Jiraiya jumped back and slapped the ground with his hand, and a large toad appeared under his feet.

Jiraiya spun his long hair around, stepped forward, and struck a pose.

"I am the Toad Sage, master of the Toads of Mount Myoboku, and my name is Jiraiya!"

Naruto quietly watched him perform, unsure whether to run away.

Jiraiya had brought many smiles to Naruto's face in his previous life and had also made him cry a lot.

He always felt that Jiraiya was a mix of contradictions.

You could say he was a bad guy, but he was kind and brave, always willing to risk his life for the village.

You could say he was a good guy, but he would happily spend Naruto's pocket money on drinks and women.

But he was devoted; he waited for Tsunade for decades and never settled down with anyone else, despite his wandering eyes.

You could say he was single-minded, but he still loved to peek in bathhouses and hot springs.

You could say he hadn't achieved much; even the title of Sannin was given to him, Tsunade, and Orochimaru after they survived a battle with Hanzo-like a consolation prize.

Yet, you could also say he was extraordinary. The students he taught were some of the most powerful in the ninja world. If they stood together, they could shake the entire world.

"The Tale of Jiraiya the Gallant. Now it'll end a bit better, I hope. The final chapter... I'll call it: Frog at the bottom of the well drifts off into the great ocean."

That was Jiraiya's final thought about himself.

Naruto still didn't know if those words were heroic or just sad when Jiraiya said them.

But what made Naruto admire Jiraiya wasn't those words.

It was the moment Jiraiya broke a popsicle in half and gave one piece to Naruto.

Humans are strange creatures. Sometimes they laugh when they cry, and sometimes they cry when they laugh.

Now, with Jiraiya standing in front of him alive, all of Naruto's thoughts boiled down to one simple phrase:

"Oh, Pervy Sage."

"Bang!" The toad disappeared, and Jiraiya stumbled. "It's the Toad Sage! The Toad Sage!"

Then he leaned in again. "Naruto, come here, let's talk about your ninjutsu...hehe."

This old pervert-how could anyone respect him as an elder?

Naruto was annoyed. "I've heard my parents talk about you."

"Oh? What did they say?"

"My dad said you were his most respected teacher and an amazing ninja."

"Mmmm." Jiraiya coughed, trying to look serious.

Naruto continued, "But my mom told me not to hang out with you."

"Hey??? Why?"

Jiraiya's jaw dropped. Kushina, you've changed! When you and Minato told me you'd name your child after the hero in my novel, you weren't like this!

"Because she was afraid you would corrupt me!"

"There must be some misunderstanding!" Jiraiya desperately tried to defend his reputation.

"Yeah, I used to think so too, but after seeing you today, I'm convinced."

"How is it?" Jiraiya asked, hoping for a twist.

Naruto shook his head. "Turns out, kids should listen to their moms. So, I'm heading home now. Goodbye, Pervy Sage."

Naruto waved his hand, walked past the stunned Jiraiya, and started heading home.

Jiraiya quickly turned around and chased after him. "Wait, wait, I'm coming too! I was planning to visit your house anyway!"

"Pervy Sage."

"It's the Toad Sage! The Toad Sage!"

"Oh, Pervy Sage."

As the evening sun bathed the streets of Konoha in golden light, the shadows of the old and young stretched long behind them...

****

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

"I'm back!" Naruto exclaimed as he pushed open the door, followed closely by Jiraiya.

Kushina came to greet him, her eyes widening in surprise. "Welcome back... Jiraiya Sensei?"

"Yo, sorry for intruding!" Jiraiya greeted with a wide grin.

Kushina asked curiously, "How did the two of you meet?"

Naruto began to answer casually, "Well, on my way back, I ran into this girl—"

But before he could finish, Jiraiya quickly covered his mouth, smiling nervously. "Haha, nothing to worry about. We just happened to bump into each other. I recognized Naruto right away as Minato's son and decided to come along."

"Really~?" Kushina eyed him suspiciously.

"Yeah, yeah, that's exactly what happened!" Jiraiya nodded vigorously, pressing down on Naruto's head.

"Mmmph!" Naruto struggled to break free, grumbling, "Pervy Sage, that's enough!"

"Alright, alright, come inside," Kushina sighed, already familiar with Jiraiya's antics. She led them in, adding, "Minato will be back soon. Have a seat and some tea."

As Kushina turned to prepare the tea, Jiraiya pulled Naruto aside and whispered, "Naruto, could you, uh, forget about that little incident? It's kinda embarrassing."

Naruto looked unimpressed. "Didn't you say you were just gathering 'research material'? Now you're worried about embarrassment?"

'Embarrassment? More like self-preservation! If Kushina found out, especially given her friendship with Tsunade, I'd be in serious trouble.' Jiraiya rubbed his ribs, recalling past pains.

Of course, he couldn't say that out loud. "Anyway, if you keep quiet about it, I'll teach you a super cool jutsu!"

Naruto scoffed. "Jutsu? I could just learn something from Dad."

"This one is different! My *Art of the Raging Lion's Mane* is unique, and no one else in the entire ninja world can do it!"

Naruto shrugged. "I'm gonna take a shower." As he walked away, he muttered to himself, "But that hair jutsu does sound kinda interesting."

As he imagined it, Naruto could see his yellow hair growing longer and shining with a golden light, powered by Kurama's chakra. "Hah, I'd look like a Super Saiyan!"

After his shower, Naruto returned to find the table full.

"Dad, Kimimaro, Kakashi-sensei, good evening!"

"Good evening," Kimimaro and Kakashi replied in unison, one with cool detachment, the other with his usual laid-back demeanour

"We were just waiting, Minato said, beckoning him to sit down as they all began to eat.

Minato and Jiraiya soon fell into conversation. "So, Sensei, what brings you back today? I've sent messages through the toads multiple times."

Jiraiya chuckled. "Ah, there were always reasons..."

Naruto rolled his eyes. *Reasons,* sure. Probably just chasing after Orochimaru and gathering more 'research material.'

"I can't believe Naruto's grown up so much," Jiraiya mused. "And you even adopted a child."

Minato smiled proudly. "Kimimaro is a great boy. His strength and character are almost flawless."

Kimimaro nodded modestly. "Thank you for the compliment."

Jiraiya, too, was impressed. "He's very polite. A good kid indeed," he said, shooting Naruto a pointed look.

Naruto rolled his eyes again.

Unaware of the tension, Minato asked, "So, how's Naruto's ninjutsu training coming along?"

"He's doing alright," Naruto answered. "My *Kagura's Mind Eye* technique has improved a bit. The *Flying Thunder God* is still tough—I feel like I'm just a step away. I also want to learn a more powerful water-style jutsu."

Jiraiya raised an eyebrow. "Kagura's Mind Eye? What's that?"

"It's a sensory technique," Kushina explained. "Naruto likes to call it that because he says it's like having a mini-map in his head."

Jiraiya blinked in surprise, then laughed. "As expected of your son, Minato."

"Hahaha, right? I always knew Naruto inherited my talents." Minato beamed with pride.

Jiraiya choked. 'That's not quite what I meant...'

"Sensei," Minato began, "I was thinking of teaching Naruto the *Summoning Technique*. It's a type of space-time ninjutsu, and it might help him."

If it was just a simple summoning, Minato wouldn't have mentioned it. Jiraiya knew he was talking about the Toad Contract with Mount Myoboku.

Jiraiya smiled warmly. "That's a great idea. I'll give you the scroll later so Naruto can sign it."

Minato hesitated. "Are you sure?"

"Of course! You're my most talented student. It's about time."

"I won't let you down."

Suddenly, Naruto remembered something. "Oh, Dad, what happened with Zabuza and Haku?"

Minato answered, "They're in Konoha. Their movements are restricted for now, but I'll figure something out."

Kushina pretended to be angry as she turned to Kakashi. "Speaking of which, Kakashi, how could you have Naruto and his classmates face someone as dangerous as Zabuza while you only dealt with Haku?!"

Kakashi scratched the back of his head, his face half-hidden by his mask. "Well, at the time, those three kids insisted on going after Zabuza... I didn't have much of a choice."

"Have you been slacking off again?"

"No!"

"Then why does Kakashi always read those trashy books by certain trashy authors?"

Kushina glared pointedly at Jiraiya.

Jiraiya paused mid-bite. 'Is she talking about me? My fan just got roasted. Should I step in?' But one look at Kushina's fiery red hair made him reconsider. 'Sorry, Kakashi, you're on your own.'

Kakashi stammered, "Well... I've been working on new jutsu. Sometimes, reading helps me relax and... inspires creativity! Yeah, that's it."

The famed Copy Ninja of Konoha, stuttering and stumbling over his words, was a rare sight. He'd rather face an Akatsuki member than endure this lecture.

"Is that so?" Kushina's tone was sharp. "Well, I've decided. When your team isn't on a mission, you'll be training with us!"

"Uh, yes ma'am," Kakashi replied weakly, the food suddenly tasting bland.

Naruto snickered at Kakashi's plight.

He nudged Kimimaro, "How are your teammates these days?"

"Same as always," Kimimaro replied. "Recently, Gai-sensei brought his new student to meet us. Have you ever seen five people, all dressed in green, hugging each other and shouting about youth? It's... disturbing."

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

Thank you,"Schwiftyz" for becoming a Elite member on patreon, shoutout to you . Enjoy!

---

Speaking of those odd teammates, Kimimaro had a lot to say.

Having been with the team for three years, he had more or less grown accustomed to his teammates' quirks.

But when asked by someone close to him, he couldn't help but vent a bit.

"The most troublesome thing is that Lee, Tenten, and Neji keep urging me to change my hairstyle, change my clothes, and shout slogans. Yes, I admit that Gai-sensei is very powerful, but there's no need to imitate him completely! To keep the peace, I just told them that whoever can beat me can decide my look."

Naruto chuckled, intrigued. "And then what happened?"

"Then it got even worse," Kimimaro replied, his tone dry. "They started challenging me three times a day—morning, noon, and night. If I lost, they'd train even harder, so I had to keep up."

"Hahaha!" Naruto burst out laughing. "They're persistent, huh? Even forcing you, the usually stoic Kimimaro, into this situation!"

Naruto gave Kimimaro a playful pat on the shoulder. "Well, it's a good thing your teammates are so energetic. I think they're interesting."

Kimimaro remained expressionless. "If you like them so much, maybe I'll bring them over to help your team train sometime."

"Eh? That's not necessary!" Naruto exclaimed, a bit alarmed. When did Kimimaro pick up this sly side?

Naruto knew well that in pure taijutsu, he wouldn't stand a chance against Kimimaro—fighting him would just be asking for a beating.

As the brothers bantered, on the other side, Kushina suddenly thought of something important. "Kakashi, haven't you thought about finding a girlfriend yet?"

Kakashi, caught off guard, replied, "Well… I'm not in a hurry."

"You're not getting any younger. What do you think of Anko? Or maybe I could ask Mikoto to introduce you to some Uchiha girls—they're very pretty."

Kakashi tried to deflect the conversation.

Kushina sighed. "It's all Jiraiya-sensei's fault for writing those ridiculous books that corrupted you!"

"Hey, how is this my fault?" Jiraiya protested. "I'm just a writer! If your kid's picking up bad habits, that's on you. My books are clearly labelled for adults!"

"Speaking of which," Naruto jumped in, "Jiraiya-sensei, you're still single, huh? Waiting for Tsunade-sama?"

"Er… well…" Jiraiya stammered. For all his bravado and his famous novels, he was surprisingly shy about his feelings.

Naruto, enjoying the chaos, was already planning how he could help Jiraiya and maybe even find a partner for Kakashi. But then, the conversation took an unexpected turn.

"Listen up, Naruto, Kimimaro," Kushina said sternly. "You two better not pick up any bad habits from these guys. This is important."

Kimimaro remained silent, but Naruto quickly retorted, "Mom, I'm only twelve!"

"What's that supposed to mean? Your father was already…" Kushina blushed and trailed off, embarrassed.

Jiraiya and Kakashi, knowing the story, burst out laughing.

Naruto, imagining the scene, couldn't help but think, 'Yeah, my dad was amazing. He was already sneaking around under the moonlight with you when he was twelve.'

The next morning, Minato and Jiraiya headed to the Hokage's office, while Kimimaro went off to meet his enthusiastic teammates. Naruto and Kushina walked to the mission hall together.

Someone was already waiting at the entrance.

"Good morning, everyone," Kushina greeted with a smile.

"Morning, Akamaru, Hinata, and…" Naruto's eyes darted to where he instinctively felt was the most unlikely spot, and sure enough, "…Shino."

"Good morning, Kushina-sensei. Good morning, Naruto-kun," Hinata greeted shyly.

Kiba, noticing Naruto's focus on Akamaru, shouted, "Hey, Naruto! You haven't seen me in so long, and you only notice Akamaru?"

"Wow!" Akamaru barked happily, his tail wagging.

Naruto scooped Akamaru up, petting him with a grin. "How can I not notice Akamaru? He's adorable! You, Kiba, are just his sidekick."

Kiba, indignant, yelled, "You bastard! How can you betray me?"

"Oh, go ask Sasuke to fight you," Naruto responded dismissively. Why fight when petting the dog was more fun?

As they waited, Naruto struck up a conversation with Kurama in his mind. "Hey, big fox."

"Hmm?"

"Can I pet your head?"

Kurama smiled mischievously. Naruto's eyes widened as a giant tail appeared before him, and then… WHAM! He was sent flying.

"Ow! You just wait, Kurama. One day, I'm gonna—" Naruto winced, rubbing his head.

Kushina, watching her students interact with Naruto, couldn't help but smile.

Especially when she noticed Hinata sneaking glances at Naruto, she was even more pleased. 'Looks like yesterday's decision to train with Kakashi's squad was the right call! I'll keep an eye on both Kakashi and Naruto—two birds with one stone!'

"All right, let's pick up the mission first. You can do what you like in the afternoon."

"Yes!" Hinata, Kiba, and Shino responded in unison, with Akamaru barking in agreement.

Kushina's authority was unquestionable, and even the rambunctious Kiba wouldn't dare defy her.

Naruto reluctantly handed Akamaru back to Kiba and continued waiting for his teammates.

Sasuke and Sakura arrived on time. Kakashi must've crossed paths with a black cat or something. He was only ten minutes late today—not too bad.

"Let's go," Kakashi said lazily.

Today's mission was a dog-walking assignment. There wasn't much choice—most missions left to genin were mundane tasks like finding lost pets, babysitting, pulling weeds, or running errands.

Each of the three took a dog, leashed it, grabbed a plastic bag, and set off on their mission.

The walk was uneventful. These were just ordinary dogs, not as smart as Akamaru, nor as cute, so Naruto didn't feel the urge to play with them.

After submitting the mission, Kakashi reached for some snacks from his ninja pouch but decided against it. "All right, let's go train with Team 8 today."

Sasuke didn't care, but Sakura asked curiously, "Why are we suddenly training with another team?"

Kakashi sighed inwardly. 'Do you think I want to? Kushina-sensei gave me orders, and I'm not about to disobey her. But how can I explain that to you?'

Naruto stifled a laugh, giving Kakashi an out. "Maybe he wants us to see how we measure up against another team."

"Yeah, that's it," Kakashi agreed quickly, relieved.

---

Chapter Text

---

After submitting their assignment, Team 7 hurried to the training ground.

Kushina joked, "You're on time for once, Kakashi. That's worthy of praise."

Kakashi sighed helplessly, "Is my image that bad in your mind?"

"Hahaha, alright, enough chit-chat! Let's get a match started!"

Kiba, itching to fight, jumped out impatiently and shouted, "Let's have a showdown, Naruto!"

Naruto couldn't do much but agree. He knew that if he didn't beat Kiba thoroughly, he'd never stop.

"Okay, okay, let's fight." As Naruto said this, everyone heard him, and he signalled that he was ready.

Kushina excitedly stepped into the middle to preside over the match. The others stepped back to make space.

"And now, the first friendly match between Team 7 and Team 8: Kiba Inuzuka vs. Naruto Uzumaki! Get ready—start!"

Naruto and Kiba exchanged the seal of opposition.

Kiba didn't miss the chance to talk tough. "Give it your best, Naruto! This time, Akamaru and I will defeat you!"

"Woof!" Akamaru barked in agreement, wagging his tail.

"Give it my best? Are you sure?" Naruto asked.

Kiba was full of confidence. "Yes, give it your best! I've gotten a lot stronger—don't underestimate me!"

Sasuke, hearing this, looked at Kiba with pity.

Naruto nodded, "Alright, let's do this."

"Akamaru! Get ready!"

"Woof!"

Naruto thought for a moment. 'What's my full power?' He decided to start with 1,000 shadow clones.

Naruto shouted, "Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu!"

As soon as Kiba and Akamaru got into their attacking stance, they were met with—

"Bang bang bang bang bang..." Countless Narutos filled the field, packed so tightly that even the spectators were nearly drowned in the sea of clones.

"Hey, you stepped on my foot, idiot!"

"My arm's about to be crushed, you jerk!"

"Move over, give me some space!"

"Eliminate yourself"

"Hey! Who touched there, are you gay?"

"Are you a bastard?"

****

The clones were noisy and shoving each other, causing chaos that resembled a crowded marketplace, a packed train during rush hour, or a bus during peak hours.

Looking around, the entire training ground was filled with little blond heads. Anyone who didn't know about the fight would think they were in a sunflower field.

Kiba was completely overwhelmed by Naruto's clones; he couldn't even move, let alone fight.

Akamaru was plucked up by one of the Narutos and passed through the clones back to Naruto.

Kushina, who was closest to the battlefield, had a tick mark on her forehead as she found herself surrounded by the clones.

Kushina raised a hand irritably, "The match is over! Naruto wins. Now get rid of those shadow clones, right now!"

Naruto obediently dispelled the shadow clones. Over 1,000 of them vanished instantly, and the remaining chakra returned to him.

Naruto, feeling a bit drained after having his chakra split into a thousand parts, regained his composure.

Though the sheer number of clones looked intimidating, they didn't have much combat power.

In the anime, Naruto overwhelmed Mizuki with thousands of clones because he had used the Nine-Tails' chakra in his rage.

But now, Naruto was using only his chakra, so each clone had less than 0.1 of a chakra point.

The issue was that even if you combined Kiba and Akamaru's chakra, they only had about 0.23 points of chakra.

No matter how much Kakashi was mocked for having low chakra, he was still a Jonin. Kiba, on the other hand, was just one of the better Genin, so he was completely out of his league.

After the shadow clones disappeared, Kakashi glanced up at the sky, "Was that necessary?"

Sakura was relieved. She had been squished into Sasuke's arms and apologized weakly, "I'm sorry, Sasuke, I got pushed over accidentally."

Inner Sakura, however, was punching the air, "Nice job, Naruto!"

"It's fine," Sasuke muttered, rubbing his chest, feeling a bit sore.

Hinata's face was red, her fingers twiddling together, and her head was almost steaming. She had been too close to Naruto...

As for Kiba, he was crushed. He slumped to the ground as if he had lost all hope: "What... just happened?"

*Wham!*

Kushina punched Naruto on the head, "That was too much!"

"He told me to do my best... Sorry," Naruto apologized sincerely, realizing he might have overdone it.

Kushina noticed Kiba was feeling down and quickly went over to comfort him, "Actually, in a real battle, you just have to outlast him until he runs out of chakra. This tactic isn't practical in a real fight."

Of course, Kushina didn't mention that there are other ways to counter this, such as using large-scale ninjutsu to clear the field or creating the same number of shadow clones to counter him but With Naruto's growth rate, this move might become useful in the future.

Akamaru jumped out of Naruto's arms, whimpered, and licked Kiba's hand, trying to cheer him up.

Being a hot-blooded kid, Kiba quickly regained his spirit, "Naruto, I lost this time, but next time—next time..."

Sasuke looked at him with pity once again. 'So naive. I thought like you when I was four. Now I'm twelve...'

Naruto and Kiba left the stage after exchanging the seal of reconciliation, and Kushina shouted:

"Next up, Hinata Hyuga vs. Sakura Haruno!"

The two girls walked to the centre of the field, exchanged the seal of opposition, and faced each other.

Hinata didn't know much about Sakura, but she had always envied her for being on the same team as Naruto-kun. She also admired Sakura for having the courage to confess to the one she liked.

'But even though I admire you...' Hinata thought quietly as she glanced to the side where Naruto was watching. 'I want to win!'

Sakura didn't know much about Hinata either. All she knew was that Hinata was a shy, introverted girl.

She always thought of Hinata as a good person—any girl who didn't try to take Sasuke away from her was a good person.

'But even though you're a good person...' Sakura glanced at the sidelines where Sasuke was watching. 'I don't want to lose in front of Sasuke.'

Hinata assumed her Gentle Fist stance, her eyes firm and determined.

Sakura encouraged herself quietly, feeling the power surging within her.

Sakura made the first move, rushing at Hinata with her fists flying, cutting through the air with surprising speed, and then... she froze.

'What happened?'

'Why?'

'What is this?'

'Is this Hinata?'

Under Sakura's shocked gaze, Hinata's Byakugan activated, the veins around her eyes bulging as she effortlessly dodged Sakura's punch.

Then, like a butterfly flitting through flowers, Hinata's hands slipped through Sakura's defences with ease, striking her in rapid succession, hitting her thirty-two times in an instant!

----

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

Sakura felt as if her entire body had been struck with countless small hammers, leaving her powerless to fight back.

When Hinata finally stopped her assault, Sakura's strength gave out, and she collapsed to the ground. The chakra she usually controlled with ease now refused to respond.

What's going on? Hinata, a girl who is usually so quiet and reserved, has become so strong!

"I lost," Sakura admitted, barely managing to prop herself up as she sat on the ground, her voice filled with disappointment.

Hinata quickly trotted over, offering her hand to help Sakura up. "I'm sorry, Sakura! Are you alright?" she asked softly.

"It's alright, Hinata. You're amazing. What was that just now? I feel completely drained."

"Ah, yes," Hinata explained shyly, "It's the Gentle Fist technique of the Hyuga Clan. It disrupts the flow of chakra by targeting specific tenketsu points. I just sealed 32 of your chakra points, but I'll unlock them for you right away!"

Hinata, who had just been precise and decisive in battle, reverted to her usual timid demeanour as she began unsealing Sakura's chakra points.

Naruto, watching from the sidelines, was amazed. In terms of coolness, the Hyuga Clan's Gentle Fist is definitely among the best.

When Hinata was using the Gentle Fist, each move was so fluid and elegant—it looked especially graceful.

Compared to the slow-motion martial arts films that have been popular in the last few years, this was far more impressive.

The graceful young warrior look that Hinata displayed was miles above what anyone would expect.

Even Sasuke was taken aback. Is this the Gentle Fist of the Hyuga Clan? Sakura couldn't even put up a fight.

Sasuke had always thought of Hinata as just a shy girl who barely made her presence known.

Kakashi, however, wasn't particularly surprised. He had seen the Gentle Fist many times before.

Hinata's level is decent among her peers. He couldn't help but wonder how she would measure up against Neji Hyuga, whom Gai often praised.

As Hinata helped Sakura off the stage, Kiba rushed forward to praise her, with Akamaru barking excitedly at his side.

Hinata felt embarrassed by the praise and occasionally stole glances at Naruto to gauge his reaction.

Sakura noticed Hinata's shy looks and smiled knowingly, like an aunt who just figured something out.

"Alright, the third match next is Shino Aburame versus Sasuke Uchiha!"

The next battle was incredibly intense, though Naruto couldn't remember much about it afterwards.

No one seemed to remember who won.

When Naruto later asked Sasuke about it, Sasuke just grumbled, "It's none of your business. I didn't lose, alright?"

Oddly enough, no one thought to ask Shino, who was also in the battle... but why not?

After the three matches were over, Naruto slyly suggested, "How about a battle between the teachers?"

Kushina cracked her knuckles and smiled. "I wouldn't mind."

Kakashi immediately raised his hands in surrender. Why does this kid always try to get me in trouble?

"I'll pass. I have some training to do," he said, slipping away into an inconspicuous corner.

Naruto wasn't sure if it was his imagination, but he felt that the area where Kakashi was "training" looked much brighter than usual.

Naruto then turned his attention to Team 8's training.

Hinata is throwing Gentle Fist strikes at a wooden dummy with a determined expression, though she occasionally seems a bit distracted.

Shino is busy practising his insect manipulation, all while dodging surprise attacks from Kushina.

In many ways, the Aburame Clan is similar to the puppet masters—they both relied on manipulating something other than their bodies in battle, making their main bodies vulnerable.

Kiba's training is the most intense. Not only was he running around on all fours like Akamaru, but his mimicry of Akamaru's attacks was incredibly precise.

The most shocking, though, is Akamaru's airborne dynamic marking technique.

Akamaru would leap high into the air, spin 720 degrees, and accurately spray his target. It is truly terrifying—a psychological blow more than anything.

Naruto silently vowed: If Kiba ever uses that move on me, I'll end him, and not even Kushina will be able to save him!

Naruto, Sakura, and Sasuke continued their usual training routines. However, while Naruto is practising his sensory abilities, he has a sudden, unconventional idea.

He remembered how Luffy in *One Piece* had learned Observation Haki by being blindfolded and dodging attacks from Rayleigh.

Luffy had been forced to develop his ability through sheer practice.

So, Naruto gritted his teeth and blindfolded himself, asking Kushina to attack him from different directions so he could sense her movements and evade.

As for how Kushina managed to guide Team 8 while helping Naruto train... Kushina is a master of Shadow Clones, so multitasking wasn't an issue for her.

But that wasn't all. Naruto created 100 Shadow Clones, scattered them throughout the forest, and had them pull down their headbands to cover their eyes.

They played a high-stakes game of blindfolded tag. If a clone sensed another, they would strike, but the challenge was to avoid being detected themselves.

One by one, the clones were taken down—except for Naruto, who kept getting pummeled.

How was Kushina's punch? Everyone who's experienced it would agree—it was no joke.

Naruto's screams could be heard echoing across the training grounds.

Meanwhile, Kakashi's lightning was flashing brighter, Kiba's training was more lively, and Hinata seemed to be spacing out more often.

After more than 30 clones were "killed" in the game, Naruto finally managed to dodge one of Kushina's punches for the first time.

Feeling proud of his accomplishment, he got excited—only to be hit again.

Two hours later, only one clone remained in the forest. It let out a sigh of relief.

This time, the clone didn't disperse on purpose—surviving the game was a reward in itself.

Compared to the clones' joyful game, Naruto had to endure not only the painful memories of his clones being defeated but also the physical pain of the punches himself.

Kushina is a true mother, serious about anything related to training, and she didn't hold back when it came to disciplining her son.

As she put it, "It's better to be beaten and cry at home than to be killed outside."

Fortunately, the afternoon wasn't wasted. Naruto finally awakened the Kagura Mind's Eye, though it was still unstable when he got too excited.

Naruto felt like a bronze-tier player in some online game, constantly reminding himself to watch the minimap but getting ganked every time he focused too much on one thing.

As evening approached, everyone wrapped up their training. Kushina clapped her hands and announced, "Alright, that's enough for today. Hinata, wait a moment. You made some mistakes in your movements earlier—I'll go over them with you. The rest of you can head out!"

Everyone else dispersed, but Naruto waited around so he could walk home with Kushina.

Kushina spent a little extra time coaching Hinata before glancing at the sky. "Oh, it's gotten late. Hinata, it's not safe for a girl to walk home alone at this hour, but I need to stop by the store..."

Kushina tapped her chin thoughtfully. "Naruto, why don't you take Hinata home?"

Naruto blinked in surprise. "Huh?"

---

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

Naruto and Hinata walked together on their way back to the Hyuga household.

Naruto had his hands in his pockets, recalling the ambiguous expression on his mother's face when he left home. He couldn't help but feel a bit speechless.

By now, Naruto should have understood what Kushina was implying, no matter how dense he might be.

It was challenging for someone like her—who usually acted on her thoughts without hesitation—to start using more subtle tactics.

Naruto was also aware that Hinata had a crush on him.

As for whether he liked Hinata—a girl with a gentle personality, strong heart, and good looks—it was obvious that he did.

Who wouldn't like such a girl?

Considering the customs of the ninja world, Naruto had been an official ninja since graduating from the academy, so there wasn't any concern about puppy love.

After all, back then, a bunch of five- or six-year-old girls were madly in love with Sasuke, which was puppy love.

As Naruto realized this, he suddenly thought of his mother setting him up on a blind date.

Even though he and Hinata had known each other since childhood and could be considered childhood sweethearts, Naruto felt a bit uncertain and didn't know what to say.

Hinata walked just half a step behind Naruto, her head lowered as she played with her fingers.

Hinata was caught off guard when Kushina suggested that Naruto walk her home. Her mind was in a whirl, and she agreed before she knew it.

Now, as they walked together through the streets, it felt like they were on a date.

Hinata was so shy that she wondered if she should say something but worried that it might make Naruto uncomfortable.

So, one was too embarrassed to speak, and the other was too shy, leading to a silent walk to the Hyuga household.

As they reached the door, Hinata finally gathered the courage to turn around and say, "Naruto-kun, thank you for walking me home today."

"It's nothing, Hinata. Goodbye."

"Goodbye."

Naruto waved his hand and turned to leave, thinking to himself that his social awkwardness was the reason he had only one girlfriend for 20 years in his past life.

Behind him, the door that had just closed opened slightly, and a small head peeked out, watching Naruto's back until he disappeared around the corner.

****

After returning home, Naruto was interrogated by Kushina.

After he truthfully revealed what happened, Kushina poked him in the forehead with her finger (Sasuke would be familiar with this gesture).

Then she grumbled before returning to the kitchen to continue cooking.

The next day followed a similar routine—simple tasks in the morning and training in the afternoon.

However, the training ground had been changed to a different location.

In the evening, Kushina found another excuse to keep Hinata around a bit longer, giving her extra training before instructing Naruto to walk her home again.

After leaving the training ground, Naruto realized that this particular training ground was the farthest from the Hyuga household... His mom was being deliberate.

The atmosphere today wasn't as awkward as the day before.

Naruto tried to initiate conversation. After all, they were both ninjas and could talk about ninjutsu and missions.

Although Hinata's voice was as quiet as a mosquito when they talked, Naruto could sense the excitement in her tone.

On the third day, Kushina arranged for Hinata and Naruto to practice Taijutsu together.

The reason was that Hinata wasn't decisive enough in combat.

She wanted someone tough who wouldn't mind getting hit to help her train.

Naruto was instructed to only dodge and defend, not fight back.

As for Naruto's other techniques like the Shadow Clone Jutsu, Summoning Jutsu, and Flying Thunder God, they were left to his clones to practice on their own.

Naruto thought to himself, 'Mom, you know how to push me.'

At first, Hinata couldn't bring herself to attack Naruto. Worried about hurting him, she didn't act decisively until she noticed how easily Naruto could dodge or counter her attacks.

This made Sakura, who was secretly watching from the sidelines, feel annoyed.

She muttered to herself, "Hinata wasn't this hesitant when she hit me the other day. She had me sore all over!"

Yes, Sakura had been secretly observing Naruto and Hinata.

She had felt something was off the day before and was convinced that Kushina was trying to create opportunities for Naruto and Hinata to spend time alone together.

Today, seeing Naruto and Hinata exchanging glances, Sakura was certain something was going on.

She felt a pang of envy. If only Sasuke's mother would help create opportunities for her...

But then Sakura reminded herself that she was in the same class as Sasuke now, which gave her an advantage.

She just needed to improve herself, and Sasuke would surely notice her! Sakura clenched her fists in determination and resumed her training with renewed vigour.

That evening, under Sakura's watchful eyes, Kushina once again found an excuse to keep Hinata behind.

For the third time, Naruto walked Hinata home. Along the way, they discussed the morning's mission and what they had learned during their training.

Naruto often caught Hinata giving him admiring looks, which made him feel good about himself.

In response, Naruto, a self-proclaimed "dense guy," began trying to show concern for Hinata, asking if the training was too hard and such.

Naruto's clumsy attempts at small talk made Hinata's heart flutter with happiness.

****

About 20 days passed this way. Naruto's skills with his mini-map technique became more refined, and he could now use his summoning techniques effortlessly.

However, he had never tried summoning a large toad yet—especially not the toad that once helped Jiraiya boast about his strength.

Currently, Naruto's Shadow Clones are still focusing on mastering the Flying Thunder God jutsu, while Naruto continued his Taijutsu training with Hinata.

At this point, even the dogs could see that something was going on between the two.

Akamaru: "Woof!"

In recent days, Naruto noticed more people in the village wearing different forehead protectors, signalling that the Chunin Exams were approaching.

On the morning of June 24th, no team went to pick up a mission. The six students and one dog waited at the training ground.

Soon, Kakashi and Kushina arrived, each holding three application forms, which they handed to their students.

Kushina spoke, "As you can see, Kakashi and I have recommended you for the Chunin Exams. Let me warn you, the Chunin Exams are dangerous, so think carefully before deciding whether to participate."

Kushina continued speaking, "If you choose to participate, bring your application form to classroom 301 at the academy by 3:00 PM, seven days from now. Of course, we're not forcing you to take the exam; we're just giving you the qualification. If you feel unprepared, you can opt-out at any time."

Kiba was the first to jump up, shouting, "Of course I'm participating!"

Shino adjusted his sunglasses and said, "Since we have this qualification, we should give it a shot. If you want to know why..."

There was silence in the air.

Three seconds later, everyone looked at Shino with an expression that asked, "Why?"

Shino felt a bit frustrated. Usually, they would interrupt him by now, but this time they didn't. Now he felt awkward.

So Shino had no choice but to continue, "Because..."

****

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

Shino continued with his thoughts, "Because..."

"Forget it, don't talk about it, it's a long story," Kiba interrupted impatiently.

"Hinata, what about you?" Kiba asked.

"I want to participate," Hinata responded firmly.

She remembered Naruto's overwhelming shadow clones, his stunning Water Style jutsu, and his powerful summoning jutsu.

Hinata felt that if she didn't work harder, she would only fall further behind Naruto-kun. Besides, both Kiba and Shino were good people, and she didn't want to hold her teammates back.

Sasuke and Sakura had already decided to participate, so they didn't say much. After expressing their intentions, they returned to training.

Around noon, an unnamed shadow clone suddenly succeeded in performing the Flying Thunder God Jutsu.

The unnamed clone was ecstatic, "I did it!"

But then he was surrounded and beaten by numerous clones, led by Clone No. 001 and Naruko, who shouted while hitting him:

"Ugh, it's him again!"

"He was the first to master the Rasengan!"

"He was the first to summon Gamakichi!"

"Get him!"

"Kill him!"

The unnamed shadow clone was beaten into oblivion. As for why he was beaten after mastering the Flying Thunder God?

Well, you'd have to ask the Second Hokage, Tobirama-sensei, for that answer.

In short, after the unnamed clone dispersed, the other shadow clones received his memories and began trying the technique.

For a moment, yellow hair fluttered all around the training ground, golden light flickering.

Occasionally, multiple shadow clones would choose the same teleportation point, and unable to adjust their posture in time, they bumped into each other awkwardly, leading to some embarrassing collisions before they suicided out of shame.

The other shadow clones also ended themselves after receiving the memory. The reason was simple—if they died, the embarrassment would be left to the original Naruto.

Meanwhile, the real Naruto, who is training with Hinata, is too happy to concentrate after receiving the memory of learning the Flying Thunder God. This distraction led to him being smacked hard in the abdomen by Hinata.

"Ahh..." Naruto bent over in pain, taking a deep breath.

"Oh no, Naruto-Kun! Are you okay?" Hinata hurriedly supported him.

Naruto waved his hand, "It's fine, just a little pain in my liver."

But after absorbing all the clones' memories, Naruto's liver hurt even more.

Seeing Naruto's face getting paler, Hinata quickly fetched Sakura.

Sakura's hand glowed green as she examined Naruto. She sighed, "Good thing I got here quickly..."

Hinata was nervous. "Is it because I was too rough? It's all my fault... I—"

"Relax," Sakura interrupted Hinata's incoherent self-blame. "I meant it's a good thing I got here before he healed on his own. There's nothing wrong with his internal organs, just a minor bruise."

"Huh?" Hinata tilted her head, confused.

"Seriously, Hinata, you got all worked up over a tiny hit." Sakura leaned in closer and whispered mischievously, "So, how far have you two progressed? Have you hugged? Kissed?"

"N-No, no, no... nothing like that!" Hinata stammered, blushing furiously.

"I'm fine now," Naruto reassured Hinata, trying to comfort her. "I just made a little progress with my ninjutsu and got distracted. I'm okay."

Hinata nodded, finally relieved.

As Sakura walked away with her medical kit, she couldn't help but feel a bit sad, wondering when Sasuke would ever come around.

Naruto reached out and patted Hinata's head. "I've got some questions to ask my dad. I'll be back soon."

"Okay," Hinata replied obediently.

...

After saying goodbye, Naruto ran to the Hokage's office.

"Dad, my shadow clone just successfully used the Flying Thunder God Jutsu."

"Oh? You already mastered it?" Minato said, finishing a document and setting it aside as he smiled at Naruto.

"No, it was my shadow clone who learned it."

"Isn't that the same thing?" Minato asked, puzzled. If the shadow clone learned it, doesn't that mean the original Naruto also learned it?

"But I still have a problem. If I don't solve it, I won't dare to use the Flying Thunder God."

"What's the problem?"

"Well, what would happen if the Flying Thunder God Technique failed?"

"If it fails, you'll just stay in place and waste some chakra at most. Is that the issue?"

"No, no, I mean, if it partially fails, could I end up... split?"

"Split?"

"Yeah, like if my head teleports but my body stays behind, or something like that."

Minato was stunned. After a moment, he explained, "That's not going to happen. When you use the Flying Thunder God Technique, it takes everything in direct contact with your body or things connected to your chakra."

"This isn't something the caster controls. For example, if a shuriken is stuck in you, it'll teleport with you when the jutsu is performed. The human body is a single entity, so it can't be split."

"Oh, so you're saying there's no way my clothes would stay behind while I teleport, right?" Naruto asked, feeling relieved.

Minato chuckled, "Of course not, why do you have so many strange ideas?"

"It's just stuff I've picked up," Naruto replied, shrugging. After reading so much fanfiction in his previous life, all kinds of strange ideas had formed.

Some authors even tried to explain the Flying Thunder God as a four-dimensional space-time jutsu. And the worst part? They never finished their stories.

"One last question. Is it possible to change the style of the Flying Thunder God's mark once it's set?"

"Hmm... not exactly. The essence of the Flying Thunder God mark is a chakra-based seal, arranged in a specific pattern to form a symbol or text."

"You can rearrange it to create a new mark, but any differences might complicate the Jutsu's perception. You need to practice the new mark enough to be able to use it instantly in battle. So it's better not to waste energy on creating a second one."

"Oh, I see. So it's like using different weapons in a game; it doesn't matter if you use different types as long as they're just for teleportation. But the key placement might affect how fast you can teleport."

After understanding, Naruto became excited. The marks he'd been practising with were all swirl patterns, and he felt they lacked uniqueness. Now he could design new marks just for fun.

Naruto placed one hand on the desk, letting chakra flow from his palm to create a black seal, slowly forming three large characters: "Request Monthly Pass."

Naruto admired his work and then teleported back to the training ground using the swirl mark left by his shadow clone.

In the office, Minato was left scratching his head. "What's a 'Monthly Pass'?"

****

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

Of course, Naruto didn't perform all these elaborate tricks just for fun. Well, it wasn't *just* for fun.

For example, if a mission took him through an interesting place, Naruto could leave a Flying Thunder God mark on a landmark. Later, he could take Hinata there for a visit when they had some free time.

Of course, this kind of behaviour falls under the category of uncivilized tourism, so kids shouldn't learn from it.

Moreover, Naruto has a bigger plan. He intends to have his shadow clones travel all over the world, leaving Flying Thunder God marks at intervals and mapping the coordinates.

That way, Naruto could create a large-scale teleportation map of the Ninja World.

When the time comes, with Naruto's Kagura Mind's Eye for precise positioning, wouldn't he be able to start a logistics company?

Uzumaki Express, mission guaranteed!

The Art of Sealing is perfect for you, the Flying Thunder God Jutsu enables ultra-long-distance delivery, and the Kagura Mind's Eye ensures last-mile accuracy!

Uzumaki Logistics is the best choice in the logistics industry!

…

Back at the training ground, an excited Naruto increased his weight to 100 kilograms and started running laps around the area.

In the sealed space, Kurama yawned out of boredom. He used to think Naruto was an interesting kid.

Later, when Naruto learned the Shadow Clone Jutsu, Kurama was amazed—it turns out humans can die so happily, they can even exhaust themselves over trivial matters, and they can pose in such bizarre ways.

'This kid... so small and determined. I can feel his strength growing, even though he doesn't realize it yet. Despite everything, he keeps moving forward. It's almost admirable... No, it's inspiring! I never thought I'd see a human like this.'

'There's something special about him, something that makes me think... maybe, just maybe, he could be the one to change everything. I never thought I'd trust a human but with him... I think I might finally be ready to believe.'

After a while, Naruto, having finished his laps, drenched in sweat, took a few deep breaths, and hurried off the training ground. He needed to order some special kunai.

Naruto looked around Konoha's largest ninja tool shop but didn't see the girl with the bun hairstyle.

He wondered if this shop was owned by Tenten's family.

Naruto took out one of Minato's kunai as a sample and requested an order of 100, urgently needed.

The shopkeeper grinned. He recognized it immediately. Wasn't this the special kunai used by the Fourth Hokage? He had made these many times and was quite familiar with them.

As Naruto left the shop, he touched his shrunken frog wallet and couldn't help but sing, "I see this life like a swinging vine ~ Swing my heart across the line ~ And in my face are flashing signs ~ Seek it out and ye shall find~..."

As expected of the arms business—it's so expensive!

"Kid, you've got the scent of Shukaku on you."

"Huh?" Naruto stopped and opened his internal map. About two streets away, four chakra signatures were moving together—it was a team of Suna shinobi.

Kurama sat up with interest. "Go fight him."

Naruto refused. "Don't cause trouble. They're here for the Chunin Exams. It wouldn't be appropriate for me to beat them up without reason. It might even lead to a diplomatic incident."

"You think about stuff like that?" Kurama was surprised. This kid used to be so impulsive—what changed?

"Being reckless isn't a good thing. We can't go around causing problems like Boruto." Boruto is truly Sasuke's apprentice, doing whatever comes to mind without thinking.

As long as it's on a whim, my dad can never guess what I'll do next.

"Who's Boruto?" Kurama asked, sensing something off.

"It's said to be a non-flammable material. Throw it into Amaterasu, and Amaterasu will go out," Naruto explained with a straight face.

Kurama glared at him, grumbling something the fox didn't understand.

Naruto steered the conversation back on track. "That's not important. Anyway, when the exam starts, I'll have a legitimate reason to fight Shukaku."

"..." Kurama, who couldn't fight Shukaku for now, lay back down out of boredom. "I want some barbecue."

"..." Naruto pulled out his deflated wallet, and with tears in his eyes, he created a shadow clone, handing it the last few bills. Kurama took control of the clone and happily headed to the barbecue restaurant.

Naruto watched his clone's cheerful retreat and concluded with a life lesson—without money, you're not worthy of raising a fox.

Back at the training ground, Naruto told Kushina about the news that the Jinchuriki of the One-Tail was coming to take the Chunin Exams.

Kushina's expression turned serious. If it were just the One-Tail, she was confident she could handle it herself.

The problem was, if Sunagakure had any intentions, it couldn't be as simple as sending just the One-Tail Jinchuriki.

In that case, Konoha could suffer significant casualties, and this needed to be discussed with Minato.

Naruto's face also turned serious. He couldn't figure it out—how could this Kazekage dare to make a move?

He wasn't sure if Orochimaru was involved in this, but even if he was, would he dare to come to Konoha?

The Uchiha clan hadn't been wiped out, both the Third and Fourth Hokage were around, and Jiraiya had returned to the village.

Was he looking for his death? Did he think he could take on the village?

Naruto couldn't understand because he was thinking clearly, but Rasa wasn't.

Rasa only knew that Konoha was strong and that a real fight would likely result in a loss, but he didn't know just how strong they were.

In reality, Rasa was desperate and didn't want to take any extreme measures. If he could develop his village smoothly, who would want to risk their life in a fight? But Rasa was under immense pressure.

Sunagakure is already poor—the desert lacked everything except sand, and the Daimyo of the Land of Wind had little interest in funding their village.

As a result, Rasa, the Fourth Kazekage, had to personally use his Gold Dust technique to subsidize the village by panning for gold.

The Fifth Kazekage, Gaara, controls ordinary sand, the Third Kazekage controls iron sand, and the Fourth Kazekage, Rasa, has the powerful ability to control gold dust.

When this guy fought, wealth and riches were scattered all over the battlefield. If someone were killed by him, it would certainly be called a glorious funeral.

But panning for gold could only be a temporary measure. Over time, gold would become less valuable.

To secure some benefits, Rasa had to take the risk, hoping that everyone would be satisfied.

Konoha is so strong, yet you still withhold our funds—what if the Land of Fire decides to go to war in the future?

Anyway, at most, some lives would be lost, it wouldn't be too much of a loss.

Just when Rasa was formulating a plan, a notorious figure in the ninja world, one of the Legendary Sannin, Orochimaru, betrayed the village and came to him, seeking revenge on Konoha.

It was a case of opportunity knocking at just the right time. As everyone knew, Orochimaru was once pursued by Konoha, and his desire for revenge was understandable. So, the two struck a deal.

This was the first encounter at the entrance to Sunagakure. The moment Rasa saw Orochimaru, he knew he was dealing with a snake who had lost his humanity.

If you want to know what happens next, stay tuned for the next chapter!

---

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

In the last chapter, we mention that the Fourth Kazekage, Rasa, and Orochimaru reached a preliminary agreement.

They want to strike against Konoha, but there is some disagreement on how to do it and to what extent.

Orochimaru wants to kill the Third Hokage, Sarutobi Hiruzen, and deliver a message to his former teacher.

Rasa disagrees, as killing a Kage is too extreme.

He only wants to weaken Konoha, not provoke a full-blown conflict. There is no need to go that far.

Orochimaru agrees on the surface but insists that his deep-seated hatred requires a more severe blow against Konoha.

Rasa concedes that it makes sense. In negotiations, when one party steps back, the other should also compromise.

As a gesture of sincerity, Rasa offers to use the village's most powerful weapon, the One-Tail Shukaku.

Orochimaru appears satisfied but secretly makes other plans. Thus, a superficial alliance forms, and the two further discuss the so-called "Crush Konoha Plan."

At this time, news of Jiraiya's return to the village hasn't yet spread.

However, Orochimaru understands that, given Konoha's current strength, relying only on himself and the alliance with the Sand Village won't be enough to achieve his goal.

He needs additional resources, but there is no need to inform Rasa about this.

****

"It's alright to tell you," Minato says at dinner, responding to Naruto's question. "Jiraiya-sensei went to find Tsunade-senpai, which is why you haven't seen him lately."

"Tsunade?"

"Yes. Even though we suspect that the Sand Village might be planning something big, they haven't made any overt moves yet. All we can do is take precautions. If Tsunade-senpai returns, even if war breaks out, our losses will be minimal."

Naruto thinks to himself, "Of course. She's the legendary healer who could heal the entire village single-handedly, and she's the one who can rally all of Konoha."

"But what if she can't be found?"

"Whether or not Jiraiya-sensei succeeds, he will return before the exams start. I won't allow the enemy to make any moves in Konoha, so you should focus on the exam. Until your generation is ready, we elders will handle these threats." Minato smiles warmly.

Naruto nods and continues eating, feeling that the food tastes even better. "Orochimaru, let's see if you can survive this."

"By the way, after Orochimaru's betrayal, did he go directly to the Land of Sound to establish the Sound Village?" Naruto suddenly remembers that in the original story.

Orochimaru betrays Konoha because he is obsessed with immortality, and that's when he begins experimenting on himself.

But since Itachi hasn't defected yet, maybe Orochimaru didn't leave the Akatsuki, and he could have even invited Pain to join forces! I'm not prepared for this level of threat!

Fortunately, Minato's words reassure him: "No, according to Jiraiya-sensei's investigation, Orochimaru did join the Akatsuki to avoid Konoha's pursuit, but he deflected for unknown reasons and was subsequently hunted by members of the Akatsuki."

"Is that so? One more thing, Dad—when you fought Obito, didn't you leave the Flying Thunder God mark on him?" Naruto asks, thinking that the mark is still there.

They could gather a team of strong allies like Kushina, Kakashi, Guy, Shisui, Fugaku, Itachi, Jiraiya, and more, and attack them all at once.

That way, they wouldn't have to worry about these constant threats.

"I did, but it wasn't effective after that," Minato admits, a little embarrassed. "But the mark was lost during the battle."

"Can someone erase the Flying Thunder God mark?" Naruto is surprised. Isn't it supposed to be permanent?

"It wasn't erased. My Rasengan was too powerful, and it obliterated everything below Obito's chest, causing the mark to disappear. We still aren't sure how he survived, but someone must have rescued him."

"...Okay, so even if Obito survived, he's not exactly in one piece. Is he even human anymore?"

"Does pervy sage know the full details about the Akatsuki organization?"

Minato doesn't correct Naruto's nickname for Jiraiya and replies, "I told Jiraiya-sensei everything I knew, including that this information came from your dreams."

"He wouldn't do something reckless, like storming into Amegakure alone, would he?" Naruto asks, worried that Jiraiya might feel it is his responsibility to correct the mistakes made by his former students.

Even with his strength and intelligence, what would happen to Konan and her 600 billion paper bombs?

"Don't worry. I've convinced Jiraiya-sensei not to take any immediate action. He won't do anything without discussing it with me first."

"Alright." Naruto processes the large amount of information he receives today and considers what steps to take next.

In any case, strength is the foundation of everything. If there's any doubt, becoming stronger is the priority. Once this exam is over, Naruto decides that he should also start training as a sage.

****

In the following days, Naruto's shadow clones begin practising ninjutsu related to the Flying Thunder God Jutsu, such as the time-space barrier that Minato uses to deflect a Tailed Beast Bomb.

Meanwhile, Naruto himself continues his physical training, sparring with Hinata, Sasuke, and the ever-energetic Kiba.

One difference is that Naruto no longer needs Kushina to make excuses to walk Hinata home. The two are now holding hands freely.

One day, a little girl suddenly runs out from the Hyuga Clan's gate, pouting and glaring at Naruto before pulling Hinata back inside.

"Sister, I've been waiting for you for so long! You haven't spent time with me for almost a month!"

Hinata hugs the little girl and apologizes, "This is my sister, Hanabi. She's been very attached to me since she was little. Maybe it's because I haven't had much time for her lately, so... so..."

Hanabi struggles slightly but then hugs Hinata tightly as well, thinking happily, "It's been so long since my sister held me like this." She turns back to Naruto, almost as if to show off...

Unfortunately, Naruto doesn't notice whether she rolls her eyes or not. He thinks this little girl is cute.

Even if he had seen it, he wouldn't have minded.

After all, if he marries Hinata in the future, he'd have to deal with the whole clan.

Who knows, maybe the fox spirit inside him makes him immune to their stares.

"It's alright, Hinata." Naruto knows about Hanabi. Hanabi seems to be attached to her sister, and Naruto wouldn't get upset over such a small thing.

Hinata says seriously, "Naruto-Kun, please do your best in tomorrow's exam. I'll be doing my best too!"

"Okay." Naruto gives Hinata the same warm smile as Minato. "Let's both do our best."

****

Read advanced chapters ahead on P@treon.

p@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you for reading.

Chapter Text

---

Nighttime in the Sealed Space.

Naruto sat in front of Kurama, patting his massive paw, and spoke in a low voice, "Big fox, I have an exam tomorrow."

"Yeah," Kurama replied, not particularly interested. He was bored since he couldn't go and brawl with Shukaku.

Naruto continued with a mock-serious tone, "This exam is tough. Can you help me relax?"

Kurama eyed him suspiciously. "What are you planning?" He knew Naruto never had a simple request.

"Hehe, I want to do something thrilling." Naruto grinned mischievously, revealing his true intentions.

But after hearing him out, Kurama declined, "Get lost."

"Just once!" Naruto pleaded.

"How about I help you exit instead?"

"Ah." Your friend Naruto Uzumaki has gone offline.

Naruto exited the sealed space, closed his eyes, and drifted off to sleep.

In the sealed space, Kurama also closed his eyes and settled down for the night.

However, a few hours later, Naruto woke up, sneaked back into the sealed space, saw the sleeping fox, smirked, and started climbing up Kurama's back.

Naruto knew Kurama's sleep schedule was almost identical to his own, mainly because Kurama would get bored if Naruto was asleep.

So, feeling smug, Naruto picked a tail with a suitable angle and slid down it using his "Reverse-Sand-Sliding Technique."

"Wahoo~ Take off~"

At that moment, all other forms of sliding, like sandboarding and grass sledging, paled in comparison to sliding down a fox's tail.

Sliding down from a height of several meters and doing so secretly while Kurama was asleep doubled the thrill!

What Naruto didn't realize, though, was that the moment he started climbing, Kurama had already opened one eye but didn't move.

When Naruto was about to reach the bottom, Kurama flicked the tip of his tail, sending Naruto soaring 100 meters into the air.

Naruto: "!!! What's happening?!"

He looked down to see Kurama staring up at him, grinning.

Naruto felt a chill down his spine and tried to talk his way out of it, "Ahahaha, big fox, you're awake? I was just, you know, slipping, and I happened to touch your tail... believe it or not?"

The last word dragged out because Naruto started to fall faster, "Ahhh~ Big fox, I was wrong!!!"

Naruto's earlier laughter turned into screams.

Kurama ignored him. As Naruto was about to land, Kurama caught him with his tail and then flung him into the air again. "Having fun, are we?" Kurama asked with a menacing grin.

"Ah~~~" Naruto screamed as he rose and fell.

Kurama caught and tossed him again. "You can play, right?"

Naruto continued to contribute to the background noise: "Ah~~~"

"You haven't had enough, have you?"

This time, Kurama stood up, angled his tail, and let Naruto slide down again.

Then, using his other tails, he created a roller-coaster-like track and let Naruto spin around 81 times.

When Kurama finally let him down, Naruto's eyes were swirling.

"Big fox, I think I might have developed a fear of heights," Naruto muttered before passing out.

Kurama caught Naruto with a tail, preventing him from hitting the ground, and gently placed him on his head.

Lying down again, Kurama recalled a prophecy: "In the future, there will be a boy who will call out the name of the Nine-Tailed Beast and play with it..."

"It's him... The old man won't recognize anyone else," Kurama grinned, the happiest he had been in a thousand years.

****

Early the next morning, Naruto finished his breakfast alone. Minato, Kushina, and Kimimaro had already left, leaving a note for Naruto.

It was the first day of the exam, and they had much to do.

Naruto first went to the ninja shop to collect his custom kunai, then headed to the training ground as usual.

His reporting time wasn't until three in the afternoon, and he had agreed to meet his friends there.

Before everyone arrived, Naruto released some shadow clones to apply a sealing technique to the kunai handles.

The clones didn't mess around, as seriousness is in the mood.

When Sasuke and Sakura arrived, Naruto handed them each a kunai.

Sasuke, familiar with Minato's Flying Thunder God technique, had a good idea of what was going on.

Sakura, however, looked curiously at the oddly shaped kunai with a swirling logo on the handle and asked, "What's this?"

"Just hold it and stay still," Naruto said, tossing a kunai. As it flew, Naruto instantly disappeared and reappeared in midair, holding the kunai.

For a moment, Naruto wanted to blurt out, "This is Flying Thunder God Jutsu!" but fortunately, he held back, returning to Sakura.

"That's..." Sakura was speechless with surprise. Even with her current dynamic vision, she could see Sasuke's movements when he practised the Chidori, but she didn't catch Naruto's movements at all.

"This is the Flying Thunder God Jutsu. No matter how far away I am, I can instantly appear wherever this Jutsu is placed, and I can bring others with me."

"That's amazing!" Sakura exclaimed.

"Then, let's practice this technique together. With it, we can improve our tactical coordination."

Five minutes later.

"Ugh—"

"Ugh—"

When Hinata and the others arrived at the training ground, they found Naruto tossing a kunai up and down in boredom while Sasuke and Sakura were leaning against a tree, vomiting.

After dozens of times experiencing intense spatial disorientation, they had contributed their breakfasts to the forest as fertilizer.

Naruto, having experienced this since childhood and played with shadow clones' crazy flashes, was used to it.

Seeing this, Hinata asked with concern, "Naruto-kun, what happened to them?"

"Nothing serious, just ninja aftereffects," Naruto replied, handing Hinata a kunai and explaining the situation.

Hinata accepted the kunai with surprise, realizing that with this, Naruto-kun could visit her at any time.

Hinata blushed at the thought. What if Naruto-kun showed up at an awkward time...? Oh, where should she keep this kunai...?

Naruto noticed Hinata's expression and was puzzled. Where did this trouble come from? He gave her the kunai for protection.

Having finally found a loyal girlfriend after two lifetimes, he had to take precautions. Many eyed her because of her Byakugan.

How could he not provide some form of protection?

Naruto thought a woman's mind is indeed hard to understand & girls' too.'

Everyone focused on their regular training. Since they didn't know the content of the afternoon exam, it was wise not to overexert themselves.

At noon, Hinata shyly took out two bento boxes she had prepared that morning.

Naruto was overjoyed and eagerly dragged Hinata to a spot to eat together.

Meanwhile, Sakura looked frustrated as Sasuke walked away. She angrily thought, 'Why didn't I think to bring Sasuke a bento?!'

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

After the meal, Naruto holds Hinata's small hand, leading her on a walk to help with digestion.

While Hinata's cooking is delicious, Naruto is perplexed, wondering if she has eaten enough.

He recalls an episode from the anime where Hinata consumes over 40 bowls of ramen during a Big Eater competition—not because she can't eat more, but because the time runs out.

Naruto can't help but wonder how much she can truly eat in reality, though he finds it hard to ask.

He makes a mental note to visit a snack street with her when they have the time so he can observe her appetite more discreetly.

After a while, their friends start returning, and it's nearly two o'clock.

Kiba, the most impatient among them, shouts for everyone to submit their applications.

Naruto, still holding Hinata's hand, is reluctant to let go. "What's the rush? Even if we go early, we won't get extra points. Besides, we might encounter some clueless candidates."

"Isn't that even better? Let them see how strong we are, right, Akamaru?" Kiba retorts.

"Woof!" Akamaru barks in agreement, wagging his tail.

Sasuke is also eager to move. After training intensely for so long, he's itching to show off.

"Fine, let's go early," Naruto finally agrees, curious about what kind of opponents they'll face.

He's particularly interested in seeing the current state of the boy who, like him, lost his parents at a young age.

The six of them, along with Akamaru, set off for the academy. Naruto finally lets go of Hinata's hand.

Naruto doesn't mind holding her hand, but Hinata feels embarrassed, her face almost buried in her chest.

Naruto casts a kind glance at Sakura, who is walking ahead of him.

He sighs, wondering why they are so different at the age of 12.

Naruto lowers his gaze sympathetically.

Sakura gets annoyed and feels compelled to punch Naruto.

She shakes her head and condemns herself internally, thinking, 'Naruto is an excellent teammate. Why do I have these thoughts?'

****

When they reach the second level, they spot a classroom labelled 301, with a crowd gathered at the door, disputing with two chunin guards.

As they arrive, they witness one of the chunin knock down Rock Lee.

Sakura frowns, realizing that the floor is covered with a genjutsu barrier.

When Sasuke notices Lee's appearance, he thinks of the weird members of the Uchiha clan.

He becomes enraged and uses his Sharingan, which quickly reveals the illusion.

Kiba's nose twitches and Shino examines an insect on his index finger while everyone demonstrates their skills. However, Naruto is listening to Tenten.

Tenten is helping Lee with his plan to feign weakness, pleading with the two chunin to let them pass.

Her elder brother looks on coldly, seemingly too embarrassed to play along with his comedic teammate.

The two chunin sneer, proclaiming that the weaklings present are undeserving of sitting for the chunin exams.

Naruto recognizes the voice—it sounds like Kotetsu Hagane, one of Konoha's infamous pranksters. Have they used the Transformation Jutsu to disguise themselves?

Leave it to those two to ditch guarding the village gate to oversee the exam entrance.

Kiba can't take it anymore and, with Akamaru's support, speaks up. "Hey, how long are you going to keep up this farce?"

Kotetsu feigns ignorance. "Huh? What are you talking about?"

Sasuke, always eager for attention, walks over with his hands in his pockets. "Hmph, a mere illusion like this can't fool these eyes. Stop embarrassing yourselves!"

As he speaks, he deliberately flashes his double-tomoe Sharingan.

Sakura exclaims, "Amazing, as expected of Sasuke!"

It's worth mentioning that the way she pronounces this line in the anime is quite amusing.

Kotetsu and Izumo sigh as they remove the genjutsu. It was only intended to prevent inferior candidates from continuing.

The onlookers murmur in admiration. "So this is the Uchiha clan? Impressive."

Even Tenten can't help but comment, "This year's newcomers are quite impressive."

Neji, however, is not pleased. The Hyuga clan has a saying, "The Hyuga clan is the strongest."

Even Hinata's father, Hiashi Hyuga, often declares this after defeating an opponent, a habit that makes people want to roll their eyes.

Neji has been raised with this mindset, so he isn't thrilled about the Uchiha clan, though he doesn't provoke them.

With his usual good manners, he greets Hinata politely, "Lady Hinata."

"Brother Neji," Hinata replies naturally, indicating they have a good relationship.

Tenten, looking Hinata up and down, teases, "So this is the little sister Neji always talks about? He always praises you, especially since you graduated, saying you're improving rapidly!"

"Ah, thank you, thank you," Hinata stammers, not quite sure how to handle such familiarity.

"Tenten, don't say too much," Neji scolds her gently.

"Hee hee," Tenten giggles, sticking her tongue out at Neji.

It is a heartwarming scene, almost like a husband and wife in perfect harmony.

Naruto can't help but think he has discovered something—a cold protagonist & cheerful female lead.

Rock Lee then approaches Sasuke. "You must be Sasuke Uchiha. Hello, I've heard a lot about you from the three upperclassmen. They say you're a genius, and I'm looking forward to a match."

Sasuke grits his teeth at the mention of those three eccentrics. "Well, thanks to them, I'll show you the true power of the Uchiha."

Sasuke doesn't underestimate Lee despite his earlier dishevelled appearance. He knows that these green-clad ninjas are formidable opponents.

To take them lightly would be a grave mistake.

While they chat, Kiba is fuming. 'I was supposed to be first! I was the one who stood up and exposed them, but why did Sasuke steal the spotlight? Shouldn't someone ask me how I saw through that illusion?'

"It's the smell," Shino's voice suddenly whispers in Kiba's ear.

Kiba jumps in surprise. "When did you get here?"

Shino ignores Kiba's question and continues his speculation. "We didn't arrive too early. If this were the real exam room, there should already be candidates inside. You and Akamaru can smell the human scent, whether it's sweat or something else."

Shino adjusts his sunglasses and adds, "If you want to ask me how I know..."

"Because you know my sense of smell. You're so annoying," Kiba interrupts Shino's long-winded explanation.

He turns to the others and calls out, "Hey, it's time to go upstairs and submit our applications!"

The group begins to ascend the stairs. Shino, momentarily forgotten, adjusts his sunglasses again, and a mysterious gleam reflects off the lenses.

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Nine of them enter the classroom one by one.

Inside, the room is already packed with hundreds of candidates, gathered in small groups.

Some are chatting and laughing, while others seem tense and focused.

As they settle in, a small figure darts over and latches onto Sasuke's back.

"Sasuke, you finally showed up! We've been waiting forever!" Ino pouts playfully, clinging to Sasuke and shooting a glare at Sakura.

Sparks fly between the two girls as they lock their eyes.

Sakura steps forward and grabs Ino's arm. "Let go of Sasuke!"

"No way!" Ino tightens her grip.

"Let go!" Sakura's forehead creases in frustration.

"Not a chance!" Ino sticks out her tongue and makes a face.

Sasuke frowns and pulls away from the two girls, breaking free from their grip.

Ino finally lets go, but the argument with Sakura continues right on the spot.

Naruto can't help but wonder if Ino's more interested in getting Sakura's attention than Sasuke's.

Shikamaru and Choji follow closely behind. The room is filled with experienced ninjas and others from different villages, making the three of them feel a bit uneasy.

"You guys finally made it. This exam is such a drag," Shikamaru grumbles.

Choji continues munching on his snacks and offers his bag of chips to Naruto. "Want some?"

"No thanks," Naruto replies. It's not every day that someone from the Akimichi clan offers to share their food. Choji must consider him a friend.

In return, Naruto rummages through his belongings and pulls out a large package of snacks, handing it to Choji.

Since the mission to the Land of Waves, Naruto has made it a habit to carry extra food, water, and other essentials.

"Whoa, Naruto! You're the best!" Choji exclaims, hugging the snack package just as he finishes up his stash.

Naruto glances around the room, noting that Konoha has the most participants, followed by Suna.

However, aside from Gaara's team, most are just average ninjas.

"Hey, are all the rookies here to take the exam this year?" Tenten asks in surprise. "But you guys have some bad luck. This year's exam isn't going to be easy."

Sakura and Ino pause their bickering and turn to listen as Tenten continues, "This year's Chunin Exams have the highest number of participants in years, which means it's going to be tougher. You newbies should've trained a bit more."

Noticing that Neji seems close to these Genin because of Hinata, Tenten doesn't mind sharing some advice.

"Newcomers are often seen as easy targets. They'll likely be picked on right from the start."

Sakura and Ino look a bit uneasy, while Hinata silently encourages herself.

Kiba, full of confidence, smirks, "That's exactly what I'm hoping for!"

Akamaru barks in agreement.

"Such a hassle," Shikamaru mutters, gazing up at the ceiling, already thinking of a way to opt out.

Choji continues eating, unconcerned about the warnings—after all, food is far more important than any intel.

Sasuke stands beside Naruto, cool and confident, clearly agreeing with Kiba's attitude.

'I'm not targeting anyone specifically, but everyone here is just cannon fodder,' Naruto thinks, debating whether to voice the insult when a puff of smoke erupts at the front of the room.

Ibiki Morino, dressed in a large black trench coat, strides onto the stage with a group of proctors. "Listen up, you maggots! Quiet down!"

"The first exam starts now! I'm the head proctor, Ibiki Morino. Submit your application forms, then get your number plates and take your assigned seats."

The candidates line up, handing in their forms and receiving their number plates.

Naruto glances at Hinata as they both line up, thinking, 'What is this, some kind of love lottery with these number plates?'

The two end up sitting next to each other, and Naruto can't help but wonder if his mother, Kushina, has somehow threatened Ibiki to make this happen.

Once everyone is seated, Ibiki begins explaining the rules.

"First rule: Each of you starts with 10 points, and there are 10 questions on the test. It's a point deduction system—one point lost for each wrong answer or unanswered question."

"Second rule: The test results are calculated as a team."

"The most important rule: If you're caught cheating, or if the proctor even suspects you of cheating, you lose 2 points each time."

"You want to be Chunin? Then take this test like real ninjas."

"If any one member of your team scores zero, the entire team fails. And the final question will be given 45 minutes into the test."

"The exam is one hour long, starting now."

The candidates flip over their test papers. Sakura, brimming with confidence, begins writing immediately.

As a top student, she believes no written test can stump her. Sasuke and Naruto, who also have strong academic records, feel secure as well.

Sakura quickly breezes through the first nine questions, her speed even surpassing that of some Chunin who already know the answers.

She looks up, surprised to see so many others still frozen, not even starting.

A moment of realization hits her—these questions are far beyond what any Genin should know.

Naruto is also working through the questions.

The first one is a coding problem. Naruto examines it closely; it looks like some kind of ancient script, almost like the Poneglyphs from *One Piece*. 'Do I need to summon Nico Robin to answer this?'

The second question involves calculating the trajectory of a shuriken thrown by Ninja A and predicting the characteristics of an enemy who might appear within the shuriken's range.

'When did throwing weapons become rocket science?' Naruto thinks, bewildered.

As he continues through the questions, they only get more absurd—like analyzing complex chemical reactions.

Naruto finally drops his pen. 'Sorry to all the geniuses out there. I can't answer a single one of these.'

Sasuke finds himself in a similar predicament, but then he remembers Ibiki's words: "Take this test like real ninjas."

Understanding the hidden message, Sasuke activates his Sharingan, copying the movements of the candidate in front of him and writing down the answers.

The Uchiha clan's trademark technique is perfect for acing tests and copying homework.

Meanwhile, the other candidates use their unique skills—some employ Byakugan, others send bugs to gather information, and some communicate with their ninja dogs to get the answers. All in a day's work for a ninja.

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Naruto knows the purpose of the exam is to test their intelligence-gathering skills, but he realizes he doesn't have any Jutsu that could help him cheat.

Could he use the Flying Thunder God Jutsu to teleport to Sakura's side, swap their test papers, and then teleport back?

The proctor isn't blind, and that would get him kicked out right away.

Maybe he could contact Kurama, the fox spirit inside him. It'd be like phoning a friend on a quiz show. But asking the Nine-Tails for help? Forget it.

It's better to wait for the 10th question and just turn in a blank sheet. Who knows, maybe he can pass with a blank.

For some reason, not writing anything feels like the most "Naruto" thing to do.

Naruto isn't worried, but someone else is.

After Sakura finishes answering the questions, she notices Naruto resting his chin on his hand, staring off into space. His pen has rolled to the edge of the table and is about to fall off.

Sakura is baffled. Why has Naruto, the strongest student since graduation, suddenly become the weakest link?

Inner Sakura: 'Are you kidding me!? Sasuke is almost done, and you're just sitting there! Move it, idiot!'

As time passes, some people get caught cheating by the proctor and are thrown out along with their teammates.

The boldest move is by Kankuro's puppet, which has disguised itself as a proctor and even catches a few cheaters without being exposed.

Ino, who is sitting behind Sakura, sees that she has stopped writing and assumes she's done.

Even though she usually teases Sakura, Ino has to admit she admires her skills.

So Ino focuses on Sakura and tries to copy her answers using the Mind Transfer Jutsu.

But as soon as she enters Sakura's mind, Inner Sakura punches her right out: "You were just trying to steal Sasuke from me, and now you want to copy my answers? Get lost!"

'What!?' Ino's head spins. How could her jutsu fail like that?

Failed once & failed again.

Left with no other option, she has to switch targets, still confused.

…

Forty-five minutes have passed. The students have copied almost everything they need. Now it's time for the final question.

"First, you need to decide if you want to answer the 10th question. If you choose not to answer, you'll get zero points, and your teammates will also be disqualified.

If you choose to answer but get it wrong, you'll never be eligible to take the Chunin Exams again."

Ibiki Morino's words create intense pressure on the candidates.

Some give up, afraid of losing their chance to become Chunin forever.

Naruto, though, thinks it would be fun if he could stay a Genin forever.

Then he'd drag Sasuke around, fighting battles in other countries using a giant robot like a Gundam.

If anyone came to investigate, Minato could just step in and say, '"Don't worry. It's just these two Genin from our village having a little sparring match."'

…

When Ibiki announces that the remaining candidates have passed, only 20 teams are left out of the original 51.

It's even fewer than in the original timeline because Naruto hasn't jumped up to cause a scene.

As Ibiki is about to congratulate them with a smile, a black cloth suddenly covers the scene.

On the cloth, the words "Second Examiner, Anko Mitarashi" are written.

When Anko mentions that at least half of them will be eliminated, Naruto sizes her up and down. 'So, it's you, Aunt Anko. I wonder if my mom ever tried to set you up on a blind date with Kakashi.'

The candidates follow Anko to the site for the second exam.

As Ibiki gathers the exam papers, he notices Naruto's blank sheet.

'The Fourth Hokage's son turned in a blank paper. Isn't he supposed to be talented? Should I go after him and disqualify him?' Ibiki can't help but laugh at his thoughts.

…

Anko begins explaining the rules for the second exam.

Each team will receive a scroll, either marked with "Heaven" or "Earth." They need to collect both scrolls and reach the central tower within five days to qualify.

Before receiving the scroll, they have to sign a waiver of liability.

After that, whether they live or die is out of Konoha's hands, and the final decision rests with the village.

Most candidates hide their scrolls carefully, afraid someone might see which one they have.

Naruto, on the other hand, openly holds his Heaven scroll. If everyone sees it, maybe half of them won't bother him.

As for the other half who decide to target him, Naruto is ready to flip them off and shout, "Come at me!"

If he can win, he'll fight. If he can't, he'll run. With the Flying Thunder God Jutsu, could he even die in a fight?

Naruto even thinks about taking his teammates home for a meal midway through the exam and returning when they're full.

He wonders if Minato ever went home for dinner in the middle of a battle, leaving the enemy to wait while he came back and finished them off in one blow.

Naruto waves to Hinata and enters the designated entrance with Sasuke and Sakura.

Training Ground 44, also known as the Forest of Death, is a dense, jungle-like area filled with poisonous insects and wild beasts.

Naruto seriously doubts whether this forest is where the First Hokage fought and left his mark.

There's no place in all of Konoha with trees as thick and lush as the ones here.

"What should we do next?" Sakura asks.

Naruto excitedly pulls out three tents from his scroll and says, "Let's set up camp, hunt for food, and light a bonfire. I've never been camping before!"

Sasuke and Sakura both sweat-drop. What about the exam? Couldn't he be more serious?

"All right, fine," Naruto says, noticing their annoyed expressions. "We'll look for the scroll first."

With that, Naruto activates his Kagura's Mind Eye. His current range is about 5 kilometres, but it can extend up to 10 kilometres.

"Yes! About 500 meters away, there's one large and two smaller chakra signatures. The smaller ones are about the same as Sakura's, and the larger one has several times Kakashi-sensei's chakra."

Sasuke:?

Sakura:?

What kind of unit is a *"Kakashi?"*

"Oh, one 'Kakashi' is the amount of chakra that Kakashi-sensei has," Naruto explains casually.

Sasuke doesn't pay much attention to Naruto's made-up unit and says in surprise, "Is there such a strong presence among the Genin?"

"Having a lot of chakra doesn't necessarily mean they're strong…" Naruto thinks of three people who might have that much chakra.

One is Gaara. If it was him, he would've already started yelling about wanting to beat everyone up.

Another is Orochimaru, although Konoha hasn't found any trace of him yet. Naruto isn't sure if Orochimaru is involved in the exams.

The last one is Karin. Naruto is thinking about how to convince her to stay in Konoha.

After all, she's technically part of the Uzumaki clan. Maybe she's even a distant cousin. He can't just let her go back to Kusagakure to suffer.

"Let's go take a look, and make sure you have the kunai I gave you," Naruto says as they move forward.

****

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

----

After walking for a while, Naruto raises his hand.

"We've been discovered," he says.

It's not surprising, given how openly they've been moving. Both Sakura and Sasuke silently grumble to themselves.

Sure enough, two large men jump out of the bushes the next moment.

One of them unsheathes the long knife on his back, eyeing the three young ninjas. "Oh? Looks like we've run into one of Konoha's rookie teams. We're in luck."

The other smirks, just as confident. "If you know what's good for you, hand over your scrolls now. Otherwise, don't blame us for what happens next."

Sasuke turns to Naruto. "One each?"

"Sure," Naruto replies casually. "I'm not in the mood for a fight, but since you're being so polite, I guess I'll oblige."

The man with the knife can't hold back any longer. "How arrogant! You two brats!"

The other one chimes in. "You won't even know what hit you!"

Naruto wants to laugh but holds it back. For a fight, it's better to be serious.

Sasuke throws a kunai, and Naruto follows suit.

The two grass ninjas dodge and are about to sneer, "Newbies will be newbies. Is this all they've got..."

But before they can finish, lightning crackles around Sasuke's body, and his left hand has already pierced one of the men's chests.

Naruto vanishes in an instant, reappearing at the spot where he threw his kunai, and slams a Rasengan into the other man's skull.

In truth, defeating these two doesn't require much effort, but both Naruto and Sasuke want to test out their new techniques.

For Sasuke, it's the first time his Chidori strikes a person And for Naruto, it's the first time he uses the Flying Thunder God Jutsu in combat.

Besides, these two Kusa-nin aren't good people. Their intentions were lethal, so there's no guilt in taking them down.

The two Kusa-nin collapse and Sasuke coolly shakes the blood off his hand.

Naruto pulls out a canteen from his scroll and tosses it to Sasuke to wash his hands. Reflecting on his actions, Naruto thinks the move looked pretty cool.

"Sakura, check their bodies. I'll scout ahead to see if there's anything left," Naruto says.

Sasuke follows without a word. These two weaklings were the ones Naruto sensed earlier. He's curious to see how strong the third one might be.

Sakura quickly searches the bodies of the two Kusa-nin. It's not that Naruto doesn't care about her, but as a ninja, she wouldn't be squeamish about corpses. Moreover, Sakura is studying medicine, so examining bodies is no big deal for her.

Naruto and Sasuke soon find the third person's hiding spot.

It's a young girl with red hair and red eyes, wearing glasses and a Kusa-nin forehead protector. She's about the same height as Sakura and is leaning against a tree, looking at them in fear.

Sasuke frowns. "Are you sure she's the stronger one?"

Sakura, who found nothing on the two Kusa-nin, looks at Naruto, puzzled.

"In terms of chakra, yes," Naruto explains casually. "But it seems she hasn't learned much ninjutsu, or even had much training."

The blonde one is handsome, and the black-haired one behind him is even more handsome, the girl thinks.

Sakura, noticing the way the girl is looking at Sasuke, quickly steps in front of him, eyeing her warily.

Karin snaps back to reality, realizing now isn't the time to be distracted. She holds out the Earth scroll with trembling hands. "This is our scroll. Please, don't kill me!"

Sasuke and Sakura both look at Naruto.

"She... might have relatives from my clan," Naruto says as he takes the scroll. "Do you know the Uzumaki Clan?"

Karin is taken aback. Do I have relatives among Konoha's ninjas? But this handsome guy seems approachable. "No... I don't know."

"I see..." Naruto muses. It's not surprising. After the fall of Uzushiogakure, the surviving members of the Uzumaki clan likely went into hiding.

At the time, they probably didn't dare tell their children about their lineage, fearing it would bring disaster.

Thinking of this, Naruto says, "Come with us. With your teammates gone, you probably don't plan on continuing the exam, right?"

"Ah, yes," Karin replies. She had been sent to take the exam by a bald man from Kusagakure, tasked with healing her teammates by letting them bite her.

Now that they're dead, there's no point in staying. She could be attacked by wild beasts at any moment.

It's better to go with this kind of ninja; if she has relatives in Konoha, it would be better to take refuge there than continue being used by those in Kusagakure.

Naruto contacts Kushina via a communication link and asks her to meet them at the Hokage's office.

Leaving with someone from another village requires approval from the Hokage.

So, Naruto creates a shadow clone.

As soon as the clone appears, it sticks a small disk labelled "001" on its chest, seemingly out of nowhere.

Naruto resists the urge to punch him and pats the clone's shoulder. "Come on, this is serious. Can you act more responsibly?"

"Don't worry, I got this," the clone, labelled No. 001, says confidently before placing his hand on Karin's shoulder and vanishing.

"I trust you as far as I can throw you," Naruto mutters under his breath.

Ignoring the clone, Naruto shakes the two scrolls at his teammates. "Let's go. Time to head to the central tower."

The tower is only five kilometres away. It won't take long if they move quickly, though they might encounter other candidates or dangerous creatures on the way.

Better to reach the tower early and avoid unnecessary trouble.

...

The other clone arrives at the Hokage's office with Karin in tow.

"Hey, Pervy Sage, what are you doing here?"

The office is occupied by only two people: Jiraiya and Minato, who seem to be in the middle of a discussion.

"Naruto? Shouldn't you be taking the second test? How did you get here?" Minato asks, eyeing Karin, who hasn't yet reacted to her surroundings. "And who's this?"

"Did you meet a pretty girl during the exam and couldn't wait to introduce her to your parents?" Jiraiya quips, noticing Karin's red hair. "Oh, as expected of father and son—similar taste!"

"I'm just a shadow clone," No. 001 explains. "The real me is still taking the exam. This girl here... well, she might have ties to the Uzumaki clan. I figured we should let my mom confirm it."

The door to the office bursts open, and Kushina storms in. "Where is she?"

No. 001 guides the timid Karin toward Kushina. "Mom, is this my long-lost sister?"

Minato: ??

Karin: ??

Jiraiya: !!!

****

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Kushina looks at Karin's red hair, senses the chakra in her body, and thinks, 'This child must be from my clan.'

Naruto pushes the timid Karin, who tugs at the corner of his shirt, forward and says, "Don't be afraid; everyone here is family. Tell us about yourself. How did you end up in Kusagakure? Has everything been okay?"

Jiraiya, standing nearby, hears Naruto refer to him as family and smiles happily.

Kushina looks at Karin with concern. "Yes, I might even be your aunt!"

It has been a long time since anyone has shown Karin such kindness, so she slowly begins to share her story.

In her memory, when she was very young, she wandered with her mother, who told her that their homeland had been overtaken by bad people.

They end up in the Land of Grass, where they are taken in by Kusagakure.

But outsiders like them aren't easily welcomed; they are grudgingly given a place to stay, and even finding food is a struggle.

One day, the shinobi of Kusagakure discover that Karin's mother has a special ability—anyone who bites her and absorbs her chakra can heal quickly, even from wounds deemed incurable.

From that day on, Karin's mother often goes to the hospital to help in exchange for food. She also begins wearing long-sleeved clothes all the time, even in the hottest weather.

Little Karin always thinks her mother is just working hard.

This goes on for a long time until one day, when Karin is waiting at home for her mother as usual, what comes instead is her cold, lifeless body. Karin sees her mother's arm hanging off the bed, covered in bite marks.

Karin cries, terrified, but the Kusagakure shinobi don't let her go. Instead, they take her to the hospital.

Unfortunately, Karin has the same ability as her mother.

So, Karin falls into the same fate. Day after day, she is bitten by different people to heal their injuries.

Even when she sleeps, she fears someone will come to take her to the hospital, as if she were born for this purpose.

The shinobi of Kusagakure tells her, "You and your mother are just outsiders. The village has taken care of you for so long; you have to give something in return."

Now, Karin's arms, shoulders, and legs are covered with dense bite marks.

Karin is deeply scared, with her mother's tragic fate still fresh in her memory. She doesn't know when she will die just as miserably. She hates her abilities.

As she recounts these memories, Karin's shoulders tremble, and she begins to cry.

Jiraiya looks out the window silently. He has witnessed many tragic things, but to do such a thing to a child... Kusagakure...

Minato clenches his fists, his knuckles turning white.

Tears well up in Kushina's eyes. She understands the pain and helplessness of living in a foreign land.

She has experienced the agony of sealing the Nine-Tails when she was young, but now she has her own home and can protect herself. But this child...

Kushina embraces Karin and comforts her. "Good girl, I'll be your mother from now on, and you'll be my daughter. No one will dare to bully you again!"

Karin, still terrified of Kusagakure, says, "But what if they come for me again..."

"They wouldn't dare!" Kushina's red hair flares up. "I still have to settle the score with them. If they so much as whisper your name, I'll blow their heads off!"

Minato adds with a reassuring smile, "I'll handle Kusagakure. Don't worry, you're my daughter now, and your father is the Hokage."

Looking at Kushina's flowing red hair and Minato's warm smile, Karin suddenly feels an overwhelming sense of security. She throws herself into Kushina's arms. "Mom—! Waaaaahhh..."

Karin cries, releasing all the grievances, pain, sorrow, and fear she has held in for so many years.

Kushina holds her close, one arm around her, and gently strokes her red hair, as bright as her own, with the other.

Time seems to pass slowly as Karin's voice grows hoarse, and her crying gradually subsides into small sobs.

Naruto, watching the scene, turns to Minato and asks, "Dad, do you know how many Kusagakure shinobi made it to the second round?"

Minato looks at the report Ibiki has submitted to him. "There are nine in total, including Karin."

"So that means there are six left."

"What are you planning?"

"Of course, I'm going to collect some interest. My sister's been bullied; how could I, her big brother, not do anything?"

However, Minato pulls out a file on Karin from the candidates' materials submitted by Kusagakure and says, "But according to this, Karin is older than you, Naruto."

"Huh?" Naruto is embarrassed. "So I'm the younger brother?"

"There's one more thing." Minato, trying to lighten the mood, pulls out another report. "Care to explain why you got a zero on the written test?"

"Ah, that—"

Kushina, noticing that Karin has calmed down, teases Naruto. "Getting a zero on a test, Naruto, now you have to call Karin 'sister.' I'll let it slide for Karin's sake, but otherwise..."

Naruto glances at Karin, who has wiped her tears and put her glasses back on, and reluctantly says, "Sis-sister—"

"Well, little brother with a zero on your test, please take care of me," Karin responds solemnly, then looks at Naruto's conflicted expression and bursts into a giggle.

"Hahaha..." The whole room joins in the laughter, and Naruto's earlier wounds are momentarily forgotten.

"Well, I should go and report to the main body." Naruto's clone suddenly looks away. 'We're just a clone after all. Let's make the main body suffer with this,' and then resolutely dispels himself.

...

The clone's memory returns to the original Naruto, about an hour later.

Along the way, Naruto and the others defeat a team from Otogakure and take down a tiger and a bear, all while continuing their journey.

Naruto, who has just lectured Sasuke on the famous saying, "Set fire to the mountain, sit in the bottom of the prison," suddenly stops and looks up at the sky.

"So I'm destined to be the younger brother?"

It isn't so bad with Kimimaro, but even Sasuke is older than him, and now there's Karin, who's also older.

Naruto sighs, thinking back to when he was three and used to say offhandedly that it would be nice to have a younger brother to boss around, or a younger sister to look after...

Sasuke notices Naruto's pensive look and asks, "What's wrong?"

Sakura also stops. "Did you sense an enemy?"

"No," Naruto snaps out of his thoughts and says determinedly, "I just want to do something!"

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Naruto briefly explains the situation to his two teammates, avoiding too much detail about Karin's past of being tortured in the Village.

He considers it a personal matter and only mentions that Karin has had a tough time.

Sasuke picks up on the key points: "So, Karin is your sister?"

"She's your sister too," Naruto replies.

"What does that have to do with me?" Sasuke initially brushes it off but then remembers his Sensei with fiery red hair.

Sakura asks, "So, are you planning to stand up for your sister?"

"She will become your sister in the future, too," Naruto says, trying to form a connection.

"Huh?" Sakura is momentarily confused.

Naruto chuckles and adds, "When you change your last name to Uchiha in the future..."

"Ah..." Sakura's cheeks turn pink as she glances shyly at Sasuke. "Naruto, how can you say something like that?"

[Inner Sakura: If only you could talk like this more often!]

Sasuke is bewildered. Why would Sakura change her last name to Uchiha? Could there be some connection between her family and the Uchiha clan?

He thinks of Uchiha Izumi, a woman he doesn't particularly like. Although she originally had a civilian surname, her mother was a Uchiha, and she later changed her surname back to Uchiha after awakening her Sharingan.

Sasuke has always been cautious around her, not because he could tell she had intentions toward his brother.

'Could it be—she wants my brother to teach her how to train?'

'Absolutely not My brother already has so little time to train with me; I can't let her take even more of it away!'

Ignoring Sasuke's paranoid thoughts, Naruto summarizes that 20 groups have advanced to the second round, and after excluding his group and the three groups he has already dealt with, there are 16 groups left.

Naruto creates 16 shadow clones, waves his hand, and says, "Each clone will confirm a group, open a small map, and search the area thoroughly!"

"Yes, sir!"

The 16 clones scatter and quickly leave Naruto's sight.

One of the clones pins the number 001 card to its chest, another transforms into Naruko, and a third clone's cheerful expression turns into a blank stare.

Naruto says, "Let's keep moving toward the tower. If the clones don't find anything, they can also block the entrance."

Sasuke and Sakura have nothing to say; helping their sister is now their duty.

The Kagura Mind ability used by the clones might be slightly weaker than the main body's, but it is sufficient, and the Forest of Death isn't particularly large.

Since the exam has just started, the groups entering from different entrances are still relatively spread out.

Soon, the shadow clones locate each group and rush toward them.

Thirteen of the clones are unlucky and don't encounter any Grass Ninjas. They are initially disappointed because they've lost their chance to take action and rack up appearances. But then they cheerfully choose a method of self-destruction.

The unfortunate candidates witness little yellow-haired clones happily running into their line of sight and then, in front of their eyes, either committing suicide with a kunai, using Rasengan on themselves, smashing into a tree, or even grabbing a venomous snake to get bitten.

These 13 groups discuss the strange behaviour of the suicidal yellow-haired clone:

"That was a shadow clone, right?"

"Yeah, why did it show up just to kill itself in front of us?"

"You're stupid! The shadow clone is a reconnaissance jutsu. If it destroys itself after seeing us, it sends the information back to the original. That means our location and movements have been exposed."

Many teams quickly move and change their routes to avoid ambushes by the yellow-haired team.

Of course, some are confident enough not to care, like Gaara's team or the Sound Village's Dosu Kinuta's team.

They aren't afraid of being tracked and continue on their original paths.

Even the Konoha team assumes Naruto's shadow clone is just there to gather intel.

Tenten complains, "What's that guy thinking? Can't he just dispel the clone properly? Why does he have to stick his head into a lion's den? It's creepy!"

The Ino-Shika-Cho team also encounters a shadow clone, and Shikamaru calmly says, "Naruto probably won't bother us, so let's keep our ambush position. Finding another good spot is too troublesome."

Choji munches on his snacks and nods, "Yeah, Naruto gave me some precious snacks earlier, so he definitely won't come to steal our scrolls. How about we trade a scroll for some snacks with him?"

Ino facepalms in despair, unable to handle these two lazy and food-obsessed teammates.

However, clone 001 and an unnamed clone get lucky, and each finds a team of Grass Ninjas.

Clone 001 cheerfully blocks their path, wielding a makeshift Xuanhua Axe made of branches, and shouts:

"I own this road, and I planted these trees. If you want to pass, pay the toll!"

Meanwhile, the unnamed clone simply but confidently declares:

"You're surrounded by me."

The luckiest—and unluckiest—clone is Naruko because she encounters Hinata's team.

Naruko is initially thrilled. What luck to run into Hinata! Surely, the main body will reward him with a bunch of appearances for this!

But when Naruko jumps out to greet them, he notices something is off. Hinata takes two steps back, looking shocked and lost.

Kiba's jaw drops, and he points at Naruko like he's seen a ghost: "You—you…"

Akamaru barks in confusion.

The scent is right, but the appearance is... strange.
Shino adjusts his sunglasses, the lens reflecting a calculating light.

Naruko is baffled. Is something wrong with me? He strokes his blonde ponytails, then freezes as he realizes he can't see his toes...

Crap.

I'm done for! Did I turn into a woman?!

"Uh... Let the main body explain this to you later."

Seeing Hinata's wide-eyed shock, Naruko manages a bitter smile. He's probably about to lose his appearance count!

Naruko quickly dispels himself.

'Note to self: What do I do if my girlfriend discovers my hobby of cross-dressing? Asking for advice online, urgently!'

That's Naruko's last thought.

"Hahahahaha..."

Naruto bursts out laughing while walking with his two teammates, leaving Sasuke and Sakura staring at him in confusion.

What on earth is he up to?

After all this time training together, how could he not recognize Hinata's chakra? And what's with cross-dressing to advance the mission?!

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"Big fox, come out and blow up Konoha."

Naruto is tired of it all; he wants to destroy the village.

"I won't," Kurama responds, uninterested. "Why should I destroy Konoha? I'm watching this show with amusement, don't disturb me."

Besides, what did Konoha do wrong? It's not like you didn't cause this yourself.

This kid is full of violent thoughts every day, he needs to be educated. Isn't peace better?

Clone 001 also receives Naruko's memories at the same time. His expression, which had been joyful at unlocking a new jutsu, suddenly turns menacing:

"All this just to make me lose face in front of my future wife? You guys are dead!"

"Water Release: Exploding Water Colliding Wave!"

Clone 001 nearly drains all his chakra, and in an instant, a massive wave over 30 meters wide and 10 meters high surges forward, crashing down on the three trembling Grass Ninja.

They are tossed around like clothes in a washing machine, spinning and rolling with the waves, their limbs completely unresponsive.

Before they fall unconscious, all three Grass Ninjas have the same thought: Do you call this a Water Release jutsu?

When the water subsides, Clone 001 spots a large wild boar nearby and kicks it hard on its rear.

The enraged boar charges forward, and Clone 001 runs to where the three Grass Ninja have fallen, stops, and willingly allows himself to be trampled by the wild boar.

As for whether the boar stops after hitting him, that's none of his concern.

On the other end, another unnamed clone also receives Naruko's memories. His mouth twitches slightly before he regains his usual stoic expression.

The three Grass Ninjas who had been mocking the unnamed clone's poor accuracy now laugh even harder.

"With such a big mouth, I thought you'd be strong! But you can't even throw a kunai properly!"

Of the three kunai thrown, two are off-target, and the only one on course looks weak.

So the Grass Ninja in the middle casually catches the kunai. The other two fly past the Grass Ninja on either side.

What they don't expect is for the three clones to suddenly appear right beside them, standing in a triangle formation, surrounding them.

Each clone holds a Rasengan and thrusts it forward:

"Forbidden Jutsu: Instant Prison Shadow Clone Jutsu!"

The three Grass Ninja are sent flying by the impact of the Rasengan, colliding with each other, coughing up blood, and falling unconscious.

In the Forest of Death, the smell of blood will soon attract wild beasts.

The unnamed clone doesn't kill them, but he doesn't care about what happens next either.

Naruto's real body clutches his chest. The revenge he sought has been achieved, and he's even shown off his Hokage-level skills, but why doesn't he feel satisfied?

How will he explain this to Hinata when he gets back...

Naruto walks mechanically beside his two teammates, like a lifeless body, with a white soul seemingly floating out of his mouth.

Sasuke notices Naruto isn't in a good state and occasionally helps lift branches that might scratch him.

Sakura looks at Naruto with concern, though she also envies the attention he's getting.

Eventually, the three of them reach the central tower without further incident. The last part of their journey is surprisingly smooth.

Once they arrive, Sasuke and Sakura follow the instructions written on the wall and simultaneously open the Scrolls of Heaven and Earth.

By this time, Naruto has nearly regained his strength. He looks at the figure emerging from the smoke alongside his teammates.

Long black hair, a forehead protector, a tear mole at the corner of the right eye, a delicate face, and a purple coat.

"Why are you here?!" Sasuke exclaims, recognizing the person he least wants to see—Izumi Uchiha.

"Hello, Sasuke, Naruto, and you must be their teammate, Sakura?" Izumi Uchiha greets them with a smile.

"Ah, yes." Sakura quickly responds. Seeing the Uchiha crest on Izumi's clothes, she wonders why Sasuke seems to dislike her so much.

"Sister Izumi, why is it you?" Naruto asks. He's met Izumi a few times when visiting Sasuke's house and has once seen her give a dango stick to Itachi, who ate it happily.

"I heard from Itachi that you all were participating in the Chunin Exams, so I arranged for Anko to be in charge of your group."

Izumi can't understand why Sasuke has disliked her since they were kids. But she hopes that with more interaction and care, things will improve.

"Ahem." Izumi clears her throat, "Now, I'll explain the significance of 'Heaven' and 'Earth'. This is very important for becoming a Chunin."

Sasuke reluctantly listens to her explanation alongside his two teammates.

The gist is that a Chunin should be capable of leading a team, needing both brains and brawn—both are essential.

"That's about it. You're the first team to complete the second round of the exam. Keep up the good work."

Izumi bids farewell to the three with a smile and disappears into smoke.

"So, what now?" Sakura asks.

"We wait here for the other candidates to finish the exam. In the worst-case scenario, it could take up to five days."

"It's so boring. How about I create some shadow clones to take our place, and we can use the Flying Thunder God Jutsu to sneak out and come back when it's time?"

Sasuke thinks it might be better to train outside rather than just wait around.

Sakura doesn't mind as long as she's with Sasuke—she can train anywhere.

So Naruto creates three shadow clones and lets them assign roles among themselves.

However, as soon as the first clone appears, it shouts, "Freedom or death!" and stabs itself to death.

The second clone shouts, "I'd rather be free in death than live in chains!" and also stabs itself to death.

The third clone begins, "The mere body..." before Naruto punches it, finishing the sentence for it, "...would you rather have a seed?"

"Damn it, why are you all rebelling?"

Naruto understands what they mean. The main body doesn't want to stay bored here, and neither do the clones. This is a case of "what you don't want to do, don't force onto others."

(╯‵□′)╯︵┻━┻

Naruto feels like he's on the verge of losing his mind.

Sasuke and Sakura watch this scene unfold with barely contained laughter.

At first, they find Naruto's clones to be unruly and strange, but after getting used to them, it's quite entertaining. Not many things can make Naruto so frustrated.

What is this? The only one who can defeat him is himself.

Naruto, now accustomed to his clones' antics, pulls out a deck of cards from a scroll and a bunch of snacks like peanuts and melon seeds: "Forget it, let's just play cards while we wait."

Naruto Uzumaki, the man who can pull out anything from his scrolls, from sleeping bags to snacks and cards, is prepared for anything.

----
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura are playing cards in the lounge, and the loser has to put a sticker on their face.

At first, it's just normal entertainment with winners and losers, but Sasuke usually avoids games like this.

He wants to emulate his father Fugaku's serious and old-fashioned demeanour, thinking he wouldn't be playing cards with his two teammates.

So, Sasuke ends up losing the most, and the stickers on his face completely cover his eyes.

Then something miraculous happens. After that, Sasuke starts winning every game as if he has god's help.

Sakura is in awe, unable to believe how quickly Sasuke improves at playing cards, falling into her usual fangirl mode.

Naruto, however, senses that something is off. While Sasuke is shuffling the cards, Naruto casually lifts one of the stickers from Sasuke's face.

Sasuke's smooth movements halt, and under Naruto's scrutinizing gaze, Sasuke's eyes shift from their Sharingan state back to normal.

Caught red-handed, Sasuke feels the tension rise as Naruto's expression turns from suspicion to disgust. "No wonder you've been so eager to shuffle the cards every round! I thought you were just trying to get familiar with the rules or find a strategy,"

Naruto grumbles. "But you were using your Sharingan to track every card's position. No wonder you were winning!"

Naruto, now fuming, adds, "When the Sage of Six Paths finds out you're abusing the Sharingan for something like this? You should apologize to every generation of Indra, you bastard."

Naruto throws down his cards in frustration. "If I ever play cards with the Uchiha again, I'll be an idiot. That goes for the Hyuga clan too. You guys, with your special powers, have no business in gambling."

He continues to rant, "I remember hearing Izumo and Kotetsu joke that the Hyuga clan uses their Byakugan when playing cards, and now it all makes sense. This is ridiculous."

Deciding he's had enough, Naruto declares, "I'm done with these trash games. They're ruining my youth."

He tosses the cards aside and goes to retrieve some scrolls, eager to study instead. "At least learning makes me happy," he mutters, diving into his notes on space-time ninjutsu.

Sakura, witnessing the unexpected turn of events, is left in shock. Not knowing what else to do, she decides to join Naruto in studying.

She picks up the medical scroll Naruto had given her and Sasuke previously, focusing on how to use it.

Now she can carry some medical books with her, thanks to the sealing technique she learned.

Sasuke, his face flushed with embarrassment, quickly puts away the cards.

The game wasn't the problem—it's getting caught that's truly humiliating.

Resigned to his fate, he pulls out some ninjutsu scrolls and starts studying alongside his teammates.

---

Meanwhile, other teams in the forest aren't as relaxed as Team 7. Most are cautiously navigating through the woods, searching for other teams to steal scrolls from while trying to survive the harsh environment.

It's not that Naruto doesn't want to help Hinata's team; he does, but in the end, he decides against it.

Even after defeating two teams from the Grass Village, he chooses not to take their scrolls.

Naruto knows Hinata is stronger than she appears. She doesn't want him to solve everything for her.

She wants to become a chunin through her efforts. Naruto respects that and decides to keep an eye on her from afar, ensuring her team won't be ambushed by someone like Gaara.

As for the other teams, Naruto isn't too worried. It's not like Gaara would personally go after Hinata's scroll, especially considering their current relationship.

As the days pass, teams gather all their scrolls and make their way to the tower. On the fifth day, Hinata and her team appear on Naruto's minimap.

Naruto quietly slips away to meet Hinata. Seeing that she isn't injured, he advises her to rest and then leaves.

A few hours later, Izumi Uchiha enters the lounge and informs Naruto that they need to gather. Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura follow her.

Naruto asks curiously, "Sister Izumi, don't you have to go to the police force?"

Izumi smiles and explains, "I switched shifts with some friends. I'm here to watch Sasuke's match for Itachi-kun."

Sasuke turns away, sulking. "Hmph, if he cares so much, why doesn't he come himself?"

Izumi thoughtfully taps her chin. "Itachi-kun has an important mission. He said he'll come next time."

Sasuke doesn't look pleased.

Naruto, holding back his laughter, thinks to himself, 'Sure, Sasuke, I believe your brother. He'll come next time…'

The three of them follow Izumi to a large square, where a pair of giant arm statues stand.

The leading teachers of each team and all the examiners are present.

"Okay, that's it for now. Make sure to perform well in the test!" Izumi waves them off and rejoins the examiner's team, chatting quietly with Anko.

Kushina smiles, waving toward Naruto and his team. Karin, hiding behind Kushina, clings to her other hand.

Karin has been staying at Naruto's house for a few days now.

Although Kushina has taken her out a few times, Konoha is still unfamiliar to her, so she sticks close to Kushina.

The bond between them has grown strong, they almost seem like mother and daughter.

Karin's appearance has changed drastically; her once messy red hair is now neatly trimmed and combed. She wears a Konoha forehead protector, and her clothes and shoes are brand new.

Kushina has dressed her just like she dressed herself as a child, except Karin also wears glasses.

Nearby, Gai is enthusiastically chatting with Kakashi, striking various odd poses. Lee, with stars in his eyes, admires Gai while Tenten sighs, rubbing her forehead.

"Kakashi, you are not youthful today."

Kakashi, appearing distracted, obviously isn't paying much attention to Gai.

He resists the urge to pull out his favourite book in front of his Sensei's wife, finding the situation rather dull.

On the other side of Gai stands Asuma, a cigarette in his mouth, smiling as he watches his students.

Naruto scans the candidates who have passed. Among them are four teams from Konoha—the famous "Konoha 12"—a team from the Sand Village, a team from the Sound Village, and a team from the Rain Village.

Naruto muses to himself, noting that there are fewer teams than in the original timeline.

Kabuto isn't here, having stayed behind at the orphanage where he's happily playing the role of the "King of the Kids."

Hmm… suspicious title. In the original story, Kabuto's teammates are spies for Orochimaru; Naruto isn't sure where they are now.

Then again, Naruto has unknowingly altered the course of events by intercepting Kabuto's team and changing their route.

Unfortunately, they ran into Gaara and are no longer around.

As for the Rain Village team, who should have met their end at Gaara's hands, they too have changed their route, surviving and passing the second exam, thanks to Naruto's interference.

Once all the candidates have assembled, they line up in front of the stage. The chief examiner, Anko, announces that they have successfully passed the second exam.

Suddenly, a flash of golden light illuminates the stage, and Konoha's most handsome shinobi appears.

"Congratulations to everyone for passing the second exam. I am Minato Namikaze, the Fourth Hokage of Konoha," Minato announces with a warm smile, congratulating the candidates.

The students are in awe:

"What a fast body flicker!"

"I couldn't even see him move!"

"Is this the power of the Hokage?"

"And he's so handsome…"

Minato then explains the significance of the joint Chunin Exams, emphasizing that the performance of the candidates reflects the strength of their respective villages and could influence the number of missions their nations receive in the future.

"Alright then, I'll hand it over to you." With that, Minato returns to the stand.

Naruto, standing below, is secretly relieved. His father's speech is simple and to the point, avoiding the common pitfalls of long-winded speeches like the will of fire.

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"Cough, cough." Hayate Gekkō coughed twice, but Naruto couldn't tell if he was clearing his throat or genuinely coughing.

"I'm the examiner for this exam, Hayate Gekkō. Next, I'll be conducting the qualifiers for the third exam, ahem... It's a 1-on-1 arena..."

The examiner explained that since the third test would invite important figures from various villages, the competition time was limited; with so many participants, some needed to be eliminated.

So the preliminaries for the third test would determine who would participate in the official competition.

"If any participants are unwell or do not wish to compete for other reasons, they may withdraw now. Since this is an individual competition, withdrawing at this time will no longer affect your teammates..."

The candidates complained in their hearts, 'You're the one who should quit if you're not feeling well.'

Naruto looked at Hayate's pale face and weak voice. He couldn't help but complain about his father in his heart. ' This man is so ill, why not let him take a leave and rest instead of making him work overtime? '

Then, after a moment of thought, Naruto realized, ' This guy's girlfriend is so pretty, maybe if he goes back on vacation, he'll end up worse. Working overtime might be his only way to rest. My dad is far-sighted.'

"Since no one has withdrawn, the third test qualifier will begin now. The participants for each match will be randomly paired on that screen."

As soon as Hayate finished speaking, the screen on the sidelines began to scroll and finally stopped.

[Uzumaki Naruto vs. Hyuga Hinata]

Hinata: "?"

Naruto: "!!!"

Naruto felt the malice of the world. "When I used to watch the anime, I always thought the Chunin Exam's so-called "random" matching mechanism was rigged. And today, I finally believe that it is random."

' Dad wouldn't dare to play around like this. If you could manipulate it, my mom would make you kneel on the ground. '

Naruto turned his head to look at Hinata. ' First, I got caught in the Forest of Death when my clone was dressed as a woman, and now, I have to endure more domestic violence. This day never ends. '

"Pfft," Sakura couldn't hold back and burst out laughing. ' That's what you get for showing off your love every day. '

Even the Nine-Tails in the sealed space propped up its chin with its front paws, lying on the ground and watching with interest.

"Go, Hinata!" Kiba, the eternal single, cheered without hesitation. He knew Hinata had little chance of winning, but that didn't stop him from rooting for her.

Akamaru barked, "Woof!"

Naruto didn't know what to make of Akamaru's support, but it didn't matter now.

Hayate looked at the screen and said, "The participants in the battle stay here, and the others move to the viewing area."

Sakura and Ino temporarily set aside their differences, chatting about the gossip between Naruto and Hinata, occasionally laughing like aunts.

Meanwhile, all the Konoha candidates in the stands knew there was a match between the young couple.

They all leaned on the railing to watch the spectacle, except for Neji, who wasn't too pleased. He felt his sister was about to be taken away.

The candidates from the other villages noticed how interested the Konoha candidates were in this match and assumed these two must be strong.

The Hyuga girl had the Byakugan, and the blond boy looked a bit like the Fourth Hokage, so they concluded.

"The Fourth Hokage's son versus the eldest daughter of the Hyuga Clan? This match must be thrilling. No wonder these Konoha ninjas are so interested."

Kushina was scolding Minato while holding Karin, and Minato could only smile sheepishly and wave his hand, probably saying something like, "It's just a coincidence."

The examiners were intrigued, curious about the strength of the Hokage's son.

Asuma, however, was different. He heard someone mention the "Fourth Hokage's son" and looked at Naruto. He felt like he was seeing a reflection of his younger self.

Asuma believed Naruto, like him, was the son of a Hokage and would always be expected to be great, no matter how hard he tried.

People would think, "Of course, you're great—you're the Hokage's son." It seemed like Naruto would always live in his father's shadow, just as Asuma had. Naruto must be struggling...

So, the thoughtful bearded man decided he would offer Naruto some psychological counselling, sharing his own experiences to help Naruto avoid repeating his mistakes.

For a moment, Asuma looked at Naruto with a softer gaze than his girlfriend Kurenai Yuhi.

In the arena, Naruto and Hinata stood facing each other and suddenly felt a chill, as if something terrible was about to happen.

Hayate coughed twice and said, "Let the battle begin!"

Both of them instinctively took their stances, but neither moved.

"Naruto-Kun, please be gentle!" Hinata was still a little dazed, unsure how things had escalated to this point.

Naruto was worried about how to handle the fight. ' Using Rasengan is out of the question—it's too powerful, and using it would be a death sentence. '

' As for Taijutsu, putting a kunai to Hinata's neck and making her surrender? That's not something a decent person would do! '

' The Adamantine Sealing Chains? If I dare to tie her up, I'll be the one tied up in the same position tonight. '

' If none of that works, I could always stall for time. These people love to watch the show, so I might as well give them a good one. '

Naruto made a decision and performed the hand signs to summon 100 shadow clones.

"Hinata, don't hold back. Just think of this as actual combat training."

"Yes!" Hinata bit her lip. ' It wasn't supposed to be like this. I wanted to work hard, pass the exam with Naruto-kun, and become a Chunin. Then, I would muster the courage to tell Naruto-kun those words I've always wanted to say. '

' Even though I can feel Naruto-Kun's heart now, and I know Naruto-Kun likes me...'

' Even though we can chat and train together like a couple, I can feel his care and attention... '

' But this isn't what I want. I don't want to be a burden to you, Naruto-kun. I don't want to keep looking up at your back. I want to stand by your side with my head held high, just like Kushina-sensei stands beside the Fourth Hokage... '

' I never expected to end up fighting Naruto-kun. But since I'm destined to lose... '

Hinata activated her Byakugan, and her resolve hardened. ' Naruto-kun, please... Watch me watch the efforts of Hinata Hyuga! '

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Hinata was ready, while Naruto's shadow clones were still looking at each other.

"How should we fight her?" Clone No. 001 asked.

"The main body forbids the use of ninjutsu, so I also want to know how to fight," Naruko, who is reluctant to be Naruko today, replied.

"Let's kill her," said an unnamed clone with a sadist smile.

"Are you crazy? " Clone No 001 said.

The unnamed shadow clone, who was the coolest, said, "Grab her shoulders & wrists, trip her—whatever you need to do, as long as you can control her."

"That's it, let's go, everyone!" Clone No. 001 commanded.

Ten shadow clones who didn't deserve names rushed forward. Not because others didn't want to join, but because too many would get in the way.

Hinata looked at the ten menacing (?) little blondes but remained calm.

She moved her feet and struck two clones with her hands. Since they often sparred together, Naruto is very familiar with the Gentle Fist, and Hinata was equally familiar with Naruto's moves.

With the aid of her Byakugan, Hinata struck a shadow clone on the chest, making it dissipate immediately. The other palm strike was blocked by a clone's hands, but it, too, vanished.

If it were ordinary taijutsu, blocking with hands might prolong the fight, but Gentle Fist directly infuses chakra into the body to attack.

A real person could withstand it, but shadow clones can't.

Gentle Fist is simply the nemesis of shadow clones.

With her 360-degree vision, Hinata wasn't afraid of the shadow clone assault. Her quick palm strikes made dealing with them seem like child's play.

The group tactics that had been so effective against Kiba and Akamaru were useless against Hinata.

A wave of ten shadow clones lasted less than ten seconds against her.

Naruto hadn't said anything yet, but Clone No. 001 was already frustrated, cursing, "You idiots, hold on for at least three seconds!"

"Next wave, go!"

Another ten shadow clones rushed in, but the result was the same as before. Hinata's palms fluttered, each strike or tap dissolving a clone, and she seemed to be getting more fluid in her movements.

After defeating this wave, Hinata didn't stay put. She charged into the crowd of clones, almost like she had activated "True Hinata mode"

Naruto watched from a distance, captivated by Hinata's agile steps, her flexible form, her dexterous hands, and her serious, determined expression.

Hinata's skilful charge against the Naruto clones caught them off guard.

Fortunately, they quickly adapted to Hinata's offensive, and under the wise leadership of Clone No. 001... wait, when did No. 001 die?

Then, under the wise leadership of Naruko Uzumaki, the second-in-command of the clones... wait, Naruko died too?

By the third time... well, the unnamed shadow clone was gone too.

After four minutes, all 80 remaining shadow clones were defeated.

But they didn't disappoint No. 001's expectations. They fought with style and momentum.

Most importantly, each one lasted an average of three seconds.

The audience in the stands was amazed by Hinata's performance. Even though they were just clones, not every Genin could handle them so easily.

Tenten and Lee, who knew Neji well, exclaimed, "Is this the same Gentle Fist technique as Neji's?"

Neji's eyes were full of pride, and he didn't hesitate to praise Hinata: "Not only is she on the same level as me, but her timing and adaptation are almost better than mine."

Neji continued speaking "I didn't expect her to improve so quickly after just a month of not sparring with her. It seems Hiashi-sama's judgment about Hinata being inferior to Hanabi is completely wrong."

Neji recalled his uncle, the clan head, saying that Hinata was weaker than Hanabi, and he found it amusing. With this level of offence, she could easily knock Hanabi to the ground, right?

But... Neji rolled his eyes toward Naruto, What's with this guy? Can a person have this much chakra? Then, thinking of Kushina, Neji realized some people really can...

Hinata was slightly out of breath. She was tired from the intense physical duel and the chakra output needed for Gentle Fist.

"N-Naruto-Kun please continue to attack!"

Naruto looked at Hinata's serious expression and decided to respect her wishes, so he summoned another 100 clones. "This time, no holding back. Don't mess around like you're in some gourd baby rescue mission!"

The shadow clones surrounded Hinata and swarmed her.

Hinata didn't panic. She unfolded her Gentle Fist technique, taking down clone after clone.

But eventually, Naruko managed to land a palm strike on Hinata's shoulder, leaving a spiral mark.

Hinata staggered from the hit but quickly turned to disperse Naruko with another palm strike.

Hinata realized that if this continued, the attacks would become too overwhelming to block.

She could only use that technique, even though she hadn't mastered it yet... She wanted Naruto to see it!

Hinata took a deep breath and declared,
"Protective Eight Trigrams Sixty-Four Palms!"

Hinata's small hands flew up and down, the afterimages dancing. Chakra burst from her palms like steel needles, destroying all the shadow clones attacking from all directions, even from above.

Naruto watched in surprise as Hinata's arms moved like a thousand-handed Kannon.

Did she recreate this technique? I've never seen her practice it before. Did she practice after going home?

Seeing Hinata going all out, Naruto began to reflect on himself. Had he been too casual about this?

Hinata had taken this sparring so seriously, but he had treated it like a game.

Hinata, having destroyed all the shadow clones in one go, was gasping for air. She hadn't fully mastered the Protective Eight Trigrams Sixty-Four Palms yet.

Her chakra control wasn't precise enough, so to ensure power, she had to increase her chakra output, leaving her exhausted and barely able to keep her eyes open.

Hinata struggled to maintain her Gentle Fist stance, her tone firm: "Naruto-kun, please... Please take me seriously."

"Alright." As Naruto spoke, he instantly appeared behind Hinata, using the mark Naruko had desperately placed earlier.

He put his hand on her shoulder, just about to stop her, but then felt a force hit his chest, pushing him back a few steps.

"Gentle Fist, one strike!"

Hinata turned around and gave Naruto a small smile despite his shocked expression before collapsing.

Hinata didn't fall to the ground, though, as Naruto caught her in a princess carry. Naruto felt this was the best and smoothest use of his Flying Thunder God technique yet.

"Hinata-chan, why are you pushing yourself so hard today?"

"Naruto-kun, I wanted you to see... I wanted to tell you..." For some reason, Hinata, now out of battle mode, returned to her usual soft and shy demeanour.

As Naruto wondered what Hinata wanted to say—

"Winner, Naruto Uzumaki!" The referee, Genma Shiranui, announced out of nowhere.

"Eek!" Hinata suddenly remembered they weren't alone and immediately buried her head in Naruto's chest, refusing to speak.

Naruto: …

Genma, you bastard!

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Naruto thought for a moment about the possibility of asking his father to completely stagger the schedules of Hayate Gekkō and Uzuki Yugao as a form of revenge.

Hayate didn't notice anything and immediately started the next match. The names scrolled on the big screen and finally stopped:

[Hyuga Neji vs. Tenten]

Naruto turned his head to look and thought, "Ah, well done!"

He hugged Hinata, turned around, and walked to the side of the arena. Seeing the three- or four-meter-high viewing platform, he decided to take the stairs.

Climbing the stairs to the top of the platform would take him only a second at most, but... Naruto decided to hold onto Hinata a little longer without getting tired.

As they were heading up, they happened to run into Neji, who was coming down the stairs.

"Hmph." Neji shot Naruto a disapproving look.

Naruto: "???"

"What's the deal? Didn't we get along well during the first exam?"

Hinata buried her head even deeper, too shy now that her brother Neji had seen her like this.

Kushina watched her son with pride, then glanced at Minato. "Like father, like son," she thought. Some things just don't need to be taught—they're inherited.

Neji and Tenten walked to the field and got into position. Naruto, still carrying Hinata, also made his way upstairs.

Instead of joining the crowd or going to their parents, they stopped in a relatively open spot to watch the match.

"Naruto-kun," Hinata called out softly.

"Hm?"

"Put me down," Hinata whispered, blushing.

"I'm not tired," Naruto replied earnestly.

"But..." Hinata's face turned even redder as she glanced at the crowd. There were so many people around.

Realizing her discomfort, Naruto gently put Hinata down and created two shadow clones. "Go, bring our sofa here."

When the clones vanished, they left behind the Flying Thunder God mark. Moments later, they reappeared, carrying the living room sofa, placing it behind Hinata, along with a small round table set with tea and snacks.

"Uzumaki Logistics, at your service! Please rate us 5 stars if you're satisfied!" The clones gave a playful salute before disappearing. Though they loved to joke around, they knew when it was time to be serious.

Naruto pulled Hinata onto the sofa, poured her some tea, and handed a snack to her mouth.

Hinata, already accustomed to Naruto's playful shadow clones, took a small bite of the dessert, feeling sweetness not just in her mouth but in her heart.

Sasuke glanced over at them, wondering why Naruto hadn't joined him.

Sakura looked enviously at Naruto and Hinata, then back at Sasuke, and again at Sasuke.

"If only Sasuke was half as attentive as Naruto, I'd have three kids by now!" she thought.

"The second qualifier: Neji Hyuga vs. Tenten. Begin!"

Tenten jumped back a considerable distance, simultaneously throwing a barrage of shuriken and kunai, trying to create some space. She knew Neji too well—close combat was not an option.

Neji also knew Tenten. If she managed to maintain distance, he'd be up against a barrage of ninja tools, risking either getting crushed or exhausted.

With the help of his Byakugan, Neji deftly dodged the shuriken and deflected the kunai, all while closing the gap between them.

These two were like natural opposites: one excelled at long-range combat, the other at precise positioning.

In the end, Neji's superior skills shone through. He fended off an array of Tenten's ninja tools—sickles, machetes, maces—and managed to get close enough to place his finger on her neck.

"I surrender," Tenten said. She had anticipated this outcome. Even though she still had her Twin Rising Dragons jutsu, she knew Neji had his eyes and Eight Trigrams Sixty-Four Palms.

"Winner: Neji Hyuga," announced Hayate, declaring the result.

Naruto thought the match was thrilling, but lamented the absence of commentary like the kind he used to provide.

He took Hinata's hand and silently switched out the tray of snacks.

"Wait, I just had two pieces from this plate—how did they disappear so quickly...?"

As Neji and Tenten left the field, the screen began to scroll again:

[Haruno Sakura vs. Uchiha Sasuke]

"Pfft~" Naruto spat out a mouthful of tea. "What is this, some kind of annual blind date event?"

"Naruto-kun?"

"It's nothing." Naruto wiped his mouth, then frowned. In his attempt not to spray tea all over the table, he'd ended up soiling the armrest of the sofa. Would he get scolded for this at home?

Sakura also frowned, but it was more out of envy for the scene between Hinata and Naruto.

She imagined losing a match, only to be carried off like a princess and then cuddling while watching the next fight.

But knowing Sasuke's style, she'd be lucky if he held back 30% of his strength for her sake, even if he was in a good mood.

Sasuke was a bit surprised by the match-up but didn't say anything, simply leaping off the stand.

As everyone knew, in the original story, Sasuke only had three categories of people in his life: Itachi, Naruto, and everyone else.

Now that his family was still alive, he probably added his parents to the list, but Sakura still wasn't someone he took seriously.

Facing off, Sakura and Sasuke waited for the signal. When Hayate announced the start, Sasuke didn't even activate his Sharingan—he just walked forward and slashed at Sakura's neck with a kunai. But Sakura dodged.

After training with Naruto and Sasuke for so long, her reflexes and reaction speed were far beyond those of an ordinary genin.

Sasuke continued with a series of Uchiha-style taijutsu, his movements fluid and almost dance-like. With his good looks, it was as if he was performing, truly living up to the Uchiha name.

During the battle, Sakura stayed focused, taking it seriously. She utilized substitution jutsu, shadow clones, and shuriken to distract and evade, demonstrating a solid foundation and an incredibly strong will to survive.

Sasuke wasn't surprised—Sakura's survival skills had been honed through countless battles with him and Naruto.

In the end, Sasuke placed a kunai on Sakura's neck, and she raised her hand to surrender.

Naruto realized how naive his earlier thoughts had been. Putting a kunai to his future wife's neck and forcing her to surrender—that's just something only Sasuke could pull off.

After changing out another tray of snacks, Naruto thought bitterly, "If this guy wasn't so handsome, he'd be single forever!"

"Winner: Sasuke Uchiha."

The screen started scrolling again and eventually settled on:

[Nara Shikamaru vs. Temari]

Naruto calmly took a sip of tea and didn't forget to offer Hinata another snack because this was turning into a blind date session.

Wait a second—Naruto suddenly noticed a pattern as he reviewed the roster from the previous matches:

Naruto Uzumaki vs. Hinata Hyuga

Neji Hyuga vs. Tenten

Nara Shikamaru vs. Temari

And then there was the last one:

Haruno Sakura vs. Uchiha Sasuke

Ah, this...

Naruto smirked, realizing the truth: Sakura didn't just want to change her surname to Uchiha—she wanted to make Sasuke change his surname to Haruno!

Or even if Sakura does take the Uchiha name, she'll probably be the one calling the shots... ahem.

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Back in the stands, Sasuke tried to approach Naruto, but Sakura pulled him back.

'Sakura did a great job, I'll be your wingman,' Naruto thought.

Sasuke couldn't spot Naruto, so he had to hold back his urge to act.

Naruto took a sip of his tea and continued to watch the battle, only to see Temari stepping on her giant fan and gracefully floating down from the stand.

After Shikamaru complained about the trouble, he wanted to raise his hand to surrender, but Asuma appeared in an instant and grabbed him by the back of his collar, pulling him back down.

"Watch closely!" Asuma lit a cigarette. After dragging Shikamaru back, he felt better, and his anxiety about not seeing Kurenai for a day was relieved a little.

Shikamaru fell to the ground, lying on his back, doubting his life choices. Only by quietly watching the clouds in the sky could he calm his mood.

"How long are you going to lie there?" Temari said irritably. It was bad enough that he wasn't as handsome as the previous little guys, but now he just looked like a lazy bum, which is annoying.

With no other choice, Shikamaru got up with difficulty and walked over sluggishly. With that dazed look, Naruto felt that he might unleash a sleepy attack at any moment.

After Hayate announced the start of the match, the scene could be summed up in one sentence:

Temari is showing off with her fan, while only Shikamaru is getting beaten.

With a single swing of Temari's fan, she unleashed a powerful Wind Release jutsu. Shikamaru could only run around in embarrassment.

Before two minutes had passed, Shikamaru already had three bloodstains on his arm.

If it were just Wind Release jutsu, it wouldn't be so bad, but the real trouble was Tenten's kunai and shuriken, which added more damage to Temari's attacks.

Yes, it was Tenten's kunai and shuriken. When the well-off kunoichi fought Neji, she scattered her ninja tools all over the battlefield.

She didn't pick up any of them, and now they were littered across the square.

So Shikamaru was in a tough spot. The heavier weapons, like the maces and machetes, were fine—they just lay on the ground and didn't fly around.

But the small ninja tools, like shuriken and kunai, were mixed into the storm and came at Shikamaru like stones in a sandstorm.

Shikamaru finally managed to hide behind a statue and took a few seconds to calm down. The statue's surface was also covered with scars from the wind blades.

Crouching behind the statue, Shikamaru began to think of a countermeasure, hands forming a circle as he pondered.

Naruto couldn't help but want to narrate his thoughts: "Get ready, get ready, get ready, Shikamaru~"

After about ten seconds, Temari became impatient and was about to go around to deal with him when she saw a sharp shadow stretching out from behind the statue.

Although she had never seen this kind of Jutsu before, Temari knew better than to let such a strange thing touch her.

So, Temari hurriedly dodged sideways, with the shadow following in pursuit. Temari then retreated, and after a few meters, the shadow seemed to reach its limit and retracted.

Temari closed her fan and drew a line in the dirt with it, saying, "I don't know what that shadow does, but it seems this is the limit of your jutsu's range."

Shikamaru stepped out from behind the statue, picked up a bunch of ninja tools scattered on the ground, and with the Shadow Shuriken Technique, threw all the tools at Temari.

Temari swung her fan, knocking down the tools that could have hit her. She taunted, "So, aside from that strange shadow jutsu, you can't even use a shuriken properly?"

Then she saw Shikamaru's shadow, combined with the shadows of the various ninja tools that had fallen in front of her, stretch forward.

Seeing this, Temari hurriedly jumped back a couple of steps, letting the shadow lash out harmlessly in the air.

Temari drew another line in the dirt and said, "So that's it. You're trying to use the shadows of other objects to extend the range of your attack?"

Temari turned her fan sideways and said confidently, "I won't be careless anymore. You're out of moves at this distance!"

Then she realized she couldn't move.

"What... what's going on?" Temari's face turned pale. She had calculated the distance!

"Shadow Imitation, successful." Shikamaru controlled Temari's body and looked back. A thin shadow had passed through the ninja tools behind her and connected to her shadow.

"This... how could it be!" Temari said in shock. "You... those shuriken that missed earlier..."

"Yeah, I threw those ninja tools not to hit you, but to extend the range of my shadow from behind through the shadows they created. I knew you were good at analyzing situations and that you'd think you understood everything once you gathered enough information. That would make you drop your guard, allowing me to set up this trap."

As Shikamaru spoke, he had already controlled Temari's body, raising her giant fan as if to smash her head with it.

"Are you still not going to surrender?"

Temari gritted her teeth and struggled a few times, but found she still couldn't control her body. Finally, with great reluctance, she said, "I surrender."

"The winner, Nara Shikamaru." Naruto smacked his lips. "Tacticians always have such clever minds."

Looking at his empty plate, Naruto fell into deep thought.

Given Shikamaru's family background, his future wife should be able to support him for now.

But if his parents retire and he's still just a Chūnin, his salary definitely won't be enough, especially with that troublesome woman he has to support in the future.

He should think of a way to make some extra money. Maybe writing a novel with Jiraiya—those zeros on Jiraiya's bankbook are very tempting.

However, if Kushina found out he was writing that kind of novel, she'd kill him… Yeah, writing a novel is a dead-end.

Naruto reached for a plate of fruit this time; eating just snacks was getting monotonous.

The examiners in the stands were amazed. The strength gap seemed so big. In the first half, Temari beat Shikamaru so embarrassingly, how could he still pull off a comeback?

Asuma blew up with pride at the perfect time: "Shikamaru's IQ is over 200, so it's completely reasonable for him to come up with this kind of strategy."

"Over 200?!"

Asuma sighed like a bragging parent: "It's just his personality… too lazy."

"Geniuses, they always have something a little different from ordinary people."

For a moment, the scene turned into mutual admiration for Asuma and his student.

Asuma thought silently, It's a pity that Kurenai is so focused on her disciple lately that she didn't come to watch with me. I would have loved to show her how brilliant my student is.

The big screen in the arena began to scroll again:

[Gaara vs Yamanaka Ino]

"What nonsense is this?" Naruto stood up abruptly, slamming the table.

"I'm against this marriage!"

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Hinata was taken aback by Naruto's reaction. "Naruto-kun?"

"Huh?" Naruto suddenly realized this wasn't a friendly gathering but the Chunin Exams, and he quickly explained, "Oh, I mean, that Gaara guy is really strong and cold. If Ino ends up fighting him, it could be dangerous."

Hinata, also feeling nervous, looked at Gaara, who was eagerly waiting to enter the arena. He seemed incredibly fierce. "What should we do?"

"I hope Ino just forfeits, or the examiner steps in to save her." Naruto wasn't too worried about Ino's life being in danger.

With so many examiners present, they probably wouldn't let the heiress of the Yamanaka clan get killed.

Besides, his father is still here. No matter how fast Gaara's movements were, they couldn't be faster than the Flying Thunder God Jutsu.

Asuma must have realized something too. He exchanged a few words with Ino earlier, then finally nodded, signalling her to enter the arena.

Ino's thoughts were simple. If Sakura could last a while against Sasuke, then forfeiting without trying would just let Sakura win by default, her competitive spirit made her decide to give it a shot.

Moreover, she didn't believe a shinobi from Sand Village could be stronger than Sasuke.

She had no idea how much Sasuke was holding back when he fought Sakura.

"Preliminary match number five, begin!"

As soon as Hayate Gekko finished speaking, I immediately made a hand sign, preparing her Yamanaka clan's secret technique:

"Ninja Art: Mind Transfer Jutsu!"

Ino's body slumped to the ground as her jutsu hit Gaara. Surprisingly, it worked smoothly; Gaara didn't move, allowing her jutsu to connect.

However, Gaara's body trembled slightly, and his expression twisted into something dark.

Three seconds later, Ino's consciousness was forced back into her body, and she scrambled back, terrified.

She stared wide-eyed at Gaara. "A monster...!"

Gaara, clutching his head, screamed in pain before raising his gaze, his voice filled with malice. "I'll kill you... kill you..."

Gaara waved his hand, and the cork from the giant gourd on his back popped off, releasing sand that surged towards the terrified Ino.

"I-I forfeit!" Into managed to shout, her voice trembling. Immediately, a gust of wind blocked Gaara's sand, scattering it.

Gaara didn't stop, his bloodlust only growing. He continued to control the sand, trying to push it through the wind.

The Sand Village's Jounin, Baki, quickly descended to restrain Gaara. The plan wasn't ready; Gaara couldn't lose control here.

Temari also hurried down, grabbing Gaara and trying to calm him down.

Kankuro's expression darkened as he followed, ready to assist.

Asuma instantly appeared next to Hayate, his eyes locked on Baki, his hands ready to draw his trench knives.

Baki quickly explained, "Don't misunderstand. Gaara occasionally loses control of his bloodlust. If I'm right, that girl must've used the Yamanaka clan's Mind Transfer Jutsu, which might have triggered Gaara. So..."

Gaara, with his hand still on his head, gradually calmed down, his usual indifferent expression returning. He followed Temari back to the stands.

Sakura jumped down to Ino's side, her hands glowing with healing chakra as she checked Ino's condition. After confirming there were no serious injuries, she let out a sigh of relief.

Ino still hugged herself, trembling, clearly terrified.

Sakura waited for her to calm down a bit before helping her stand.

Despite their rivalry, when something serious happened, Sakura cared for Ino more than anyone else.

"Ino, what did you see? Why are you so scared?" Sakura asked, concerned.

"Monster..."

"Ino." Asuma interrupted her, "You mustn't tell anyone what you saw today."

"Huh?" Sakura was curious, but since Asuma had spoken, she didn't press further.

"Yes." Ino gritted her teeth and, with Sakura's support, slowly walked back up to the stands.

Naruto watched Ino's trembling form, wondering if she had seen Shukaku.

Incredible, Ino, you almost got hit by one of the Sand Village's deadly weapons.

"Hey, Kurama, is Shukaku scarier than you?" Naruto wondered if his tailed beast could be that terrifying.

"Him?" Kurama scoffed. "That one-tailed bastard is nothing compared to me."

"Then why was Ino so frightened?"

Kurama glanced at Naruto, annoyed. "You're just as dense as always. When you were three or four, you weren't scared of me. You even dared to talk back. That girl's reaction is what a normal human child should have when seeing a tailed beast for the first time."

"Em... I guess you're right." Naruto realized he had been taking Kurama's presence for granted.

After all, Kurama was lazy, loved stories, and enjoyed watching the chaos unfold. Naruto almost forgot that a tailed beast was one of the strongest forces in this world.

He had a perception of Kurama & another tailed beast from his previous world.

This was the first time Naruto truly understood the fear that tailed beasts instilled in ordinary people.

As he watched Sakura help Ino to a seat, Naruto offered his spot on the couch.

Even if you're on a date, you can't ignore someone in need, especially an acquaintance.

"Thank you," Ino said weakly, sitting down.

Hinata and Sakura sat on either side of her, talking softly to ease her nerves. Shikamaru and Choji also came over to check on her.

Sasuke looked around. "They're all busy. Can I go to Naruto now?"

"What's up with that red-haired guy?" Sasuke could tell Gaara is strong, but he didn't understand why Ino was so terrified.

"I'll explain later," Naruto said with excitement on his face.

"That guy isn't an ordinary ninja," Shino's voice suddenly cut in.

Naruto and Sasuke turned to see Shino standing nearby. "When did you get here?!"

Shino, holding a small insect on his finger, ignored Naruto's question. "The bugs are afraid of him."

Kiba, who had followed Shino, was trying to calm Akamaru, who was trembling in his arms.

"Awww..." Akamaru whimpered, hiding in Kiba's embrace.

Naruto gently patted Akamaru's head. He had watched Akamaru grow from a small pup to a dog bigger than Kiba. Seeing him scared like this made Naruto emotional.

Shukaku, just wait—Naruto glanced at Gaara. Scaring my dog like that? I'm not letting this slide!

"Winner: Gaara. The next match will begin shortly," Hayate finally announced.

The screen displayed the next match-up:

[Zaku Abumi vs Shigure]

Naruto glanced at the screen. Who are these two? Are they just background characters?

There was no sense of anticipation.

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Zaku Abumi is a ninja from the Hidden Sound Village, with black hair styled in a wild manner.

In the anime, Team Dosu travelled to Konohagakure to participate in the Chūnin Exams with the secret goal of killing Sasuke Uchiha.

Before the exam started, Zaku and his teammates overheard Kabuto Yakushi talking about their village and decided to attack him.

After Zaku threw Kunai as a distraction, Dosu attacked Kabuto and damaged his hearing.

To prevent the situation from escalating, the exam proctors, led by Ibiki Morino, appeared and settled things down.

After Zaku passed the written portion of the Chūnin Exams, he moved on to the second phase alongside his teammates.

Zaku has air vents in the palms of his hands, which he uses to unleash Wind Release jutsu and sonic attacks. It's rumoured that Orochimaru may have modified him.

Shigure was a ninja from the Hidden Rain Village, with brown hair, two scars on his face, and stitches at the corners of his mouth. He carries seven umbrellas on his back and has a rather aged appearance.

In the original story, Shigure and his two teammates were killed by Gaara's Sand Waterfall Funeral jutsu, which is as deadly as it sounds.

These two seem much more normal compared to the usual shinobi from Konoha when they first appear, and their meeting is just a series of trash talk.

Shigure starts: "Kid, you're out of luck for meeting me. If you know what's good for you, you should surrender."

Zaku retorts: "Old man, maybe it's time for you to retire."

Hayate Gekkō waved his hand and announced, "The sixth match of the preliminaries, begin!"

Shigure pulled out five umbrellas from his back and threw them into the air, forming hand seals:

"Ninja Art: Senbon Rainstorm!"

The five umbrellas spun rapidly, unleashing countless senbon needles. Under Shigure's chakra control, they surrounded Zaku from all directions and rained down upon him.

As the saying goes, "When it rains needles, you better find cover."

But Zaku wasn't one to sit idly by. Powerful gusts of wind erupted from his palms, blowing the senbon away as he dashed forward, escaping the barrage from all sides.

Of course, Shigure wasn't about to let him off easily and continued to guide the remaining senbon to pursue Zaku.

Zaku charged ahead and closed the distance between himself and Shigure:

"Wind Release: Decapitating Airwaves!"

Shigure quickly removed an umbrella from his back to block, but the powerful air current sent him crashing into the wall, knocking him unconscious.

"Ah... Damn!" Zaku was also hit from behind by the remaining senbon, turning him into a pincushion. Fortunately, the needles weren't strong enough to hit any vital spots.

"The winner is Zaku Abumi," Hayate announced.

Medical staff carried the two away for treatment as the screen began selecting the next battle.

"The next one is me! It's gotta be me!" Rock Lee couldn't help but chant, eager to prove himself.

Kakashi watched Lee, reminiscing about a young Gai.

Gai seemed to sense this, turning to flash Kakashi a thumbs-up and a gleaming smile.

Kakashi chose to ignore him.

The screen finally froze:

[Shino Aburame vs Kin Tsuchi]

Lee deflated like a wilted plant but quickly perked up again, determination burning in his eyes: "The next one will be me."

Shino and Kin entered the arena.

After Hayate announced the start of the match, Kin made the first move, throwing two senbon with bells attached.

Shino dodged calmly, and the senbon embedded themselves into the wall behind him. Shino's brow furrowed slightly at the sound of the bells.

Kin then threw ordinary senbon.

Shino swiftly dodged again, but the sound of bells behind him caused him to freeze.

He noticed that the earlier senbon were connected by wires, and with a simple tug from Kin, the bells rang.

Suddenly, Shino felt dizzy and fell to his knees, Kin standing triumphantly before him.

"I used the sound of the bells to cast a genjutsu. You shouldn't be able to move at all, right? Now, I'll finish you with this!"

As she prepared to throw another senbon, Kin froze in place.

A large swarm of black insects had surrounded her.

"Ah~! What… what is this?!" Kin screamed.

Shino broke free from the genjutsu and stood up: "I'm from the Aburame Clan of Konoha."

He pushed up his sunglasses, speaking calmly, "Insects aren't affected by genjutsu."

Naruto, as a friend, wanted to remind Shino that villains often meet their end because they talk too much, and explaining your abilities to the enemy during battle is a foolish move.

But he decided against it—Shino's enemies probably wouldn't remember anyway.

Next, Shino directed his insects to swarm Kin.

Kin quickly raised her hand: "I surrender!"

Shino's jutsu is truly terrifying, especially for those with entomophobia.

"The winner, Shino Aburame."

Shino retracted his insects and casually walked back to the stands with his hands in his pockets.

Several of the girls in the audience looked at him with a mixture of fear and awe.

Sasuke pondered for a moment—those insects could be dealt with using Fire Release, and Naruto could probably handle them with Water Release.

Sasuke felt that the Chunin Exams so far hadn't been very challenging, except for Neji And Gaara… there was something off about him, something dangerous. He wondered if there was some hidden power at play.

Lee, looking at the scrolling screen, regained his energy. He began practising headstands, rooster stands, push-ups, and other bizarre poses, praying frequently: "Choose me, choose me!"

But once again, he was disappointed.

[Kankuro vs Tsubame]

"The preliminaries, match eight, begin."

Kankuro unfastened the large bundle on his back and placed what looked like a coffin on the ground.

Tsubame wore a bamboo hat with two umbrellas strapped to his back. His ninjutsu was similar to Shigure's, starting with a rain of senbon, though the quantity was far less.

Tsubame didn't expect to land a hit with his first move. After seeing Temari and Gaara's performances earlier, he assumed the Sand Village ninjas were all incredibly strong, so he was already planning his next move.

But to his surprise, the guy across from him got struck by a few senbon after only dodging a bit!

Am I going to win? This guy must be the weak link of the Sand Village trio! I'm so lucky!

Tsubame was overjoyed, but his joy quickly turned to dread.

Kankuro suddenly opened his mouth, spitting out dozens of senbon that struck Tsubame, who had let down his guard.

As Tsubame looked on in shock, Kankuro dropped the sand-covered disguise of a shell, revealing his true form—a puppet.

"It's a puppet!" Tsubame was stunned—it was the first time he had seen a puppet master in action.

The real Kankuro emerged from a cocoon-like bandage on the ground.

Looking at the now-paralyzed Tsubame, he said, "My senbon were coated with poison. If you're not treated in time, you'll die."

----
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"I admit defeat," Tsubame said, feeling that he could still be rescued.

"The winner, Kankuro," Hayate announced.

The audience began to discuss, "What was that? Is he a puppet master?"

"That's pretty rare."

"It should be quite common in the Hidden Sand Village."

Naruto didn't get involved in the conversation. Instead, he wondered if, in the future, when relations between the villages improved.

He could ask Kankuro to perform a puppet show or even make a cool puppet with him and practice his puppet tricks.

Only Rock Lee didn't care much about puppet masters. He was only concerned about when it would be his turn to fight.

But instead of continuing to pray like he did before, he suddenly figured out a pattern and wanted to try it.

He watched the names on the screen flash by until they finally stopped.

[Inuzuka Kiba vs Akimichi Choji]

"As expected!" Lee punched his left hand with his right fist, a triumphant expression on his face as if he had seen through everything.

Gai is likely on the same wavelength as Lee, as he immediately asks, "Oh? Did you discover something, Lee?"

"Yes, Gai-sensei! I realized that every time I desperately prayed for my turn in the next match, it would not be my turn.
So if I don't pray then maybe it will be?"

Lee looked like someone who believed in reverse psychology, convinced that his desperate "cursed" prayers worked.

But Gai didn't quite get it: "Ah, to figure that out, as expected of you, Lee!"

"Sensei!"

"Lee!"

Inexplicably, the two of them started hugging each other and crying, "Oh, oh, oh! This is youth!" x2

Neji and Tenten slapped their foreheads. Here they go again.

Kakashi chuckled awkwardly. Gai and Lee were still the same. Well, as long as they didn't bother him, it was fine.

"The ninth match of the preliminaries begins!"

Kiba and Choji were familiar with each other.

"Choji, Akamaru and I have gotten a lot stronger, so don't be scared!"

"Woof!" Akamaru barked fiercely.

Choji clenched his fists, steam puffing out of his nostrils.

"I'm ready, Kiba! Asuma-sensei said if I won, he'd treat me to a barbecue! For the sake of barbecue, I won't lose!"

"Stop boasting, Beast Human Clone!"

Kiba dropped down on all fours, his fingernails extending like claws, and then he charged, elbowing Choji.

Choji blocked with his arms crossed, and Kiba jumped back.

"Not bad, but try this! Fang passing Fang!"

Without giving Choji a chance to breathe, Kiba spun like a tornado and charged at him.

Naruto wanted to ask Kiba's family if they sold those toy four-wheel drives—the voice-activated ones.

Choji couldn't take it anymore. He got hit in the stomach, flipping several times before he finally got up.

"Give up, Choji, you can't beat me!"

"I swear on the honour of the Akimichi Clan; I will eat the barbecue Asuma-sensei promised!"

Choji's fighting spirit ignited, and he transformed into a giant ball:

"Expansion Jutsu!"

"Akamaru, Beast Human Clone!"

"Woof!"

Kiba was ready to fight head-on:

"Fang passing Fang!"

"Human Boulder!"

Boom! Boom!

Two white tornadoes collided with a massive rolling meatball. At that moment, countless scientists in the ninja world must have lifted their coffins, ready to shout, "Now the momentum theorem will apply!"

Choji, who had the greater mass, gained the advantage, sending Kiba and Akamaru flying, unable to get back up.

"The winner, Akimichi Choji."

"Yes!" Choji cheered, his joy evident as he trotted up the stairs and hugged Asuma's leg. "Asuma-sensei, barbecue! Barbecue!"

"Alright, alright." Asuma wiped away a cold sweat, realizing this would be a pricey meal. This is the power of food lovers.

The names on the screen shuffled again, and now only three were left: Rock Lee, Dosu Kinuta, and Misumi Tsurugi; whoever wasn't chosen would get a pass.

Misumi Tsurugi was praying for the pass, sincerely hoping for it.

Lee was also praying for the pass, but because he was trying to curse himself with his reverse psychology.

He even asked his two teammates to pray for him to ensure it worked.

Neji wasn't interested in Lee's antics and didn't bother.

Tenten, unable to refuse Lee's plea, whispered, "Please let Lee pass, please let Lee pass..."

So... Lee miscalculated because Tenten was lucky, and under her sincere prayer, Lee got the pass...

[Dosu Kinuta vs Misumi Tsurugi]

When the match was announced, Lee burst into tears, collapsing into an or posture and pounding the ground: "Why! Why!"

"Uh..." Tenten reached out a hand, unsure how to comfort Lee. She knew he wanted to fight. A bye might be lucky for others, but to Lee, it was disappointing.

Just as Tenten was at a loss, a fist suddenly connected with Lee's face, sending him flying into the wall, where he slowly slid down.

Lee clutched his face, looking up with tear-filled eyes, "Gai-sensei?"

Gai embraced Lee, "Lee! Youth is always accompanied by loss and sadness. You just have to believe in the path you're walking and take big steps forward because hard work will never betray you!"

"How inspiring, Gai-sensei!"

"Lee, your youth is just beginning!"

"Sensei!"

"Lee!"

...

Naruto didn't know if it was his imagination, but when Guy and Lee embraced, it seemed like he could hear the sound of waves crashing against rocks and see the afterglow of the setting sun...

The wind snapped Naruto out of his thoughts: "Winner, Dosu Kinuta."

What? What did I miss?

Naruto turned his head. Several senbon needles were scattered around Dosu.

Did I... miss a match because I was watching Gai-sensei and Lee's antics?

Was Gai-sensei's shout of "youth" an illusion?

Hayate continued, "Now, would the victorious contestants and Rock Lee, please come forward."

Of the eleven contestants, only ten gathered, Zaku had gone to get treated and hadn't returned.

Hayate looked at the ten in front of him and said:

"The preliminaries are over. You will all participate in the final test in a month. Congratulations."

After a brief pause, Hayate continued, "The reason you must wait a month is that important people from various nations will be invited, and they will need time to travel and prepare. You can use this month to improve your skills and gather information on your opponents."

"Cough cough..."

"The final matches will also be one-on-one, with opponents determined by drawing lots."

"Come forward to draw your lots."

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

The result of the lottery has been announced. Naruto only remembered that he was going to fight Gaara, the rest no longer seemed important.

Eighty per cent of the time, he would face Shukaku, and then, he thought, he might have to interrupt the exam.

By the time Naruto got home, it was already night. As usual, he had first sent Hinata at home.

Of course, the sofa and the small round table had already been returned to their places.

Regarding the sofa being soiled, Kushina didn't blame Naruto at all. She even praised him, which was quite inexplicable.

Jiraiya, Minato, Kushina, Kakashi, Kimimaro, Karin, Naruto, a family of nine had gathered happily.

Minato raised his cup, saying, "It's been five days since Karin came to our home, but today our family is officially gathered.
So to celebrate Karin becoming my daughter, cheers!"

"Cheers!" echoed six voices.

The seven cups clinked together, the sound as crisp as the laughter around the table.

The adults drank sake, while Naruto and the others had juice—Kushina insisted that minors weren't allowed to drink alcohol.

Naruto ate and drank happily. During the five days of the second exam, though there was plenty of food and fun, nothing compared to relaxing at home, especially with his family so joyful and the atmosphere so harmonious.

Karin is probably the happiest of them all. She remembered how, when she first met Naruto, she thought he was handsome.

Later, when she met Minato, who is now her father, she thought he was even more handsome.

Then she saw Kimimaro, her older brother, who was also very handsome and even though her father's student, Kakashi, usually had his face covered like a lazy bum, her woman's intuition told Karin that he must be a good-looking guy too!

Oh my gosh, what kind of family of beauties is this? It almost seemed like Naruto, her little brother, was the one holding them back.

Ah, no, how could I think that way about my brother? Karin shook her head—appearance was no longer important.

Looking at Naruto, who kept teasing Kakashi along with Kushina, at Minato, who always had a warm smile on his face, at Jiraiya, and at Kimimaro, who didn't talk much but kept serving her food, Karin felt like she was probably the happiest person in the world.

As dinner came to an end, the last bit of anxiety in Karin's heart disappeared. I, Karin, a genin of Konoha, daughter of the Fourth Hokage, from now on—I will help my mother with the housework every day!

After dinner, as Karin busied herself with Kushina, the mother and daughter seemed to enjoy chatting together.

Meanwhile, Jiraiya, Minato, and Kakashi sat in the living room, sipping tea and discussing the plans ahead, while Naruto eagerly listened in, wanting to know more about his dad's ideas.

As for Kimimaro, he had been dragged off by three younger boys for late-night training. To be honest, Naruto was looking forward to his brother being defeated by his teammates and getting his head shaved like them as agreed.

He even thought about secretly giving his brother some laxatives before their match...

"Are you leaving tomorrow pervy sage?" Naruto asked.

"Yeah, there was some news about Tsunade last time, but it was too late, so I came back before the exam just in case," Jiraiya replied.

Naruto thought to himself: I bet you were more eager to see Orochimaru than Tsunade.

You probably rushed back because you heard Orochimaru was planning something for the Chunin Exams and didn't want to miss out.

Minato said, "In that case, can Sensei take Naruto with him?"

"Huh?" Naruto put down his cup. What about me?

"But Naruto need to prepare for the next exam right?" Jiraiya asked.

Minato replied proudly, "Actually, Naruto's ninjutsu is already very advanced. To be honest, he's far surpassed me at his age. I think he needs to go out and learn more ninjutsu."

"And in terms of training, anything I can teach him, you can teach him too."

"That's fine," Jiraiya agreed, putting down his cup. "So, Naruto, will you come with me?"

Naruto thought it might be good to go out for a while, but he also wanted to give some benefits to his friends: "Can I bring a few more people?"

Jiraiya refused: "You want to bring your little girlfriend? No, this is training, not a vacation."

Naruto said, "I was thinking of bringing Sasuke and Sakura."

"Huh? What for?" Kakashi asked, still considering whether to teach Sasuke something during the upcoming month.

"It wouldn't hurt to bring two more. It's not like the Pervy Sage hasn't taken a genin squad before. Besides, I can give Sasuke some pointers, and Sakura's studying medicine, so I could recommend her to Lady Tsunade as an apprentice."

"The most important thing is, if we all leave, you, Mr. Lazy, can help my dad with more work."

"..." Kakashi was speechless. Last month, he'd gone on missions with you every day and trained under Kushina's watchful eye. It was exhausting!

I barely had a few days of reprieve during your exams, and now you're going to cause more trouble for me? Damn it, I haven't even finished reading Lord Jiraiya's new book!

Jiraiya appreciated Naruto's consideration for his teammates: "Well, it's not impossible, but it's not mandatory. You'll have to convince them yourself."

"No problem." Naruto thought Sakura would be easy to persuade if Sasuke was involved. As for Sasuke… well, he had a plan.

…

Early the next morning, Naruto first went to the Hyuga estate to say goodbye to Hinata. Fresh from her morning training, Hinata is wearing a black training uniform, slightly panting, with a little blush on her face.

Hinata felt a little disappointed when she learned that Naruto was leaving, but it was normal for ninjas to go on temporary missions. She said obediently, "Naruto-Kun, have a safe journey."

Naruto gently hugged Hinata and whispered in her ear, "I'll miss you every day."

"M-Me too," Hinata stammered, blushing. It was too close—this was at the entrance to her house, and she was still sweaty... so embarrassing.

Inside the estate, Hanabi, who is training, accidentally pierces through a training dummy.

"Hanabi, your control is off!" Hiashi reprimanded sternly.

"Yes!" Hanabi bit her lip, eyes wide with determination.

…

After saying goodbye to Hinata, Naruto slipped into Sasuke's training ground. Sure enough, Sasuke was practising his Uchiha-style shuriken techniques.

"Sasuke, I want you…"

"To help you train?" Sasuke quickly guessed. He didn't know why, but he always seemed to shout whenever Naruto asked him to train.

"…No, I want you to come with me to train."

"Leave? Where to?"

Naruto explained the situation to Sasuke: "So, what do you think? Training with the legendary Sannin, Jiraiya."

"No, I want to train with my brother," Sasuke replied, unmoved. Training with his brother was more important than with a mere Sannin.

"Are you sure Big Brother Itachi will have time to teach you?" Naruto challenged, striking at Sasuke's core.

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Sasuke felt unsettled. He wasn't sure why, his mother had told him that Itachi had been extremely busy since the Chunin Exams, and today, he left without even having breakfast.

Seeing Sasuke's troubled expression, Naruto decided to stir things up: "My dad is super busy lately, and even Kakashi-sensei got dragged into extra work. There's no way your brother has time right now. Even if you ask him, he'd probably just say, 'Forgive me, Sasuke... next time.'"

Naruto, mimicking Itachi's tone perfectly, delivered the final blow by poking Sasuke on the forehead.

"You're so annoying." Sasuke swatted Naruto's hand away. He thought about his brother's usual behaviour but couldn't find a good comeback.

"I get it," Sasuke muttered, saying goodbye to Mikoto with a sense of defeat. After gathering his things, he and Naruto went to find Sakura.

---

"Sakura-chan!" Naruto yelled from below her window.

Sakura lived in a small, three-story building near Ino's house. Naruto had passed by with Sasuke while heading to school, so he knew exactly where she stayed.

"What's all this noise? It's early!" Sakura poked her head out groggily, still in her pajamas. But the moment her eyes locked on Sasuke, she snapped awake. "Sasuke-kun!"

She quickly ducked back inside, frantically fixing her messy hair. After a moment, she reappeared with a sweet smile. "What's up?"

"We've got a mission, and we need to head out," Naruto explained briefly.

Now fully awake, Sakura moved with a speed that rivalled Lee in his training. In the blink of an eye, she was dressed, packed, and out the window, shouting back inside, "Mom! Dad! I've got a mission, I'm heading out!"

Naruto vaguely heard Sakura's mom shouting from inside: "How many times have I told you not to jump out the window like that? You're going to ruin your image as a proper young lady!"

With their team now assembled, Naruto smiled in satisfaction.

Sasuke, still sulking over missing training with Itachi, and Sakura, glowing with excitement, followed Naruto as he led the way to Konoha's gate where Jiraiya was supposed to meet them.

---

At Konoha's village gate.

"That guy… is he Jiraiya-sama, one of the Legendary Sannin?" Sasuke asked in disbelief, pointing at a lecherous old man with white hair.

"...Yeah, it's him," Naruto sighed, clearly embarrassed. "You'll get used to it."

Sakura stared, wide-eyed. "How do you get used to that?"

Their surprise was understandable. Jiraiya was crouched in a corner, crystal ball in hand, with a creepy smile on his face.

The image in the crystal ball? The women's bathhouse. Drool was almost escaping his lips.

"It's not that bad. Kakashi-sensei is kind of the same," Naruto muttered.

Naruto's words silenced both Sasuke and Sakura. Did all-powerful ninjas need weird hobbies? Surely not.

The Hokages had always been strong, and they didn't seem like the type to have... peculiar habits.

The two pushed the strange thoughts from their minds, but little did they know they had brushed close to the truth.

The First Hokage, revered for his strength, was quite the gambler, the Second Hokage had sibling issues, the Third was a notorious peeper, and the Fourth... well, his sunny smile concealed a middle-schooler's heart.

Determined not to let Jiraiya's behaviour slide, Naruto called out, "Oi, Pervy Sage! We're ready!"

Jiraiya quickly tucked away the crystal ball and stood up, adopting the demeanour of a serious elder. Even Jiraiya had to care about appearances in front of new students.

"These must be your teammates, Naruto. They're fine young ninjas."

Sasuke observed him thoughtfully. Judging by how fast Jiraiya had hidden the crystal ball, he probably was stronger than Kakashi.

Sakura responded politely, "Thank you for your kind words, Jiraiya-sama."

[Inner Sakura: Kind words?! I don't want praise from this perverted geezer!]

"Ahem," Jiraiya coughed, perhaps out of embarrassment. "Well, if everyone's ready, let's head out."

"Wait a second." Naruto raised his hand. "Give it."

"Give what?" Jiraiya feigned ignorance.

"The crystal ball. That's from the Hokage's office, isn't it?"

"You must be mistaken."

"Oh? Should I ask my mom if she remembers otherwise?"

"Is that necessary...?"

"Yes." As a good young man of the new era, Naruto wasn't going to let such behaviour slide.

Sweating, Jiraiya finally gave in and shoved the crystal ball into Naruto's arms. "Alright, fine. But I picked it up! It's not like Minato would've left something so valuable lying around. Good thing I found it!"

---

After Naruto sent the crystal ball back to Minato using the Flying Thunder God Jutsu, the four of them officially embarked on their journey to find Tsunade.

Naruto was excited to meet the legendary "Legendary Sucker" and thought about making some extra money by challenging her to a few bets.

---

Meanwhile, back at the Uchiha compound, Itachi returned home shortly after Naruto and Sasuke had left.

"Itachi? Why are you back?" Mikoto asked, surprised to see her eldest son.

Itachi smiled. "I managed to take a break this morning. I came back to train with Sasuke and help him get ready for his next exam. Where is he?"

Mikoto's face fell. "Ah... Sasuke left with Naruto. They've got a mission outside the village."

Itachi's expression faltered. "I see... that's unfortunate. I rarely get time off."

Mikoto smiled, trying to reassure him. "Don't worry. Sasuke's in good hands with Jiraiya-sama leading them. It'll be fine."

"True, but... I don't have anything else to do now. Maybe I should just head back to work," Itachi said, his sense of duty kicking in.

"There is something you could do," Mikoto said, suddenly remembering. "Izumi has been by the house several times recently, but you were never here. You should go see her, at least as a courtesy."

Itachi hesitated. "Well, I suppose, but..."

"No 'buts.' I know a nice little shop that sells dango. You and Izumi used to go there all the time when you were kids, right?" Mikoto knew her son well.

After his responsibilities to his clan, his ANBU team, and his family, few people could get his attention. Izumi is one of them.

"Alright," Itachi sighed and headed out, changing into his casual clothes.

As Mikoto watched him leave, she smiled to herself. Finally, with Sasuke out of the house, she could focus on something else. Mother's wisdom at work.

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"Um... what kind of person is Tsunade-sama?" Sakura asked curiously, now understanding the purpose of their journey.

Jiraiya thought for a moment before replying, "Well, if I had to say it, she's a troublesome woman who loves gambling... excessively. People in almost every village know about her."

"..." Sakura was silent for a moment, confused. 'Are you sure you're talking about the legendary Tsunade-sama?'

Jiraiya continued, "Speaking of which, she's earned a nickname — the 'Legendary Sucker,' hahaha."

"Are you serious? How could she have such a title?" Sakura is struggling to accept the reality as the newly minted medical ninja; like many others, she idolises Tsunade.

It was hard to reconcile that image with someone having such bad habits.

"There's no mistake about it. She's always loved gambling, but her luck is so terrible that she almost always loses. That's why they call her the 'Legendary Sucker.'" Jiraiya chuckled, clearly entertained by his old friend's misfortune.

"How could this be..." Sakura's idealized image of her idol was crumbling. "Then if she's so well-known, shouldn't it be easy to find her?"

Jiraiya shook his head. "It's not that simple. She despises ageing, so she uses special ageing to alter her appearance. Though she's in her 50s, she looks like she's in her 20s."

He grinned and continued, "Plus, when she loses everything, she borrows money and runs off. She'll change her appearance to look like she's in her teens, 30s, or 40s to dodge her debts."

"Hahaha, the old days were something else!"

Sakura suddenly felt disillusioned. Jiraiya, one of the legendary Sannin, is a shameless pervert, and now Tsunade is revealed to be a gambling addict.

What would Orochimaru be like? A total madman? (Well about that...)

Even Sasuke is shocked, thinking, 'The great Sannin addicted to gambling and not paying their debts? How could such a disgraceful person exist?'

He glanced at Naruto and had a sinking feeling that Naruto could end up the same way if he wasn't careful.

"So, how do we even find her?" Sasuke asked, focusing on the more practical matter.

"Well, I got a lead on her whereabouts a few days ago. We'll check the next town for more information."

As they travelled, Jiraiya shared about his adventures throughout the ninja world.

He spoke of the different customs and the political situations in various nations.

Occasionally, he'd slip in remarks about the best hot spring inns or places with mixed baths, but overall, he carried himself as a reliable mentor.

By evening, they arrived at a small town and checked into a hotel. Jiraiya announced he was going out to gather intel and told the trio to explore on their own.

Naruto chimed in, "Actually, there's no need to stay in a hotel. I could just take you all back to Konoha with my Flying Thunder God Jutsu. I've already marked this spot, so I can teleport us back tomorrow."

"No, Naruto," Jiraiya said sternly, "From now on unless it's necessary for combat or training, you are forbidden from using the Flying Thunder God Jutsu."

"Huh? Why?" Naruto complained. "There's no cooldown, and I've got plenty of chakra, so why not use it?"

Jiraiya raised a finger. "Listen, I brought you out here to train and help you grow. True training isn't just about ninjutsu. It's about strengthening your spirit."

"Only by leaving your comfort zone and seeing the world with your own eyes can you truly grow. A ninja endures, If you keep teleporting back home, you'll never grow."

Sasuke and Sakura listened intently, feeling a deep respect for Jiraiya. Despite his quirks, there was wisdom in his words.

"Oh..." Naruto admitted the point but had a nagging suspicion that Jiraiya just didn't want him interrupting his drinking plans back in Konoha.

Jiraiya soon slipped away, and the trio decided to explore the town. This was only their second time leaving Konoha, with their first trip to the Land of Waves being rather sombre.

This time, they intensely enjoyed themselves in this bustling town, which seemed geared towards travellers and merchants.

The streets were lined with hotels, hot springs, shops, and snack vendors.

Naruto sampled some snacks, thinking they weren't bad. Quietly, he left a Flying Thunder God mark on the street, planning to bring Hinata here later.

Suddenly, a thought crossed his mind: 'Why not bring Hinata some snacks right now?'

Jiraiya might have forbidden him from using the technique to return home, but nothing was stopping him, right?

So Naruto packed up a variety of snacks for later.

Meanwhile, Sakura was enjoying herself shopping with Sasuke. Although they weren't alone, Naruto was always running around, giving them time to browse together.

Despite Sasuke's usual aloofness, he was curious about the various items for sale.

However, he seemed reluctant, Although he resisted when Sakura dragged him to different stalls to play games like dart throwing and goldfish scooping.

Sasuke won a bracelet from the dart game and handed it to Sakura, who was so overjoyed that she had tears in her eyes, wondering how to repay him.

'I owe him big time... maybe I'll repay him with... myself?' Sakura's thoughts spiralled wildly.

Sasuke felt chills down his spine.

"Am I sick or something?"

…

As night fell, the trio returned to the hotel after having a great time. Naruto laid out all the snacks he had packed, guessing that Hinata had just finished her evening training session.

In Hinata's room, she and Hanabi were startled by the sound of food bags falling onto the table. The aroma of freshly cooked snacks filled the room.

"Dong, dong, dong..." More snacks appeared one after another.

Hanabi was dumbfounded. 'Father said there's no such thing as free food, only hard work, but here it is, falling from the sky!'

Hinata smiled, realizing what had happened. On the table was a kunai that Naruto had given her, marked with his Flying Thunder God seal.

Finally, a note appeared, written in Naruto's handwriting. He explained where the snacks had come from, ending with a few words that made Hinata blush.

Hanabi saw the note and couldn't help but grumble, "It's that guy again!" Though she ate the chocolate banana happily. "Hmm, it's pretty sweet..."

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Hanabi finally leaves with a satisfied burp, and by the end of the meal, she doesn't dislike Naruto as much. Maybe it's because Naruto has been so generous.

Hinata barely eats one-fifth of what Naruto devours, leaving most of the heavy lifting to her stomach. In the end, both sisters are quite satisfied.

Naruto, on the other hand, is exhausted. He and Sasuke have been up half the night, unable to sleep because of Jiraiya.

The old sage stumbles back in the middle of the night, reeking of alcohol and some stranger's perfume.

For a brief moment, Naruto entertains the thought of crashing into Sakura's room. After all, they are teammates, right? It couldn't be that weird... could it?

But he quickly shakes off the idea. "No, my comrade's room is off-limits," he tells himself.

Luckily, an idea pops into his head: solve the problem using ninjutsu. Sasuke is impressed and silently vows to never get drunk in Naruto's presence.

---

The next morning, Naruto and Sasuke go to get Sakura for breakfast, while Jiraiya is still fast asleep.

The sunlight eventually creeps through the window, hitting Jiraiya's face. With a pop, the snot bubble he's been blowing bursts. He blinks his eyes open and yawns, trying to roll over—only to find he can't.

Jiraiya: ? ??

He realizes he's been trapped... by his blanket.

Looking closer, he sees the intricate sealing techniques on the quilt: sound suppression, immobilization, and something that seems to block the smell.

Is this what Naruto's doing?

"Kid's gotten pretty good at sealing techniques," Jiraiya said with a smile on his face, but there was no time to admire the work—he quickly broke free of the seals without much trouble.

Naruto hasn't meant to make them too strong, just strong enough to stop his snoring and the alcohol stench from bothering anyone else.

Jiraiya stumbles downstairs, still groggy, and immediately starts digging into Naruto's plate without so much as a hello.

Naruto, poking at his chopsticks, raises an eyebrow and asks, "Pervy Sage, what are you doing?"

Jiraiya shoots back, "What am I doing? What did 'you' do?"

Sasuke, already feeling a bit guilty, looks away. He's been watching the chaos last night with interest and even copied a few of Naruto's sealing techniques with his Sharingan.

Naruto defends himself, "What was I supposed to do? You came back reeking of booze and who knows what else. How were we supposed to sleep?"

Jiraiya waves it off. "It was just a little alcohol."

Naruto isn't having it. " 'Just' a little? That was a stink cloud, not a smell!"

He adds sarcastically, "Didn't you just tell us yesterday, 'A ninja must endure'? Does that mean we have to endure 'you'?"

Jiraiya isn't fazed at all. "Brat, you don't know what you're talking about. I was gathering 'intel'."

Naruto smirks and quips, "Oh yeah? So you're telling me your stomach can process info from alcohol now?"

Jiraiya grumbles something unintelligible as he continues shovelling food into his mouth.

Naruto shrugs and orders another breakfast.

Sasuke watches the back-and-forth between Naruto and Jiraiya with a slight sense of envy. Naruto always seems to get along with everyone.

Whether it's his parents, Kakashi-sensei, Shikamaru, or even Jiraiya, Naruto has this way of joking around with people without annoying them.

Even now, he's stealing Sasuke's fried egg.

"Uzumaki... Naruto..." Sasuke says slowly, his voice cold.

Naruto looks back, fried egg halfway in his mouth, and blinks innocently.

After a brief staring contest, Sasuke sighs and smiles. "Forget it. Enjoy your food."

Naruto happily chews the egg. For some reason, stolen food always tastes better.

Sasuke turns back to his plate and splits his remaining egg in half, offering the other half to Sakura, who smiles brightly at the gesture.

Seeing her so happy makes Sasuke smile even more. He's glad to have been placed on this team.

He keeps his eyes on his plate, though, making sure to guard the rest of his food from Naruto's next sneak attack.

Meanwhile, Jiraiya watches them banter and thinks back to his teammates. His team had once been just as close.

He had been more handsome than Sasuke, more talented than Naruto, and Tsunade... well, he convinced himself that she'd been as gentle as Sakura back in the day.

He shakes his head, his chest tightening. No, that's just the alcohol still messing with him. Tsunade? Gentle? She's worse than Orochimaru in that regard.

---

After breakfast, the group heads to a hill outside the village for some training. Jiraiya wants to see how the three are progressing.

First is Sakura. Jiraiya is impressed by her chakra control and medical knowledge. It's like seeing a young Tsunade, right down to her flat chest.

Jiraiya isn't skilled in medical ninjutsu, but having trained alongside Tsunade, he gives Sakura some advice based on what he remembers from their younger days.

He realizes now that he genuinely wants to introduce her to Tsunade for further training.

Sasuke's Sharingan, paired with Chidori, is also impressive. His Fire Style jutsu and quick reflexes make him a formidable opponent.

Jiraiya shares his insights on using ninjutsu strategically, advising Sasuke not to mimic Naruto's all-out assault style.

He also suggests that Sasuke and Naruto try combining Wind and Fire release jutsu in the future.

This new, knowledgeable side of Jiraiya changes both Sasuke's and Sakura's impressions of him. He isn't just a perverted old man—he's a wise teacher too.

Finally, Jiraiya tosses a scroll to Naruto. "Here's that Lion's Mane jutsu I promised. But don't be greedy. Focus on mastering Water release and perfecting the Rasengan."

"Got it!" Naruto replies enthusiastically, though he secretly plans to learn everything.

"Alright, you three train hard. I need to check on something suspicious from my last intel mission," Jiraiya says, his face becoming comically serious as he walks off.

The three of them exchange glances, and whatever respect they gained for Jiraiya quickly evaporates. They watch him leave, shaking their heads in unison.

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Three days have passed, and it seems as though Jiraiya hasn't woken up during that time.

Every morning, he finds himself tightly wrapped in his blanket, but he's getting better at escaping it with each passing day.

On the morning of the fourth day, Jiraiya stops the three kids—Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura—as they are about to head out.

"We should move on to the next location."

Naruto looks at him blankly and asks, "Did you find any new leads, or are you just tired of hanging around here?"

"Stop spouting nonsense. I've been investigating!" Jiraiya clears his throat before continuing. "Someone did spot her in this town, but she didn't stick around for long. Probably because this place doesn't have any casinos."

Naruto sighs, "So where are we going next?"

"To a place called Short Book Street. There's an old temple there, pretty historic. The town is a lot livelier than here, and more importantly—there's a whole street full of casinos."

Seeing Jiraiya's gleeful smile, Naruto can't help but wonder if it isn't the casinos, or rather, *other* services that Jiraiya is truly excited about.

With Jiraiya calling the shots, the three of them have no choice but to pack their things and follow him.

Not long after leaving town, Naruto suddenly says, "Pervy Sage, we've got two people tailing us. Their chakra is about... teacup-sized. Pretty weak."

"Oh?" Jiraiya turns around, eyes narrowing as he scans the area. Sasuke and Sakura notice it too—these two aren't skilled at hiding themselves.

A couple of minutes later, Jiraiya returns with two men, both sporting bruises and swollen faces. They are dressed like samurai, with hats, bags, and swords at their waists.

Jiraiya asks sternly, "Why are you following us? Speak."

One of the men stammers, "W-We don't know who you are, but—"

"Then why are you tailing us? Are you trying to rob us? Or did someone hire you?"

"No, no! We're looking for Lady Tsunade."

"Tsunade?" Jiraiya frowns, a bad feeling rising. "You wouldn't happen to be chasing her for debts, would you?"

"That's... exactly it. I'm senta from the Akagi gang, and this is bunzo. We've been looking for Lady Tsunade for three years, but her whereabouts are always unpredictable."

This guy is trying to put it nicely, but everyone knows Tsunade's gambling habits keep her constantly on the move.

Senta continues, "We heard you were asking around about her recently, so we thought you might have a lead. We followed you in hopes of finding her. We're sorry for being discovered so quickly."

Jiraiya believes them almost immediately—this is totally Tsunade's style.

"For three years, we haven't returned home, all because of her debts. Please allow us to travel with you. We just want to find her," they both plead, bowing deeply.

Jiraiya thinks for a moment before agreeing. "Fine. When we find Tsunade, I'll ask her about it myself."

"Thank you so much!" the two samurai say in unison.

Now their group has two additional members—debt collectors.

Sakura groans internally, already feeling disappointed in Tsunade. Owing debts for three years and running away from them? 'What a shameless old woman.'

As the group moves forward, Jiraiya suddenly remembers something. "Naruto, what did you mean by 'teacup-sized' chakra?"

Sasuke and Sakura are also curious.

"Oh, that," Naruto replies. "You know my sensory ability, right?"

The three of them nod.

"I can sense the location of others, but I can also gauge their chakra levels. If chakra were water, then the amount those two have is about the size of a teacup."

"Interesting," Jiraiya says, though he can't help but smile at Naruto's odd way of measuring chakra. "Why use that term?"

"Well..." Naruto scratches his head. "I used to use Kakashi-sensei as the standard, but his chakra has been increasing a lot recently, so he's no longer a good reference. Plus, using him as a benchmark wasn't fair to people with less chakra."

Jiraiya can't help but laugh. 'It's not that you're unfair to people with less chakra—it's Kakashi who's been getting a raw deal.'

Out of curiosity, Jiraiya asks, "So, how do we compare?"

Naruto thinks for a moment. "Sakura-chan is at bathtub level."

Sakura's face twitches. 'Bathtub?' She is fuming on the inside.

"Sasuke is at the small-pond level. Kakashi-sensei was a small pond too, but now he's a large pond."

Sasuke raises an eyebrow. 'So before you changed units, I was just a little puddle?'

"As for you, Pervy Sage, you're at lake level. I'm around the same, and my mom's chakra is at an even larger lake level. If I count Kurama's chakra, then I'm probably at sea level, like the First Hokage."

The two samurai look on in awe. 'Are all ninjas this powerful?'

Jiraiya sighs. Naruto has come up with his system of measurement, and while chakra levels don't always equal strength, a "teacup" going up against a "bathtub" definitely isn't going to end well. He has to admit, the kid's system isn't entirely useless.

"Your little sensory technique is pretty handy," Jiraiya remarks.

"Nah, it's still got a long way to go," Naruto says humbly. "A real minimap should show people's faces or names. I can sense different chakra signatures, but I can't always remember who's who. And I still need to work on sensing intent—whether someone's a friend or foe."

---

After walking for a while longer, the group finally arrives at Short Book Street.

"Let's find a place to stay," Jiraiya says. "Then we'll split up to gather information."

At that very moment, at the entrance of a nearby casino, a blonde woman dressed in green proudly opens a suitcase full of money.

"Exchange all of this for chips! Today, I'll win back everything I lost!"

Behind her, a dark-haired woman holding a piglet sighs, while the piglet quivers with dread.

The casino guests exchange glances, whispering to each other as they stare at the blonde woman.

"If I'm not mistaken..."

"Isn't that...?"

"Yeah... the legendary Big Loser!"

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

****

Everyone has been searching all night, but there are still no results. The two samurai insist on continuing the search, while Jiraiya takes the three kids to eat.

Jiraiya randomly chooses an izakaya, but as soon as Naruto enters, he notices Jiraiya and a blonde woman exchanging affectionate glances.

"The crowd searches for him thousands of times, and when they look back, the man is in the dim light."

This saying might not fit perfectly here, but the mood of the scene certainly does.

From her appearance, it's Tsunade, and the flustered woman beside her with a small pig must be Shizune.

"Jiraiya?" Tsunade asks, slightly dazed and blushing from drink, hiccuping.

"Tsunade?" Jiraiya looks equally surprised.

"Well, since you're here, have a couple of drinks with me."

Jiraiya introduces everyone, sits across from Tsunade, and starts reminiscing over drinks.

Naruto and Sasuke sit next to him, busy eating the side dishes, while Sakura sits beside Shizune.

Sakura is initially very excited. After all, even if her idol gambles, drinks heavily, and is deep in debt, Tsunade is still her idol.

As a fan, Sakura forgives her instantly and even wants to say, 'Lady Tsunade, you're just too beautiful!'

But when Sakura sits down, her mood dims as she glances at Tsunade's, ahem, *impressive assets*, and then at herself. She purses her lips, feeling rather disheartened

Sasuke seems oblivious to what's going on, while Naruto, glancing around, appears to understand but doesn't say anything.

"Poink poink!"

Naruto, focused on his food, is suddenly distracted by a strange pig's cry and glances at the small pig in Shizune's arms.

It has pink, shiny skin, and looks tender—probably not more than ten kilograms.

Naruto, after swallowing his mouthful of greens, turns to Shizune and asks, "Hey, Miss Shizune, this pig looks a little weak. Why don't we just…"

Naruto licks his lips, pats Sasuke's shoulder, and adds, "Sasuke's good with fire-release jutsu. He could probably roast it to perfection."

Shizune immediately protests, "No! Tonton isn't..."

"Hahaha, I've always wanted to try! Tonton does look delicious, doesn't she?" Drunken Tsunade interrupts, trying to reach out and grab the pig.

"Hey, hey!" Shizune's eyes widen in shock as she shields Tonton, "Lady Tsunade, you've had too much to drink!"

"Oink oink!" Tonton squeals in fear, burrowing into Shizune's arms.

"I'm not drunk! Kid, you've got a good eye." Tsunade turns to Naruto, her eyes suddenly softening. "...Nawaki…"

Naruto immediately understands. This is his passive ability kicking in—the *'I remind everyone of someone* technique.

People, especially those emotionally vulnerable or intoxicated, tend to see someone they care about in Naruto.

Tsunade sees her younger brother, Nawaki, in Naruto. Jiraiya and Kakashi see Minato in him.

Even the villain Zabuza, who attacked the village, saw the shadow of his student in Naruto.

Before Naruto can respond, Tsunade grabs him in a tight hug, knocking over the cups and dishes.

"Ugh, I can't breathe," Naruto gasps, finally managing to free himself, "Lady Tsunade, I—"

*Smack!* Tsunade flicks his forehead hard. "Call me *big sister*!"

Naruto's head spins. That flick hurts more than his mom's punches. He glances at Jiraiya for help.

But Jiraiya, being the rogue he is, simply stares off into space, his eyes occasionally wandering to... less appropriate places.

Sakura, who has just regained her composure, seems crushed once again, mechanically using her chopsticks to stir at nothing in her bowl.

Sasuke shoots Naruto a sympathetic glance. He's sure of one thing—he's going to avoid this type of woman at all costs in the future.

Naruto, unwilling to argue with a drunk, sighs and mutters, "Big sister Tsunade."

"Good," Tsunade smiles, leaning back and muttering in her sleep, "Shizune, roast the pig... my brother wants some…"

Jiraiya and Shizune both fall silent. They know how much losing Dan and her younger brother, Nawaki, has affected Tsunade. She's even developed a severe fear of blood.

Now, seeing her drunkenly mistaking Naruto for Nawaki, neither of them knows whether it's a good or bad thing.

Eventually, Shizune leads Tsunade away. Naruto can't help but throw Jiraiya a look of pure contempt—' No wonder you're still single.'

…

The next morning, Naruto and Sasuke leave their room, only to find Tsunade leaning against the doorframe, rubbing her forehead. Naruto politely greets her, "Good morning, big sister Tsunade."

"Huh? Who are you, kid?"

Naruto: "…"

She hugged him all night, calling him her dear brother, but now that she's sober, he's just a 'kid.'

'This woman is dumb,' Naruto thinks to himself.

Sakura, hearing the commotion, steps out and stands beside Naruto and Sasuke, watching their dishevelled idol recover from her hangover.

Naruto explains, "We came looking for you with Pervy Sage. We met at the izakaya yesterday."

"Pervy Sage?" Tsunade raises an eyebrow, though she instantly knows who Naruto means. "Where is he?"

"Hey, is someone missing my handsome self this early?" Jiraiya strolls out of the room across the way.

"You haven't changed a bit," Tsunade says. She doesn't recall much from the previous night. "So, why did you come looking for me? Are these your students?"

Jiraiya reintroduces Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura.

"So, Kushina's son is all grown up," Tsunade says, eyeing Naruto. She feels a strange sense of familiarity with the boy.

Naruto replies, "My mom asked me to bring you a message. She said she misses you and hopes you'll visit soon."

"I see." Tsunade waves her hand dismissively. Kushina is the closest person to the family Tsunade has left, and seeing her reminds Tsunade of her grandmother, Mito.

But Konoha holds too many painful memories for her to easily return.

Sensing the tension, Jiraiya changes the subject, "We can talk about this later. First, I think there's someone here who's been waiting for you."

"Who?"

Jiraiya knocks on the door of two samurai who have been looking for Tsunade.

The moment they see her tears well up in their eyes as they exclaim, "It's been three years! We've been searching for you all this time. Do you even know how we've managed to survive these past three years?!"

****
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"You... are subordinates of the Akagi gang?" Tsunade hesitates for a moment, then recognizes the two figures, vaguely remembering seeing them before—probably during one of her drinking sprees.

"Exactly." Bunzo pulls out the IOU(I owe you), cutting straight to the point. "We're here to collect the debt."

Jiraiya, already prepared for a massive financial haemorrhage, makes a mental note: if Tsunade tries to run, he'll help her up first.

But Tsunade, crossing her arms, says calmly, "I did owe a debt to the Akagi gang's casino three years ago, but I settled it last year."

"Huh?!" The two debt collectors are stunned, and even Jiraiya makes the same incredulous noise.

"Have you two been away for a year?" Tsunade sighs, looking exasperated. Turning towards the room, she shouts, "Shizune! Bring the bill!"

Shizune quickly brings out the paperwork. After seeing the boss's signature on the bill, the debt collectors turn pale, realizing their mistake.

They mutter under their breath, confused about their long absence.

Naruto shakes his head at these two hapless debt collectors. "You're debt collectors, not runaways. How do you not check back for a whole year?"

Then, with a sigh, he thinks, "In a world where people mostly rely on walking for transportation and shouting for communication, I guess this kind of thing happens. Not everyone has the Flying Thunder God Jutsu or KCN."

The two unlucky samurai eventually leave, downtrodden. Jiraiya, feeling sorry for them, hands them some money for travel.

Sakura, meanwhile, has a glimmer of hope that her idol, Tsunade, still has some redeeming qualities. "It's not that she never repays her debts," she reasons, "it's just... the timeline for repayment gets a bit stretched."

Despite Tsunade's notorious gambling and debt-dodging, her character isn't so bad that she refuses to pay entirely.

Otherwise, her reputation would be ruined long ago, and no one would lend her money at all.

"Now that this nonsense is sorted, I'm heading to place some bets," Tsunade says, stretching lazily. Jiraiya's eyes can't help but wonder in a certain place....

"Wait a second, I still need to talk to you!" Jiraiya snaps back to reality, stopping her in her tracks.

"You're annoying, Jiraiya. I don't have time, the games won't wait for anyone," Tsunade huffs and turns to leave.

"Do you even have any money?" Jiraiya smirks, knowing that Shizune told him Tsunade lost all her money yesterday.

Tsunade freezes mid-step. That is... a serious problem.

"I'll just borrow from the casino again," she mutters stubbornly.

Jiraiya grins. "How about this—let's make a bet. I'll gamble with you."

"Oh?" Tsunade perks up, her interest piqued. "What's the wager?"

"If you win, I'll lend you the money to gamble at the casino. If you lose, you hear me out."

Jiraiya is confident. He isn't a gambler by nature, but to beat Tsunade? He doesn't think much skill is necessary—just having a pulse should be enough.

"Deal." Tsunade agrees immediately, pulling a deck of cards from somewhere in her clothes—Naruto has no idea how or where she stores all this stuff. It's in her..ahem.

Inside, Jiraiya and Tsunade sit facing each other, with Naruto and the others watching closely.

Shizune prays silently for Jiraiya to win. Their wallet is already overflowing with IOUs, and Tsunade simply can't afford to lose again.

Naruto, too, hopes Jiraiya will win, worried that if Tsunade wins, things might turn dangerous for everyone in the room.

Tsunade skillfully shuffles and deals the cards. The game itself is unfamiliar to Naruto.

Each player is dealt five cards, then they discard and draw more according to rules Naruto doesn't understand. After a few rounds, they show their hands.

Jiraiya's mouth hangs open, and Tsunade trembles slightly. Even Sakura and Naruto can't make heads or tails of the cards.

"Eh...?" Shizune makes a strange noise, clearly more familiar with the rules. Even Tonton the pig looks confused.

Naruto has a sinking feeling. No way... did Tsunade win?

Tsunade's expression turns serious as she throws her cards down. "One more game!" she demands.

Jiraiya sighs but agrees, shuffling again. They switch games and play multiple rounds—each time, Tsunade wins.

Dice games, card games, no matter what they play, Tsunade keeps winning.

At last, she crushes the dice cup in frustration, pieces scattering across the floor. She crosses her arms tightly, staring at the floor in silence.

Tsunade knows her luck all too well. Whenever she wins at gambling, something terrible is sure to follow. Who will be in danger this time? Jiraiya? Shizune? Or... Naruto?

Sasuke and Sakura are clueless as to why Tsunade isn't happy about her winning streak.

Naruto, on the other hand, is panicking. He knows Tsunade's luck is ominous—more accurate than even the Great Toad Sage's prophecies.

Whenever she wins, something bad happens, usually to someone close to her.

"Don't worry," Jiraiya says, trying to comfort her. "It's normal to have good luck once in a while." He then pulls out a stack of bills and places them in front of her. "I lost, so here's the money. Do what you like."

Tsunade glances at the money, bites her lip, and then looks up. "Why did you come to me, Jiraiya?"

Jiraiya's tone becomes serious. "It's about Konoha. The Chunin Exams are happening, and Minato received intel that Suna might be plotting something. They could be working with Orochimaru to attack Konoha, and if they do, it could turn into another war. We need your help as a medical expert."

"Orochimaru?" Tsunade's expression darkens at the name. If it's him, is it revenge for losing the Hokage seat to Minato?

No, he doesn't seem the type to care about such things. More likely... he wants revenge on the Third Hokage.

"And Suna..." she mutters in disgust. "Another war?"

Tsunade's memories flash—her grandfather, her lover Dan, her younger brother Nawaki... all lost to war. And now it threatens to start again.

"Come back to Konoha with me, Tsunade," Jiraiya urges.

Naruto can already sense it—if anyone is fated to die in this chaos, it might be the Third Hokage.

While the old man might want to die in battle, Naruto doesn't want that. If he does, it will create a chain reaction of grief and low morale in Konoha, affecting his family and Minato's leadership.

Tsunade has the power to prevent it. But how to convince her? Should Naruto use the Flying Thunder God Jutsu to teleport her back to Konoha by force?

All he needs to do is touch her...

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Pov- Tsunade

"Go back to Konoha?" Tsunade murmurs. 'Do I have the courage to return to the village that holds so many painful memories?'

As Tsunade stood at the crossroads of her past and future, a storm of conflicting emotions churned within her.

The familiar weight of grief pressed heavily on her chest—Nawaki's innocent face, full of hope, and Dan's passionate promise to change the village for the better haunted her every thought.

How could she, of all people, take up the mantle that had brought nothing but loss to those she loved?

Becoming close to her had cost them their lives, and the pain of those memories still lingered like open wounds.

"What good is power if you can't save the ones who matter most?" she had once asked herself, bitterness seeping into her voice.

The village had taken everything from her, and for years, she convinced herself that she didn't owe it anything in return. Konoha could burn for all she cared. She would never go back.

But then, there is that boy—Naruto. The spitting image of her younger brother's reckless passion, one she had tried to bury. At first, it had infuriated her, how stubborn he was, how naive.

But somewhere in those loud declarations and defiant eyes, she saw something else—a glimmer of hope, the same hope she had seen in Nawaki and Dan.

"Is it possible to protect them? To protect the village… without losing anyone else?" The thought gnawed at her, something she had long given up on.

Pov- end

Naruto doesn't act rashly. There's no way to force her back. If he tries, his house might end up either redecorated or outright demolished.

Then, he'd have no choice but to crash at Sasuke's place again, which he's already done more times than he can count. Surely, sleeping over one more time won't hurt, right?

For now, Naruto decides to rely on his "Talk no Jutsu" rather than force. He quips, "Why is Tsunade-nee-san so upset after winning a bet?"

"Naruto, don't say unnecessary things," Jiraiya interrupts, not wanting Tsunade to relive those painful memories.

'Maybe if I sweeten things up and call her 'sis,' she won't kill me,' Naruto thinks. 'As for whether it's appropriate to call her that, well, even if Tsunade is—cough—very experienced in age, it shouldn't be an issue.'

Tsunade looks at Naruto, seeing a glimpse of Nawaki. Back then, Nawaki was about the same age, and he used to call her 'sister' just like that.

This boy reminds her so much of him. No wonder she felt a sense of familiarity when she first saw him.

At his age, Naruto should have never even experienced war, yet he might get caught up in one soon. 'Would his fate end up like Nawaki's...?'

Tsunade tries to calm herself. "There's nothing I can't say. Every time I win a bet, the people around me suffer bad luck, so…"

"Maybe it's just a coincidence," Naruto counters. "Things were fine before, and now you've won. Isn't that just luck?"

"How many coincidences can there be?" Tsunade's voice is strained. "I usually lose every bet, but this time, I won a dozen games in a row!"

"I'll bet with you!" Naruto exclaims. "Maybe the pervy sage just has bad luck. I mean, he got caught peeping at the women's bath even with all his ninja skills."

Sakura, who has been silently watching, takes a few steps back. She silently vows that as long as Jiraiya is in the village, she will never step foot in the bathhouse.

Jiraiya braces himself for a punch but notices that Tsunade isn't moving. Honestly, he thinks it might have been better if she had hit him rather than wallowing in sadness.

Tsunade stares at Naruto for a few seconds, then picks up the money Jiraiya placed in front of her and slaps it on the table. "Alright, let's bet! Where's your wager?"

Naruto digs into his frog wallet, pulling out a few coins and small bills. He's broke. Before the Chunin Exams, he had commissioned a custom kunai and treated Kurama to a feast.

He'd also spent most of his pocket money on snacks for Hinata. This is all he has left.

He pushes the money forward. "I'll bet with these first."

Tsunade doesn't mind and randomly grabs a banknote. "How do you want to bet?"

Naruto pulls out a coin. "I don't know much about other games. How about a coin toss?"

"Fine," Tsunade agrees, thinking the result will be the same no matter what they bet on.

Naruto flicks the coin into the air. "Heads or tails?"

Tsunade watches the coin spin. "Heads."

*Ding, ding, ding.* The coin lands—tails.

Naruto smirks. He's betting on his good fortune. After all, despite everything, the Kyuubi hasn't wiped out his family. Maybe he can counteract Tsunade's bad luck.

Tsunade is stunned. She isn't sure if she should feel relieved or not. She grabs another bill. "Again!"

Naruto gathers up his small change, leaving only the banknotes on the table.

The coin flies up again. "Heads!" Tsunade guesses.

*Ding, ding, ding.* Tails.

"Keep going!"

"Heads!"

"Tails!"

"Heads!"

…

Eight more times, Tsunade guesses wrong. Frustrated, she slams the table. "Are you cheating?!"

Naruto's heart is pounding. The odds of guessing wrong ten times in a row are slim, but he hands the coin to Tsunade. "Wanna toss it yourself?"

Tsunade tosses the coin, and Naruto guesses, "Heads?"

The coin lands—heads.

"Again!"

"Tails"

"Tails"

"Heads"

…

Naruto is enjoying the game. He even considers trying to make the coin stand on its edge just for fun.

After several rounds, Naruto realizes the truth. According to probability theory, each coin toss is an independent event. The odds of guessing correctly are always 50%.

But under his lucky streak and Tsunade's bad luck, it seems almost natural for him to win repeatedly.

Tsunade stares at her last banknote. Normally, losing would leave her feeling miserable, but this time, it feels... easier.

"Jiraiya, your turn!" Tsunade hands the coin to him.

"Huh? Oh." Jiraiya, still surprised at how things are unfolding, guesses, "Tails."

The coin lands—heads.

None of them understand what's happening. Could it be, as Naruto suggested, that Jiraiya just has awful luck?

Tsunade tries betting with Shizune and Jiraiya again but eventually returns to Naruto. In the end, only Naruto can win against her.

'What is this?* Tsunade wonders. 'Why is he the only one who can beat me?'

Naruto places his stack of winnings on the table, flashing his trademark grin. "So, Tsunade-nee-san, maybe luck exists, but you shouldn't be too superstitious. Even if you think your winning streak brings bad luck, didn't you lose to me? Maybe I'm here to break your so-called curse?"

Tsunade looks at Naruto. She hasn't seen such a hopeful smile in a long time. 'Maybe... maybe I should trust this kid?'

"Let's make another bet."

"Huh?"

"I said, let's bet again. If you win, I'll return to Konoha with you. If you lose…"

"I'll give you all this money." Naruto shrugs, unfazed by the idea.

"No. If you lose, you have to call me 'big sister.'"

Naruto meets her eyes with a serious expression. "I'm not Nawaki; I'm Naruto."

Pretending to be Nawaki, playing on her emotions—that's not something Naruto can do in good conscience.

Tsunade smiles. "I know."

Naruto grins back. "Alright, big sister."

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Winning or losing the game no longer matters. In the end, Tsunade has a reason for returning to Konoha, and Naruto has gained an older sister.

And Jiraiya…

"By the way, Naruto, didn't you say that you caught Jiraiya peeking at the women's bath?"

Jiraiya immediately becomes alert, discreetly distancing himself from Tsunade, thinking, 'This kid promised not to mention this. What is he up to?'

"Yeah, he even taught me a jutsu and told me not to mention it to my mom," Naruto says, completely betraying Jiraiya, though not specifying that he wasn't supposed to mention it to his sister. "So, Sis, you'll keep this a secret, right? Don't tell Mom."

"Heh, no problem," Tsunade grins, clenching her fist. "I'll help him keep that secret."

Jiraiya takes a few steps back, sweat forming on his forehead. "Wait, I can explain—"

Before he can finish, Tsunade's fist slams into his chest.

Jiraiya: "AHHHHHHH!!!"

A human-shaped hole appears in the wall of the inn. Across the street, Jiraiya is embedded in the wall.

Tsunade cracks her knuckles in satisfaction. "Much better."

Sasuke and Sakura, who have never seen anything like this, stand frozen in shock. "Will… will he die?" Sakura asks.

Naruto feels a bit guilty. "We were just playing around. I didn't want to get him killed." He tugs at Tsunade's sleeve. "Granny, did you hit him too hard?"

"It's fine," Tsunade says confidently. "At most, he'll break a rib. He's not going to die...wait, what did you just say?"

"Oh." Naruto nods, trusting her expertise as a medic. He grabs the money from the table and waves it to everyone. "Let's go! The Pervy Sage is treating us to dinner!"

"Come here you brat!" Tsunade shouts in anger.

Everyone has a great meal, and, of course, Naruto knocks Jiraiya out of the wall afterwards.

The injuries aren't serious—just a fractured rib. In the ninja world, such an injury is nothing, especially considering it comes from Tsunade.

After they eat and drink their fill, and while Tsunade isn't drunk, Naruto asks, "Sis, when are we leaving?"

"As soon as Jiraiya recovers. Don't worry, we'll get back to Konoha before the Chunin Exams," Tsunade assures him, thinking about how there will be fewer casinos once they return.

Jiraiya doesn't argue. He merely bandages his chest and applies some medicine. Tsunade doesn't even bother to use medical ninjutsu on him.

Naruto points at Sakura. "Since you're not doing anything, why not take on an apprentice?"

Tsunade glances at Sakura, who immediately straightens up and looks at her expectantly.

"No, teaching is such a hassle," Tsunade replies. After all, it would cut into her gambling time.

"Come on, Sakura is talented," Naruto insists. "She might even master your medical ninjutsu completely. She already has a good foundation."

Tsunade wraps her arm around Naruto's neck and whispers, "Naruto, let me tell you something. That girl's mind is clearly on that Uchiha boy. No matter how nice you are to her, it won't change that."

"Don't tease me," Naruto wriggles free. "I have a girlfriend back in Konoha! I'm recommending Sakura because she's genuinely talented."

"Really? Shizune, test her," Tsunade relents, deciding to give Sakura a chance.

"Yes," Shizune says, proceeding to ask Sakura some basic medical questions.

Sakura, who has thought all hope is lost, eagerly answers the questions, glad for the opportunity.

Naruto, meanwhile, picks up the pig from the table and pets it. It doesn't feel as nice as Akamaru, but it still feels nice to pet it. Naruto switches to play mode.

"Poyo~" The Pig doesn't dare resist, fearing Naruto might cook it.

At first, the questions are simple enough that even Naruto can understand them. But soon, the conversation between Shizune and Sakura devolves into an incomprehensible medical Exam.

To Naruto, it sounds like:
Shizune: "@#%￥…&*@?"

Sakura: "*&…%…&."

"What the heck are they talking about?" Naruto thinks. "I can understand the words individually, but together it's all gibberish."

Are all medical students this knowledgeable?

Ten minutes later, green chakra glows from Sakura's hand. Tsunade nods approvingly. "Very good. From now on, you're my apprentice."

"Yes! Tsunade-sensei!" Sakura jumps up excitedly, bowing to her new teacher before turning to Naruto and Shizune. "Thank you, Naruto! And thank you, Shizune-sensei!"

"Congrats!" Naruto cheers, happy for her. In the ninja world, having a good teacher makes all the difference.

Shizune congratulates her new junior as well. Only Jiraiya looks at Sakura sympathetically, knowing how tough being Tsunade's apprentice can be.

Then he thinks, 'Maybe she'll beat me up less in the future.' That idea brightens his mood.

The next day, the group of six heads outside the village to find a suitable training ground.

Jiraiya, still nursing his injury, sits off to the side, offering advice to Naruto and Sasuke. Shizune holds Tonton and teaches Sakura while Tsunade…

"Boom!"

"AHH!!"

Between lectures, there are frequent explosions and screams—most of them are of Sakura's—coming from the training ground. Naruto and Sasuke exchange worried looks.

Tsunade's punches leave forming huge craters, and the ground is riddled with spiderweb cracks.

"Will Sakura survive this?" Sasuke whispers, his eyes wide.

He glances at Jiraiya with newfound respect. 'He took a punch from her and only broke a rib? Truly worthy of the Sannin.'

Jiraiya, lost in thought, isn't paying attention to Sasuke's gaze. He is remembering a time Tsunade broke six of his ribs for peeking at her bath. Absentmindedly touching his current injury, he sighs. 'Youth… so full of regrets!'

Meanwhile, Tsunade is explaining the three rules of medical ninjas to Sakura:

1. A medical ninja must never stop treatment until their comrades die.
2. A medical ninja must never be on the front lines.
3. A medical ninja must never die before their comrades.

The first rule requires cultivating a strong sense of duty. The second depends on the strength of teammates.

But the third—Tsunade is training Sakura herself for that one. The training method? Combat.

"If you can dodge my attacks, great. If not, endure them. If you get hurt, don't worry, I'll heal you. It'll even double as live instruction. Once you can withstand dozens of my moves, you'll be considered qualified."

Tsunade's teaching is simple, brutal, and effective.

Unlike her previous training with Naruto and Sasuke, this time Tsunade isn't holding back.

By the end of the day, the training ground is devastated, filled with deep craters and cracks. Sakura is battered, having fallen countless times, covered in scrapes and bruises.

And that is with Tsunade pulling her punches, keeping her attacks within Sakura's reaction range.

Tsunade is strict. "Today was just an introduction. Tomorrow, I won't go so easy on you!"

"Yes, thank you, Tsunade-sensei!" Sakura grits her teeth, determined not to give up. This is the hardest training she has ever experienced, but she has the resolve to push through.

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

In the days that followed, Sakura endures Tsunade's training and beatings every day while learning medical ninjutsu.

However, she grits her teeth and refuses to give up. She truly wants to become stronger, from the bottom of her heart.

One night, Naruto knocks on Sakura's door, seeing how exhausted she is, and says, "Let's talk?"

Sakura nods and lets him in. The two sit opposite each other at the table.

Naruto, without hesitation, pours himself some tea and asks, "Sakura, do you regret it?"

Sakura shakes her head, replying, "This is an opportunity you helped me get. I won't give up that easily."

"For Sasuke?" Naruto guesses right away.

Sakura hesitates for a moment, then smiles. "Maybe at first, but not anymore."

Naruto is taken aback. "You don't like Sasuke anymore?"

"Of course I do," Sakura quickly denies it.

Naruto eyes her suspiciously. "Then why did you say that?"

Sakura sighs, feeling the need to talk. "I've realized something lately."

Naruto sits up, interested, and pours her a cup of tea. "I'd like to hear more."

Sakura, used to Naruto's quirky behaviour, begins, "When I first graduated from the academy, I had no real goals. My only dream was Sasuke."

She reminisces. "Sasuke was handsome, confident, strong... everything about him seemed perfect."

Naruto sets down his tea, interrupting, "I didn't come here to listen to you praise him."

Sakura chuckles. "Alright, alright. I always admired him, but I never really knew him. To him, I might just be a familiar face. Maybe in his heart, your sneeze would worry him more than me getting injured."

Naruto laughs internally, thinking they share a deep friendship and brotherhood, but now he understands Sakura better.

Sakura seems like a fan who fell for Sasuke as if he was an idol. Without knowing why, she developed those feelings and suffered for it. She fell in love with someone who didn't reciprocate.

Looking at the ceiling, Sakura continues, "I'm like a cherry blossom petal blown by the wind. I saw a tree I liked and wanted to reach it desperately, without ever considering if he liked me back or needed me. I didn't even know if I could get there."

Naruto feels a bit out of his depth, sipping tea to cover his embarrassment. His love story was far simpler—he liked someone, she liked him back, and that was it.

"In that sense, I've been outshined by Hinata."

Wait, Hinata?

Sakura smiles wistfully. "Hinata always had her own goals. She worked hard to become stronger. To be honest, I was amazed by her during the Chunin Exams. If I were a boy, I would have liked her too. She's gentle, beautiful, strong, and hardworking."

Naruto beams internally, proud to hear those words. But sensing Sakura's regret, he wants to comfort her until she speaks again.

"But now I have a new goal."

Sakura's voice grows firmer. "I want to become a powerful ninja-like Tsunade-sensei. I don't want to be just a petal in the wind."

"I want to grow into a full cherry tree! If one day, Sasuke stands by my side, I want it to be because I'm worthy of him, not because I waited or because I moved him. I am Haruno Sakura, a strong Konoha ninja first, and then a girl who loves Sasuke."

At that moment, Sakura radiates confidence.

Naruto is impressed. If Sasuke doesn't appreciate this girl, he'll be single forever!

Naruto glances at the door and says, "So, Sasuke, do you understand?"

…

After three seconds of silence.

"Huh?" Sakura's expression freezes. She slowly turns toward the door, only to find it closed.

She turns back, glaring at Naruto, who is laughing awkwardly.

"Ha... ha..." Naruto scratches the back of his head. "Well, I just thought it was too serious, so I wanted to lighten the mood..."

*Boom!* The table shatters, spilling tea everywhere. Sakura's forehead bulges with veins, and she seethes, "Naruto!"

Naruto bolts to the door, opening it just a crack to peek back in. "Wait, Sakura! When did you gain superhuman strength?"

"Tsunade Sensei has been teaching me techniques recently." Sakura cracks her knuckles with a malicious grin. "Wanna practice with me?"

"No, no, I have something to do! See ya!" Naruto declares, fleeing.

Three seconds later, his head pops back around the corner. "Uh, Sakura? You broke the table. You'll have to pay for it."

"Uzumaki Naruto!" Sakura yells, shattering the table further, before chasing him to the door.

This time, Naruto makes a true escape. Sakura clenches her fists and mutters, "How has Sasuke put up with him all these years without killing him?"

[Sasuke: Maybe because I couldn't beat him?]

Sakura calms down, preparing to clean up the room. After venting and sharing her thoughts, the frustrations from the past few days ease.

She laughs thinking about how Naruto came to talk to her and lighten her mood.

"It's nice," she whispers.

…

As time passes, Jiraiya's injury heals, and Sakura's training intensifies. She gets hurt less by Tsunade, who is pleased with her progress, feeling that Sakura is more suited to inherit her techniques than Shizune.

Perhaps, after gaining more experience, Tsunade may even teach her the Yin Seal.

Jiraiya watches Sakura smash a boulder with one punch, and with her long pink hair, he briefly imagines a younger Tsunade.

Wait—pink? Jiraiya looks again, only to see Naruto using the messy lion's mane technique to stretch his hair into nine strands, looking like Kushina.

Naruto gleefully plays with his new ninjutsu and asks Jiraiya, "Hey, Pervy Sage, do you think I can pull off something like Hair Needle or something like that?"

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

I'm Naruto Uzumaki, and I'm being chased by Sasuke Uchiha, but I'm not panicking. Why? Because, believe it or not, I run faster than him.

...

Here's how it all starts. After Granny.. I mean big sister Tsunade heals Jiraiya-sensei's injury, we all head back to Konoha from Tanzaku Town.

The journey back is smooth with no twists or trouble, much easier than travelling home during a mission.

By noon, we reach Konoha. Tsunade and Jiraiya go straight to the Hokage office, while Sakura hurries home to report to her family.

Naruto, being Naruto, finds out through a phone call that Kushina has led a team on a mission, so the house is empty. With Hinata busy, he decides to tag along with Sasuke and grab a meal at his place.

However, once they arrive, Sasuke's mother informs him that on the day he was "kidnapped" by Naruto, his brother Itachi had taken leave to train with him.

But since Sasuke wasn't there, Itachi ended up spending the day with Izumi instead.

Naruto senses that things are about to go bad and tries to slip away quietly.

Sasuke, on the other hand, doesn't even catch his mom's next remark about Itachi spending more time with Izumi lately. His mind is fully occupied by one thought: he has missed an entire month of training & private time with his brother—all thanks to Naruto.

And so, there it is: Sasuke, furious and filled with regret, starts chasing Naruto down with Sharingan flaring red.

Feeling a little guilty, Naruto just runs.

"Why are you running? Why are you running!" Sasuke yells, his voice echoing through the streets.

"Why should I stop when you're chasing me?!" Naruto shouts while continuing to run. No way is he going to make this easy for Sasuke.

"If you weren't running, I wouldn't be chasing!"

"And if you weren't chasing, I wouldn't be running!"

"I'm going to kill you!"

"Like you can even catch me!"

...

The two shinobi dash through the alleys of Konoha, sprinting across rooftops, circling the village again and again. Sparks fly as their feet hit the ground.

Along the way, they run into Gai-sensei's Team of 3 and Kimimaro's group, who seem to get fired up by the sight of Naruto and Sasuke's wild chase.

Naruto could've sworn he heard Gai shout something about the power of youth.

After hours of high-speed pursuit, Sasuke's stamina gives out. He realizes, once again, that no matter how angry he gets, a regular human's endurance can't compete with Naruto's insane chakra reserves.

Exhausted and out of breath, he hasn't even noticed that his Sharingan has evolved during the chase.

"You... huff... better... stop..." Sasuke pants, barely able to stand as his pace slows.

"You done yet?" Naruto asks, equally tired but still pushing ahead. He isn't about to stop, not unless he wants to get beat up. "I swear, if I didn't feel a bit guilty, I'd have flattened you by now."

So Naruto keeps running, not daring to stop in front of those blazing Sharingan eyes.

...

Eventually, Sasuke collapses from exhaustion, leaving Naruto to carry him on his back as they head to Sasuke's house.

Naruto, unable to resist teasing his friend, mutters, "Why'd you go nuts? I didn't even know Itachi took leave to train with you."

"Hmph," Sasuke grumbles. He knows it isn't entirely Naruto's fault, and as much as he hates it, Naruto has good intentions.

"And, even if you did catch me, what could you do? I can't time travel, y'know. Plus, you've gotten a lot stronger this month."

"Hmph," Sasuke mutters again, trying to brush it off. He knows Naruto is right, but he isn't about to admit it.

"Hey! Are you you a girl? It's disgusting if a boy pouts, you know"

"I will kill you next time, Uzumaki!"

Naruto shakes his head. "Man, you are stubborn. You're always picking fights, and then you wear yourself out and make me carry you back."

"I didn't ask for a ride." Sasuke turns his head, too proud to admit defeat.

Naruto almost drops him right there. "Seriously? I haven't even carried Hinata yet, but I'm stuck carrying your sweaty, grumpy self."

...

When Naruto finally arrives at the Uchiha compound with Sasuke, they run into Itachi and Izumi, who are just saying goodbye.

"Brother?" Sasuke tries to get down but is too worn out to stand on his own. Naruto has to help him stay upright.

"Yo, little Sasuke, Naruto!" Izumi greets them with a smile. "You two seem close as always."

"What happened to Sasuke?" Itachi asks, noticing his younger brother's state.

Sasuke turns his face away, too embarrassed to explain.

Naruto, ever the bro, steps in. "Just some physical training. Pushed himself too hard."

Sasuke doesn't argue. After all, long-distance running *is* physical training, right?

"Let me take him," Itachi says, lifting Sasuke onto his back without breaking a sweat.

Sasuke doesn't resist, leaning against his brother, feeling his anger drain away.

Naruto, curious as ever, asks with a grin, "You two have been on a date or something?"

Izumi blushes instantly. "No! We just had a meal together!"

Itachi, always composed, calmly replies, "That's all it was."

Naruto, channelling his inner Kushina, narrows his eyes at the pair. "Really? 'Cause Aunt Mikoto told me, you've been spending a lot of time together lately."

Flustered, Izumi stammers, "W-We've just been... hanging out."

"Well, goodbye!" she says quickly, before rushing off, clearly embarrassed.

"Goodbye, Sister Izumi!" Naruto calls after her.

Itachi chuckles and turns to Naruto. "Take care, Naruto."

Naruto waves and makes his way home.

...

When Naruto arrives home, the place is packed. Tsunade has just finished checking up on Kimimaro's health.

Naruto had asked her to take a look at him for signs of his "bloodline disease," and apparently, Tsunade had taken it seriously.

Jiraiya and Minato are chatting on the couch, while Kakashi is reading one of Jiraiya's books—though not *Icha Icha Paradise* for once, but a collection of stories Minato has written.

In the kitchen, Karin is helping Kushina cook, while Haku is already setting the table. The atmosphere feels warm and familiar—just like always.

But then Naruto does a double-take.

"Haku? What're you doing here?!"

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"Haku, why are you here?"

Naruto looks at Haku, who is helping in the kitchen, his eyes narrowing with curiosity. Did I miss a chapter or two of my own life?

"Naruto, call him your brother!" Kushina corrects him, holding a spoon in her hand.

"Brother?" Naruto raises an eyebrow, feeling a bit confused, Isn't this turning into a strange, extended ninja family?

"Yes, Haku officially became my son a few days ago," Kushina says, her face lighting up with happiness.

Haku tilts his head slightly, showing a smile so beautiful it could make many girls envious. "Naruto-kun, no, Otouto, please take care of me from now on!"

Naruto nods, still a bit stunned. Having more brothers is fine, but being called *Otouto* always reminds him of Sasuke.

His mind wanders briefly, imagining them all going on missions together. He pictures them facing enemies, using their various kekkei genkai to defeat foes several times their size.

The enemy, beaten and lying on the ground, asks in shock, "You're so strong! Who are you?"

Kimimaro steps forward and says, "I, Kimimaro, am the son of the Fourth Hokage!"

Haku follows, "I, Haku, am the son of the Fourth Hokage!"

Karin steps up next, "I, Karin, am the daughter of the Fourth Hokage!"

And Naruto, of course, finishes, "I, Naruto, am the son of the Fourth Hokage!"

So stupid!

Snapping back to reality, Naruto remembers something and turns to Kushina, "Wait, why didn't you tell me about this over the phone? That's kinda important, don't you think?"

Kushina chuckles. She doesn't bother correcting him anymore. "I wanted it to be a surprise. Are you happy?"

"...Happy?" Naruto mutters. Sure, he's happy, but he's starting to wonder if his spot in the family hierarchy is slipping.

"Can you tell me what happened while I was gone? Did Haku join Konoha for good?"

Minato appears at that moment. "Let me explain. Before Zabuza and Haku were captured, they were both considered rogue ninjas."

Naruto notices that Haku doesn't react at all to the mention of his past. He just smiles softly.

Minato continues, "Although I intended to cooperate with them, we had to interrogate them as part of protocol. I apologize for that."

"You've apologized enough, Hokage-sama," Haku says gently. "Zabuza-sama and I understand your position."

Minato nods and explains further, "Afterward, Kushina learned about Haku's past and insisted that Haku and Kimimaro, both have faced so much hardship, should be part of our family."

Naruto already knows Haku's backstory—how his entire village feared and persecuted him for his Ice Release kekkei genkai.

Hakus's father killed his mother upon learning of her abilities and was about to do the same to Haku.

In his panic, Haku unleashed his Ice Release, turning the entire house into an ice sculpture.

He survives but is later taken in by Zabuza, who treats him as a mere tool—though they eventually grow to care for each other in their own way.

"So, did Haku just agree to this?" Naruto asks, turning to Haku.

"Well, Zabuza-sama was about to leave for a mission and insisted that I stay in Konoha. He told me that he used to see me only as a tool, but after seeing how easily you interact with the Hokage and Jonin here, he realized that Konoha might be a better place for me."

"You didn't agree right away, did you?" Naruto asks. He guesses Zabuza's mission probably has something to do with the Land of Water. His father, after all, is trying to pursue peace across the ninja world.

Haku smiles softly. "At first, I didn't. I insisted on staying as Zabuza-sama's tool. But then, he gave me one final order as his tool—to become a real person and live for myself."

Naruto's eyes widen in surprise. Zabuza, that guy, doesn't seem like such a cold-blooded killer after all.

"But I wasn't sure how to do that until your parents invited me into their home. I feel something warm here," Haku says, placing a hand on his chest. "It's similar to the feeling I had when I was needed by Zabuza-sama, but... different. Warmer."

Haku smiles again. "I'm not sure if I'm a real person yet, but I can tell you this—I like this family."

Naruto slowly nods, starting to understand the situation. Not bad, he thinks.

"So, what happens after Zabuza finishes his mission? Will you go back to him?"

Minato ruffles Naruto's spiky blonde hair. "Zabuza will become one of Konoha's strongest allies. We won't stop Haku from meeting or even teaming up with him."

"Oh." Naruto ducks away from Minato's hand.

"Excuse me!" Shizune suddenly bursts in, carrying Tonton.

"You're late, Shizune!" Tsunade throws her cards down in frustration. She has been playing cards with Jiraiya, Kakashi, and Kimimaro.

Naruto suspects she lost once again and has used Shizune as an excuse to stop playing.

"It's not my fault, Tsunade-sama! You left all the work to me!" Shizune sits down with a sigh.

"Oink!"

"See? Even Tonton agrees!" Shizune retorts, using her uncanny ability to understand Tonton's "language."

Tsunade nonchalantly pours herself another cup of sake. "Oh, quit whining. Can't you see I'm busy?"

Shizune makes a dramatic face. "Busy drinking?! You're supposed to be taking over the entire medical division! Please, take it seriously!"

Tsunade rolls her eyes, but Shizune isn't wrong. Minato had arranged for Tsunade to take over Konoha's medical affairs, and Jiraiya is being prepared to handle intelligence, slowly replacing the current advisors.

As everyone settles down, the table is full of food. The whole family gathers around, raising their cups.

"Cheers!"

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

----

The next day, three elders gather, but they don't invite the Third Hokage to join them.

Since the meeting is initiated by Danzo, it takes place at his residence.

Koharu Utatane takes a sip of tea and says, "It's been quite a while, Danzo."

Homura Mitokado nods, adding, "Yes, ever since the disbanding of Root, you've become more and more reclusive."

Danzo, seated opposite them with his cane in his hand, gazes at his old comrades through his single eye.

He speaks gravely, "This old man had planned to retire, but over the years, the actions of the Fourth Hokage have become excessive. How can a Hokage so freely treat shinobi from other villages as his own children?"

Homura, being responsible for intelligence, is somewhat familiar with these matters. "I'm aware of those children. They're talented and young. With proper training, they could become Konoha's future pillars."

Danzo scoffs, "Hmph. You trust in emotions too easily. Leave them to me, and I'll make sure they're moulded into perfect tools."

Koharu raises an eyebrow, sensing there is more to Danzo's agenda. "Did you gather us here just to discuss this?"

"No," Danzo replies, "I wanted to ask: are you really satisfied if you are replaced by others?"

Homura adjusts his glasses, wary. "What do you mean?"

Danzo's voice lowers. "I suspect that Jiraiya and Tsunade will soon replace you."

"..." The two glance at each other but remain silent.

Seeing their lack of denial, Danzo presses on. "The Fourth Hokage is too young & too reckless. It was a grave mistake for Hiruzen to choose him in the first place."

Homura disagrees. "But Konoha has grown stronger in recent years. The Fourth Hokage has done well. Even the Uchiha clan—"

"Superficial strength!" Danzo interrupts. "The Fourth Hokage is too naive. Allowing a Uchiha to become the head of the Anbu and captain of the Hokage Guard? If they harbour any ill intentions, Konoha could fall in an instant! Have you forgotten the Nine-Tails' attack?"

"But the Fourth has already proven the Uchiha wasn't responsible for that incident, at least not the Uchiha within the village. The police force is even opening its doors to non-Uchiha now," Homura counters.

"Their involvement in the police force is irrelevant. That clan can't be trusted. If it were up to me, I'd have handled them much better," Danzo declares with unwavering confidence.

Koharu, growing impatient, asks directly, "What are you really getting at, Danzo?"

After a brief pause, Danzo speaks. "If the Fourth Hokage's decisions lead to disaster, I hope you'll support me."

"Danzo, don't do anything rash," Koharu warns.

"That's right. We've dedicated our lives to Konoha, and we won't let you harm the village," Homura adds.

Both of them suspect that Danzo, having been sidelined for so long, is eager to reclaim power through drastic measures.

"Everything I do is for Konoha," Danzo replies sternly, as he always has, convincing himself of this truth for years.

"Let's hope so," Koharu says.

Neither Homura nor Koharu believe their old friend would betray Konoha for power. After all, they are heirs to the Will of Fire... or so they think. Yet, as they leave, they resolve to keep a closer watch on Danzo.

After they depart, a black-haired boy enters the room, kneeling respectfully before Danzo. "Danzo-sama," he greets.

Danzo looks down at him and orders, "From now on, until the mission is complete, your name will be Sai."

"Yes, Danzo-sama," Sai says, forcing a smile as he raises his head.

Danzo scrutinizes him for a moment and says, "Don't put on that fake smile around me."

"My apologies. The books say that to win trust, you must smile first, but I can't quite control my expressions," Sai explains, returning to his neutral demeanour.

"You're still not fully prepared, but..." Danzo thinks to himself, "I don't have many options left." Aloud, he says, "But you are the most suitable for this task. Don't fail me."

"Understood." Sai stands and leaves.

Danzo turns and stares in the direction of the Sarutobi residence, muttering under his breath as he leans on his cane, "Forgive me, Hiruzen, but if it's for Konoha, I know you'd be willing to make sacrifices."

...

"Of course not!" Sarutobi Hiruzen exclaims, setting down his pipe and looking at the water stains on his robes. "Konohamaru, how many times do I have to tell you? You don't need to defeat your grandfather to become Hokage."

Konohamaru's head droops in disappointment after his failed ambush. "But Grandpa, didn't you say you're the strongest Hokage? If I beat you, I should become Hokage!"

Hiruzen chuckles, though slightly choked on his pipe smoke. Was it wrong for a grandfather to boast a little to his grandson? After all, Minato wouldn't be around to call him out.

He pats Konohamaru's head and says, "Being Hokage isn't just about strength. It's about protecting the village in its time of need. Where Konoha thrives—"

Before he can finish his lecture, Konohamaru has already run off. "Grandpa always says the same thing," the boy grumbles. "Something about flames never dying out... but Naruto Ni-san says fire only leads to ashes if you burn down a forest. Maybe Naruto Ni-san makes more sense after all."

"Ouch!" Konohamaru yelps, rubbing his head after bumping into someone. He looks up to see red hair and quickly bows. "Sorry, Aunt Kushina!"

Kushina ruffles his hair. "Be more careful next time, Konohamaru. Off you go."

"Hello, Lord Third, Mrs Sarutobi," Kushina greets as she steps into the room.

Biwako, having just finished cleaning up after Konohamaru's prank, smiles warmly. "Kushina, it's been a while. Would you like some tea?"

"Thank you," Kushina replies, sitting down. "I've been busy with the Chunin Exams lately. I came by to ask some questions about jutsu."

"Of course. Give me a moment to change," Hiruzen says, pointing to his soaked clothes.

Kushina smiles. "Another one of Konohamaru's pranks? He behaves so well around me."

Hiruzen sighs as he walks into the house. "Yeah, but he's quite a handful. I'll be back shortly."

As Hiruzen leaves the room, Kushina leans closer to Biwako, her face serious, and whispers something quietly.

Biwako's eyes widen in surprise, but she nods solemnly, accepting a small package from Kushina.

Afterwards, Kushina asks a few questions about water-style jutsu, then politely takes her leave.

----

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"There has to be a limit for messing around!" Sakura complained.

Yesterday, she had heard about Naruto and Sasuke's latest chase. Sparks and lightning had flown through the air.

When Sasuke started slowing down, he activated his Chidori in frustration.

If Naruto hadn't been prepared, he would've been injured.

Though Sasuke's move was fast, it didn't last long. Exhausted, he hadn't fully recovered until today.

Sakura checked Sasuke over several times, finally relaxing when she saw that he was only exhausted with a slight muscle strain.

Sasuke resisted for a moment but soon realized that even after she used 70% of her strength, Sakura wasn't even fazed. Accepting defeat, he lay flat, giving up.

"What's the big deal? You know, Sakura, if it were me, this little injury would be healed with just some sleep," Naruto grinned as he bounced around.

Today, Kushina didn't have any work, so Team 7 had a day off. Hinata and the others didn't come, Kakashi was finally able to relax, perched in a tree, reading his favourite book.

Sakura grew quiet at Naruto's words. She had checked his body before—since starting medical training, she measured the physical limits of everyone in both Team 7 and Team 8.

But Naruto is something else. His "limit" was beyond reason, and even when he hit that limit, he kept training.

At first, Sakura had tried to stop him, but each time Naruto collapsed like a dead man, he'd bounced back the next day, stronger than ever.

She even had to adjust her estimate of his limits slightly higher every time. It was absurd!

At noon, Naruto invited Sasuke and Sakura to eat at his house. Kakashi didn't need an invitation; he just tagged along without a second thought.

In the afternoon, they all headed to the hospital with Kushina. Kakashi decided to take the whole team with him, figuring out that with Sasuke still recovering, they couldn't train properly anyway.

Tsunade would be the lead surgeon for Kimimaro's operation, with Sakura and Shizune assisting her.

As for Tsunade's hemophobia, it was psychological. Once she overcame her past traumas and found a new purpose, her fear would gradually disappear.

Two hours later, Naruto was bored out of his mind, slouching to the side at a 45-degree angle, mimicking Brook from *One Piece.*

While he wasn't exactly worried about Kimimaro's surgery, early detection and treatment by the world's best medical ninja ensured there was no danger.

Finally, the light above the operating room turned green, and Tsunade came out with Sakura, smiling. "The operation was successful. After a couple of days of rest, Kimimaro can resume normal activities."

"Great!" Everyone waiting in the hallway breathed a sigh of relief and cheered softly.

Even Pakkun, who had been waiting outside with Naruto, wagged his tail in happiness, feeling more secure now that Naruto had calmed down.

"Ohhh!" came the chorus of voices from Kimimaro's three green-suited, melon-headed comrades in the corridor. They hugged each other tightly and sobbed with joy.

"Let's celebrate Kimimaro's successful surgery with a thousand push-ups!" Jiro suggested.

"Yeah!" Gen agreed.

"I'm in too!" Daiki added.

The three of them were about to start exercising right there in the hallway when Tsunade, Kushina, and Sakura each grabbed one by the collar and threw it out the window. "The hospital needs to be quiet, no matter what!"

The trio rolled on the ground but sprang up like carp, brushing the dirt off and shouting, "Since we couldn't complete our push-ups, we'll run five hundred laps around the training field!" And with that, they ran off.

On the hospital bed, Kimimaro smiled softly, listening to the commotion outside.

Afterwards, Tsunade took Karin to another room to work on removing her scars.

When it came to skincare and scar removal, Tsunade was unmatched in the ninja world. Even at fifty, her skin is better than many women half her age. Despite all the battles she'd been through, she bore no visible scars on her body.

Second place in that area would go to Orochimaru, though his methods involved changing bodies, which came with its own… side effects.

Scars weren't an issue if you could just swap to a new body, but you might lose a few other things along the way.

Not long after, Karin and Tsunade emerged with smiles on their faces. The scar on Karin's arm had faded significantly, and a few more sessions would remove it completely.

With Kimimaro and Karin's issues resolved, the group dispersed. Haku and Karin volunteered to stay and take care of Kimimaro, while Minato dropped by to visit. It was a happy moment for the family of five.

As for why it wasn't six, well, that was because Naruto had been kicked out by Kushina, with Team 7 and Team 8 on break, there wasn't much for him to do.

Naruto left the hospital feeling dejected as if he was being targeted. He is now waiting outside the Hyuga residence, eager for Hinata to finish changing so they can go out together.

Naruto didn't understand why she needed to change clothes so carefully for a casual outing—her usual mission attire was already pretty.

After a while, the door opened, and Hinata stepped out in a light pink shirt, a lavender jacket, and a long white skirt. She walked over to Naruto, who stared at her in awe.

Naruto wasn't sure if Hinata had put on makeup—he only knew a girl was wearing makeup if she had lipstick on—but it didn't matter. In his eyes, she is beautiful, and he had been waiting for over an hour.

Hinata blushed at his gaze and softly murmured, "Naruto-kun…"

"Ah? Oh, Hinata, you look amazing today," Naruto said, feeling like his vocabulary was too limited. Maybe he needed to go back to his dad for more lessons.

Hinata hadn't expected Naruto to recite poetry like some eloquent nobleman. A simple compliment was enough to make her heart race with happiness.

Hand in hand, they set out, leaving behind a small girl training viciously in the yard.

Aside from their usual training sessions, this was their first real date. Naruto hadn't planned anything in particular, but Hinata was happy to follow his lead.

Before long, they found themselves at Konoha's food street. Naruto knew this place all too well, having visited with his shadow clones many times. It was perfect for their first outing.

They started sampling the food, sharing everything—first, she'd take a bite, then he'd take one.

Hinata initially tried to eat modestly, worried about her image, but Naruto's EQ kicked in, and he reassured her by saying, "I like feeding you."

Naruto did enjoy it, at least until his wallet was empty.

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

It didn't take long for Naruto to feel a bit embarrassed as Hinata took out her small wallet and handed it to him. She really is a princess of the Hyuga clan.

Under the shopkeeper's knowing gaze, Naruto used Hinata's money to settle the bill, then continued to drag her around for more food and drinks.

Instead of being ashamed, Naruto was delighted. He even fed Hinata a snack, thinking, "Envy me, you losers!"

"Hina, don't you think the street's more crowded than usual today?" Naruto asked. According to info from one of his earlier shadow clones, this street wasn't usually this packed.

"It's probably because the Chunin Exams are coming up," Hinata replied thoughtfully, tapping her chin with a finger. "I heard that Fourth Hokage's son will be fighting in the third stage. A lot of people are coming from far away to watch."

"Huh?" Naruto tilted his head, confused. He didn't realize he had so many fans. On second thought, it was likely because of his father's reputation, not his own.

Hinata turned to look at him and said softly, "Everyone's looking forward to Naruto-kun's performance."

Naruto turned his head towards her. "You too, Hinata?"

"Of course." Hinata nodded. In her heart, Naruto-kun could never lose.

Naruto sighed dramatically, "But I'm not so sure myself…"

Hinata looked puzzled. "Why not? Naruto-kun is strong."

"It's Gaara… he's not an ordinary ninja. His chakra alone is more powerful than Kakashi-sensei's," Naruto admitted. "I swear I'm telling the truth, I'd never lie to you, Hinata."

Hinata's face clouded with concern. "Stronger than Kakashi-sensei? Isn't that dangerous for you, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto smirked. "I'll give him my best shot, but if Hinata can give me a little extra motivation, I'll feel more confident."

"W-What kind of motivation?" Hinata blushed, sensing something mischievous in Naruto's tone.

"Let's make a promise," Naruto whispered in her ear, causing her face to turn visibly red.

"Since Hinata doesn't object, it's a deal!" Naruto grinned like a fox who'd stolen a chicken.

"Yes…" Hinata murmured, still blushing.

Naruto happily bought some popsicles, splitting one and handing half to Hinata. It was still her money, after all.

Hinata, for her part, was happy sharing food with Naruto, taking small bites of the popsicle and momentarily forgetting her shyness.

The two wandered around until evening when Naruto walked her back to her house. Before leaving, he gave her a light hug and went on his way.

As he walked, Naruto started thinking about his fight against Gaara. *"Gaara, this fight is mine. Not even Shukaku can protect you,"* he thought confidently.

"Hey, Kurama, what stance did you take when you beat Shukaku back in the day?" Naruto asked, patting the Nine-Tails on the chin excitedly.

Kurama shot him a scornful look. "You're just doing this to impress a girl?"

"Come on, don't put it like that. It's not just about impressing her—it's about love!" Naruto quipped.

Kurama grinned darkly. "Then deal with it yourself. I suddenly don't feel like helping."

"Hey, come on! It's totally normal to be your bro's wingman. And if you like some vixen in the future, I'll return the favour"

"Get lost."

"Okay, okay." Naruto climbed onto Kurama's back and rolled around comfortably. "Alright, I'm done rolling. How about we practice tomorrow?"

Kurama's answer was a heavy smack of his tail, which Naruto barely dodged. "You're just like those oxen swatting flies with their tails," Naruto teased.

"Oxen?! Who are you calling an ox, brat?"

And so, Naruto was promptly sent flying by the Nine-Tails' swat.

…

Meanwhile, back in the Sunagakure village's desert, things were far more serious.

Orochimaru, Guren, and the Sound Four stood in a circle. Six bodies lay between them—one of them, the Fourth Kazekage, Rasa.

Barely clinging to life, Rasa weakly raised his head. "Why…?"

Orochimaru's long, snake-like tongue flicked out, licking his lips as he answered in a hoarse voice, "I've always been after the life of the Third Hokage. Your only interest was personal gain. Our goals were never the same. I merely needed to use the power of Sunagakure. Now that the village's forces have been deployed, your continued existence would be a hindrance."

Rasa tried to rise but collapsed. "I won't let you—"

Before he could finish, a red crystal spike pierced his heart. Guren coldly declared, "No one can stand in Lord Orochimaru's way."

Guren, a kunoichi with the Crystal Release kekkei genkai, could form red crystals to create weapons—or crystallize enemies and shatter them like glass.

One of Orochimaru's candidates for a new body, her greatest desire was to merge with him. Another tragic soul kidnapped and brainwashed by the Snake Sannin.

If this were a video game, an achievement notification would probably pop up: *"Congratulations to Team Orochimaru for killing the Fourth Kazekage! [Orochimaru: Fourth Kazekage Skin Unlocked]."*

After taking some samples of Rasa's hair and tissue, a large white bird circled overhead before swooping down.

Sai jumped off its back and greeted Orochimaru with a smile. "Orochimaru-senpai, I've brought a message from Danzo-sama."

He handed Orochimaru a scroll.

"Oh? Danzo's messenger?" Orochimaru smiled, but suddenly flung a kunai at Sai, who exploded into a pool of ink, the scroll dropping to the ground.

Guren carefully picked it up, inspected it for traps, and then handed it to Orochimaru.

Orochimaru opened the scroll, and he looked off into the distance. "It's rather impolite to use a clone for communication."

From a hidden bunker, the real Sai emerged, still smiling. "I had to be cautious, considering I'm dealing with the legendary Orochimaru."

"Lose that fake smile," Orochimaru said coldly as he read the scroll. His smile slowly widened into a smirk. "Interesting. Optimizing the village's barrier system to this degree… as expected from the Uzumaki Clan."

He then added, "And Tsunade has returned… it's been a while."

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

After reading the information, Orochimaru extends his tongue, rolling up the scroll before swallowing it.

He licks the corner of his mouth, casting a dangerous look at Sai, who regains his usual expressionless face. "Is there anything else?" Orochimaru asks with a sly smile.

Sai's face remains unchanged, his training as a Root operative apparent, his voice is flat and devoid of emotion as he replies, "Danzo-sama has ordered me to follow your instructions for the time being and to cooperate with your actions."

Orochimaru doesn't believe a word of it. 'Cooperate with me? It's more like keeping me under surveillance. He'll probably try to have this kid kill me the moment our business is finished.'

But it doesn't matter to him. He has dealt with such deceptions before. Gesturing to the fallen Kazekage guards on the ground, Orochimaru smirks. "So, you're going to disguise yourself as one of them."

"Yes." Sai immediately transforms into one of the Kazekage's guards.

Orochimaru's Four Sound Ninjas each select a guard to mimic as well.

"Guren, head to the designated location as planned. If you don't hear from me within three days, return to the base directly," Orochimaru instructs.

"Understood, Orochimaru-sama." Guren departs swiftly.

The group, now in disguise, continues toward Konoha without drawing suspicion.

Unbeknownst to them, Baki, unaware of this covert infiltration, has already scouted the area beyond Konoha's patrols for their hidden troops.

As for how Baki knows the exact patrol range? That's courtesy of Danzo's dark connections.

---

Morning arrives in Konoha, and the villagers step out to go about their daily lives.

Everyone is buzzing with excitement for the third round of the Chunin Exams, which feels as momentous as the Olympics being hosted in their own village.

The list of participants has been announced, and the villagers are proud that Konoha has the highest number of Genin making it to the finals.

This boosts their sense of security, as it is proof of Konoha's superiority over other villages.

They feel their future will be brighter and safer with such skilled shinobi protecting them.

Meanwhile, an influx of wealthy merchants, nobles, and tourists swarms into the village, further benefiting Konoha's economy.

Business is booming—well, except for arms dealers like Tenten's family, who don't quite fit into the general commerce of the village.

As visitors spend time in Konoha, they start getting used to the village's quirks:

For instance, if you see a group of people sporting police armbands marching with stern expressions, there's no need to panic.

That's Konoha's Police Force, known for its impartiality. They don't arrest the innocent, nor do they let the guilty go free.

Or, if you notice their strained attempts at smiling, don't be alarmed. The Police Force has recently initiated a "Smile Training Program," though some members haven't quite mastered it yet.

And if you witness a group of shinobi in green jumpsuits sprinting through the streets in strange poses, rest assured: those are Konoha's "Green Beasts," and they are as friendly as they are eccentric.

---

All in all, Konoha is a thriving village, a peaceful and hopeful place.

At that moment, in the Hokage's residence, Minato Namikaze is deep in conversation with his son.

Minato sets down the newspaper he has been reading and looks at Naruto seriously. "Naruto, are you sure you want to go through with this training?"

"Yeah, Dad. I think I'll need it soon," Naruto replies with determination.

Minato considers Naruto's upcoming opponents and frowns. "I don't object to you trying to control that kind of power, but it comes with risks."

"Dad, if you're talking about the risk of me losing control of Kurama's chakra, don't worry. My relationship with the Nine-Tails is solid. Even if I can't control his chakra perfectly, he'll take it back before anything bad happens."

Minato seems reassured. "That's true. From what you've told me, your connection with Kurama is strong. I remember the time you mentioned that chat room thing you have with him and Kushina—still can't believe you managed to hack into something like that with Kushina's chakra. Too bad it can't be shared."

Naruto grins confidently. "No worries, Dad. If it weren't for my promise to give you a heads-up before doing anything with the seal, I'd have already started training."

"No, we'll do this properly. I will guide you," Kushina declares, her voice filled with pride. "No one knows the Nine-Tails' chakra better than me."

Kurama, overhearing this from within Naruto, snorts. "Hah! I should be the one guiding him! No one understands my chakra better than me!"

Kushina shoots back, "I was a Jinchuriki! You weren't!"

Kurama growls, "I'm the Nine-Tails! You wouldn't even be a Jinchuriki without me!"

"Still, you've never been a Jinchuriki!"

"You wanna start something, woman?"

"Bring it, fuzzball!"

"Humph!"

"Bleh!"

---

"Okay, okay, you two, calm down!" Naruto groans. Their constant bickering always gives him a headache. "If you're going to argue, do it in your sealed space! Why drag it into the chat room like some rowdy forum thread?"

"Well, since it's decided, let's head somewhere private." Minato places a hand on both Naruto and Kushina's shoulders, in the blink of an eye, three of them appear inside a secluded cave.

Naruto and Kushina look around in surprise.

"Minato… Isn't this..." Kushina begins.

"Yes," Minato says, smiling. "This is where Naruto was born. Remember?"

"Yeah… I haven't been back here since that day." Kushina's expression softens with nostalgia, but then, out of nowhere, she punches Naruto on the head.

"Ouch! Mom, what was that for?" Naruto asks, rubbing his sore head.

"For not coming out sooner when you were born! You caused me so much pain!" Kushina huffs, hands on her hips.

"Ugh..." Naruto mutters, completely helpless in this argument. 'Can't exactly change how I was born...'

They say a child's birthday is also a reminder of a mother's labour.

For Naruto, even though he has no control over his birth, he figures getting hit by his mom every now and then isn't the worst thing.

After all, it means she is healthy and full of energy.

Minato chuckles, watching his family with a contented smile. He is grateful for the choices that have led him to this moment.

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"So, are we going to train here next?" Naruto quickly shifts the conversation.

Minato smiles and replies, "That's right. This place is secluded enough, and I've reinforced the barrier. As long as you don't blow up the mountain with a Tailed Beast Bomb, we're good."

Kushina, full of energy, chimes in, "Then let's get started!"

"Wait." Minato suddenly raises a hand, his expression serious. "Before that, I have something really important to say."

"What is it?" Naruto and Kushina both look puzzled.

"I just thought of a cool name for—"

"Mom, let's just start training," Naruto interrupts his father without hesitation.

"Alright!" Kushina agrees with a smile. After all, even if Minato reveals his 'cool' name, only he will remember it.

"Huh?" Minato's face falls, his enthusiasm deflating as he watches Naruto & Kushina have already begun the training; his expression turns somewhat goofy.

Scratching his head, he mumbles, "Well... whatever. I've got other things to do." He turns to leave.

Meanwhile, Kushina switches into full teaching mode, speaking seriously to Naruto:

"Even though you've probably figured out some of it already, I still want to explain in detail how to use the nine-tails chakra."

"First, you can draw a portion of its chakra through the seal. This filtered chakra can be used directly, and it doesn't change your appearance much—like this."

Naruto watches as Kushina's chakra spikes, though her appearance remains the same.

Inside Kushina's mindscape, the Nine-Tails, Kurama, lets out a growl, clearly annoyed. "Hey, you! At least warn me before you use my chakra!"

Kushina blinks, suddenly remembering. "Oh, right! Kurama, I'm borrowing your chakra."

"Say that *before* you use it!" Kurama snaps, his sharp teeth gnashing in frustration.

Ignoring the grumbling fox, Kushina continues her explanation to Naruto: "The next step is drawing more chakra, which will form a chakra cloak around your body. It'll look like bubbling energy, with a fox-like shape. As it progresses, you'll see changes like longer nails and sharper canines."

"Big fox!" Kushina calls out.

Kurama's eyes narrow. "Big fox? Since when do you call me that?"

"I'm used to Naruto calling you that. Just go with it," Kushina says as she opens the seal's gate.

Kurama grumbles but doesn't budge from his comfortable spot in her mind. "Whatever."

Naruto watches in awe as a bubbling cloak of chakra envelops Kushina, and a chakra tail sways behind her. She slams her fist into the ground, leaving a crater in the rock.

"Whoa, super strength?" Naruto asks, recognizing the technique.

"No," Kushina corrects. "It's just raw physical power. In this form, your strength and speed increase dramatically, you also have an advanced healing ability."

Naruto nods, remembering how he healed from near-fatal injuries, like being pierced by Sasuke's Chidori, without leaving a scar.

Kushina continues, "If you keep pushing, you can increase the number of tails, up to three. But beyond that, when you reach the fourth tail, something changes."

"Changes?" Naruto latches onto the word.

"Well... I've never gone that far," Kushina admits sheepishly. "The pain when I reached the fourth tail was unbearable, so I stopped and went straight to mastering the perfect form."

Kurama snorts inside the mindscape. "That wasn't the perfect form."

"It wasn't?"

"Of course not. You were forcefully taking my chakra. As you used my chakra, I was draining yours in return. If you used too much, you would've run out of chakra and died. Without my cooperation, it wasn't a true perfect form."

Kushina frowns. "What? You were holding back on me?"

"You never asked me back then! You just threw chains at me and tried to take my chakra by force," Kurama says, clearly still irritated.

"I didn't know you had feelings other than hatred back then," Kushina says, her voice softening.

Kurama grins, sensing victory. "And you acted all high and mighty, saying, 'Kurama, I'll restrain you like no one else in the world.' You thought you were the saviour of the world."

"Ah! Stop, stop! Don't remind me of that embarrassing stuff!" Kushina groans, turning red. "That was so cringe, worse than anything Minato has done!"

Kurama chuckles, relishing her discomfort. "It's funny seeing you like this."

Clearing her throat, Kushina regains her composure. "Kurama, for all the times I mistreated you, I sincerely apologize. Will you help me train Naruto?"

Kurama looks at her, sighing. "You're making it hard for me to stay mad."

He raises a giant paw, gesturing for a fist bump. "Let's put the past behind us. But don't think this means I'm going easy on you."

Kushina smiles and bumps her fist against his. "Deal."

In that instant, a bond forms between them, and a brilliant chakra cloak, golden with hints of black, surrounds Kushina's body.

Naruto stares in awe. "She looks even cooler than the female superheroes!"

Kushina inspects her chakra-clad form and stretches out several large chakra arms. "This form enhances everything—speed, strength, and even lets you use the Tailed Beast Bomb."

She demonstrates this by creating a small, dense black orb of chakra, about the size of a baby's fist. "This is the smallest form of the Tailed Beast Bomb. It's harder to master than the Rasengan."

Naruto feels the immense power radiating from the tiny orb. "That thing could level a mountain! This is insane."

"Any questions?" Kushina asks with a smirk, clearly enjoying her demonstration.

Naruto gulps, regretting he had asked in the first place.

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"How's this power?"

"Why don't you find it yourself." Kushina Uzumaki tossed Naruto into the depths of the cave.

"Huh?" Naruto immediately sensed something was off and quickly tried to stop her. "Wait! Dad said I shouldn't go in there—"

But it was too late.

*Boom!* An explosion echoed, and the second half of Naruto's sentence barely reached Kushina's ears: "…the tailed beast bomb is in here…"

The cave shook violently.

Naruto reacted quickly, grabbing Kushina and dashing out before the cave collapsed completely.

…

In the Hokage's office, Minato Namikaze stared at his wife and son standing before him, his face full of exasperation.

"So, you two blew up that mountain?"

"Hahaha…" Kushina laughed awkwardly. "Well, we did cause a bit of an explosion, but the mountain's still standing. The cave, though… it's gone."

If it weren't for Naruto's Flying Thunder God Jutsu, they probably would've had to blow up the entire mountain to escape.

What could Minato do? He sighed helplessly and said, "Forget it. Let's find another place to train."

The family of three arrived at a massive underground chamber. Minato explained, "This was once a training base for Root, but it's been abandoned. Let's set up a barrier and use this place for training."

"Alright," Kushina replied and began setting up the barrier with Minato.

Naruto, watching them, realized he could help too. After all, he is a master of sealing techniques who had once trapped Jiraiya in a seal made out of a blanket. So, he joined in to assist.

Soon, the barrier was complete. Its purpose was to conceal any disturbances and prevent anyone from wandering in by mistake. After all, it wouldn't do to show off their "nuclear-level" power so casually.

Before leaving, Minato gave them one last warning: "This time, don't use the tailed beast bomb."

"Mm-hmm!" Kushina and Naruto both nodded enthusiastically, like chickens pecking at rice, their movements perfectly synchronized, smiling from ear to ear.

In the sealed space, Naruto followed Kushina's instructions and opened the door. "Alright, let's start, Kurama."

"Fine!" The great Nine-Tails grinned at the open door. While he couldn't escape, it felt different knowing Naruto couldn't lock him away completely.

As the door opened, Kurama's and Kushina's chakra quietly intertwined.

"If their family lives long enough," Kurama mused, "I'd be willing to stay with them for another thousand years."

…

After a full day of training, everything went smoothly, but Naruto was puzzled by Kurama's unusually cooperative attitude.

During the training, Naruto even slept on Kurama's back, but the fox didn't seem to mind.

Naruto didn't fully understand why, but lying on the back of the Nine-Tails was surprisingly comfortable.

In the afternoon, after they finished training, Naruto and Kushina headed home to wash away the sweat and dirt, changed clothes, and then went to Hokage's office to meet Minato, who had just finished work. Together, they went to the hospital to pick up Kimimaro.

Minato handled the paperwork downstairs, while Naruto and Kushina headed straight to the ward.

Naruto pushed open the door and found the room a bit crowded.

The most noticeable people were the three bowl-cut heads, handing flowers to Karin.

Despite their goofy appearance, they were surprisingly polite, even remembering to bring flowers for a hospital visit.

If only they hadn't given a thumbs-up with sparkling teeth after saying hello, Naruto's impression of them might have changed.

Karin thanked them politely, placing the flowers on the table, before running to Kushina's side and grabbing her hand.

Kimimaro was sitting up in bed, reading a book. When Naruto and Kushina entered, he greeted them with a smile.

Haku sat beside the bed, skillfully peeling an apple with his ice ninjutsu—turning something so simple into a graceful act.

Naruto watched Haku finish slicing the apple and leaned in to take a bite. The coolness refreshed him, but then Kushina knocked him on the head.

Haku smiled, cutting the apple in half. The half Naruto had bitten was handed back to him, while the other half went to Kimimaro.

As Naruto munched on the apple, he admired the ice blade dissolving in Haku's hand and asked, "Can you make a sword for me?"

"What kind of sword?"

Naruto described it roughly.

Haku created a long ice sword and, under Naruto's direction, adjusted it.

Everyone watched Naruto tinker with the ice sword, not quite sure what he was up to.

When Minato finally came in, he found Naruto waving a beautifully crafted ice sword, proudly discussing how it resembled Frostmourne, the legendary weapon.

Minato raised two fingers, effortlessly stopping the blade before it grazed his hair. "Frostmourne? That's an impressive name. I wonder, if we altered the wind element, could we create a Windmourne?"

A group of nine people left the hospital together. The bowl-cut trio declined the Namikaze family's dinner invitation, declaring that "youth must never slack off" and that even night was a time for sweating in training.

On the way home, Naruto handed Frostmourne to Konohamaru, whose eyes sparkled with excitement at the sight of the sword, and said casually:

"This sword is so powerful, even the Fourth Hokage had to stop it. Go challenge your grandpa before the ice melts. It'll give you strength!"

Konohamaru grinned wildly, dashing off toward home with Udon and Moegi in tow, their eyes filled with envy.

"Was that okay?" Haku, who had created the weapon, hesitated. "Isn't this kind of… dangerous?"

Naruto didn't seem concerned. "It's fine, Haku. That kid's usual pranks are worse than any ice sword. Besides, he's always pulling stunts on Grandpa Third. A little action will do the old man good."

Naruto then turned to Minato. "Hey, Dad, aren't the Pervy Sage and Tsunade coming today?"

"They're busy with something. We'll meet up after the Chunin Exams in a couple of days."

"I want to go camping!" Naruto said.
He never experienced a real camping trip before—he had wanted to camp in the Forest of Death last time, but his teammates didn't agree.

"Sure," Minato said, smiling. "I know just the spot. In fact, I helped create that place."

"When did you do that?" Kushina asked, puzzled. "When did you team up with Kurama?"

Minato explained, and Naruto suddenly understood.

It had happened twelve years ago, on the night Naruto was born. The Nine-Tails had wanted to celebrate with fireworks on Hokage Rock, but Minato, enforcing fireworks safety regulations, had moved Kurama's "celebration" to a distant mountain.

The resulting explosion not only carved a massive crater but also uncovered a hidden water vein.

After the river was connected, it created a beautiful artificial lake—perhaps it should be called "Fox Lake?"

In any case, this scenic 5A-level spot near Konoha had mountains, rivers, and breathtaking views. If they promoted it, it could be packed during Golden Week.

With no objections from anyone, Naruto enthusiastically agreed. "Alright! Let's go!"

With the Chunin Exams only two days away, Naruto suddenly thought

'Peaceful days are short, what is Orochimaru planning?'

---
For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

Yo! I have released a new fanfiction " Pokemon: Skybound", support it as you do to this story!
---

Today is the day when the third round of the joint Chunin Exam officially began.

As Hokage, Minato had to oversee everything, including receiving important guests, such as the Fourth Kazekage, though Minato suspected he might be an imposter, possibly Orochimaru in disguise.

Despite both Minato and Kushina having sensory ninjutsu, they couldn't confirm whether it was truly Orochimaru.

The rogue ninja may have altered his chakra over time due to frequent body changes.

Kushina needed to visit the barrier team to ensure all security measures were in place, and then she would head to the arena to watch the matches.

After two days of rest, Kimimaro had nearly recovered from his training. Following the patrol route laid out by Minato, he teamed up with his three comrades from the Guren squad to patrol the village.

The team guren was well-known, regularly passing through various parts of Konoha. They blended in with the daily bustle, making them one of the least conspicuous patrols.

Meanwhile, Haku and Karin stayed at home. Though both planned to continue their careers as shinobi, Haku had yet to officially join Konoha's ninja forces, and Karin still needed to work on her fundamentals, with the possibility of conflict in Konoha, it was safer for them to remain at home.

Besides, once the seals around their house were activated, it offered protection equivalent to the village's shelters.

Of course, Naruto is set to compete in the exams. He created four shadow clones to spread out across Konoha, planning to handle communication duties.

Though Minato may have arranged for the Yamanaka clan to manage communication, Naruto wanted to be prepared. After all, wasting a bit of chakra wasn't a big deal.

The Land of Wind, a nominal ally of the Land of Fire, had also sent important dignitaries to observe the exams.

Since Naruto arrived early at the stadium, the audience stands were still mostly empty.

The arena resembled the kind of battlegrounds seen in competitive mobile games, where only the strongest survived.

In the waiting area, only Genma Shiranui was present, chewing on his ever-present senbon, looking as calm as usual.

"Genma-san, are you the head proctor today?" Naruto asked.

"Naruto, you're early and yes, I'm the proctor today. Don't expect me to go easy on you," Genma replied, the senbon in his mouth twitching slightly as he spoke, almost as if it might fall.

"That's fine. But tell me, do you really not have a sister named Mai Shiranui?"

Genma Shiranui, one of the Hokage's personal guards, was someone Naruto had grown familiar with over time.

Along with Raido and Iwashi, they were part of the elite squad capable of using the Flying Thunder God Formation—an adaptation of Minato's Flying Thunder God Jutsu, albeit one that required a team effort.

"You've asked me that a hundred times, and no, I don't have a sister, let alone someone named Mai Shiranui," Genma replied, though he made a mental note that it wasn't a bad name if he ever had a daughter in the future. Compared to Naruto's name, it seemed more grounded.

(The day before yesterday, Hiruzen Sarutobi, who had failed his attempt to wield Frostmourne, said, "You're too naive.")

"Where's Hayate? I didn't get a chance to settle things with him after our last encounter," Naruto asked, recalling the coughing proctor from previous exams.

"He's been assigned another task," Genma explained. "Can't have someone coughing through the whole exam—it wouldn't look good for Konoha's reputation."

After some light banter with Genma, Naruto finally spotted his first teammate arriving.

"Shikamaru! What are you doing here so early? Where's Choji?"

"Choji ate so much last night that he ended up with a stomach ache. He's in the hospital now," Shikamaru sighed.

Shikamaru had calculated his timing perfectly that morning, planning to laze around at home.

But after a scolding from his mother and some complaints about the Nara clan's laid-back attitude, he figured it was better to leave the house early to avoid further nagging.

"Typical Choji," Naruto chuckled. He could already imagine how Kiba would react upon hearing that Choji missed the finals because of overeating.

One by one, the other participants and spectators arrived. In the stands, Hinata sat with Hiashi, Hizashi, and Hanabi.

The rest of their friends who didn't make it to the finals were also scattered throughout the audience.

At this point, the Third Hokage, Hiruzen Sarutobi, dressed in a ceremonial robe picked out by his wife, stood behind Minato.

Though he had passed the title of Hokage to Minato, Hiruzen still made public appearances during important events.

As the Fourth Kazekage took his seat, Minato greeted him, "It's an honour to have you here, Kazekage-sama. I hope your journey went well."

The Kazekage briefly glanced at Minato, then shifted his gaze to the Third Hokage. "It's been a long time, Lord Fourth, and I see the Third is still in good health."

"Though I've aged, it brings me joy to see Konoha's future generations flourish," Hiruzen replied, thinking the Kazekage's words were just polite formalities.

He glanced down at the arena, where the Konoha candidates dominated the roster, reassured that his decision to entrust the village to Minato was the right one.

As the crowd settled, Minato stepped forward and announced in a clear voice, "Thank you all for attending the joint Chunin Exams. The third round of the exam will now officially begin!"

A roar of cheers erupted from the stands.

Genma stood before the eight remaining participants, reading from a sheet of paper. "dosu and Zaku from the Sound Village are disqualified for not showing up. Choji Akimichi from Konoha is absent due to illness, so the matchups have been adjusted. Please confirm your opponents."

Naruto glanced at the updated list: Sasuke vs Rock Lee in the first match, Neji vs Kankuro in the second, Naruto vs Gaara in the third, and Shikamaru vs Shino in the fourth.

After the participants had taken note of the changes, Genma announced, "Uchiha Sasuke and Rock Lee, please remain on the field. The rest of you, head to the waiting area."

As Naruto made his way off the field, he glanced up at the sky—it was a clear, sunny day.

He looked over at Sasuke, who wore his usual serious expression. Naruto couldn't help but wonder if Sasuke would be able to handle Lee's speed and power.

"Don't underestimate your opponent, Sasuke. Be careful," Naruto called out, offering a friendly reminder.

---

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"I won't lose to this guy!"

When Sasuke laid eyes on the green jumpsuit, bowl-cut ninja, he was reminded of the three lesser-known Uchiha.

Though he was furious, he had to admit that these odd-looking shinobi were quite formidable.

If Naruto were here, he'd probably sum it up by saying, "That green jumpsuit freaks are terrifying."

Sasuke would never underestimate this thick-browed opponent.

Rock Lee stood tall and said earnestly, "Sasuke Uchiha, my seniors, Gen, Daiki, and Jiro, are also from the Uchiha clan. I hope you won't tarnish their names."

"You bastard, it's because of them that I've been humiliated!" Sasuke snarled, clenching his teeth. He swore on the Uchiha name that he would win this battle.

Sasuke knew his brother was watching. As he entered the arena, he scanned the crowd, confident he could spot Itachi in his ANBU gear. No mask or cloak could conceal him from Sasuke's sharp eyes.

Genma raised his hand and announced, "The first match of the Chunin Exams: Sasuke Uchiha vs. Rock Lee, begin!"

"Leaf Whirlwind!" Lee started with his signature move. It was a test of strength—if you couldn't handle it, you were done for. If you could, then you deserved his respect.

"He's fast," Sasuke muttered to himself, impressed but not overwhelmed. He had seen this move before and had copied it using his Sharingan.

Naruto loved to use it in their sparring matches, but Sasuke found it didn't suit his fighting style, so he hadn't practised it much.

Recalling his fights with Naruto, Sasuke opted to dodge and hurled three shurikens at Lee.

Lee dodged the shuriken with ease and charged forward, hands on the ground as he launched an upward kick toward Sasuke's chin.

Sasuke blocked with both arms, stepped back, and countered with a sweeping kick.

Lee leapt into the air, flipped, and aimed a sharp kick at Sasuke, who sidestepped the blow, leaving Lee's foot to create a small crater in the ground.

The two traded a flurry of blows—twenty, thirty moves passed. Just as Sasuke was about to smirk, Lee suddenly stopped and glanced up at Gai Sensei, who stood watching from the high platform.

Gai flashed his trademark grin and gave Lee a thumbs-up. "I approve, Lee. You can take them off!"

"Yes, Guy-sensei!" Lee squatted down and removed the weights from his legs, gently placing them on the ground.

Sasuke, in a rare show of honour, didn't seize the opportunity for a sneak attack. His pride wouldn't allow it. He thought to himself, 'Weights? Even with those, he was that fast? I can't underestimate him now.'

Lee rose with one hand behind his back, the other outstretched. "Sasuke-kun, prepare yourself to witness my real speed!"

In an instant, Lee vanished from sight.

"Nani?!" Sasuke immediately activated his Sharingan and barely managed to tilt his head in time to avoid Lee's punch. The force of the wind from Lee's fist ruffled his hair.

Sasuke's eyes widened, his mind racing.
'I won't let him mess up my reputation in front of brother'

Lee appeared at Sasuke's side, delivering a powerful sidekick. Sasuke blocked it with his forearms, skidding backwards from the impact. He winced slightly but then smirked, "I can see you now."

Dodging a few more of Lee's attacks, Sasuke's confidence grew. "You're fast, but not fast enough. With these eyes, I can see all your movements!"

Up in the stands, Naruto slapped his forehead. "That idiot. Is he seriously getting cocky right now? He should hit him with some ninjutsu before Lee gets serious!"

Lee paused, realizing the situation. "So, it's the same Sharingan as Gen, Daiki, and Jiro? This won't be easy then... Guess I'll have to use it. Eight Gates: The Gate of Opening... open! The Gate of Healing... open!"

At the same time, Sasuke seemed to remember he knew ninjutsu, forming hand seals rapidly.

"Fire Release: Phoenix Flower Jutsu!"

Sasuke unleashed a dozen small fireballs, strategically aimed to give Lee no room to dodge. 'Just one hit... and then I'll have him!'

But to Sasuke's shock, Lee's speed increased, allowing him to weave through the fireballs effortlessly and charge straight at Sasuke again.

A fist loomed large in Sasuke's vision, the Sharingan's dynamic sight slowing it down just enough.

"Move!" Sasuke's body crackled with lightning, and in a split second, he activated the Chidori-enhanced reflexes, narrowly dodging the blow.

Now both fighters were in full flow, trading punches and kicks at blinding speeds. Sasuke could keep up with Lee's pace but knew he couldn't match his raw power. 'I can't win this with taijutsu alone. And at his speed, most ninjutsu won't hit him. Even Chidori might not be enough.'

Suddenly, Sasuke had an idea. 'What about genjutsu?' He locked eyes with Lee, attempting to trap him in an illusion.

Lee's body wavered, his eyes drooping as he fought against the urge to fall asleep. Yet, his body moved on instinct, still attacking.

Sasuke was stunned. 'What is this? Is he still fighting in his sleep?'

Finally, Sasuke found an opening and delivered a solid kick to Lee's abdomen, sending him flying back. Lee recovered quickly, standing up with a hand on his stomach.

"Ah, genjutsu. I let my guard down," Lee muttered, recalling Gai Sensei's advice to avoid looking into a Sharingan user's eyes.

Sasuke was filled with regret. 'Why didn't I learn more powerful genjutsu from Itachi?'

Since illusions weren't effective, Sasuke thought back to Naruto's advice about overwhelming opponents with ninjutsu. Without hesitation, he formed seals and unleashed his largest Fire Style attack yet.

"Fire Release: Great Fire Annihilation!"

A massive wave of flames erupted from Sasuke's mouth, spreading across the arena like an inferno.

The crowd gasped in awe. Even those who couldn't follow the earlier taijutsu exchange could appreciate the grandeur of Sasuke's jutsu. But would Lee survive such an attack?

Then, a voice rang out from within the flames:

"Eight Gates: The Gate of Life... open! The Gate of Pain... open!"

Lee's chakra exploded, pushing the flames aside. He stood, enveloped in energy, his eyes filled with determination.

"The lotus of Konoha blooms here!"

---

Don't forget to checkout my new story "Pokemon: Skybound"

For early access to advanced chapters on p@treon.

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Naruto was pleased with Sasuke's performance. Though the scale of the Fire Release isn't on Madara's level, it's still strong enough to roast a layer of skin if used on the One-Tailed Shukaku.

As the flames dissipated, a figure stood in the centre. Rock Lee, arms crossed in front of him, hair spiked, skin reddened, and his clothes tattered.

In the stands, Kakashi looked at Gai in shock. "You actually taught him that technique?"

Gai grinned proudly. "Lee and I are similar, but his perseverance surpasses even that of stone, iron, and steel!"

"You're insane!" Kakashi rubbed his forehead, revealing his Sharingan to observe Lee closely. "How many gates can he open?"

"The fifth gate. Lee is my most prized student," Guy said with a thumbs up. "But don't worry—Lee won't use the fifth gate recklessly against comrades."

Sasuke was startled at the sight of Lee. "Is he... cooked?" No, his Sharingan could see the chakra surging through Lee, intense and erratic. "What is this?"

"This technique was meant to defeat Neji. Sasuke-kun, you're strong, but I want to win!" Lee's foot struck the ground, shattering it as he charged toward Sasuke.

"Uh-oh." Sasuke immediately recognized Lee's speed was beyond his own. Using the fastest seals he'd learned in 12 years, he created a dozen clones to scatter.

Lee struck a clone, only for it to disappear. "A clone technique? Even my eyesight can't tell the difference, but if I break them all…"

Lee moved like an afterimage, smashing through Sasuke's clones, but none were the real ones.

"What is this?"

Sasuke's voice echoed around Lee. "It's my Body Flicker Technique. None of these are real... or maybe they all are."

"Isn't this Shisui's signature move?" Kazekage commented, glancing at Shisui behind Minato.

"Exactly," Shisui replied, while Minato did not object. "Sasuke's talent is remarkable."

Kazekage watched Sasuke with admiration. "Such talent… Uchiha Sasuke, eh? I'll have to find an opportunity to bring him under my wing or maybe his body..."

In the arena, Lee continued his assault, but he couldn't catch Sasuke. Despite his speed, Sasuke's strategy was making Lee desperate.

Sasuke, for his part, is genuinely frightened. Even with the Sharingan, he could barely track Lee's movements, and his body couldn't keep up.

If his real position were exposed, one punch from Lee would be the end of him.

But Lee's body had reached the limit. Opening the fourth gate had torn his muscles, and the strain on his bones was immense.

Sasuke noticed Lee's movements becoming sluggish. When Lee's fist passed through another clone, Sasuke suddenly appeared, grabbing Lee's wrist with his left hand.

He hadn't anticipated the sheer force behind Lee's movements.

Sasuke barely managed to stay standing and immediately struck Lee in the face with his right fist. At the same time, Lee's knee smashed into Sasuke's abdomen.

Lee collapsed to the ground, the violent chakra dissipating. His hair and skin returned to normal as he struggled to stand.

Sasuke was thrown back, coughing up blood, but he managed to rise first, breathing heavily as he held a kunai to Lee's neck.

Lee's eyes dimmed as he said, "I lost."

"The winner, Sasuke Uchiha!" Genma announced, and the crowd erupted in applause.

Sasuke sheathed his kunai and extended a hand to Lee, who looked up at him, his eyes dull.

"Rock Lee, you're incredibly strong. If you had gone all out in that last attack..." Sasuke trailed off. He knew Lee had been at his limit, and if the final blow had been at full power, Sasuke wouldn't be standing.

"Next time we meet, I'll be even stronger!" Lee grasped Sasuke's hand and stood.

"Me too." Sasuke helped him to the stands, stopping the medics. He waved to Sakura in the audience, trusting her medical ninjutsu more than the team's.

The medical staff recognized Sakura as a disciple of Tsunade and allowed her to assist. After examining them, she said, "Sasuke's injuries aren't serious. Just a few days of rest. But Lee has torn muscles and a small fracture. He should go to the hospital for proper treatment."

Lee was placed on a stretcher, his spirits low as he passed by Guy. "I'm sorry, Gai-sensei for letting you down."

"That's right, Lee. To punish you for losing to Kakashi's student, run 500 laps around the training field!" Gai declared dramatically. "But, Lee, youth is defined by failure and tears. Never let a single defeat stop you!"

"Oh, Gai-sensei!" Lee, reinvigorated, tried to jump off the stretcher, but the medics pushed him back down.

"Stop messing around, you idiot!" one of the medics snapped at Guy. "If you're his teacher, let him rest properly!"

"Huh?" Gai blinked, stunned as if someone had unplugged his power. He then bowed deeply. "I'm so sorry!"

He gave Lee a thumbs-up. "In that case, Lee, your punishment can wait until you've recovered."

"Yes, Gai-sensei!"

Lee was carried away obediently.

"The next match is Hyuga Neji vs. Kankuro!" Genma called out. "Competitors, please enter the arena!"

In the stands, Sakura and Sasuke joined Naruto.

"Sasuke, are you alright?" Naruto asked.

Sakura frowned. "He should rest, but—"

"I can teleport you with my Flying Thunder God," Naruto offered, placing his hand on Sasuke's shoulder.

"No need. This is nothing," Sasuke shrugged him off. He didn't want to miss Naruto's match over something so minor.

Naruto rolled his eyes, prepared to force Sasuke to rest, when Kankuro's voice interrupted him.

"I forfeit!"

"What?!" The crowd erupted, was the Sand Ninja backing out?

Kankuro, adjusting the puppet on his back, muttered to himself, "I don't want to reveal too much before the plan starts."

"Tch," Neji clicked his tongue in frustration as he slapped the railing, clearly dissatisfied.

Shino, standing a few meters away from Kankuro, perked up. Plan? His sunglasses glinted with a knowing light.

----

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

There were boos from the audience, but Kankuro didn't flinch. The exam, or whatever it was, didn't matter to him at all.

"Tch," Genma sighed before announcing, "Kankuro has forfeited. The winner by default is Hyuga Neji."

"The next match: Naruto Uzumaki vs Gaara."

"Sorry about this." Naruto scratched his head. Sasuke was still hurt, and a fight could break out at any moment.

He didn't have time to explain, but he really should have given them a heads-up.

"Sakura, keep an eye on Sasuke. You two stick with Kakashi-sensei. There could be trouble soon."

At this point, even Sakura was more battle-ready. Worst case, a fight breaks out, and they'll just get out of there. Naruto gave some quick instructions and left, leaving Sasuke and Sakura looking a bit lost.

The crowd quieted down as the match was about to begin. Many had come specifically to see this battle.

Even though Naruto, the son of the Fourth Hokage, and Gaara, the son of the Kazekage, didn't fully represent their villages, the outcome between them would be enough to influence people's opinions about the two villages' strength.

"Naruto-kun…" In the stands, Hinata clasped her hands together and silently cheered for Naruto. Her face turned red as she suddenly recalled something.

Hanabi glanced at her sister, feeling a bit exasperated. Unless Naruto was taken down by that "gourd baby," it seemed Hinata's feelings would remain hopeless.

Gaara descended the stairs, saying nothing. His killing intent was palpable, and the cruel smile on his face grew wider.

He had learned some things about Naruto—the son of the Fourth Hokage, strong in his own right. "Mother will like his blood," Gaara thought.

Kankuro watched Gaara nervously, praying he wouldn't lose control. If Kimimaro were here, he would probably mock him—being afraid of his younger brother. "You're the most pathetic older brother," he would say.

Naruto walked down the opposite stairs slowly, conversing with Kurama as he went. "Hey, big fox, do you think Shukaku has noticed you?"

"Him? Tch, not a chance," Kurama scoffed.

"His sensory abilities can't be that bad, right?" Naruto asked, surprised that Shukaku couldn't sense Kurama at such a short distance.

"It's not his sensory skills; our sealing technique is just that advanced," Kurama replied with pride.

The Nine-Tails felt a surge of smugness. Shukaku's half-baked seal was barely holding up, while Naruto's seal was rock-solid, fully controlling him. Kurama couldn't help but feel a bit melancholic.

Over the years, Naruto's inner world had transformed into lush mountains and grasslands, a testament to how strong their bond had grown.

Yet Kurama was conflicted. Should a tailed beast feel proud that its seal was so effective? And why did he say "our sealing technique," anyway?

Naruto, thinking little of it, asked, "Do you want to say hello to him?"

"Not now. Let him have his fun for a bit. Then I'll give him a nice surprise," Kurama said, recalling the old stories Naruto used to tell him.

As they both entered the arena, Gaara's gaze sharpened, and the smile on his face twisted even further.

Naruto sighed, thinking, This guy looks cool but might be suffering from chronic insomnia.

After this battle, will he turn into the caring guy we see in Shippuden? Naruto wondered, or would it take something like Izanami or Kotoamatsukami to change him completely?

But then again, those techniques don't seem like a part of Gaara's toolkit.

Seeing the two combatants take their positions, Genma raised his arm. "Begin!"

As soon as the words left his mouth, the cork on Gaara's gourd shot out, hitting the ground with a thud. Sand began pouring from the gourd, seeping into the ground, preparing to create a desert-like battlefield—Gaara's home turf.

Naruto frowned, not about to let this environmental damage slide. He pulled three special kunai from his pouch and tossed them. It was his way of saying hello to this eco-terrorist.

One kunai flew directly toward Gaara, while the other two angled toward his flanks. Gaara remained unmoving as the sand automatically rose to block the middle kunai.

Naruto couldn't help but compare the feeling to fighting an Elden ring boss. He grabbed the kunai mid-air and with his left hand, threw it backwards to set a return point. His right hand formed a Rasengan and thrust it into the sand wall.

The sand exploded outward from the impact, some splashing onto Gaara's face.

Gaara was surprised by Naruto's speed. Still, he stood firm, crossing his arms while controlling the sand to surge toward Naruto.

But Naruto was already on Gaara's left side. One hand threw a kunai into the ground, while his other fist smashed into Gaara's cheek—his sand shield didn't react to the kunai and was too slow to block the punch.

Meanwhile, the kunai Naruto had thrown to Gaara's right had already flown behind him. Naruto dodged, using the kunai to pivot and swept a kick at the back of Gaara's head.

Gaara's sand reacted too late, but it came crashing down on Naruto right after.

Without hesitation, Naruto teleported back to the kunai he'd thrown earlier.

Hmm, he thought, my moves were good, but I didn't deal any real damage. I probably shouldn't have used Rasengan right away—there's no time to build another one now.

Up in the stands, Kankuro and Temari were shocked. "He's so fast! Gaara's been hurt!"

The regular audience could only see flashes of golden light. Then Gaara lowered his head, revealing cracks in his face as his sand armour crumbled to the ground.

Those who knew a little about ninjutsu were stunned, admiring Naruto's speed and technique. But the ones truly in the know were in disbelief.

"Golden hair, Flying Thunder God, Rasengan… He's the second coming of the Yellow Flash!"

The Sand Village ninjas began to realize what they were up against. If Konoha was this strong, they might remain the top village for generations.

Meanwhile, Konoha's ninjas swelled with pride. The Fourth Hokage's legacy had a worthy successor.

Orochimaru watched Naruto with interest, licking his lips. This kid could be useful… Maybe I should mark him as a candidate for later.

He glanced at the Third Hokage, whose old face was lit up with a smile. Orochimaru thought, Let's settle this for now. I'll distract him just long enough.

Gaara touched his cheek, not feeling any pain. This only excited him more. Covering his eyes with one hand, he chuckled darkly. "Heh… Heh heh… I'll kill you. I'll kill you!"

Gaara waved his arm, sending a massive wave of sand hurtling toward Naruto.

Naruto sighed, realizing he still had to deal with Gaara. He glanced at Genma. From the ref's position, I should be on the right side… Alright, this should be fine.

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Naruto took a few steps back and quickly completed the hand seals:

"Water Release: Exploding Water Shockwave!"

A massive tidal wave, wide enough to cover the entire arena and towering over ten meters, rose in front of Naruto and crashed into Gaara's sand wave, completely overwhelming it.

After all, the water was several times higher than Gaara's sand. It was like an adult bullying a child.

Naruto was now planning to learn a first-hand technique from Kisame Hoshigaki, often referred to as the "Monster of the Hidden Mist."

He started by using the lake's surface to create a battlefield advantage.

The scale of Naruto's Water Release shocked almost everyone present.

Kankuro and the others, worried for Gaara, were reminded of the terrified voices of the unlucky Grass Village ninjas back in the Forest of Death: "Do you call this thing a Water Release jutsu?"

It wasn't good-the attack signal hadn't been given yet. If Gaara went berserk now, it could ruin everything.

Even the Leaf Genin, who knew Naruto well, was stunned by the size of the waves.

They had heard he was skilled in Water Release, but this was over the top. Had he made a summoning contract with the sea itself?

The audience, unaware of the truth, was equally incredulous. They thought the Uchiha kid's Fire Release was terrifying, but this was on another level.

Especially the senior Genin from other villages-they felt embarrassed. Were Konoha's Genin standards this high now? Should they all go back to the Academy?

The enormous wave finally crashed down, and Gaara's sand had no effect beyond muddying the water.

After the turbulent waters calmed, the arena had transformed into a lake, and Gaara had disappeared beneath the surface.

Genma, the referee, had already retreated to the wall. The senbon in his mouth twitched as he muttered to himself, "Is Naruto attacking the referee? Damn, I should penalize him."

Minato and the Third Hokage looked at the terrified audience in the front row from the high platform.

They were relieved that the seats were elevated from the arena: "Naruto's gone too far."

"What powerful chakra... It's as expected, considering who his mother is," said the Kazekage, admiring the red-haired figure in the distance.

Meanwhile, Kushina was laughing and slapping Kakashi on the back: "That's it! Great job, Naruto! That's how you use ninjutsu-hit 'em hard!"

Kakashi winced in pain from her enthusiastic backslap, his masked face betraying his helplessness. He thought to himself, Ninjutsu really shouldn't be used like this...

Asuma's cigarette had fallen from his mouth, his thoughts mirroring Kakashi's.

Meanwhile, Gai, who had just returned after seeing Lee off, was deep in thought.

Suddenly, he clapped his hands together in realization. "So that's it! He's the Fourth Hokage's son!"

Kakashi rolled his eyes at his best friend. "You've met him so many times, Gai..."

In the arena, Naruto opened his mini-map through sensory ninjutsu and realized Gaara hadn't moved.

He was still at the bottom of the water. Looking up, Naruto noticed an eye floating in the air, staring right at him.

It was Gaara's Sand Eye, a scouting ninjutsu that transmitted visual information directly to his brain.

Though the sight was unnerving, Naruto's first thought was how badly he wanted to learn that trick.

Naruto resisted the urge to use the Transformation Jutsu to mess with Gaara and lift his spirits-it would be too risky with so many people around, and he might get himself killed if they found out.

In the end, Naruto sent a shadow clone to investigate. As for why he didn't use water... well, he was used to it. Fortunately, he had dispatched the more mischievous clones as scouts.

The kunai thrown earlier had already been washed away by the water, leaving the clone to dive down. Ten seconds later, the clone's memory returned:

There was a sphere at the bottom, like an eggshell. When the clone tried to break it open, spikes shot out and destroyed him.

Is this thing waterproof? Naruto wondered. He regretted not knowing techniques like Kisame's Water Shark Bombs or the Five Feeding Shark for underwater combat.

There was still time to learn that jutsu-he could always drag Sasuke along to track down Kisame later.

Before Naruto could decide on his next move, a splash broke the surface of the water.

Gaara emerged, half his face covered in sand, transforming into the One-Tail, his eyes were like copper coins, and one of his arms had turned into a massive sand appendage.

Naruto stared curiously. Is this the first stage of his transformation? Why doesn't the sand arm absorb water?

Gaara's voice came out cold and sinister: "You're strong. You're worth killing. And when I kill you, I'll finally feel alive!"

With that, Gaara's sand arm lunged at Naruto.

Though the audience didn't fully understand the situation, they felt something big was about to go down. They focused intensely on the fight.

But Naruto was struggling to stay awake. His eyelids drooped, and soon, one by one, the audience members began falling asleep under Gaara's Genjutsu.

The elite ninja snapped out of it quickly, like Neji and Hiashi, who shielded Hinata and Hanabi, using their Byakugan to survey the area.

Anbu, led by Itachi, sprang into action, engaging the Sound and Sand ninja who had suddenly appeared to attack.

Gai and Asuma also joined the fray, while Kakashi protected Sasuke and Sakura, blocking enemy attacks one by one.

Sasuke and Sakura stared at the chaos, unable to process what was happening. Was this the change Naruto had warned them about?

A Sound ninja snuck past Kakashi, rushing toward Sasuke and Sakura. He thought to himself, A weak, injured girl? One hit should be enough...

Before he could finish the thought, he was embedded in the ground. Sakura rubbed her wrist. "Don't underestimate me."

[Inner Sakura: Shannaro! Finally, it's my turn to protect Sasuke!]

Kushina rushed over to Minato, relaying news from the village's east, west, and north gates, brought to her by Naruto's shadow clones. "Large serpent-like summoning beasts have appeared in all three directions, along with dozens of Sand ninjas attacking the village!"

There was no news from the south yet, but Naruto knew Izumo and Kotetsu were on guard duty there today...

Minato stood up abruptly, but before he could speak, the Third Hokage, unaware of the unfolding plot, turned in shock toward the Kazekage. "Kazekage... you...!"

"Now!" Seizing the moment of distraction, the "Kazekage" grabbed the Third Hokage and leapt to the roof. Four of his five guards reverted to their true forms-the Sound Four-and erected the Four Violet Flames Formation. The last one followed closely behind.

The plan to destroy Konoha had officially begun!

----

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Naruto dodged Gaara's attack and instantly used the Flying Thunder God Jutsu to teleport near Kushina and Minato, assisting his family with the marked kunai. Such a quick response was second nature to him.

"Dad?" Naruto called out without hesitation.

"Shadow Guard, assist the Anbu in clearing out the enemies in the arena!" Minato commanded.

"Yes!" The Shinobi behind Minato dispersed swiftly.

"Naruto, follow the plan. First, evacuate all the spectators," Minato instructed rapidly. "Your mother and I will handle the enemy. You're responsible for luring Gaara out of the village. Although we can handle him, it's too dangerous if Shukaku goes on a rampage inside the village."

Naruto nodded confidently and patted his chest. "No problem! I have a plan to deal with the giant snakes outside the village. You and Mom should focus on protecting the Third Hokage."

"Don't worry, leave it to me" Minato affirmed resolutely.

Naruto's clone, along with Naruko and another unnamed clone, received instructions through their link with Kurama, the Nine-Tails, and teleported back to their original positions using the Flying Thunder God Jutsu.

Naruto pricked his finger, drawing a little blood for each clone, and they returned to their positions outside Konoha's eastern, western, and northern walls.

"Big fox, I need some chakra support!" Naruto requested.

Kurama grumbled while sharing his chakra. "Such a hassle. Just take care of this quickly, the real fight is with Shukaku."

The three clones focused on the giant snakes charging toward the village. After smearing the blood on their fingers, they formed seals.

"Summoning Jutsu!"

Toad Gamaken, Toad Hiro, and Toad Bunta appeared beneath the clones. Each clone addressed their respective summon:

"Please, Gamaken!"

"Leave it to me," Toad Hiro replied, wielding two large swords.

Toad Bunta, smoking his pipe with a short sword at his waist, remarked, "How do I not remember that the Fourth Hokage had a son?"

The three toads grabbed their weapons and leapt towards the giant snakes, boosting the morale of the Konoha ninja defending the village:

"It's Jiraiya-sama and the Fourth Hokage's summoning beasts!"

"But who's that on their heads? The Fourth's son... or daughter?"

"It doesn't matter! We just need to handle the enemy ninja!"

"Yeah!!!" The defenders rallied, and their spirits lifted.

The Uchiha clan, leading the Konoha Police Force, coordinated with other ninja units, pushing back the invaders.

In the Chunin Exam arena, Naruto's commanding voice echoed as he used the "Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu!"

Instantly, hundreds of shadow clones, each with Naruto's signature spiky blonde hair, appeared and rushed toward the audience, with each clone responsible for transporting two people.

Using the Flying Thunder God, they evacuated the unconscious spectators to safety.

The Uzumaki Logistics Company, known for its efficiency, is now transporting people instead of goods.

Perhaps it should be called a passenger transportation company instead... Ahem.

One clone, acting on a request from Hiashi Hyuga, transported Hinata, Hanabi, and Hizashi back to the Hyuga Compound, earning the clone the unofficial title of "personal chauffeur."

As the head of the Hyuga clan, Hiashi stayed in the arena to fight, while Hizashi gathered others from their clan to defend the village.

The Hyuga clan was deeply grateful to the Fourth Hokage for his support.

Another clone took Sasuke and Sakura to the hospital and returned with Tsunade and Jiraiya.

Neji, however, declined Naruto's offer to evacuate him. "My opponent is still here," he said seriously.

Still holding a grudge over Kankuro avoiding their previous fight, Neji was determined to settle the score now that they were enemies.

Gaara, meanwhile, was losing control, struggling against Shukaku's influence. Naruto glanced at Temari and Kankuro, who were trying to take Gaara away.

"If that's the case, I'll leave his teammates to you and focus on Gaara," Naruto said.

He kicked Shikamaru, who was pretending to be under a genjutsu, waking him up. "Don't slack off now. Ask Shino to help!"

Shikamaru sighed, dusting himself off. "How troublesome…"

As Minato, Kushina, Jiraiya, and Tsunade headed to the rooftop battlefield, Naruto, Neji, Shikamaru, and Shino chased after Gaara's team.

Maki intercepted them. "Temari, Kankuro, take Gaara to the most crowded area in Konoha!"

Temari and Kankuro quickly carried the struggling Gaara away. Naruto and his team tried to bypass Maki.

"Don't underestimate me!" Maki threw several shuriken, only for them to be deflected by kunai thrown from the opposite direction.

"What?" Maki exclaimed in surprise. "You're... Shisui of the Body Flicker?"

Uchiha Shisui, standing alongside Genma, responded, "Never underestimate Konoha's shinobi."

"Naruto, go ahead. Leave this guy to us," Shisui said, his eyes blazing with determination.

Naruto gave a thumbs-up without looking back. Inwardly, he felt a little sorry for Maki. Not only did he have to face Genma, but now Shisui as well.

Maki realized she couldn't afford to take her eyes off Shisui for a moment.

Naruto and his team continued chasing the Sand Siblings out of the exam arena. Kankuro abruptly stopped.

"Temari, take Gaara and keep going. I'll hold them off!" He released his puppet, the Crow, and chakra strings appeared on his fingers.

Neji stepped forward. "He's mine. You three go on."

"Understood." Naruto believed Neji could easily handle Kankuro. He and the others kept pursuing Gaara and Temari.

"Don't think you can just leave!" Kankuro shouted angrily, his puppet spraying a barrage of poisonous needles.

"Eight Trigrams Palms: Revolving Heaven!" Neji countered, spinning rapidly and forming a protective barrier of chakra that deflected all the needles. He then took up a Gentle Fist stance. "I told you, your opponent is me."

"This guy…" Kankuro muttered, preparing his puppet for battle.

After a brief chase, Naruto noticed the surrounding area was empty. No civilians were in sight.

"Water Release: Water Dragon Jutsu!"

The water dragon surged towards Temari, forcing her to stop.

Naruto threw a dozen Flying Thunder God Kunai. Temari blocked most of them with her fan, but one landed perfectly.

In an instant, Naruto teleported beside Gaara, pressing his head into the ground.

"I'll take him. You handle her!" he shouted.

"Seriously…" Shikamaru sighed, beginning to strategize their next move.

Naruto and Gaara teleported to an isolated spot outside the village. Kurama looked around, recognizing the location.

Of course, it was familiar. This was the place where Naruto's family had sealed him.

Once the barrier was activated, even the Third Hokage would be unable to enter for a while. If locked inside, not even the Nine-Tails could escape easily.

Naruto slammed Gaara's head into the ground, creating a massive crater.

"Shukaku! Come out and get beaten! You bastard"

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Gaara's head plunged into the ground, and Shukaku roared in pain as he struggled for control.

The Tailed Beast's chakra surged wildly, causing Gaara's body to further desertify.

Naruto should have taken this chance to restrain Gaara with his Shadow Clone Jutsu and bring him back to the village, but Kurama had been waiting to fight Shukaku for so long.

Ending it now would have been anticlimactic, and Naruto felt it might strain their budding friendship.

In the sealed space, Naruto sat at the top of Kurama's back, patting the big fox. "Just this one-time, okay?"

"What are you talking about?" Kurama asked, puzzled.

"Letting the enemy complete their transformation is the stupidest thing ever. He's not using some invincibility jutsu or freezing time. It's better to take him down before he's fully ready."

"Hmph, even if Shukaku is at full power, I could take him down in no time," Kurama scoffed, though he wasn't entirely sure.

Transformations in the anime feel long, but they're actually over in a few seconds.

"Hahahaha, I am finally out!" Shukaku's voice was sharp and harsh as he emerged fully transformed.

"Go on, say hello," Kurama nudged.

What could Naruto do? He had to start with something flashy.

"Water Release: Exploding Water Shockwave!"

A massive wave surged forward, but Shukaku, towering dozens of meters high, was unimpressed. The water, several meters deep, barely covered his feet.

Still, Naruto managed to catch Shukaku's attention. "A pesky little bug!"

Shukaku swatted down, trying to crush Naruto.

"I'll show you soon enough that this bug isn't so easy to squash…" Naruto muttered.

"Water Release: Great Waterfall!"

A giant water column slammed into Shukaku's face. The attack didn't deal much damage but was certainly insulting.

"Annoying brat! You've angered this beast!

Wind Release: Drilling Air Bullet!"

Shukaku bellowed, his voice echoing through the desert as he launched a volley of high-speed air bullets.

As a creature of sand, Shukaku despised two things most: water and the Nine-Tails and here was this little brat, mocking him with both. Now he is determined to crush Naruto for good.

The barrage of sand and wind struck Naruto like a hailstorm. Dodging and weaving, Naruto was puzzled. "Where did he get all this sand from in a desert covered with water?"

It was disgusting to think about, so he decided to be cautious. "Water Release: Water Wall!"

He summoned a protective barrier of water, then layered two more on top, each thicker than the last.

"Better safe than sorry," Naruto murmured, hiding behind his triple-layered defence.

He considered summoning ten shadow clones but realized that would be disrespectful to Shukaku. So instead, he turned to Kurama.

"Hey, Kurama, lend me some chakra!"

"Do it yourself," Kurama replied with a grin, clearly enjoying Shukaku's fury.

Naruto grabbed a handful of Kurama's chakra, and his body was instantly cloaked in a thick layer of red chakra bubbles.

When all the sand bullets were blocked by his water walls, the sandstorm finally subsided.

Naruto leapt out, creating a thousand shadow clones. In an instant, a thousand versions of himself, each with fox ears and tails, surrounded Shukaku.

"Water Release: Thousand Water Dragons!"

With a synchronized shout, a thousand water dragons rose up. Each dragon, empowered by Kurama's chakra, was much larger than usual.

They merged in mid-air, forming a massive tidal wave that surged toward Shukaku from all directions.

Shukaku looked around in bewilderment. "Who am I? Where am I? And what the heck is that?"

The chakra smelled like the Nine-Tails, but why did it feel like facing Isobu, the Three-Tails? And why was there so much water?

"What kind of Water Jutsuu is this supposed to be?" Shukaku muttered in Kankuro's voice, bewildered.

Despite his confusion, Shukaku wasn't going to stand still. He pounded his belly and unleashed a massive gust of wind in all directions. "Wind Release: Sand Bullet!"

Naruto, watching from within the sealing space, wondered if he should learn Shukaku's Drilling Air Bullet technique. But then again, the downsized version resembled Danzo's Vacuum Bullets, and that seemed redundant.

The Air Bullets collided with the water dragons, creating a chaotic storm. But there were too many water dragons for the sand bullets to intercept.

The combined force of the water storm crashed into Shukaku, soaking him thoroughly.

"Stupid fox! Get out here and face me!" Shukaku roared in frustration as the water drenched his sandy form.

Kurama snickered from within Naruto. "Little Tanuki, you've gotten weak over the years, haven't you?"

Naruto's clones, seeing an opening, formed Rasengans and rushed in. Some clones raised their middle fingers before attacking, while others charged silently.

Shukaku thrashed wildly, his claws and tails swatting away countless clones. But each time he struck one down, another would leap onto him, planting Rasengans on his limbs and body.

Frustrated, Shukaku roared and unleashed a massive gust of wind, scattering Naruto's remaining clones.

"Brothers hit him with everything you've got!" Naruto shouted, his voice echoing through the battlefield.

The clones complied, swarming Shukaku from all directions. The air was filled with the sound of countless Rasengans colliding with Shukaku's sandy form, leaving craters all over his body.

"Damn brat… damn fox!" Shukaku cursed, desperately trying to shake off the clones. But the damage was done. His chakra was rapidly depleting as he repaired his battered form.

Realizing his position was dire, Shukaku gathered his chakra for one last attack. "I'll crush you all in one go! Wind Release: Drilling Air Bullet Barrage!"

Naruto watched as the giant raccoon gathered chakra in his mouth, forming a massive purple-black sphere.

Kurama, still in control of Naruto's body, wasn't fazed. He grinned and burst out more tails, the chakra cloak thickening as it reached five tails.

"Let's see who's got the better ball!" Kurama roared, gathering his chakra for a Tailed Beast Bomb.

The two attacks collided mid-air, creating a massive explosion that rocked the entire area.

The shockwave flattened trees and sent water spraying everywhere.

For a moment, the entire battlefield was engulfed in a blinding flash of light and a deafening roar.

When the dust settled, both Naruto and Shukaku stood panting, the ground around them scorched and cratered.

Shukaku had lost a layer of sandy skin and looked worse for wear, while Naruto, now in his six-tailed form, was still raring to go.

"Had enough, tanuki?" Kurama taunted, his voice dripping with mockery.

Shukaku roared in defiance, but before he could launch another attack, he faltered.

Gaara, buried deep within, was losing consciousness, his control over Shukaku slipping.

"Stupid fox…" Shukaku growled, his voice fading as his massive form began to crumble. He shrank rapidly, revealing Gaara, unconscious and severely drained, lying in the sand.

"Well, that was anticlimactic," Kurama muttered, retracting his chakra. "All that power and you still went down like a chump."

Naruto, back in control, grimaced as the pain hit him. His body was scorched and battered from the intense chakra, but he managed a grin.

"Four to eight tails… never again," he muttered, his voice strained.

Kurama huffed, clearly annoyed. "You're too weak. Can't even handle full power for long. How am I supposed to have fun?"

"It's not all my fault," Naruto retorted. "We just need more practice."

He limped over to Gaara, summoning chains of chakra to bind him securely. He wasn't taking any chances. After sealing Gaara's chakra, Naruto heaved a sigh of relief.

"You'll be fine, Gaara. You just need some rest."

He glanced around, making sure there were no threats left, then began the long walk back to the village, carrying Gaara on his back.

The battle wasn't over yet, but this skirmish had been a good warm-up. With Shukaku subdued, Naruto was ready to face whatever came next.

He just hoped that others were holding their own. There were still battles raging all over the village, and he needed to be there.

---

Naruto hurried back toward the village, his mind focused on the remaining battles.

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Inside the examination room layed a group of defeated shinobi, unable to continue fighting. Among them were Konoha ninjas and shinobi from the other village.

The stark difference was that all the Konoha ninjas had Katsuyu, the slug summon, resting on their backs, continuously healing their injuries.

This gave them the advantage of rejoining the battle—a testament to having an exceptional medical-nin on their side.

Meanwhile, dozens of shinobi continued to clash in the arena. With most of the spectators evacuated due to Naruto's actions, the stands were now nearly empty—a situation the village could hardly explain.

The most eye-catching battle was between Baki and Genma, with Shisui supporting from the shadows. It was only a matter of time before Baki would be overwhelmed.

Itachi, an ANBU captain, demonstrated his prowess as well. He refrained from using extravagant Fire Release jutsu like Sasuke.

Instead, he skillfully utilized each jutsu and shuriken with precision, perfectly synchronized with his Sharingan.

He combined intelligence and finesse, making even the smallest jutsu effective.

Furthermore, when his opponent wasn't Sasuke, Itachi's hand signs were so fast they were almost imperceptible—he truly lived up to his reputation of hitting seven targets in an instant.

On another front, Gai and Kakashi teamed up. One is a taijutsu master, the other an all-rounder adept in both offence and defence.

Years of rivalry and camaraderie have made their coordination seamless. In this intense fight, Kakashi might have had fleeting thoughts of Kurenai.

Overall, Konoha had the upper hand, and there was little concern about the ongoing skirmish in the arena.

…

Naruto couldn't comprehend the scene unfolding inside the barrier atop the roof. The two sides' lineups were as follows:

Our Side:

Third Hokage, Hiruzen Sarutobi

Fourth Hokage, Minato Namikaze

Kushina Uzumaki, the Nine-Tails Jinchuriki

Jiraiya, the Toad Sage

Tsunade Senju, the Slug Princess

This formidable team had attackers, defenders, assassins, and even healers. Their lineup was so balanced that even if Madara Uchiha were resurrected, he would think twice before challenging them.

Opposition:

First Hokage, Hashirama Senju

Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju

Rasa, the Fourth Kazekage

Orochimaru, the Snake Sannin

…and Sai, incapacitated on the ground

With three of them revived through Edo Tensei, the lineup seemed absurd. It was like a team of four elite shinobi carrying a rookie.

Naruto hadn't left a shadow clone behind, so he was clueless about what transpired while he was away.

Fortunately, Kurama, the Nine-Tails, had witnessed everything and narrated the events to him.

Despite Kurama's grumbling towards the resurrected Hashirama, Naruto managed to pacify him with his trademark line: "The past is the past, Kurama. Everyone's dead and gone."

Kurama then began recounting what had happened after Naruto's departure.

Orochimaru had kidnapped the Third Hokage and escaped to the roof, ordering the Sound Four to erect the Four Violet Flames Formation, with Sai trailing behind.

Confident in his victory, Orochimaru shed his disguise as the Kazekage, reverting to his original form.

In the shocked gaze of the Third Hokage, Orochimaru shared a twisted reunion between Teacher and student, showcasing his pride—the Reanimation Jutsu.

Orochimaru was now using a female body, embodying the sinister Snake Sage.

When Orochimaru moved to kill Hiruzen with a sadistic smile, Minato and Kushina burst onto the scene.

Orochimaru caught off guard, saw Minato deflect his kunai and save Hiruzen while Kushina landed a powerful punch on him, sending him sprawling. Naruto fondly thought of naming this combo the "Scrambled Egg Set with Tomato," if only it weren't his mother in action. ( Minato's naming Sense has affected him )

After regaining his composure, Orochimaru shed his damaged body, emerging anew, and wiped his face with his tongue. "The Flying Thunder God Jutsu? Impressive, Minato. You did manage to enter the barrier. But the jutsu requires a mark, doesn't it?"

Minato held his kunai calmly. "You know well, Orochimaru. That's true."

Suspiciously glancing at Sai, Orochimaru wondered if Danzo had leaked his plans. "But I chose this location on the info. There shouldn't be any marks here. The only possibility is that you marked the old man himself."

Hiruzen looked puzzled. "Minato, are you implying you knew about Orochimaru's attack in advance? I don't recall being in contact with you recently. When did you mark me?"

Minato smiled. "I don't need direct contact. I only need to leave a mark on your clothing."

"Clothing?"

Kushina interjected with a grin, "That's right. You don't pick your clothes, do you?"

"Don't tell me…" Hiruzen recalled Kushina visiting him days ago, asking for ninjutsu lessons, and during the chaos caused by Konohamaru's prank, she was alone with his wife, Biwako, while he changed.

Kushina continued, "That's when I handed Biwako the marked cloth and asked her to sew it into your clothing's lining. I also asked her to keep it a secret."

Minato apologized, "I'm sorry for keeping this from you, but we had our reasons."

Hiruzen, finally understanding, smiled sadly. Minato must have feared for his life, anticipating Orochimaru's attack.

"I see. You were worried that I was resigned to dying."

Minato countered, "I don't care about your past deeds, be they right or wrong. But if you truly believe you were wrong, live and make amends. Don't leave everything to the next generation and give up."

"What can an old man like me do, other than die here today?" Hiruzen lamented.

"You're a master of ninjutsu. Your knowledge is invaluable. If you could train more exceptional shinobi like Jiraiya-sensei, it would be a tremendous service."

"Ha! If that's the case, then I'll fight for Konoha for the rest of my life! But let's hope there aren't too many more like Jiraiya."

Determined, Hiruzen turned to Orochimaru. "Orochimaru, I won't let you continue down this path. I will stop you."

Orochimaru smirked, his hands flashing through hand signs. "Is the chat over? Even with all of you here, you won't be able to stop me! Edo Tensei—Reanimation Jutsu!"

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

The Third Hokage immediately recognized Orochimaru's use of the Impure World Reincarnation Jutsu and shouted, "Stop him at once!"

Minato and Kushina, fully aware of the implications of the Impure World Reincarnation, rushed toward Orochimaru. As they moved, Minato hurled his special kunai.

"Sai!" Orochimaru commanded, knowing that even if Sai could only buy him a second, he is still a useful tool sent by Danzo.

Having been ordered by Danzo to follow Orochimaru's instructions, Sai immediately stepped forward, unrolling his scroll and swiftly moving his brush:

"Ninja Art: Super Beast Imitation Drawing!"

Ink beasts surged from the scroll, charging at Minato and Kushina.

However, Kushina, cloaked in red chakra, stepped forward and unleashed a flurry of attacks. Under her strikes, the ink beasts shattered into pools of ink. After losing his ink clone, Sai was knocked back, unconscious, as he hit the ground.

But the brief distraction had worked. Minato's Flying Thunder God kunai was now embedded in the coffin of the Fourth Kazekage.

The coffin lid creaked open, and Hashirama, Tobirama, and Rasa stepped out.

"What's happening?" Rasa asked, looking confused, his last memory being of Orochimaru assassinating him.

"Is that you, Saru?" Hashirama exclaimed with surprise, recognizing the Third Hokage. "I never expected you to live long enough to look like that!"

"Lord First, Lord Second!" The Third Hokage gazed at the two former Hokage, momentarily at a loss for words.

"It seems many years have passed. How is Konoha? Is everything alright?" Hashirama asked, glancing at Minato and Kushina's forehead protectors. "Ah, you must be from Konoha. That red hair and Nine-Tails chakra—are you from Mito's clan?"

Though the timing wasn't ideal, Minato politely introduced himself, "Lord First, Lord Second, I am the Fourth Hokage. This is my wife, Kushina, from the Uzumaki clan."

"The Fourth Hokage? You're quite young and accomplished!" Hashirama exclaimed. "I never imagined the Hokage title would be passed down to a fourth generation. Back when Madara and I founded Konoha—"

"Enough, brother! Pay attention to the situation!" Tobirama interrupted, cutting off his brother's rambling.

"Huh?" Hashirama blinked, looking confused. "What is going on?"

Tobirama crossed his arms and explained calmly, "This is my Impure World Reincarnation Jutsu, a forbidden jutsu that summons the souls of the dead from the Pure Land back to the world of the living. Judging by your reactions, you're not the ones who summoned us, which means..."

Tobirama turned toward Orochimaru. "You must be the caster. It seems we've been brought here to fight Konoha."

"Such calm reasoning—truly the Second Hokage, the creator of countless jutsu." Orochimaru praised. Few shinobi in the world could earn his admiration, but Tobirama was undoubtedly one of them.

"I told you not to dabble in these forbidden techniques," Hashirama scolded his brother. "And now, even after death, you're causing trouble for the younger generation."

"Quiet, brother! It's only because you died too early!" Tobirama retorted, scolding his unreliable sibling. "You had to fight Madara one-on-one also drag me and sister-in-law along. Couldn't we have just defeated him together? In the end, both sides suffered, and I was left to clean up your mess."

"Sorry..." Hashirama muttered, lowering his head, defeated.

On the other side, Minato scratched his head awkwardly, unsure how to respond to the First Hokage's antics.

Even Orochimaru appeared amused, clearly not expecting the legendary God of Shinobi to have such a lighthearted personality.

Suddenly, a loud noise grabbed everyone's attention. Tsunade, standing outside the barrier, her forehead veins bulging in anger, slammed her fist into the roof, shaking the entire building.

She roared, "Orochimaru, you bastard! How dare you desecrate the dead!"

"Minato!" Jiraiya called out, seeing Tsunade's rage nearing a breaking point.

"Understood," Minato replied, using the Flying Thunder God to appear outside the barrier and pull both Tsunade and Jiraiya inside.

"Oh? The Flying Thunder God Jutsu?" Tobirama said with a hint of pride. "You seem to have mastered it better than I did."

Upon seeing Tsunade, Hashirama brightened up. "Ah, Tsunade! You've gotten so old! With that temper of yours, I imagine it's been difficult finding a boyfriend, right? And you're still—"

"Shut up!" Tsunade snapped, her face flushing with anger. "Stay in the Pure Land and stop bothering the living!"

"Sorry!" Hashirama quickly apologized again, his earlier majesty completely gone.

"Let's end this," Orochimaru said, driving kunai with talismans into the bodies of Hashirama, Tobirama, and Rasa.

The three began losing their consciousness, their expressions dulling. With their last words:

Hashirama: "Please stop us, Saru and Fourth Hokage!"

Tobirama: "Forgive us for the trouble, but I trust you can handle it."

Rasa: "Damn it, Orochimaru!"

Rasa was the unluckiest. Just as he understood the situation, he lost control again. His only thought was, "Why did Konoha's civil strife have to involve me and my village? Curse you, Orochimaru! Why did I ever trust you?"

Orochimaru, now fully in control, smiled wickedly. "Tsunade, if you assist me, I can show you others who have passed away."

Tsunade froze, immediately thinking of two people.

"Enough, Orochimaru, don't make this worse!" Jiraiya pleaded though he knew it was futile.

Orochimaru ignored him, continuing, "Tsunade, don't you want to see him? Or your brother, Nawaki?"

Tsunade hesitated, her voice softening. "Yes, I do want to see them, even if just for a moment."

"Tsunade," Jiraiya called gently, his voice full of concern.

"But not like this," Tsunade declared firmly. "This village holds their dreams and the people I care about." Her tone hardened. "I will never forgive you for desecrating the village and the dead!"

With those words, Tsunade remembered Dan Kato and Nawaki's smiling faces, along with the dreams they had fought for. She then glanced at the blond boy outside the barrier.

"Heavenly Foot of Pain!"

Boom! The roof exploded, leaving a massive hole as tiles and wood rained down.

Orochimaru leapt back, narrowly avoiding the blow, as he commanded the three reanimated Hokage to retreat.

Sai, still unconscious from Kushina's earlier attack, remained motionless in the corner.

Meanwhile, Hashirama clasped his hands together, preparing his next move:

"Wood Release: Deep Forest Emergence!"

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/Iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

The sturdy trees erupted from the ground, with countless trunks and roots growing erratically, shattering tiles and piercing through rooftops.

The vegetation not only covered the massive hole that Tsunade had created but also quickly spread around, intertwining and engulfing Konoha.

Despite the grave situation, Naruto couldn't help but feel a bit bemused. These roots looked almost like tentacles, conjuring up some less-than-heroic imagery…

Minato, with his exceptional reflexes and speed, swiftly evaded the attack and charged forward.

Tsunade and Kushina dodged as best they could. When evasion wasn't an option, they simply smashed through the obstacles in their path with brute force.

Jiraiya, meanwhile, used a variety of Jutsu, such as the Rasengan and Fire Release: Great Fireball Jutsu, to push forward.

The situation was most challenging for Hiruzen Sarutobi, the Third Hokage. At over 70 years old, his physical condition had drastically declined.

Despite his vast experience and theoretical knowledge, he hadn't engaged in active combat for a decade, leaving him rusty. Fortunately, Konohamaru's daily pranks had kept him somewhat active.

But even so, after a few skirmishes, the Third Hokage was ensnared by the tree roots.

Tobirama Senju seized the opportunity and lunged at him. Just as his attack was about to strike, Minato reappeared, blocking Tobirama's assault with his kunai infused with the Flying Thunder God Jutsu.

"Summoning Jutsu: Monkey King Enma!"

Before Minato could assist further, Hiruzen summoned the elderly Enma, who tore through the tree roots in two swift moves and remarked, "You've really let yourself go, Sarutobi. What is this, a Hokage reunion?"

Hiruzen didn't offer much of an explanation. His only thought was to stop Orochimaru. "Enough chatter, Enma. Transform into the Adamantine Staff."

Understanding the urgency, Enma transformed into a long staff with a black centre and golden ends, flying straight into Hiruzen's grasp.

Outside the barrier, Naruto watched as the condensed version of Shinraiju Senjutsu descended, feeling relieved that Hashirama's chakra reserves were not fully unleashed.

He mused that the knowledge and interference he had brought might have prevented Orochimaru from perfecting the Edo Tensei (Impure World Reincarnation).

After all, if Orochimaru had managed to perfect the technique, both the First and Second Hokage might have broken free of his control, which would've likely put Orochimaru in an even worse position.

For now, the battlefield didn't seem too overwhelming. Naruto wondered how "Aunt Snake" (Orochimaru) would plan to escape and if they could prolong her stay with some good hospitality from Konoha.

Back on the battlefield, the stalemate didn't last long. Tobirama quickly completed his hand seals:

"Water Release: Water Colliding Wave!"

A massive water surge rose around him, forming a tidal wave aimed directly at Hiruzen.

Kushina stepped up, forming the same seals. "I know this one too," she declared, launching her Water Release: Water Colliding Wave to counter Tobirama's.

The two waves collided, and though Kushina's was launched later, its intensity overpowered Tobirama's. The clash ended with a diminished wave flowing harmlessly through the gaps in the trees, into the hole Tsunade had created earlier.

If Tobirama's consciousness hadn't been suppressed, he might've protested. And poor Rasa, the Fourth Kazekage, wasn't faring any better. Without prior preparation for Gold Dust, he found himself in a difficult position, as the forestation added to his woes.

Rasa initially considered mining gold from beneath the large hole, but Tobirama's water flood ruined that plan. His efforts had only gathered enough Gold Dust to fill Gaara's gourd, leaving him feeling targeted by all of Konoha.

Yet, as an Edo Tensei with no emotions, he could only silently continue panning for gold, preparing for the battle.

Orochimaru, however, wasn't idle. He opened his mouth, summoning a snake, which then revealed the legendary Kusanagi Sword.

This sword was no ordinary blade; its sharpness could even make Enma, in his Adamantine Staff form, wary.

Moreover, it could be remotely controlled, reacting to even the slightest finger movement.

Orochimaru charged into the woods, disappearing before making a sudden beeline toward the Third Hokage.

Naruto sensed a strange chakra presence beside Orochimaru as he hid in the woods. Kushina, too, sensed it, alerting everyone to be cautious of the forest.

While Jiraiya scouted for Rasa, Tsunade was busy clashing with her grandfather, Hashirama.

During the water clash between Tobirama and Kushina, Minato used the Flying Thunder God Jutsu to appear beside Tobirama, slamming a Rasengan into his chest.

For an imperfect Edo Tensei body, Tobirama's durability was nowhere near his original form.

The attack disrupted Tobirama's jutsu, sending him flying, but his chest wound quickly began to regenerate.

Orochimaru sneered, "These Edo Tensei are practically immortal. No matter the injury, they'll recover and even if you kill me, the caster, the Jutsu won't end. So, what will you do?"

Hiruzen swung the staff with resolve. "Orochimaru, it's my responsibility to let you stray this far. Today, I'll correct that mistake!"

"Acting tough at your age? You'd be better off letting me finish you off." Orochimaru dodged Hiruzen's strike, countering with his sword.

Minato, observing Tobirama's rapid recovery, decided, "We can't kill him directly. We have to seal him."

Kushina cracked her knuckles with a grin. "Sealing techniques are my specialty."

Realizing the danger, Orochimaru weighed his options: either use the Edo Tensei to kill Hiruzen and flee, or retreat now.

Minato threw a kunai, aiming at Orochimaru. But the kunai passed through him, as did Hiruzen's staff. Orochimaru vanished into thin air, leaving only the Kusanagi Sword behind.

"An illusion?" Minato noted the faint mist in the air, recognizing it as a special type of genjutsu.

Emerging from the woods was a middle-aged man with blond hair and a distinctive moustache. He launched a few Water Release: Water Gunshot, which Hiruzen deflected with his staff.

Naruto, recognizing the man, shouted, "That's the Second Mizukage! His summoning beast is a giant clam, and he uses the Mirage Genjutsu!"

Naruto surmised that Orochimaru had summoned the Mizukage earlier and kept him hidden, planning to use him as a trump card.

Naruto then used the Flying Thunder God Jutsu to stand beside Kushina. "Today, Uzumaki Naruto joins the fray too!"

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Orochimaru strolled out leisurely, applauding himself. "I see you've got information on the Second Mizukage. Impressive. Due to the strict secrecy measures enforced during his reign, even shinobi of the Hidden Mist barely know about their own Kage." Orochimaru licked his lips and continued, "Naruto-kun, you've piqued my interest."

"Piqued your interest? More like you're eyeing my body!" Naruto retorted inwardly.

"I never imagined you'd go as far as desecrating the Second Mizukage's grave." Naruto shook his head in disbelief.

He knew Orochimaru's subordinates weren't as adept as Kabuto at espionage, let alone grave robbing. "I can't believe you managed to find the grave, let alone perform the Impure World Reincarnation."

"You're aware of the conditions for the Impure World Reincarnation?" Orochimaru's eyes widened. "That's not something a mere Genin should know."

"I know a lot of things, including how to achieve immortality. Want to catch me and find out more?" Naruto baited, hoping to buy some time.

"Fascinating, but I—" Orochimaru's words were abruptly cut off.

"Found you!" Minato's eyes glowed with orange Sage Mode markings as he raised his hand. "Sage Art: Super Light Wheel Rasenshuriken!"

The Rasenshuriken, enhanced with Sage Chakra, tore through the illusions of Orochimaru and the Second Mizukage, slicing through trees and exploding in mid-air. The air was filled with countless tiny wind blades.

The giant clam, which had been hiding invisibly, finally revealed itself as the Rasenshuriken shattered its shell, causing it to disperse into smoke.

Simultaneously, the illusions of Orochimaru and the Second Mizukage vanished.

A large eye appeared on the Monkey King Enma's staff as the Third Hokage looked puzzled. "What kind of arrow was that?"

Naruto walked over and curiously poked the staff. "It's called the Super Light Wheel Rasenshuriken."

Enma's eyes widened. "You even remembered the name?"

"Of course! I think Dad chose a pretty cool name this time," Naruto grinned.

The Third Hokage chuckled. "Like father, like son."

Boom! Boom!

Explosions echoed in the distance as Jiraiya fought Rasa within the barrier.

Since the battleground was confined, Rasa couldn't summon his massive gold dust waves as he did against Gaara in the desert.

Instead, he resorted to precise attacks and defences with limited gold dust.

From another direction, Tsunade's roars and the sound of wood splintering indicated a fierce battle with Hashirama.

"Our battle isn't over, Naruto. You must stay vigilant on the battlefield," the Third Hokage warned, gripping Enma tightly.

"I know," Naruto responded, scanning his surroundings for Orochimaru's location. "Aside from Hinata-chan, anyone interested in me is definitely up to no good… Wait, is Orochimaru transforming into a beautiful woman? Gross! Better put an end to this pervert's games."

"It's time to wrap this up," Minato said, and with a flash of the Flying Thunder God Jutsu, he brought Kushina to Tobirama's side, striking him with a Rasengan.

When it comes to breaking skulls, no one beats a ninja, and Minato is no exception.

Before Tobirama could recover, Kushina pulled out a sealing tag and slapped it onto him.

Black markings spread across Tobirama's body, and with a puff of smoke, the disguise faded, revealing the Sound Village ninja Sakon underneath.

"Looks like we're out of time," Orochimaru sneered, seeing Minato and Kushina swiftly subdue the Edo-Tensei. He commanded the Four Sound Ninja maintaining the barrier, "Release the barrier and retreat!"

"Yes, Lord Orochimaru!" they responded in unison.

As the barrier fell, the Sound Four prepared to flee with Orochimaru.

"Orochimaru, don't think you can escape!" The Third Hokage charged forward with Enma raised.

But Orochimaru smirked and, in a flash, turned and thrust his Kusanagi Sword upward. The Third Hokage's eyes widened as he felt the blade pierce through his abdomen, blood trickling down.

"Sarutobi-sensei!"

"Third Hokage!"

"Lord Third!"

Minato, with a grim expression, formed another Rasenshuriken and hurled it at Orochimaru while calling out, "Naruto!"

"On it!" Naruto instantly transported the wounded Third Hokage to the hospital, landing beside Sakura. "Sakura-nee, quick, first aid!"

"Lord Third!" Sakura immediately began treating the wound, her hands glowing with healing chakra. "What happened?"

"Hang in there for a bit, old man. I'll be right back." Naruto shot off to Tsunade's location, arriving just as she smashed Hashirama with a punch.

Naruto bound the regenerating Hashirama with chakra chains and placed a hand on Tsunade's shoulder. "Tsunade-nee, come with me!"

In a flash, they were transported to the hospital ward, the chains securely binding Hashirama.

"Tsunade, this is…" Tsunade quickly assessed the situation. "Sakura, I'll take over. Follow my instructions and carefully extract the sword."

"Yes, ma'am!" Sakura grasped the sword hilt, steady and focused.

Naruto watched anxiously as they carefully removed the blade. The bleeding stopped, and Sandai's condition stabilized.

"How is he?"

"He'll live, but he needs rest. He's not as young as he used to be." Tsunade wiped her brow and muttered, "Seriously, why is he still fighting on the frontlines?"

Relieved, Naruto turned to deal with Hashirama, who was still regenerating.

Drawing intricate sealing marks over Hashirama's body, Naruto completed the seal, turning the body to dust and revealing the Sound Ninja Tayuya.

"Isn't this one of the Sound Four? What's going on?" Sakura was still puzzled.

"I'll explain later. For now, take care of the Third. Tsunade-nee, let's go! Orochimaru won't get away with this!"

Returning to the battlefield, they found the Sound Four unconscious, Rasa already sealed, with the sacrificial body being Jirobo.

Minato, Kushina, and Jiraiya had surrounded Orochimaru and the Second Mizukage.

Seeing Tsunade approaching, her anger barely contained, Orochimaru wiped the sweat from his forehead. "This is truly… the worst-case scenario."

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Orochimaru died, with his bones rotting away in the soil.

The mud in question was created by Jiraiya's Earth Release: Swamp of the Underworld (Doton: Yomi Numa).

Orochimaru's demise occurred after being smashed by Tsunade and overwhelmed by the combined efforts of Konoha's elite.

Even he, a legendary Sannin, couldn't withstand the assault led by the Fourth Hokage and other powerful shinobi.

In truth, Orochimaru had planned to escape, but it was impossible.

Minato's Body Flicker Technique (Shunshin no Jutsu) and Flying Thunder God Jutsu (Hiraishin no Jutsu) alone made it difficult for anyone to escape.

Moreover, when Kushina activated her Nine-Tails Chakra Mode (Kyūbi Chakura Mōdo), her speed surpassed even that of the Raikage.

Even if Orochimaru had tried to feign death, hide, or escape, the two Sage Mode users, Jiraiya and Tsunade, would have sensed his presence through their heightened perception.

Orochimaru's last resort would have been to summon a giant snake, hide inside its body, and reverse summon himself to Ryuchi Cave, waiting for Guren to use his pre-prepared blood to summon him back to the base.

But there was no chance. Whenever he tried to form hand seals, Minato's golden flash would interrupt him.

If he fell to the ground, Tsunade was always there, ready to strike with her immense strength.

He hoped the reanimated Second Mizukage could buy him some time, but the lack of a proper sacrifice weakened the Mizukage's power to the point that he couldn't even use his signature jutsu.

The regular Water Release Jutsus he used were no match for Naruto's power, reducing the Mizukage to merely a distraction for Orochimaru.

After Orochimaru exhausted himself using his Living Corpse Reincarnation (Fushi Tensei) technique multiple times, he was finished off by a combination attack from Jiraiya and Tsunade.

Orochimaru's body was destroyed, leaving behind nothing but a few shredded remains and some snake skins.

The history books of the ninja world recorded that on August 6th of the 60th year of the Hidden Leaf, a small yet shocking battle erupted in the Land of Fire.

It involved the legendary Sannin, the Nine-Tails Jinchuuriki, the Fourth Hokage, one Kazekage, and one Mizukage.

In the end, the Third Hokage was severely injured, Orochimaru died tragically, and several high-ranking shinobi were deeply affected.

Only a handful of people were fortunate enough to witness this unprecedented conflict.

And because this battle miraculously took place on a single rooftop, it was later referred to as the "Clash of the Hokage's"

"I am a relic of the old era. No vessel can carry me into the new era, but since I still live, I will dedicate the rest of my life to Konoha." These were the words of the Third Hokage, Hiruzen Sarutobi, after regaining consciousness.

...

There was no suspense about what followed. When the top-tier combatants joined the regular battlefield, Konoha's already advantageous position turned into a crushing victory.

The Sound ninjas were either captured or didn't even have the chance to surrender.

The highest-ranking Sand Ninja, Baki, lost his will to fight after seeing his Kazekage reanimated inside the barrier and was finally captured by Shisui and Genma.

The situation was settled. The next step was to clear out the remaining enemies on the battlefield and root out those who had infiltrated the village during the chaos.

Gai grabbed Kakashi's shoulder with one hand, pointing at him with the other. "Kakashi, I won this time!"

"Huh?" Kakashi scratched his masked face, his eyes turning into his usual bored expression.

Naruto wondered if the itch could be felt through two layers of masks.

Gai, full of enthusiasm, declared, "I defeated one more enemy than you, so I won!"

"Oh." Kakashi casually kicked down a Sound ninja who was struggling to stand and looked back at Gai. "It's a tie now."

"NO!!!!" Gai clutched his head in disbelief, "As expected of my eternal rival, Kakashi! But there must still be enemies lurking in the village, and my youth will not lose to yours!"

Gai disappeared in a blur of motion, rushing out of the area.

"Anbu, stay and secure the battlefield. Tsunade-senpai, please head to the hospital. Jiraiya-sama, Kushina, and I will each take a direction outside the village. Shadow Guards, Kakashi, Asuma, and Naruto, help check if any enemies slipped into the village. I also request the help of the Hyuga Clan."

"Understood!" they responded in unison.

Naruto raised his hand, "Anyone need a lift?"

Afterwards, Naruto began his mission. When it comes to locating enemies, nothing beats the Nine-Tails' ability to sense malice.

"Hey, Kurama, I want to activate the Golden Mode!"

"Do what you want," Kurama replied lazily. After the battle with Shukaku, he had little interest, though he did feel a twinge of anger upon seeing the reanimated Hashirama.

Watching Naruto defeat him brought a rare smile to his face. Was it loneliness after the thrill?

Naruto drew on Kurama's chakra with ease. The fox's chakra was no longer guarded against him.

Golden, flame-like chakra enveloped Naruto, making him feel stronger. He sensed numerous hostile presences and activated his heightened perception!

Naruto saw everything from a bird's eye view, distinguishing between hostile and friendly chakra signatures...

"Perfect!" Naruto exclaimed. The technique to differentiate between allies and enemies was finally complete!

Excited, he dashed towards the nearest hostile presence, only for the golden aura to dissipate unexpectedly.

Naruto: ???

"Kid, your stamina is pathetic," Kurama mocked disdainfully.

Naruto was enraged. "Who's pathetic?!"

"You are as pathetic as that author of "Metamorphosis" who destroyed that girl's life."

Kurama thought Naruto was too weak to admit the truth.

"Kurama, I consider you a friend, but you insult me." Naruto felt wronged. "If you cooperate with me just a bit more, things would be so much better."

Kurama yawned lazily. "If you don't want to be mocked, get stronger."

Naruto reasoned with him, "The situation is critical. We need to catch the infiltrators. What if they kill the owner of the barbecue shop to cover their tracks? You won't get to enjoy that delicious barbecue anymore…"

"Enough! Let's do this!" Kurama snapped awake, his fur bristling. Konoha could burn for all he cared, but food? That was sacred!

"What?"

Naruto rushed to the nearest hostile presence, finding it oddly familiar. Wasn't this the Konoha Orphanage?

Naruto looked at the sneaky intruder, prepared to attack with a Flying Thunder God and Rasengan combo.

But someone beat him to it.

Kabuto, dressed in civilian clothing, withdrew his chakra scalpel and adjusted his glasses. "The orphanage has been affected. If it weren't for the guards patrolling, who knows how bad things could have gotten."

Naruto glanced at the green dot on his map representing Kabuto and leapt forward, "Kabuto, long time no see!"

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

"You're... Naruto-kun?" Looking at Naruto's shining golden appearance, Kabuto almost didn't recognize him. After all, they had only met briefly before.

"It's me." Naruto temporarily released his heightened state and pointed to the Sound Ninja on the ground. "Because of the war, some enemies and spies have infiltrated the village, taking advantage of the chaos. I'm capturing these individuals."

"I see. Then I'll leave this one to you." Kabuto's demeanour was calm and agreeable.

Naruto shook his head. "It's not that simple. Reporting a spy for verification earns a reward of 500,000 ryo."

"500,000?" Kabuto's eyes briefly flashed with interest. Although the Fourth Hokage had always supported the orphanage, funds were still tight.

Kabuto's wish was for every child in the orphanage to live a happy life. Relying solely on the village's subsidies was not enough. If he could catch a few more spies...

"That's right. I suggest you hand them over to the garrison yourself."

"Thank you for the information, Naruto-kun."

As Naruto walked away, Kabuto made up his mind. Looking at the captured ninja on the ground, he saw not just an enemy, but resources for food, gifts, and the smiling faces of the children in the orphanage.

The sun reflected off Kabuto's glasses, casting a dazzling light.

Yakushi Nono and Yakushi Kabuto, the current director and deputy director of the Konoha Orphanage, were both skilled spies.

However, unlike Danzo, Minato respected their personal wishes and supported them in running the orphanage, providing help whenever possible.

Now that Kabuto knew there were rewards for capturing spies, this was intriguing. A top-tier spy engaged in counter-espionage work meant that those who sneaked into Konoha with evil intentions were doomed.

...

On the battlefield outside the village, three giant serpents were being overpowered by three massive toads. Eventually, they were defeated and vanished in a puff of smoke.

The Konoha ninja forces were brimming with morale. Uchiha Fugaku personally led the charge with the police force, and the invading Sand Ninjas were routed.

Also with Minato, Kushina, and Jiraiya joining the battles on the eastern, western, and northern fronts, the outcome was no longer in doubt.

What people didn't know was that there had been another skirmish to the south of Konoha.

Earlier, Naruto had sent shadow clones in all four directions to maintain communication, but only three had reported attacks. Naruto assumed that Izumo and Kotetsu's gatekeeping prowess had deterred any assault.

However, Orochimaru's original plan was to launch simultaneous attacks from all directions, stretching Konoha's defences and creating an opportunity for him to assassinate his former teacher.

An equal number of giant serpents were supposed to be summoned at each gate.

However, the assault team at the South Gate encountered an unexpected situation.

The reason? Youth.

Earlier that morning, a silver-haired boy led three green-clad students on what was supposed to be a routine exercise.

Inadvertently, they wandered out of Konoha's patrol range while displaying their youthful energy.

And that's when they stumbled upon a group of Sand Ninjas drawing a large summoning circle on the ground, intending to use Orochimaru's blood to summon giant serpents.

The only strategist among the four, Kimimaro, remembered Minato's instructions and immediately recognized these individuals as hostile forces intent on attacking Konoha.

He decided to lead his three energetic teammates to disrupt their plan.

But facing dozens of elite Sand Ninjas was a daunting task for just four people, so:

"Fifth Gate: Gate of Limit, Open!"x4

The skin of all four turned red, and their bodies were enveloped in a visible green chakra.

Gen, Daiki, and Jiro activated their Sharingan, using the superior dynamic vision combined with the enormous speed and strength boost from the Eight Gates to perfectly execute Gai's Strong Fist Taijutsu techniques and Uchiha's agile fighting style.

Their movements, usually clumsy, became fluid and coordinated on the battlefield. They dodged enemy attacks with ease and seized every opportunity to land decisive blows, a stark contrast to their usual clumsy behaviour.

Gen, Daiki, and Jiro created a brand-new fighting style for the Uchiha clan, blending Gai's teachings with their unique approach!

Kimimaro, on the other hand, had a different style. On the battlefield, he was fearless and aggressive. He relied on the abilities of the Shikotsumyaku, strengthening the bones within his body.

He didn't worry about breaking a few bones—he could always reattach or regrow them if needed.

He was like a heavy tank, bulldozing through enemies. Anyone who couldn't outpace him was doomed!

Gen, Daiki, and Jiro were four years older than Lee, and Kimimaro was two years older. Physically, they were stronger than Lee and had been practising the Eight Gates technique much longer.

So, unlike Lee, who couldn't sustain the Fifth Gate for long, their bodies could endure the strain and complete a quick assault.

Given a few more years of training, they might even unlock the Sixth Gate and use techniques like the Morning Peacock.

Later, when reinforcements arrived, they were stunned by the carnage left behind. They could only wish the fallen Sand Ninjas a peaceful rest and hope that the next life wouldn't be so unforgiving.

...

While Konoha's ninjas were working to wrap up the war, Shimura Danzo was busy.

"Danzo-sama, we have confirmed that the Third Hokage was severely injured by Orochimaru. Although Tsunade saved his life, Orochimaru was killed in the battle, and all his subordinates were captured, including... Sai." Yamanaka Fu knelt respectfully on one knee after his report.

When Danzo heard that the Third Hokage had been critically wounded, he relaxed his grip on his cane. But hearing about Sai's capture made him clench it again.

After a moment of silence, he gestured for Yamanaka Fu to leave and murmured to himself, "Failed..."

Orochimaru's death was just the loss of a pawn. However, Sai's capture was more troubling.

Although he had placed the Binding Tongue Curse on Sai, the expertise of Minato and Kushina in sealing techniques meant they might be able to break it.

He needed to eliminate this potential threat, but how? Perhaps he should use Root's poison or have Fu manipulate a guard?

As he pondered, the door suddenly burst open. Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu stormed in.

"Danzo, you've gone too far!" Homura shouted angrily.

Koharu also looked enraged.

Danzo remained unfazed and responded coolly, "I don't know what you're talking about."

"Still playing dumb!" Homura threw a file onto Danzo's desk. "Look at this!"

Danzo was silent for a moment before opening the file. It contained evidence of his secret dealings with Orochimaru and the information he had leaked about Konoha's barrier and security forces.

"So, you know everything..." Danzo looked up at his old friends with dark eyes. A bold idea formed in his mind.

---

Chapter Text

---

"Danzo, what exactly are you trying to do?" Homura Mitokado asked, holding his high-ranking position. Although he could be somewhat self-serving, he would never betray the village's intelligence.

"Everything I do is for Konoha." Even when cornered, Danzo didn't waver in his conviction.

Koharu Utatane also couldn't accept Danzo's actions and retorted sarcastically, "For Konoha? Is colluding with rogue ninjas for Konoha too? Is selling the village's secrets part of that plan?"

Danzo, holding a cane in one hand and keeping the other behind his back, made a few subtle gestures and said calmly, "It seems I'll have to give you a proper explanation today."

"Of course, I..." Homura started, but suddenly his eyes widened as he felt a kunai pierce his chest. In shock, he stammered, "Koharu, why?"

Koharu didn't respond, her cold gaze fixed on him.

"That's my explanation," Danzo said as he approached Homura, looking him in the eye. "You're too weak, just like Hiruzen. You allowed the Fourth Hokage to make so many reckless decisions. Konoha will fall under your leadership. Only by making me Hokage can we truly uphold Lord Tobirama's legacy."

"You... How could you..." Homura hadn't expected Danzo's ambition to replace Minato and become Hokage—and that he'd go so far as to kill him.

Judging by Koharu's behaviour, had she succumbed to a mind control jutsu? If so, then perhaps…

"During the Chunin Exams, the village was invaded, two of its advisors were assassinated, and even the Third Hokage was gravely injured. All this was the result of the Fourth Hokage's negligence!" Danzo thought bitterly. "If I was Hokage, none of this would have happened!"

"You'll never succeed," Homura gasped, his eyes losing their light as he collapsed to the ground. His lips moved faintly, his voice barely audible, "Even in death, I didn't expect to trouble Konoha like this... I've truly failed the village..."

...

About 300 meters outside the Shimura residence, Naruto observed the three red dots marking Danzo's house on his mini-map and noticed two green dots that had just disappeared. He frowned in thought.

Initially, he sensed something malicious and assumed enemies had arrived to capture people, but it seemed Danzo and his subordinates had just killed two people.

Naruto looked at the gate of Danzo's home and briefly considered blasting it with a Tailed Beast Bomb, but he knew that doing so would label him a rogue ninja.

As for sneaking in to investigate, Naruto wasn't too confident in his stealth abilities. It'd be risky if Danzo had prepared for him.

Better consult Dad first.

...

After seeing the situation on various battlefields had been resolved, Minato returned to the office. He'd been busy for some time, but after hearing Naruto's report, his expression grew serious.

"You're saying Danzo might have killed two of his comrades?"

"Yeah, but I don't have concrete evidence," Naruto admitted before an idea struck him. "Wait, the four from Sai's group and the Sound Four are still alive, right? We can interrogate them first."

"Ibiki already questioned Sai, but he's under Danzo's Binding Tongue Curse Seal. It seems Danzo is involved, but we couldn't get much out of him," Minato replied thoughtfully. "As for the other four, they're likely Orochimaru's loyalists and have refused to talk. They even insist that Orochimaru isn't dead."

The Binding Tongue Curse Seal is a jutsu Danzo uses to control his subordinates. It's placed on the tongue and paralyzes the entire body if they attempt to reveal any information about Danzo.

Naruto had a bold idea: "Maybe Mom can try breaking the seal. Or we could have someone from the Yamanaka Clan try probing his mind."

Minato chuckled slightly, "That's not exactly what we meant by 'breaking into his mind'… but no matter. I've already started looking into that, and we should have some results soon."

Ignoring his humour, Naruto continued, "There's something else. I have a feeling Orochimaru isn't entirely dead."

"Why's that?" Minato asked, puzzled. "Both Jiraiya and Tsunade confirmed his body; it wasn't a fake death."

Naruto thought for a moment before responding, "It's just a gut feeling, but that guy has too much mastery of forbidden jutsu. Even if his body was destroyed or his soul sealed, I can't shake the feeling that he might come back through some other means. Don't the Sound Four and Anko still bear his Curse Marks? They could be a way for him to return."

Minato nodded thoughtfully. "I've examined Anko's Curse Mark. It's essentially a combination of sealing techniques and natural energy."

"I've sealed it off to prevent it from drawing energy from her or the environment, so it's harmless for now. As for the Sound Four, we'll deal with their Curse Marks later."

"If Inoichi can extract useful information about Orochimaru from their minds, I'll send a team to eliminate his remaining strongholds."

As the father and son discussed further, the office door swung open abruptly, and Kushina stormed in, dragging someone behind her with chains.

Minato blinked. "Kushina? Who's this?"

Clenching her fists, Kushina's red hair seemed to lift with her anger. "I'm not sure, but I know for a fact Danzo sent him. I'm going to throttle that old man!"

Minato quickly intervened, "Don't act impulsively. Tell me what happened first."

Taking a deep breath, Kushina explained, "I was trying to break the Binding Tongue Seal on Sai when he was suddenly poisoned. That's when I sensed this guy sneaking around and caught him. After one punch, though, I started showing symptoms of poisoning myself."

Minato's concern deepened. "Poison? How are you now?"

Kushina raised her hand and smiled slightly, "I'm fine now, not even a scar. Tsunade got to me in time and cleared out the poison."

Minato inspected her hand with concern, and only after confirming she was truly fine did he relax.

Feeling slightly flustered, Kushina muttered, "Naruto's watching."

Naruto, seeing his parents' affection, felt a tinge of longing for Hinata. "Should I take my leave?"

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Fortunately, Minato didn't forget his purpose and asked, "How is Sai?"

Kushina replied sternly, "He's been poisoned longer than I have, and Shizune is doing her best to save him."

"When it comes to this type of poisonous insect, I know someone." Minato and Shibi Aburame had been teammates for some time, and Minato knew quite a bit about the Aburame clan.

"Who?" Kushina asked.

Minato thought for a moment and said, "Shibi's son, Shino, has special antibodies in his body, allowing him to raise nano-sized venomous insects instead of the usual parasitic ones. He once had a cousin who was taken away by Danzo and forced into Root."

Kushina, knowing the story of this unfortunate child, softened and asked, "Then what should we do?"

"Remove the Cursed Tongue Eradication Seal, then have Shibi and Shino confirm his condition. Of course, we should get him to share any crucial information first."

Naruto still had tasks to complete. Konoha was bustling from top to bottom, and his presence was needed everywhere. With Naruto being efficient, physically strong, and always dependable, there was no shortage of work for him.

So, Naruto began his new business: Uzumaki Errands, anywhere in the village, within seconds.

After Shibi and Shino understood the situation, they brought Naruto along to lead the way Shino and Torune had been cousins and close friends when they were younger.

People in Root undergo Danzo's "self-erasure" training—Root operatives have no names, no emotions, no past, and no future. Their only goal is to fulfil their mission, supporting Konoha's roots, which are deeply embedded in the village's will.

It sounded similar to how Zabuza trained his followers, aiming to turn them into emotionless tools.

However, suppressing emotions and memories isn't easy—Zabuza had failed, and so would Danzo.

In the end, after everyone's efforts, Togen's memories began to resurface, but it would take time for him to fully recover.

Shino was the most excited. Ever since Togen was taken by Danzo, there had been no news. Shino had thought Togen had sacrificed himself on some mission.

Shibi bowed deeply to Minato and Kushina, saying, "Thank you both for helping me see Torune again. I will do my best to guide him into becoming an excellent Konoha ninja."

Naruto was startled when he heard that, as it reminded him of something Garp from One Piece often said: "Pffhahahaha, don't worry, Sengoku, I'll train him to be an excellent Marine!"

Then, Garp's son defected, and both of his grandsons became infamous pirates who gave the Navy constant headaches...

Of course, Minato had no idea about that story, so he waved his hand and said, "No need to be so formal. Let's focus on the questions at hand."

Torune stood up formally and replied, "Yes, Hokage-sama."

"I received information that Danzo killed two people today. Who were they?"

"It was Koharu and Homura."

"What?" Everyone present was in shock.

These two were Konoha elders, former teammates of Danzo. Could he have done it?

Killing comrades was a severe crime years ago, Mizuki had tried to kill his comrades but was stopped and imprisoned for it.

Naruto didn't expect them to meet such a sudden end.

Torune, unfazed by their shock, continued, "They had evidence that Danzo-sama leaked village security information and collaborated with Orochimaru."

Minato's expression grew darker as he listened. "Collaborating with the enemy, leaking village secrets, killing his comrades… How could Danzo do such a thing?"

Kushina clenched her fists. "That old man! He is no good!"

The room fell silent. The situation was serious. With such turmoil at the top of Konoha, who knew what further damage might come?

Shibi and Shino were clearly on Minato's side. They could tell who cared for their comrades and who sacrificed others under the pretence of righteousness.

Just then, a knock broke the silence.

Minato took a deep breath, calming himself. "Come in."

Yamanaka Fu stepped in, gave a simple bow, and said, "Lord Fourth Hokage, Danzo-sama requests your presence."

Shibi took a small step forward, subtly positioning himself between Fu and the others. Fu, oblivious to his former teammates' presence, paid no attention. Perhaps the members of the Aburame clan simply lacked presence.

Minato suppressed his anger and asked, "What is this about?"

"Koharu-sama and Homura-sama were assassinated during a gathering with Danzo-sama. Though Danzo-sama fought hard and killed the assassin, both elders perished."

Naruto was taken aback by the statement. Fighting "valiantly," huh? How convenient!

"Lead the way," Minato said sharply. He had no desire to converse further with Danzo's subordinates. His priority was to uncover Danzo's intentions, apprehend the traitor, and deliver justice.

Minato signalled for Torune and Shino to stay in the office while he left with the others.

They followed Fu to Danzo's residence, where the bodies of Koharu and Homura lay in the courtyard. Danzo, leaning on his cane, wore a sorrowful expression. His clothes were torn, some stained with blood.

Several Sand Ninja corpses were nearby, overturned flower pots were scattered around, and battle marks were evident on the ground and walls.

That old schemer had certainly done a good job of staging a scene.

Just as they entered, more people arrived—clan heads like Yamanaka Inoichi, Nara Shikaku, and Akimichi Choza, as well as Sarutobi Biwako and Asuma.

The Uchiha and Hyuga weren't invited, though. Danzo knew that both clans were firmly aligned with Minato.

The first to speak was Biwako. Having been comrades with Koharu and Homura, she asked, "Danzo, what happened?"

Danzo, feigning sorrow, replied, "As you can see, we rarely meet these days, and we were attacked. Though I fought my hardest, I couldn't save Koharu and Homura."

Biwako, sensing something was off, pressed, "How did the Sand ninja know you were meeting today and come to assassinate you?"

"Perhaps they were after me. I made many enemies in my youth, and I regret that they got caught in the crossfire."

Biwako accepted this explanation. Most presents knew that Danzo, as the Third Hokage's right-hand man, had indeed committed many unsavoury acts that could invite retaliation.

Danzo continued, "I also heard that Hiruzen was attacked and gravely injured. How is he?"

Biwako responded, "He's in no immediate danger but will need time to recover."

"That's good. I recall Hiruzen attended the Chunin Exams earlier today. The Fourth Hokage should've been there too. Tell me, Hokage-sama, why were there so many attacks today?" Danzo looked at Minato with veiled accusation.

Everyone could sense something was amiss. Danzo appeared to be shifting the blame onto Minato.

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Biwako had no patience for formalities, so she asked directly, "Danzo, what are you trying to say?"

Danzo saw that Minato had remained silent, and his tone grew more aggressive. "The Hokage is supposed to protect his comrades, yet the Third Hokage was gravely injured due to his negligence, and both advisors were assassinated. Shouldn't you be ashamed?"

Minato looked Danzo in the eye and replied, "Yes, I should be ashamed—ashamed as Hokage for not uncovering your treachery sooner!"

Danzo attempted to continue manipulating the situation, "Does the Fourth Hokage want to blame me for failing to protect Homura and Koharu? If so—"

"Enough, Danzo!" Minato shouted, unable to contain his anger. "I already know about your collusion with Orochimaru, leaking the village's secrets, and murdering the two advisors!"

Minato then asked, "Why would you do such a thing? Are you trying to become a Hokage advisor or even Hokage yourself? Or do you expect me to end my life in shame like White Fang did?"

Danzo wished Minato would indeed end his life, but he couldn't say that aloud, nor could he admit to his crimes. Instead, he deflected, "Do you, as Hokage, only slander your comrades to avoid responsibility?"

Minato, having already anticipated Danzo's intentions, refused to continue the argument. "Fugaku has already testified to your crimes. Will you still deny it?"

Danzo felt a chill run down his spine at the mention of the Uchiha leader's name. He tried to argue, "That's just one person's testimony."

Minato turned toward Yamanaka Inoichi and asked, "Inoichi, what were the findings of your investigation of the four Sound Ninjas?"

Inoichi stood up and reported, "We found memories of Orochimaru exchanging information with Danzo's subordinates."

Danzo remained defiant. "Oh? My subordinates acted on their own. I did not know of this."

At that moment, an ANBU operative arrived to report, "Lord Hokage, Sai has stabilized after emergency treatment."

Minato gestured for the ANBU to step back and replied, "Once we interrogate Sai, we will know whether he acted alone or on your orders. What do you have to say now, Danzo?"

Danzo fell silent. The mounting evidence was undeniable. His plans were falling apart.

"Yes, I did it," Danzo admitted through clenched teeth. His hand tightened around his cane before he let it drop to the ground as though surrendering. "But I did it all for Konoha. Wind—do it!"

As soon as Danzo's voice fell, a puppet made of straw, wielding a sickle, dropped from the ceiling, attacking Naruto. Without thinking, Naruto launched a Rasengan at the puppet.

"Don't touch it! That's the Mind Body Puppet Curse!" Inoichi warned.

But it was too late. Naruto's Rasengan struck the puppet, sending it flying. At the same time, Naruto's consciousness was suddenly trapped inside the puppet's body. The change in perspective made him think he had accidentally used the Flying Thunder God Jutsu.

Meanwhile, Yamanaka Fū had taken control of Naruto's body and immediately moved toward Danzo.

Danzo placed a kunai to Naruto's throat, but in the next moment, Fū suffered a backlash—the Nine-Tails' seal inside Naruto had never been fully secured, and Fū was suddenly overwhelmed by Kurama's malicious chakra. Though his consciousness returned to his own body, Fū remained unconscious.

Naruto's consciousness returned to his body, and Kurama mocked him. "So weak—letting a pathetic jutsu like that get the better of you."

Angered, Naruto activated his Kyuubi Chakra Mode. A chakra arm extended from his shoulder to block the kunai, while another condensed a Rasengan and slammed it into Danzo's chest.

"Gah!" Danzo had thought Naruto was the weakest link and the person Minato would most care about, hoping to use him as leverage. Instead, Naruto's attack sent him flying, coughing up blood.

Before Danzo could hit the ground, Kushina's fist was already in his face. "How dare you take my son hostage!"

Her fiery red hair flared with fury as she pummeled Danzo, leaving him unrecognizable—until he suddenly vanished.

In stunned silence, Danzo reappeared outside the group, completely unscathed, and bolted for the village gates.

"That's Izanagi!" Minato exclaimed. "It allows him to rewrite reality at the cost of a Sharingan."

Danzo had activated Izanagi just before Kushina's assault, giving him a brief window to escape.

He was convinced that if he could flee, armed with Konoha's secrets, he could make a comeback.

But things didn't go as planned. Before he could reach the gate, Minato was already upon him, pinning him to the ground. "You harmed Konoha, you threatened my family—I won't let you escape!"

Seeing Danzo still resist, Minato extended his hand. "Rasengan!"

Danzo screamed, "You'll regret this, Fourth Hokage!"

With his last strength, Danzo tore open his robes, and blood poured from his body, forming a black seal that expanded into a sphere. "For Konoha's future, even in death, I won't allow someone so naive to continue as Hokage!"

Minato immediately released Danzo and shouted, "Everyone, retreat!"

Danzo had inscribed the Four Black Seals onto himself—a forbidden jutsu that seals everything around him into the void upon his death.

At Minato's command, everyone retreated to safety.

Danzo's lifeless body collapsed to the ground. Within a sphere of tens of meters, everything was erased—land, air, and even the gates of his home...

And thus, in the shadows of the shinobi world, Shimura Danzo's life came to an end.

...

Amidst the destruction, Minato stood silent for a moment before giving orders. "I will publicly announce Danzo's crimes, and we will give the advisors a proper burial. Shizune coordinated with Jiraiya-sama to assess Konoha's casualties and losses. Inoichi, assist the police force in calming the villagers."

"Yes!" both men responded in unison.

"Lady Biwako, please explain the situation to the guests in the shelters."

"Understood."

"Asuma, I'll need you to lead Team 10 to the Daimyo's residence to report the incident."

"Leave it to me."

After giving his orders, Minato watched as everyone dispersed, leaving Naruto and Kushina by his side.

Naruto suddenly remembered something important. "Oh, Mom, Dad, I forgot to tell you... I had Shukaku's jinchūriki stay at our house for a bit."

"What?"

---

For early access to advanced chapters and exclusive illustrations made by me, visit my P@treon:

P@treon/iamxeno

Thank you so much for your support and for reading!

Chapter Text

---

Naruto was punched by Kushina, and he solemnly explained the truth to her. The summary was essentially this:

What is a Jinchūriki? It's like being a ticking time bomb. Even with numerous sealing techniques applied to them, it doesn't always work.

I've never heard of a bomb being kept in a private home, even with various security measures.

But halfway through, Kushina couldn't continue. "Naruto, we're also Jinchūriki, and we're the strongest ones at that."

To be safe, Kushina decided to return home and check the situation, leaving the cleanup to the Anbu. Naruto sighed, acknowledging that the Anbu were the ultimate utility team.

Whether it was gathering intelligence, dealing with rogue shinobi, battlefield cleanup, or even providing communication, they handled everything with precision.

Their level of practicality was impressive, almost like a well-oiled machine.

---

"Welcome back, Lord Fourth, Lady Kushina, Naruto," Haku greeted them formally.

"Dad, Mom!" Karin jumped directly into Kushina's arms. She always found Gaara terrifying, and the security she felt from her parents could never fully erase that fear.

Among Kushina's children, Kimimaro and Haku were the most formal and respectful, always addressing their parents with the utmost reverence.

Karin, on the other hand, was the most emotionally attached, always affectionately addressing them.

Naruto was the most casual, calling them whatever he liked, but occasionally got into trouble for going too far.

For example, when Tsunade returned a few days ago and discussed recognizing Naruto as her younger brother, Naruto casually suggested to Minato, "Let's drop the formalities. I'll call you Granny, and you call me Bro."

Naturally, "Granny Tsunade" promptly gave him a smack on the head for that.

Oh yes, and then there's Sasuke, who always respectfully calls Minato 'Uncle' but grudgingly refers to Kushina as 'Godmother'...

Given Jiraiya's and Kakashi's personalities, the family dynamic had become quite messy when it came to names.

---

After the greetings, Minato asked, "How's everything at home?"

Haku replied, "Nothing unusual. As soon as I noticed the village was being invaded, I activated the barrier at home, but Karin was really scared."

Kushina patted Karin's head and then knocked on Naruto's. "It's because some people like to bring dangerous guests home."

"Yes, yes," Naruto admitted. When he didn't know where to take Gaara and the village was in chaos, he brought him home.

"It's fine now, the war is over," Kushina reassured Karin. Then, switching to a smug tone, she added, "Your mom's pretty strong, you know. Those grunts didn't stand a chance. Three punches, no, ten…"

"You're amazing, Mom," Karin said, her fear melting away. Her admiration for Kushina was overflowing, and she quickly recovered from her anxiety, excitedly waving her fists and shouting, "I'll be as strong as you someday!"

Gaara, now conscious, observed the happy family—Minato smiling warmly—and suddenly felt a pang in his head.

"Ah…" Gaara clutched his head as a memory flashed. [Someone once smiled at me like that... Who was it? Oh, Yashamaru... Where is Yashamaru now? Ah... I killed him.] Gaara's expression became calm again, but deep inside, he was boiling. I want to destroy them.

"Gaara, right?" Minato asked the boy with the word "love" engraved on his forehead, who was about Naruto's age.

Gaara nodded slightly, expressionless.

"Suna has been defeated, and the Kazekage was killed by Orochimaru a few days ago," Minato calmly stated, summarizing the results of the war. He held no personal grudge against the boy, even though he was a Jinchūriki.

In fact, Gaara hadn't harmed any Konoha citizens and had instead been dragged off and beaten by Naruto. In a way, the boy had suffered greatly.

Gaara's expression remained unchanged. Neither Suna nor the Kazekage meant anything to him.

Minato, frowning slightly, asked, "The Fourth Kazekage was your father, right? Don't you care that he's dead?"

Gaara responded coldly, "Father? If you mean the man who repeatedly sent assassins after me, then no, I don't care at all."

"What? Assassins? What's going on?" Minato was astonished. How could a father send assassins to kill his own child?

Gaara explained indifferently, "To make me the strongest weapon, my father had a technique performed before I was born to bind the spirit of the One-Tail to me—the spirit of an ancient monk from Suna. That made me a monster from birth."

Minato pondered this—an ancient monk's spirit? Gaara didn't seem to fully understand the concept of Tailed Beasts and Jinchūriki, could it be that the Kazekage never told him the truth?

Gaara continued, "As Suna's 'masterpiece,' I've always been treated like a tool. But because my mind was unstable, I became a threat. Since I was six, my father sent assassins after me. To them, I'm just a failed experiment that should be erased."

That doesn't sound right, Minato thought. With the Kazekage's power, if he truly wanted to kill Gaara, it shouldn't have taken so much effort.

There had to be another purpose behind his actions. Minato's thoughts raced.

Then Gaara added, his voice taking on a crazed edge, "I exist to kill everyone but myself, to fight only for myself, to love only myself. I am Shura. That is Gaara."

Minato had a clearer picture now. The Kazekage wasn't trying to kill Gaara—he was testing his potential to become the perfect Jinchūriki or sharpening his abilities.

But this method was cruel. Forcing a mentally unstable child to face death every day, hated and feared by everyone around him with no one to guide him—after such treatment, it wasn't surprising that Gaara had lost his way.

Naruto glanced at Haku and thought of Kimimaro. Why do people like you always think about the meaning of existence? Does learning ninjutsu stunt philosophical thinking?

Haku noticed Naruto's gaze, tilting his head. "Something wrong?"

"Nothing," Naruto replied, avoiding the deeper topic.

Karin, listening to Gaara's story, clung to Kushina's clothes. "He's so terrifying…"

"No," Kushina corrected her. "He's so pitiful."

Kushina thought:

If I hadn't had Granny Mito to guide me, and if I hadn't met Minato, could I have turned out like that?

And what about Naruto? He's also the son of a Hokage and a Jinchūriki. If Minato and I hadn't survived twelve years ago, would Naruto have grown up like Gaara alone, feared, and isolated?

Fortunately, none of that happened, and right now, Kushina felt truly blessed.

---

Chapter Text

---

"You & Shukaku are not a monster!" Kushina gently explained to the poor child, giving him a lesson on the concept of tailed beasts and jinchūriki.

"What did you say? This kind of thing..." Gaara covered the 'love' symbol on his forehead with one hand. It was the first time someone had said this to him in so many years. "I... am I not a monster?"

"Of course not. Some people may see us as containers for tailed beasts, but those who truly love us don't. We can still choose the life we want!"

"We?" Gaara looked up at Kushina.

"That's right. Naruto and I also have tailed beasts sealed inside us."

"Then why do you..."

"A wise woman once told me, 'Maybe it's our fate to be containers for tailed beasts, but before becoming one, we must fill that space with love.' And I've already done that." Kushina gazed tenderly at Minato and their children. "I am truly happy now, and I don't feel any pain anymore."

"Love..." Gaara recalled his conversations with Yashamaru:

"Hey, Yashamaru, why do people get hungry?"

"Well, it's so they can eat delicious food, right?"